PowerFlex Drive 750 Rm002 - en P

Reference Manual
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives

Catalog Numbers 20F, 20G, 21G
Original Instructions
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required
to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Allen-Bradley, Connected Components Workbench, DriveExecutive, DriveExplorer, PowerFlex, RSLogix, SCANport, Studio 5000, Rockwell Software, and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information.
New and Updated This table contains the changes made to this revision.
Information Topic Page
Added information about 270 kW, 400 HP drives to the table of minimum 214
resistances.
Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 3

Summary of Changes
Notes:
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Table of Contents
Preface
Overview Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
What Is Not in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Product Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Studio 5000 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Chapter 1
Drive Configuration Accel/Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Adjustable Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Auto Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Bus Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Configurable Human Interface Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Droop Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Duty Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Feedback Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Flying Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Hand-Off-Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Owners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Process PID Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reset Parameters to Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Sleep/Wake Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Start Permissives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Stop Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Voltage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 2
Feedback and I/O Analog Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
PTC Motor Thermistor Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Diagnostics and Protection Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
DC Bus Voltage/Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Drive Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Input Phase Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Motor Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Overspeed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Reflected Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Shear Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Slip Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 4
Motor Control Carrier (PWM) Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Dynamic Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Flux Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Flux Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
High Resolution Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Inertia Adaption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Inertia Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Load Observer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Motor Control Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Motor Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Notch Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Regen Power Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Speed Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Speed Regulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Torque Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Speed Torque Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Chapter 5
Drive Features Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Energy Savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
High Speed Trending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Position Homing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Table of Contents
Chapter 6
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/ Additional Resources for Integrated Motion on the
IP Network Applications for EtherNet/IP Network Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Coarse Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
PowerFlex 755 AC Drives
Control Modes for PowerFlex 755 Drives Operating on the
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Drive Nonvolatile (NV) Memory for Permanent Magnet Motor
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Dual Loop Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option Module (ETAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Hardware Over Travel Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Instance to PowerFlex 755 Drive
Parameter Cross-Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Motor Brake Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Network Topologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
PowerFlex 755 and Kinetix 7000 Drive Overload Rating
Comparison for Permanent Magnet Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
PowerFlex 755 Drive Option Module Configuration
and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Regenerative/Braking Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Safe Speed Monitor Option Module (20-750-S1) Configuration . . . . 350
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Supported Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
System Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Using an Incremental Encoder with an MPx Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
PowerFlex 755 Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP
Network Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Table of Contents
Notes:

Preface
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide detailed information including

operation, parameter descriptions, and programming.
Who Should Use This Manual This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program
and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must have
an understanding of the parameter settings and functions.
What Is Not in This Manual The purpose of this manual is to provide detailed drive information including
operation, parameter descriptions and programming.
Additional Resources The following table lists publications that provide information about PowerFlex
750-Series drives.
Resource Description
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Installation Instruction, 750- Provides the basic steps required to install a PowerFlex®
IN001 750-Series AC drive.
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Programming Manual, Provides detailed information on:
publication 750-PM001 • I/O, control, and feedback options
• Parameters and programming
• Faults, alarms, and troubleshooting
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Technical Data, Provides detailed information on:
publication 750-TD001 • Drive specifications
• Option specifications
• Fuse and circuit breaker ratings
PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 / -C6S HIM (Human Interface Provides detailed information on HIM components,
Module) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001 operation, features.
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Hardware Service Manual Provides detailed information on:
- Frame 8 and Larger, publication 750-TG001 • Preventive maintenance
• Component testing
• Hardware replacement procedures
PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User These publications provide detailed information on
Manual, publication 750COM-UM001 configuring, using, and troubleshooting PowerFlex
750-Series communication option modules and adapters.
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive DeviceNet Option Module User
Manual, publication 750COM-UM002
PowerFlex 7-Class Network Communication Adapter User
Manuals, publications 750COM-UMxxx

Preface
PowerFlex 750-Series Safe Torque Off User Manual, These publications provide detailed information on
publication 750-UM002 installation, set up, and operation of the 750-Series safety
option modules.
Safe Speed Monitor Option Module for PowerFlex
750-Series AC Drives Safety Reference Manual, publication
750-RM001
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Provides basic information needed to properly wire and
Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001 ground PWM AC drives.
PowerFlex AC Drives in Common Bus Configurations, Provides basic information needed to properly wire and
publication DRIVES-AT002 ground common bus PWM AC drives.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Provides general guidelines for the application,
Maintenance of Solid State Control, publication SGI-1.1 installation, and maintenance of solid-state control.
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Provides a simple cross-reference of common schematic/
Diagrams, publication 100-2.10 wiring diagram symbols used throughout various parts of
the world.
Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage, publication 8000- Provides practices for guarding against Electrostatic
4.5.2 damage (ESD)
Product Certifications website, http://ab.com Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other
certification details.
The following publications provide necessary information when applying the

Logix Processors.
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures, publication This publication links to a collection of programming
1756-PM001 manuals that describe how you can use procedures that
are common to all Logix5000 controller projects.
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions, publication Provides a programmer with details about each available
1756-RM003 instruction for a Logix-based controller.
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control and Drives Provides a programmer with details about each available
Instructions, publication 1756-RM006 instruction for a Logix-based controller.
The following publications provide information that is useful when planning and
installing communication networks.
ContolNet Coax Tap Installation Instructions, publication Provides procedures and specifications for the installation
1786-5.7 of ControlNet coaxial taps.
ContolNet Fiber Media Planning and Installation Guide, Provides basic information for fiber cable planning and
publication CNET-IN001 installation.
You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature. To order paper copies of
technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Preface
Allen-Bradley Drives Use one of the following methods to contact Automation and Control Technical
Support.
Technical Support
Online Email Telephone
www.ab.com/support/abdrives support@drives.ra.rockwell.com 262-512-8176
Title Online
Rockwell Automation Technical http://support.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase
Support
Product Certification Product Certifications and Declarations of Conformity are available on the
internet at www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification.
Manual Conventions • In this manual we refer to PowerFlex 750-Series Adjustable Frequency AC

Drives as: drive, PowerFlex 750, PowerFlex 750 drive or PowerFlex 750
AC drive.
• Specific drives within the PowerFlex 750-Series can be referred to as:
– PowerFlex 753, PowerFlex 753 drive or PowerFlex 753 AC drive
– PowerFlex 755, PowerFlex 755 drive or PowerFlex 755 AC drive
• To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other
text, the following conventions are used:
– Parameter Names appear in [brackets] after the Parameter Number.
For example: P308 [Direction Mode].
– Display text appears in “quotes.” For example: “Enabled.”
• The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an
action.
Word Meaning
Can Possible, able to do something
Cannot Not possible, not able to do something
May Permitted, allowed
Must Unavoidable, you must do this
Shall Required and necessary
Should Recommended
Should Not Not recommended

Preface
General Precautions Qualified Personnel
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC

drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation,
start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Personal Safety
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the
bus capacitors has discharged completely before servicing. Check the DC bus
voltage at the Power Terminal Block by measuring between the +DC and -DC
terminals, between the +DC terminal and the chassis, and between the -DC
terminal and the chassis. The voltage must be zero for all three measurements.
Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when using bipolar input
sources. Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes
in motor speed and direction. Use speed command parameters to help reduce
input source sensitivity.
Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. DPI or SCANport™ host products must
not be directly connected together via 1202 cables. Unpredictable behavior can
result if two or more devices are connected in this manner.
The drive start/stop/enable control circuitry includes solid state components. If
hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of
liquid, gas or solids exists, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to
remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary braking method may be required.
Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage due to unexpected machine
operation exists if the drive is configured to automatically issue a Start or Run
command. Do not use these functions without considering applicable local,
national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines.

Preface
Product Safety
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component

damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors such as under
sizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive surrounding air
temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.
This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies.
Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or
repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures
are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, reference
Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage, publication 8000-4.5.2, or any other
applicable ESD protection handbook.
Configuring an analog input for 0-20 mA operation and driving it from a voltage
source could cause component damage. Verify proper configuration prior to
applying input signals.
A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to
the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive is
designed to use control input signals to start and stop the motor. If an input device
is used, operation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive damage will
occur.
Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains
volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a
period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a
corrosive atmosphere.
Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical

transmission equipment. This product emits intense light and invisible
radiation. Do not look into module ports or fiber optic cable connectors.

Preface
Studio 5000 Environment The Studio 5000™ Engineering and Design Environment combines engineering
and design elements into a common environment. The first element in the Studio
5000 environment is the Logix Designer application. The Logix Designer
application is the rebranding of RSLogix™ 5000 software and will continue to be
the product to program Logix5000™ controllers for discrete, process, batch,
motion, safety, and drive-based solutions.
The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of Rockwell
Automation® engineering design tools and capabilities. This environment is the
one place for design engineers to develop all of the elements of their control
system.

Chapter 1
Drive Configuration
Topic Page
Accel/Decel Time 16
Adjustable Voltage 17
Auto Restart 25
Auto/Manual 27
Automatic Device Configuration 34
Autotune 35
Auxiliary Power Supply 41
Bus Regulation 41
Configurable Human Interface Module Removal 52
Droop Feature 53
Duty Rating 53
Feedback Devices 54
Flying Start 54
Hand-Off-Auto 64
Masks 67
Owners 70
Power Loss 72
Process PID Loop 76
Reset Parameters to Factory Defaults 88
Sleep/Wake Mode 90
Start Permissives 94
Stop Modes 96
Voltage Class 104

Chapter 1 Drive Configuration
Accel/Decel Time You can configure the drive’s acceleration time and deceleration time.
Acceleration Time
P535[Accel Time 1] and P536 [Accel Time 2] set the acceleration rate for all
speed changes. Defined as the time to accelerate from 0 to motor nameplate
frequency P27 [Motor NP Hertz] or to motor nameplate rated speed P28
[Motor NP RPM]. The setting of Hertz or RPM is programmed in P300 [Speed
Units]. Selection between Acceleration Time 1 and Acceleration Time 2 is
controlled by a digital input function (see Digin Functions in the PowerFlex 750-
Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001) or by Logic Command
(sent over a communication network or DeviceLogix™ software).
Adjustment range is 0.00 to 3600.00 seconds.
Deceleration Time
P537 [Decel Time 1] and P538 [Decel Time 2] set the deceleration rate for all
speed changes. Defined as the time to decelerate from motor nameplate
frequency P27 [Motor NP Hertz] or from motor nameplate rated speed P28
[Motor NP RPM] to 0. The setting of Hertz or RPM is programmed in P300
[Speed Units]. Selection between Deceleration Time 1 and Deceleration Time 2
is controlled by a digital input function (see Digin Functions in the PowerFlex
750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001) or by Logic
Command (sent over a communication network or DeviceLogix software).
Adjustment range is 0.00 to 3600.00 seconds.

Drive Configuration Chapter 1
Adjustable Voltage As standard AC drive applications are expanding into new markets, new control
methods are required to meet these market demands for electromagnetic
applications. Some of these applications, listed below, use non-motor or non-
standard motors that require independent control of load frequency and voltage.
• Vibration welding
• Induction heating
• Power supplies
• Vibratory feeders or conveyors
• Electromagnetic stirring
• Resistive loads
Standard inverter control modes consist of volts per hertz (V/Hz), with boost
selections, speed feedback selection, fan, pump, and economize, flux vector (FV),
with encoder and encoder less modes. The control of the output voltage/
frequency relationship of the variable frequency inverter must be maintained in
the linear and nonlinear (over-modulation) regions. Voltage linearity is achieved
by maintaining a constant voltage/frequency ratio over the entire operating
region. The variable frequency inverter must deliver an adjustable-frequency
alternating voltage whose magnitude is related to the output frequency. As the
linear-to-nonlinear transition begins, the control must compensate for the lost
voltage and deliver a linear output voltage profile.
In adjustable voltage control mode, the output voltage is controlled

independently from the output frequency. The voltage and frequency
components have independent references and acceleration/deceleration rates.
The adjustable voltage control mode operation enables separate control of the
output voltage and the output frequency for use on applications that are typically
non-motor types. The voltage and frequency components have independent
references and independent acceleration and deceleration rates. Both the voltage
and frequency can be set to any point within their respective range. The
following graph illustrates these functional ranges.
Rated Voltage
Voltage
0
0
Frequency Max Frequency

Overview
Adjustable voltage control is enabled by setting P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] to

option 9 “Adj VltgMode.” This feature provides either three-phase and single-
phase output voltage. The default mode is three-phase output voltage and is
selected by P1131 [Adj Vltg Config]. In single-phase mode the drive is not
designed to operate single phase motors, but rather the output load is considered
to have a lagging or unity power factor consisting of resistance and inductance for
specially designed motor or non-motor application.
Input reference sources can be configured from P1133 [Adj Vltg Select]. The
input source can be scaled and upper when lower limits are applied. A trim source
can be selected reference from P1136 [Adj Vltg TrimSel] with the trim voltage
added or subtracted from the voltage reference.
The scalar frequency selection and scalar frequency ramp are the same
components as used in all other control modes. The exception being the
frequency command and ramp are decoupled from the voltage generation for the
adjustable voltage control mode to provide an independent frequency ramp.
Acceleration and deceleration rates and S Curve are the same as used in all other
modes. Upper and lower limits are applied to the value of the output command
frequency.
The adjustable voltage control voltage ramp provides an independent voltage

ramp decoupled from the scalar frequency ramp and controlled by user selectable
acceleration and deceleration ramp times. There is also an adjustable percent S
Curve feature.
The current limit function reduces the output voltage when the current limit is
exceeded. Minimum and maximum voltage limits are applied so the output
voltage is never operated outside that range.
Adjustable Voltage Control Setup
The following examples of setups for the Adjustable Voltage Control mode are a
starting point for configuration. Applications can be unique and require specific
parameter settings. These examples are base case only.
Table 1 - Basic Adjustable Voltage Control Parameters

Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Description
35 Motor Ctrl Mode 9 “Adj VltgMode” Adjustable Voltage feature is used in non-motor
applications.
1131 Adj Vltg Config 1 1 = 3-Phase Operation, 0 = 1-Phase Operation
1133 Adj Vltg Select Preset 1
1134 Adj Vltg Ref Hi 100 Percent
1140 Adj Vltg AccTime n Secs Application dependent


1141 Adj Vltg DecTime n Secs Application dependent
1142 Adj Vltg Preset1 n VAC Application dependent
1153 Dead Time Comp n% Vary from 0% to 100%. Dead Time Comp is best set
to 0% when output of the Sine wave Filter is fed
into a transformer, to prevent or minimize DC Offset
voltages.
Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-

PM001, for parameter descriptions and defaults.
When using sine wave or dv/dt filters, the PWM frequency must match the filter
design. The drive’s thermal protection changes the PWM frequency if over
temperature conditions are detected. Set P420 [Drive OL Mode] to option 1
“Reduce CLmt” and P38 [PWM Frequency] to the filter instructions.
Additional Parameter Changes
When using adjustable voltage control it is necessary to change additional

parameters beyond the feature itself. Use this table to assist in setting these
parameters.
Table 2 - Adjustable Voltage Applications Parameter Settings

38 PWM Frequency 2 kHz or 4 kHz Match the setting with filter tuning.
40 Mtr Options Cfg Bit 5 = 0 Reflected wave is turned off so that there are no
missing pulses in the output voltage waveform and
to minimize any offsets that can appear.
Bit 8 = 1 AsyncPWMLock is on because the filter is tuned to
the carrier frequency. The carrier frequency must be
fixed, if it changes the filter will not work. Also, set
the PWM frequency match filter tuning, either 2 kHz
or 4 kHz.
Bit 9 = 1 PWM Freq Lock is on because the filter is tuned to
the carrier frequency. The carrier frequency must be
fixed, if it changes the filter will not work. Also, set
the PWM frequency match filter tuning, either 2 kHz
or 4 kHz.
Bit 11 = 0 The “Elect Stab” bit affects angle stability and
voltage stability.
Angle stability gain is set for 0 so it does not
compensate for the current going into the filter’s
caps. Voltage stability gain is set for 0 for the same
reason.
Bit 12 = 0 Transistor diagnostics is turned off because that
sequence of turning transistors on and off charges
the caps in the filter and can cause an IOC trip.
43 Flux Up Enable 0 Leave at the “Manual” setting.
44 Flux Up Time Default Leave at 0.0000 seconds.


60 Start Acc Boost 0 Set if there are DC offset voltages at load
transformer input windings.
61 Run Boost 0
62 Break Voltage 0
63 Break Frequency 0
420 Drive OL Mode 1 “Reduce CLmt” Drive OL mode is set for reduce current limit, and
not the PWM frequency as it must remain fixed.
1154 DC Offset Ctrl 1 “Enable” This turns off any offset control programmed in the
firmware.
Modulation mode is default at space vector only because 2-phase modulation will
degrade the filter’s performance.
IMPORTANT Do not autotune.
Application Considerations
Whatever the device the user wants to connect to the drive by using the
adjustable voltage feature, that device has some type of rating associated with it.
As a minimum it needs to have a current rating and voltage rating. Drive selection
is based on those ratings.
Sizing
First, consider the voltage rating of the drive. Determine what the available line
voltage is and select a drive voltage rating to match. Next, select a drive that
supplies the current necessary for the device’s rating.
Single Phase Output
Consult Rockwell Automation before configuring a drive for single phase

adjustable voltage output. Derating of the drive is necessary because of stress on
the DC bus capacitor or the IGBT switching losses. When PWM is applied to a
resistor, the current changes state following the voltage. For each PWM voltage
pulse the current is pulsing the same way. This rapid change in current is not
designed into the IGBT selection for the drive. Therefore, some sort of derating
needs to be applied. Somewhere around 67% derating. When in this mode, actual
losses must be measured to determine a derating percentage. Adding a reactor in
series with the resistor can help by adding inductance and rounding off the
corners of the current pulses. Depending on how much inductance is added, the
waveform can look like a sine wave.

This is a plot showing output voltage, output current, and DC Bus voltage. Here
you can see the current following the voltage in a typical PWM output.
Single Phase - PWM into Resistor - No Reactor
Voltage
DC Bus
Current
This plot enlarges some of the pulses to see the current and its shape.
Notice the tops have an abrupt change to them. Any rounding of the wave form
at the top is due to the type of resistor used. The resistors used for this plot are the
grid type resistors where the resistor element is coiled along its length, adding a
certain amount of inductance. This inductance helps round over the leading edge
of the current.
Voltage
Current

Below is the same plot with a reactor added in series. These waveform look like a
sine wave and that is a function of how much inductance is added. However, the
increased voltage drop must be accounted for.
Voltage
DC Bus
Current
Another option is to have a sine wave filter in the circuit. This lets unshielded
cable to be used without the worry of PWM generated noise being injected into
the facility. The cost of shielded cable versus a sine wave filter, Among other
factors, has to be weighed.
When using single phase operation, connect the load to the U and V phases. The
W phase is energized but is not used.
Enter your maximum current into the Motor NP Amps parameter. Also use this
value in the Current Limit parameter. When started the drive attempts to ramp
to the commanded voltage. If current limit is hit, the drive levels off or reduce the
voltage to satisfy the current limit.
Notice the DC Bus voltage ripple in two of the plots above. If this ripple is high
enough in magnitude, it can cause the drive to trip on an Input Phase Loss fault.
This is due to the drive monitoring the bus ripple and if a certain delta between
max volts and min volts exists for a certain amount of time, the drive assumes an
input phase was lost. This fault can be disabled by setting P462 [InPhase
LossActn] to option 0 “Ignore.”
Three Phase Output
If you are driving as resistive load, configure it in a three phase arrangement to

avoid using the single phase mode of adjustable voltage. Use a sine wave filter to
keep PWM off the resistors. If the resistors are of the ceramic type, it is possible to
crack the resistor using PWM.

The following is a plot of voltage and current at the reactor. The output of the
drive is sent through a sine wave filter then to the reactor. The shape of the
waveform is determined by the amount of capacitance in the sine wave filter.
If you wanted to know what voltage you can expect at the three phase reactor,
consider an example where the user has four reactors in series. The inductance of
each is 1.2mH, 5mH, 5mH and 3mH. First item to calculate is XL for each
reactor. . XL = 2  pi  f  H
XL1 = 2  pi  60   1.2  1000  = 0.45ohm
XL2 = 2  pi  60   5  1000  = 1.88ohm
XL3 = 2  pi  60   5  1000  = 1.88ohm
XL4 = 2  pi  60   3  1000  = 1.13ohm
Now total it. XL1 + XL2 + XL3 + XL4 = 5.35 ohm.
For a three phase reactor the current is represented by the

equation, I = V   XL  3
Isolate the voltage. V = I  XL  3
The current value can be what the least rating of the reactors are or if the rating
are greater than the drive rating, use the drive rating. In this case the drive is rated
for 14 amps.

So plug in the numbers. V = 14  5.35  1.73 = 129.8
So 14 amps is realized when the voltage is 129.8 on the output. A drive with a
voltage rating of 240V AC could be selected.
Below is a waveform of voltage and current at a resistor. The output of the drive
runs through a sine wave filter. Then this is connected to a one to one
transformer. This output is then sent to a bridge rectifier giving us pure DC.
With the use of a feedback board and the drives PI loop, the voltage at the resistor
was steady even if the resistance changed while running.
DC Voltage Resistor Current
Resistor Current
DC Voltage
Times
Other
Setting the frequency acceleration time to zero results in the drive outputting a
DC voltage waveform.
If the frequency accel time is set between 0 and 1, this could trigger and anomaly
where the drive outputs a frequency not equal to the commanded frequency. The

cause of this anomaly is the introduction of the jerk function. This bit needs to be
off during this condition.
40 Mtr Options Cfg RW 32-bit
Motor Options Configuration Integer
Configuration of motor control-related functions. For motors above 200 Hz, a carrier frequency of 8 kHz or higher is recommended. Consider drive derate and motor
lead distance restrictions.
MOTOR CONTROL
Mtr Ctrl Options
AsyncPWMLock
Common Mode
EnclsTrqProv (1)
Options
PWM FreqLock
PWM Type Sel
Trq ModeStop
DB WhileStop
Mtr Lead Rev

Reflect Wave
Trq ModeJog
Zero TrqStop
RS Adaption
Xsistor Diag
Jerk Select
Elect Stab
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Not Used
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
Bit 32 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
When using single phase operation, connect the load to the U and V phases. The
W phase is energized but is not used.
Using a DC output can result in thermal issues. The drive may need to be
derated.
Investigate Possible Derating
Derate drive for sine wave filter.
Motor or drive overload is not affected by adjustable voltage mode.
Auto Restart The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically
perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application
intervention. Provided the drive has been programmed with a 2 wire control
scheme and the Run signal is maintained. This enables remote or unattended
operation. Only certain faults are allowed to be reset. Faults listed as Non-
Resettable in the programming manual indicate possible drive component
malfunction and are not resettable.
Use caution when enabling this feature, because the drive attempts to issue its
own start command based on user selected programming.
Configuration
Setting P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value greater than zero enables the Auto
Restart feature. Setting the number of tries equal to zero disables the feature.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this

parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function
without considering applicable local, national and international codes,
standards, regulations or industry guidelines.

P349 [Auto Rstrt Delay] sets the time, in seconds, between each reset/run
attempt.
The auto reset/run feature supports the following status information.

• P936 [Drive Status 2] Bit 1 “AuRstrCntDwn” provides indication that an
Auto Restart attempt is presently counting down and the drive attempts to
start at the end of the timing event.
• P936 [Drive Status 2] Bit 0 “AutoRstr Act” indicates that the auto restart
has been activated.
Operation
The typical steps performed in an Auto Reset/Run cycle are as follows.
1. The drive is running and an Auto Reset Run fault occurs, thus initiating
the fault action of the drive.
2. After the number of seconds in P349 [Auto Rstrt Delay], the drive
automatically performs an internal Fault Reset, resetting the faulted
condition.
3. The drive then issues an internal Start command to start the drive.
4. If another Auto Reset Run fault occurs, the cycle repeats itself up to the
number of attempts set in P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries].
5. If the drive faults repeatedly for more than the number of attempts set in
P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] with less than five minutes between each fault, the
Auto Reset/Run is considered unsuccessful and the drive remains in the
faulted state.
6. If the drive remains running for five minutes or more because the last
reset/run without a fault, or is otherwise stopped or reset, the Auto Reset/
Run is considered successful. The Auto Restart status parameters are reset,
and the process repeats if another auto resettable fault occurs.
See Aborting an Auto-Reset/Run Cycle for information on how the

Reset/Run cycle can be aborted.
Beginning an Auto-Reset/Run Cycle
The following conditions must be met when a fault occurs for the drive to begin
an Auto Reset/Run cycle:
• The fault type must be Auto Reset Run.
• P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] setting must be greater than zero.
• The drive must have been running, not jogging, not auto tuning, and not
stopping, when the fault occurred. (A DC Brake state is part of a stop
sequence and therefore is considered stopping.)

Aborting an Auto-Reset/Run Cycle
During an Auto Reset/Run cycle the following actions/conditions abort the

reset/run attempt process.
• A stop command is issued from any source. (Removal of a 2-wire run-fwd
or run-rev command is considered a stop assertion.)
• A fault reset command is issued from any source.
• The enable input signal is removed.
• P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to zero.
• A Non-Resettable fault occurs.
• Power to the drive is removed.
• The Auto Reset/Run Cycle is exhausted.
After all [Auto Rstrt Tries] have been made and the drive has not successfully
restarted and remained running for five minutes or more, the Auto Reset/Run
cycle is considered exhausted and therefore unsuccessful. In this case the Auto
Reset/Run cycle terminates and an F33 “AuRsts Exhaust” fault is indicated by
P953 [Fault Status B] Bit 13 “AuRstExhaust.”
Auto/Manual The purpose of the Auto/Manual function is to permit temporary override of

speed control and/or exclusive ownership of logic (start, run, direction) control.
A manual request can come from any port, including HIM, digital input or other
input module. However, only one port can own manual control and must release
the drive back to auto control before another port can be granted manual control.
When in Manual mode, the drive receives its speed reference from the port that
requested manual control, unless otherwise directed by the Alternate Manual
Reference Select.
The HIM can request Manual control by pressing the Controls key followed by
the Manual key. Manual control is released by pressing the Controls key followed
by Auto. When the HIM is granted manual control, the drive uses the speed
reference in the HIM. If desired, the auto speed reference can be automatically
preloaded into the HIM when entering HIM manual control, so that the
transition is smooth.
Manual control can also be requested through a digital input. To do this, a digital
input has to be set to request Manual control through P172 [DI Manual Ctrl].
Digital Input Manual control requests can be configured to use their own
alternative speed reference to control the drive. Digital inputs can also be used in
conjunction with Hand-Off-Auto Start to create a three way HOA switch that
incorporates Manual mode.
The Safe Speed Monitor Option Module uses Manual mode to control the speed
of the drive when entering Safe Limited Speed monitoring.

Auto/Manual Masks
The port configuration of the Auto/Manual feature is performed through a set of

masks. Together, these masks set which ports can control the speed and/or logic
control of the drive as well as which ports can request Manual control. The masks
are configured by setting a 1 or 0 in the bit number that corresponds to the port
(Bit 1 for port 1, Bit 2 for port 2, and so forth). Digital Inputs are always
configured through Bit 0, regardless of what port the module physically resides
in. If both [Manual Ref Mask] and [Manual Cmd Mask] for a particular port are
set to 0, that port is unable to request manual control.
P324 [Logic Mask]

Logic Mask enables and disables the ports from issuing logic commands (such as
start and direction) in any mode. Stop commands from any port are not masked
and still stop the drive.
P325 [Auto Mask]

Auto Mask enables and disables the ports from issuing logic commands (such as
start and direction) while in Auto mode. Stop commands from any port are not
masked and still stop the drive.
P326 [Manual Cmd Mask]

Manual Command Mask enables and disables the ports from exclusively
controlling logic commands (such as start and direction) while in Manual mode.
If a port assumes Manual control, and the corresponding bit for the port in the
[Manual Cmd Mask] is set, no other port is able to issue logic commands. Stop
commands from any port are not masked and still stops the drive.
P327 [Manual Ref Mask]

Manual Reference Mask enables and disables the ports from controlling the
speed reference while in Manual mode. If a port assumes manual control, and the
corresponding bit for the port in the [Manual Ref Mask] is set, the drive is
commanded to the speed reference from that port. An alternate speed reference
can be commanded using P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel]. If the respective bit for the
manual control port is not set, then the drive follows its normal automatic speed
reference, even in Manual mode.
Alternate Manual Reference Select
By default, the speed reference used in Manual mode comes from the port that
requested manual control (For example, if a HIM in port 1 requests manual
control, the speed reference in Manual mode comes from port 1). If instead it is
desired to use an a different speed reference, P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel], can be used.
The port selected in the parameter is used for manual reference regardless of
which port requested manual control, as long as the port in manual control is
allowed to set the manual reference per P327 [Manual Ref Mask]. If P328 [Alt
Man Ref Sel] is an analog input, the maximum and minimum speeds can be
configured through P329 [Alt Man Ref AnHi] and P330 [Alt Man Ref AnLo].

For analog input between the minimum and maximum, the drive derives the
speed from these parameters through linear interpolation.
The P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel] manual reference overrides all other manual speed
references, including P563 [DI ManRef Sel].
HIM Control
Manual Control can be requested through an HIM device attached to port 1, 2,

or 3. The proper bits must be set in the masks (P324 [Logic Mask], P326
[Manual Cmd Mask], and P327 [Manual Ref Mask]) for the port that the HIM
is attached. To request control through the HIM, press the (Controls) key
to display the Control screen.
Control Screen Key Function Map
corresponds to Navigation/Number Keys
Stopped AUTO
0.00 Hz F
REMOVE REF
HIM  MANUAL
REV  EDIT  FWD

REF
REF FBK 
JOG HELP
ESC REF
Press the (Manual) key.
Press the (Edit) key to confirm that you want to switch to Manual mode.
If the request is accepted, the HIM displays “MAN” in the top right corner. The
display does not indicate if the drive is in Manual, but rather if that particular
HIM has Manual control. A HIM still displays “AUTO” if it does not have
ownership of the Manual mode, even if the drive itself is in Manual mode. To see
if the drive is in Manual mode, check P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 9.
Stopped MAN
0.00 Hz F
When a HIM has Manual control of the drive, the drive uses the speed reference
from the HIM unless overridden by P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel]. To change the speed
reference on the HIM, navigate to the Status screen and press the middle soft key
labeled REF.
Stopped AUTO
0.00 Hz F
Host Drive
240V 4.2A
20G...D014
00
ESC REF PAR# TEXT

If the request is not accepted, a message indicates that “Manual Control is not
permitted at this time.” The most likely causes are that manual control is disabled
for the port or that another port currently has manual control. To check which
port has manual control, look at P924 [Manual Owner].
To release Manual mode from the HIM, press the (Controls) key to display
the Control screen.
Control Screen Key Function Map
corresponds to Navigation/Number Keys
Stopped AUTO
0.00 Hz F
REMOVE REF
HIM  MANUAL
REV  EDIT  FWD

REF
REF FBK 
JOG HELP
ESC REF
Press the (Auto) key.
Press the (Edit) key to confirm that you want to switch to Auto mode.
HIM Preload
Before taking a manual control speed reference from a HIM, the drive can
preload its current speed into the HIM to provide a smooth transition. Without
this feature, the drive immediately transitions to whatever speed was last used in
the HIM, before the operator has a chance to make their adjustment. With this
feature, the drive maintains its current speed until the operator sets the speed to
the desired manual reference.
With Manual Preload

Current Speed
Desired Manual Speed
Last Speed Used in HIM

Without Manual Preload
Manual Mode Desired Speed

Requested Set in HIM
The Auto/Manual HIM Preload is configured through P331 [Manual Preload].

Ports 1, 2, and 3 can be configured to have the speed reference preloaded into the
HIM by setting bits 1, 2, and 3 respectively.

Example Scenario
The drive has a HIM in port 1 and a 24V DC I/O module in port 5. You want to
select manual control from a digital input 3 on the I/O module. You want the
embedded EtherNet/IP port to be the source for the speed reference in
Automatic mode, and the HIM to be the source for the speed reference in
Manual mode.
Manual Speed Reference HIM (DPI Port 1)
Manual Control (Port 5, Input 3)
Automatic Speed Reference (Port 14)
Required Steps
1. Set P172 [DI Manual Ctrl] to Port 5-I/O Module > 1-Dig In Sts > 3 –
Input 3.
2. Set P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel] = 871 Port 1 Reference 3. Set P331 [Manual
Preload] = 0000 0000 0000 0010, Bit 1 enables the preloading of the
speed feedback value to the HIM at port 1 when the HIM is granted
manual control.
Digital Input Control
A Digital Input can be configured to request manual control through P172 [DI
Manual Ctrl]. When setting up the Auto/Manual masks, digital inputs are
configured through Bit 0, regardless of what port the module physically resides
in.

A speed reference for Manual mode from a digital input can be set by selecting a
port in P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel]. This however causes all manual requests to use
that port as a reference, whether the request was from the digital input or from a
HIM. A separate manual reference port for use only when the request comes
from a digital input can be configured through P563 [DI ManRef Sel]. (To see
P564 [DI ManRef AnlgHi], set P301 [Access Level] to 1 “Advanced.”) If P328
[Alt Man Ref Sel] is configured, it overrides P563 [DI ManRef Sel] and provides
the manual reference.
If P563 [DI ManRef Sel] is an analog input, the maximum and minimum speeds
can be configured through P564 [DI ManRef AnlgHi] and P565 [DI ManRef
AnlgLo]. For analog input between the minimum and maximum, the drive
derives the speed from these parameters through linear interpolation.
Hand-Off-Auto
The Auto/Manual feature can be used in conjunction with a Hand-Off-Auto

Start to create a H-O-A switch that starts the drive and requests manual control
at the same time, allowing for a local speed reference to control the drive. See
Hand-Off-Auto on page 64 for more details on the Hand-Off-Auto Start feature.
In the circuit below, a speed potentiometer was added to the analog input to
provide a speed reference to the drive. When the H-O-A switch is moved from
Auto to Hand, the digital input block requests manual control and issues a start
command to the drive. If the digital input port receives manual control, the drive
accelerates to the reference speed from the analog input. All attempts to change
the speed except from the analog input are blocked. If the drive is stopped while
in Hand, switch the H-O-A switch to Off and then back to Hand to restart the
drive.
If another port has manual control of the drive, but does not have exclusive
ownership of the logic commands (due to P326 [Manual Cmd Mask]), turning
the switch to Hand causes the drive to begin moving but for the analog input to
have no control over the speed.
O
H A
XOO
+24V DI 0: Stop
OOX
XOO
DI 1: HOA Start and
Manual Control
+10V Analog IN 0: DI Manual

Speed Reference
Speed Potentiometer

For this circuit, set the following parameters (P301 [Access Level] must be set to
1 “Advanced” to see P563 [DI ManRef Sel]).
Number Parameter Name Value
158 DI Stop Digital Input 0
172 DI Manual Ctrl Digital Input 1
176 DI HOA Start Digital Input 1
324 Logic Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 (Digital In)
326 Manual Cmd Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 (Digital In)
327 Manual Ref Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 (Digital In)
563 DI ManRef Sel Anlg In0 Value
The drive requests Manual mode, start, and tracks the reference speed coming
from the Analog Input when the H-O-A switches to Hand. (The HIM still reads
Auto. This display changes only when the HIM has control of Manual mode).
Safe Limited Speed
Safe Limited Speed through the PowerFlex Safe Speed Monitor option module
uses Manual mode to control the speed of the drive. When Safe Limited Speed
monitoring is enabled, the safety module requests manual control of the drive. If
the drive does not reach a safe speed, as defined on the option module by P55
[Safe Speed Limit] and within P53 [LimSpd Mon Delay], the drive faults.
While the option module uses the Manual mode, it has no way to provide a speed
reference or start the drive. The following parameters must thus be configured.
P326 [Manual Cmd Mask]

Turn off the bit corresponding to the safety option’s port to allow modules
installed in other ports to continue to control the drive when it is operating in
Manual mode. For example, if the safety option is installed in port 6, then turn
off Bit 6 in this parameter.
P327 [Manual Ref Mask]

Turn on the bit corresponding to the safety option’s port to allow the safety
option to command the drive to use its Manual Speed Reference when it is
operating in Manual mode. For example, if the safety option is installed in port 6,
then turn on Bit 6 in this parameter.
P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel]

Set this parameter to select the desired speed reference when the drive is
operating in Manual mode. For example, set this parameter to the value Port 0:
Preset Speed 1 to configure the drive to use P571 [Preset Speed 1] as the Manual
Speed Reference. In this case, P571 [Preset Speed 1] must be less than P55 [Safe
Speed Limit] in the safety option to avoid causing an SLS Speed Fault.
See the Safe Speed Monitor Option Module for PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives
Safety Reference Manual, publication 750-RM001, for more information.

Automatic Device Automatic Device Configuration (ADC) supports the automatic download of
configuration data to a Logix controller that has an EtherNet/IP connection to a
Configuration PowerFlex 755 drive (firmware 4.001 or later) and its associated peripherals
ADC is supported in the following:
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 20 or later
• Studio 5000 environment, version 21 or later
Project files (.ACD files) created with this software contain the configuration
settings for PowerFlex drives in the project. When the project is downloaded to
the controller, the configuration settings are transferred to controller memory.
Earlier programming software required a manual process to download
configuration settings to the controller.
ADC can also work in tandem with Firmware Supervisor. If Firmware Supervisor
is set up and enabled for a drive (Exact Match keying must be used), the drive/
peripheral is automatically upgraded (if necessary) prior to any ADC operation
for that port.
Information on Automatic Device Configuration (ADC) can be found in the

PowerFlex 755 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication
750COM-UM001, Chapter 4, Configuring the I/O includes the following
topics:
• Description of the ADC functionality
• How the Drive Add-On Profiles (AOPs) affect ADC
• Configuring a PowerFlex 755 Drive (firmware 4.001 or later) for ADC
• ADC and Logix Memory
• Storing the Drive’s and Peripherals’ Firmware in the Logix Controller
(Firmware Supervisor)
• Special Considerations When Using a DeviceLogix software Program
• Special Considerations When Using a 20-750-S1 Safe Speed Monitor
Module
• Monitoring the ADC Progress
• Examples of potential issues and solutions

Autotune The Autotune feature is used to measure motor characteristics. The Autotune
feature is made up of several individual tests, each of which is intended to identify
one or more motor parameters. These tests require motor nameplate information
to be entered into the drive parameters. Although some of the parameter values
can be changed manually, measured values of the motor parameters provide the
best performance. Each motor control mode requires its own set of tests to be
performed. The information obtained from these measurements is stored in the
drives non volatile memory for use during operation of the drive. The feature lets
these tests to be separated into tests that don’t require motor rotation (Static
Tune), all tests within the selected control mode (Rotate Tune), or if the control
mode requires the Inertia (Inertia Tune).
The Autotune tests are selected through the P70 [Autotune]. The feature
provides a manual or automatic method for setting P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74
[Ixo Voltage Drop] and P75 [Flux Current Ref ]. Valid only when P35 [Motor
Ctrl Mode] is set to 1 “Induction SV,” 2 “Induct Econ,” or 3 “Induction FV.”
Other motor control modes such as Permanent Magnet and Interior Permanent
magnet, populate other parameters associated with those control modes. See the
autotune parameter set below.
Tests
Four Autotune selections are available in the PowerFlex 755 drive control. All
four selections are selected from the Autotune parameter.
P70 [Autotune]
• 0 = Ready
• 1 = Calculate
• 2 = Static Tune
• 3 = Rotate Tune
• 4 = Inertia Tune
Ready
Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune, at which
time another start transition is required to operate the drive in Normal mode. It
also permits manually setting P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop],
and P75 [Flux Current Ref ].

Calculate
When the Autotune parameter is set to Calculate (default), the drive uses motor
nameplate data to automatically set P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74 [Ixo Voltage
Drop], P75 [Flux Current Ref ] and P621 [Slip RPM at FLA].
P73 [IR Volt Drop], P87 [PM IR Voltage], P79 [Encdrlss VltComp], P74 [Ixo
Voltage Drop], P75 [Flux Current Ref ], P93 [PM Dir Test Cur], and the Slip
Frequency parameters are updated based on nameplate parameter values. When a
nameplate parameter value is changed, the Autotune parameters are updated
based on the new nameplate values.
When using Calculate, updated values come from a lookup table.
Static Tune
When the Autotune parameter is set to Static, only tests that do not create motor
movement are run. A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor
stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of P73 [IR Voltage
Drop] in all valid modes and a non-rotational motor leakage inductance test for
the best possible automatic setting of P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop] in a Flux Vector
(FV) mode. A start command is required following initiation of this setting.
Used when motor cannot be rotated.
Rotate Tune
The actual tests performed when Static and Rotate Tune selections are made,
differ for the available motor control modes, Feedback Type and motor type
selected. The tests performed are dependent on the settings of P35 [Motor Ctrl
Mode], P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel], and P70 [Autotune]. The parameters that are
updated are then dependent on the tests run and in some cases calculated values
for some parameters are used to update other parameters. Refer to Table 3.
A temporary command initiates a Static Tune and is then followed by a rotational

test for the best possible automatic setting of P75 [Flux Current Ref ]. In Flux
Vector (FV) mode, with encoder feedback, a test for the best possible automatic
setting of P621 [Slip RPM at FLA] is also run. A start command is required
following initiation of this setting.
IMPORTANT If using rotate tune for a Sensorless Vector (SV) mode, uncoupled the motor from the
load or results can be invalid. With a Flux Vector (FV) mode, either a coupled or
uncoupled load produces valid results. Caution must be used when connecting the
load to the motor shaft and then performing an autotune. Rotation during the tune
process can exceed machine limits.

Table 3 - Autotune Value Source

Control Motor Feedback Autotune Rs Xo Idlt Rslt Id Rsld Slip Encrls Cemf PmOffset
Mode Type Select
VF Induction NA Static ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
PM NA Static ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Reluctance NA Static ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
FV Induction Encoder Static ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
Encoderless Static ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
PM Encoder Static OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
Encoderless Static ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Reluctance Encoder Static OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Encoderless Static OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Dynamic OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Inertia Tune
The Inertia Autotune selection involves only one test. Several parameters are
updated from the test results. Refer to the tables in the Individual Tests section.
A temporary command initiates an inertia test of the motor/load combination.

The motor ramps up and down while the drive measures the amount of inertia.
This option applies only to FV modes selected in P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].
Obtain final test results with the load coupled to the motor as long as the rotation
won’t damage the machine.
Test Dependencies
When running the flux test, the selected accel rate is used unless it is less than 10
seconds. In this case, 10 seconds is forced. In the case of the Inertia test, a 0.1
second accel rate is used. The selected direction used during normal operation is
used for all rotation tests. Also, during any rotate test, the normal speed limits are
enforced.
The thermal manager is always being run in the 2 ms loop, which provides
protection during all of the Autotune tests.

Individual Tests
Some of the following tests are executed during an Autotune.
Resistance Test
This test is a Static test whether Static or Rotate is selected. Used to measure
Stator resistance.
Inductance Tests
This test is a Static test whether Static or Rotate is selected. One test is used for
Induction motors and a another is used for PM motors. The result from the
Induction test is placed into the Ixo parameter and the PM test is placed into the
IXd and IXq parameters.
Flux Test
This test is a Rotate test that measures the current under a no load condition. The
results are used for the flux current. If a Static test is used, the resulting value is
from a lookup table.
Slip Test
This test is a Rotate test that measures the difference between the rotor speed and
the stator speed. This measurement is taken during acceleration.
PM Offset Test
This test can create a small amount of motor movement so it needs to be

performed with the Rotate selection. The test reads the encoder position when
the drive outputs zero hertz.
Inertia Test
This test is a stand alone test that is used to measure the system inertia.
The drive sets this value in P76 [Total Inertia] as seconds of inertia. This reflects
the time it takes to accelerate the load at 100% torque to base speed. This
information can be very useful in determining the total inertia (in lb•ft) that is
connected to a motor shaft.
WK 2  N
Using the following formula, Tacc = -------------------------
308  t 
Tacc  308   t 
and rearranging it to WK 2 = --------------------------------------
N

we have a formula that isolates the connected inertia.
For the variables, Tacc is the 100% rating of the drive in lb•ft. Let’s say I’m using a
10 Hp drive with a 10 Hp motor. We can rearrange the Horsepower formula
below to solve for torque in lb•ft.
T  Speed
My motor is 10hp, 1785RPM, HP = -------------------------
5252
HP  5252
and rearranging it to T = -----------------------
Speed
10  5252
So let’s plug in the numbers. T = -------------------- T = lb•ft
1785
And (t) comes from what the drive reports as seconds of inertia after running the
inertia tune. Let’s say that the drive reported 2.12 seconds of inertia. And now
organizing the variables we have
Tacc = 29.42
(t) = 2.12
N = 1785
Tacc  308   t 
plugging these into the formula, WK 2 = -------------------------------------- WK2 = 10.76
N
After these calculations, one can conclude that the connected inertia is equal to
10.76 lb•ft. Multiplying by 0.04214011 you get 0.453 kg•m.
What effect can P71 [Autotune Torque] have on these calculations? Regardless
of the value entered here, the drive interpolates as if this value was 100%. So the
seconds of inertia reported by the drive always reflects 100% torque.
CEMF Test
This is a Rotate test used to measure a PM motors CEMF.
Autotune Parameters Information about some other Autotune Parameters not

covered above.

Autotune Parameters
P71 [Autotune Torque]

Typically the default value of 50% is sufficient for most applications. You have the
option of increasing this value or decreasing the value.
P73 [IR Voltage Drop]

The voltage drop due to resistance.
P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop]

The voltage drop due to Inductance.
P75 [Flux Current Ref ]

The current necessary to flux up the motor. This value come from a lookup table
for Static tunes and is measured during a Rotate tune. Obviously a rotate tune
gives more accurate results.
P76 [Total Inertia]

Reported as seconds of inertia. See description above.
P77 [Inertia Test Lmt]

A number entered in this parameter limits the inertia tune test to a maximum
number of revolutions. If violated, the drive faults on F144 “Autotune Inertia.”
Also, when a value is entered and the drive determines that the number of
revolutions will be exceeded it goes into a decel and stops before the value is
exceeded.
P78 [Encdrlss AngComp] and P79 [Encdrlss VltComp]

These parameters are valid only for Flux Vector motor control mode and open
loop. P78 is populated only by a rotate tune. P79 is populated by a Static
measurement.
P80 [PM Cfg]

This configuration parameter enables certain tests to be performed based on the
motor connected.
Permanent Magnet Motors
Parameters P81 through P93 and P120 are all populated by an autotune when
the motor selected is permanent magnet. The value for these parameters are
determined only by a rotate tune.
Interior Permanent Magnet Motors
Parameters P1630 through P1647 are all populated by an autotune when the
motor selected is interior permanent magnet. The value for these parameters are
determined only by a rotate tune.

Auxiliary Power Supply The optional Auxiliary Power Supply module, 20-750-APS, is designed to
provide power to a single drive’s control circuitry in the event incoming supply
power to the drive is removed or lost.
When connected to a user supplied 24V DC power source, the communication

network functions remain operational and on-line. A DeviceNet program can
also continue to run and control any associated input and outputs.
The auxiliary power supply module is designed to power all peripherals, I/O, and
connected feedback devices.
Bus Regulation Some applications create an intermittent regeneration condition. The following
example illustrates such a condition. The application is hide tanning, in which a
drum is partially filled with tanning liquid and hides. When the hides are being
lifted (on the left), motoring current exists. However, when the hides reach the
top and fall onto a paddle, the motor regenerates power back to the drive,
creating the potential for an overvoltage fault.
When an AC motor regenerates energy from the load, the drive DC bus voltage
increases unless there is another means, of dissipating the energy, such as a
dynamic braking chopper/resistor, or the drive takes some corrective action prior
to the overvoltage fault value.
Motoring Regenerating

With bus regulation disabled, the bus voltage can exceed the operating limit and
the drive faults to protect itself from excess voltage.
0V Fault @ Vbus Max
Drive Output Shut Off
With bus regulation enabled, the drive can respond to the increasing voltage by
advancing the output frequency until the regeneration is counteracted. This
keeps the bus voltage at a regulated level below the trip point.
DB Bus
Motor Speed
Output Frequency
The bus voltage regulator takes precedence over acceleration/deceleration.
Select bus voltage regulation in the Bus Reg mode parameter.

Operation
Bus voltage regulation begins when the bus voltage exceeds the bus voltage
regulation setpoint Vreg and the switches shown in Figure 1 move to the positions
shown.
SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5
Bus Regulation Limit Bus Reg Open Closed Don’t Care
Figure 1 - Bus Voltage Regulator, Current Limit, and Frequency Ramp

Current Limit
U Phase Motor Current
Derivative Gain Magnitude
Block Calculator W Phase Motor Current
SW 3
Current Limit Level PI Gain Block
I Limit,
Proportional Channel
No Bus Reg
Integral Channel
Limit
0
SW 1
No Limit I Limit,
No Bus Reg
Frequency
Acc/Dec Rate Jerk Jerk No Limit Frequency Reference Frequency Output Frequency
Ramp Clamp Ramp Limits
SW 2 (Integrator)
Bus Reg
Speed
SW 5 Control
Frequency Setpoint Mode
Maximum Frequency, Minimum Speed, Maximum Speed, Overspeed Limit
Frequency Reference (to Ramp Control, Speed Ref, and so forth.)
Speed Control (Slip Comp, Process PI, and so forth.)

Integral Channel
Proportional Channel
SW 4
Bus Voltage Regulation Point, Vreg
PI Gain Block
Bus Reg On
Derivative Bus Voltage (Vbus)

Gain Block
Bus Voltage Regulator

The derivative term senses a rapid rise in the bus voltage and activates the bus
regulator prior to actually reaching the bus voltage regulation setpoint Vreg . The
derivative term is important because it minimizes overshoot in the bus voltage
when bus regulation begins thereby attempting to avoid an overvoltage fault. The
integral channel acts as the acceleration or deceleration rate and is fed to the
frequency ramp integrator. The proportional term is added directly to the output
of the frequency ramp integrator to form the output frequency. The output
frequency is then limited to a maximum output frequency.
ATTENTION: The “adjust freq” portion of the bus regulator function is

extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from
aggressive decelerations, overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. It forces the
output frequency to be greater than commanded frequency while the drive’s
bus voltage is increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault.
However, it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage (more than a 10% increase within 6
minutes) can cause uncommanded positive speed changes. However an
“OverSpeed Limit” fault occurs if the speed reaches [Max Speed] + [Overspeed
Limit]. If this condition is unacceptable, take action to 1) limit supply voltages
within the specification of the drive and, 2) limit fast positive input voltage
changes to less than 10%. If this operation is unacceptable and the necessary
actions cannot be taken, the “adjust freq” portion of the bus regulator function
must be disabled (see parameters 372 and 373).
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times.
However, a “Decel Inhibit” fault is generated if the drive stops decelerating
altogether. If this condition is unacceptable, the “adjust freq” portion of the bus
regulator must be disabled (see parameters 372 and 373). In addition, installing a
properly sized dynamic brake resistor provides equal or better performance in most
cases. Important: These faults are not instantaneous. Test results have shown that
they can take between 2…12 seconds to occur.
Bus Regulation Modes
The drive can be programmed for one of five different modes to control the DC
bus voltage:
• Disabled
• Adjust Frequency
• Dynamic Braking
• Both with Dynamic Braking first
• Both with Adjust Frequency first
P372 [Bus Reg Mode A] is the mode normally used by the drive unless the “DI
BusReg Mode B” digital input function is used to switch between modes
instantaneously, in which case P373[Bus Reg Mode B] becomes the active bus
regulation mode.

The bus voltage regulation setpoint is determined from bus memory (a means to
average DC bus over a period of time). The following tables and figure describe
the operation.
Voltage Class DC Bus Memory DB On Setpoint DB Off Setpoint
<685V DC 750V DC
480 On - 8V DC
>685V DC Memory + 65V DC
880
815
DB Turn On
750
DB Turn Off
DC Volts 685
1 2
650 ve # urve #
g Cur g C
Re Re
Bus Bus ry
emo
B us M
509
453
320 360 460 484 528 576
AC Volts
Option 0 “Disabled”
If [Bus Reg Mode n] is set to 0 “Disabled” The Voltage Regulator is off and the
DB transistor is disabled. Energy returning to the DC bus increases the voltage
unchecked and trips the drive on over voltage once the voltage threshold is
reached.
Figure 2 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – Disabled

DC Bus Voltage Speed Feedback
900 12
Over Voltage Trip Point
800
10
700
10 Volts = Base Speed
600 8
Stop Pressed Motor Coasts
DC Bus Volts
500
6
400
300 4
200
2
100
0 0
-0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Seconds

Option 1 “Adjust Freq”
If [Bus Reg Mode n] is set to 1 “Adjust Freq” The Bus Voltage Regulator is
enabled. The Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint follows “Bus Reg Curve 1” below a
DC Bus Memory of 650V DC and follows the “DB Turn On” above a DC Bus
Memory of 650V DC (Table 5). For example, with a DC Bus Memory at 684V
DC, the adjust frequency setpoint is 750V DC.
Below you can see the DC bus is being regulated as the speed is sacrificed to be
sure the drive does not trip on over voltage.
Figure 3 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – Adjust Frequency

DC Bus Voltage Speed Feedback
900 12
DC bus is regulated under the over voltage trip point.
800
10
700

600 8
DC Bus Volts
500
6
400
300 4
Motor stops in just under 7 seconds instead
of the programmed 1 second decel.
200
2
100
0 0
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Seconds
Option 2 “Dynamic Brak”
If [Bus Reg Mode n] is set to 2 “Dynamic Brak” The Dynamic Brake Regulator is
enabled. In Dynamic Brake mode the Bus Voltage Regulator is turned off. The
“DB Turn On” and turn off curves apply. For example, with a DC Bus Memory at
684V DC, the Dynamic Brake Regulator turns on at 750V DC and turns back
off at 742V DC. The Dynamic Brake mode can operate differently depending
upon the setting of P382 [DB Resistor Type] either External or Internal.

Internal Resistor
If the drive is set up for an internal resistor, there is a protection scheme built into
the firmware such that if it is determined that too much power has been
dissipated into the resistor the firmware does not allow the DB transistor to fire
any longer. Thus the bus voltage rises and trips on over voltage.
Figure 4 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – Internal Dynamic Brake Resistor

DC Bus Voltage DC Current Speed Fdbk
900 12
DC Bus Over Voltage Trip
800
10
700

600 8
Motor Speed
DC Bus Volts
500
6
400
300 4
200
Brake Current 2
100
0 0
-0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Seconds
External Resistor
If the drive is set up for an external resistor and the resistor has been sized
correctly and the regenerative power limit is set to a value that enables the
regenerative power to be fully dissipated, the DB transistor continues to fire
throughout the decel time.
Figure 5 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – External Dynamic Brake Resistor

800 14
DC Bus
780 12
10
760
Motor Speed
8
740
DC Bus Volts
6
Brake Current
720
4
700
2
680 0
660 -2
-0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2
Seconds

The DB current seems as if it is decreasing toward the end of the decel. This is
just a result of the sweep time of the oscilloscope and instrumentation. After all,
it’s not known as “Ohm’s Suggestion.” The point is evident that the DB transistor
is pulsing through the decel.
Option 3 “Both DB 1st”
If [Bus Reg Mode n] is set to 3 “Both DB 1st” Both regulators are enabled, and
the operating point of the Dynamic Brake Regulator is lower than that of the Bus
Voltage Regulator. The Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint follows the “DB Turn
On” curve. The Dynamic Brake Regulator follows the “DB Turn On” and turn
off curves. For example, with a DC Bus Memory between 650 and 685V DC, the
Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint is 750V DC and the Dynamic Brake Regulator
turns on at 742V DC and back off at 734V DC.
It is possible that the drive can react differently between Flux Vector mode and
Sensorless Vector mode. The important thing to remember here is that in SV
control, the drive does not use the value entered into P426 [Regen Power Lmt]. If
left at default (-50%) and the decel is such that it creates a large amount of regen
power, the drive again attempts to protect the resistor.
Consider the plots below.
Option 4 “Both Frq 1st”
If [Bus Reg Mode n] is set to 4 “Both Frq 1st” Both regulators are enabled, and
the operating point of the Bus Voltage Regulator is lower than that of the
Dynamic Brake Regulator. The Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint follows the “Bus
Reg Curve 2” below a DC Bus Memory of 650V DC and follows the “DB Turn
Off ” curve above a DC Bus Memory of 650V DC (Table 4). The Dynamic Brake
Regulator follows the “DB Turn On” and turn off curves. For example, with a
DC Bus Memory at 684V DC, the Bus Voltage Regulator setpoint is 742V DC
and the Dynamic Brake Regulator turns on at 750V DC and back off at 742V
DC.
Figure 6 shows that upon a stop command the bus voltage rises immediately to a
point where the DB transistor turns on briefly bringing the voltage down to a
point where the bus regulator can regulate the bus by adjusting the output
frequency (speed).

Figure 6 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – Both Adj First

800 12
DC Bus
780 10
Motor Speed
760 8

740 6
DC Bus Volts
720 4
700 2
Brake Current
680 0
660 -2
-0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2
Seconds
Flux Vector (FV) Control
With the Regen Power Limit left at default, and a decel time of 0.1 seconds, the
drive is limiting the amount of power to a point where the resistor could be
heating up due to duty cycle considerations. So the drive stops the DB transistor
from firing and switches to “Adjust Frequency” to regulate the bus and then
enables another DB pulse and then back to adjust frequency and so on until the
bus voltage remains below the trigger level.
Figure 7 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – Both DB First FV

900 14
DC Bus
800 12
700
10
600
8
500
DC Bus Volts
Motor Speed 6
400
Brake
Current 4
300
2
200
100 0
0 -2
-0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8
Seconds
If the Regen Power Limit is opened up to 100% for instance, the plot will look
exactly the same as the Sensorless Vector mode plot show below.

Sensorless Vector (SV) Control
Because the drive is not limiting the regen power the DB is able to dissipate the
power the entire decel time before duty cycle considerations limits the DB
capability.
PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Regulation – Both DB First SV
900 14
DC Bus
800
12
700
10
600

Brake Current
500 8
DC Bus Volts
400 6
Motor Speed
300
4
200
2
100
0 0
-0.15 0.05 0.25 0.45 0.65 0.85 1.05 1.25 1.45
Seconds
Table 4 - Bus Regulation Curves

Voltage Class DC Bus Memory Bus Reg Curve 1 Bus Reg Curve 2
< 650V DC Memory + 100V DC
480 650V DC  DC Bus Memory  685V DC 750V DC Curve 1 - 8V DC
> 685V DC Memory + 65V DC
Level/Gains
The following parameters are Level/Gains related to bus regulation.
P374 [Bus Reg Lvl Cfg]

Bus Regulation Level Configuration - Selects the reference used to determine the
bus voltage regulation level for the bus voltage regulator and the reference used
for the dynamic brake.
• “Bus Memory” (0) – References are determined based on P12 [DC Bus
Memory].
• “BusReg Level” (1) – References are determined based on the voltage set in
P375 [Bus Reg Level].
If coordinated operation of the dynamic brakes of a common bus system is

desired, use this selection and set the P375 [Bus Reg Level] to coordinate the
brake operation of the common bus drives.

P375 [Bus Reg Level]

Bus Regulation Level - Sets the turn-on bus voltage level for the bus voltage
regulator and the dynamic brake.
Table 5 - Turn On Bus Voltage

P20 [Rated Volts] = Default Turn On Volts = Min/Max Setting =
< 252V 375V 375V / 389V
252…503V 750V 750 / 779V
504…629V 937V 937 / 974V
> 629V 1076V 1076 / 1118V
While the following parameters are listed and editable in the drive, they typically
do not need to be adjusted in any way. Take care when adjusting because
undesired operation can occur in another aspect of motor control.
P376 [Bus Limit Kp]

Bus Limit Proportional Gain - Enables a progressively faster decel when the drive
is behind the programmed decel time by making the bus limiter more responsive.
A higher value means the drive tries to decrease decel time.
This parameter is valid only in NON-Flux Vector modes.
P377 [Bus Limit Kd]

Bus Limit Derivative Gain - Lets you force the bus limit sooner. The higher the
value the quicker the bus limit is hit and regulation starts. This can cause
regulation below the typical setpoint (750VDC for 460V drive). Too high a
value and normal operation of the motor can be affected. (60…60.5 Hz
oscillation.)
P378 [Bus Limit ACR Ki]

Bus Limit Active Current Regulator Integral Gain - If you find your system
makes the regulator unstable or oscillatory, a lower value in this parameter settles
out the oscillations.
P379 [Bus Limit ACR Kp]

Bus Limit Active Current Regulator Proportional Gain - Determines the
responsiveness of the active current and therefore, regenerated power and bus
voltage. Raising this value can cause the output frequency (when in bus limit) to
become noisy or jittery. Too low a value can cause the bus limit function to
malfunction and result in a over voltage fault.
P380 [Bus Reg Ki]

Bus Regulator Integral Gain - When regulating the DC bus, the voltage tends to
swing above and below the voltage setpoint in what looks like a ringing
oscillation. This parameter affects that behavior. A lower the value reduces
oscillation.
This parameter is valid only in Flux Vector modes.

P381 [Bus Reg Kp]

Bus Regulator Proportional Gain - This determines how fast the bus regulator is
activated. The higher the value the faster the drive reacts once the DC voltage
setpoint is reached.
This parameter is valid only in Flux Vector modes.
Once again, the likelihood of these parameters needing adjustment is highly

unlikely. In fact, some descriptions related to the functionality of these
parameters are intentionally left out of this text to eliminate undesired motor
operation when they are adjusted unwisely.
Configurable Human With the PowerFlex 750-Series the drives response to a HIM communication
loss (removal) is configurable. This feature is available in drives with firmware
Interface Module Removal revision 3.0 or later.
It is used to prevent unintended stopping of the drive by disconnecting the HIM.

However, the HIM cannot be the sole source of a Stop command to enable this
feature.
The configuration is similar to the communication adapter communication loss

selections:
• 0 = Fault
• 1 = Stop
• 2 = Zero Data
• 3 = Hold Last
• 4 = Send Fault Config
The default setting is 0 “Fault.”
The HIM can be connected to one 1 of 3 ports per the parameters below. Each
port is configured separately:
• P865 [DPI Pt1 Flt Actn] to determine the fault action at port 1.
If “Send Flt Cfg” is to be selected for the fault action, then configure the
appropriate parameter below.
• P868 [DPI Pt1 Flt Ref ] to set the speed reference if the HIM at port 1 is
disconnected.
disconnected.
disconnected.
A constant value must be entered as the fault speed reference in this instance.

Droop Feature Droop is used to shed load and is usually used when a soft coupling of two motors
is present in an application. The master drive speed regulates and the follower
uses droop so it does not oppose the master. The input to the droop block is the
commanded motor torque. The output of the droop block reduces the speed
reference. P620 [Droop RPM at FLA] sets the amount of speed, in RPM, that
the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque. For example, when P620
[Droop RPM at FLA] is set to 50 RPM and the drive is running at 100% rated
motor torque, the droop block subtracts 50 RPM from the speed reference.
Duty Rating Applications require different amounts of overload current.
Normal Duty
Sizing the drive for Normal Duty enables the use of the highest continuous
output current rating of the drive and an overload rating of 110% for 60 seconds
(every 10 minutes) and 150% for 3 seconds (every minute).
Heavy Duty
For heavy duty applications, a drive one size larger than is required for the motor
is used in the application and therefore provides a larger amount of overload
current in comparison to the motor rating. Heavy Duty sizing provides at least
150% for 60 seconds (every 10 minutes) and 180% for 3 seconds (every minute).
Light Duty
The light duty setting, for a given normal duty rated drive, provides a higher
continuous output current but with limited overload capability. When in light
duty, the drive provides 110% for 60 seconds (every 10 minutes). The light duty
setting is only available on PowerFlex 755 drives, frame 8 and larger.
The overload percentages are with respect to the connected motor rating.
The duty rating is programmed in P306 [Duty Rating]. This parameter is reset to
the default setting if a Set Defaults “ALL” is executed. For drives rated under 7.5
kW (10 Hp) the normal duty and heavy duty continuous current ratings are the
same, and have the heavy duty overload settings.
When changing the [Duty Rating], review P422 [Current Limit 1] and P423
[Current Limit 2].
Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Technical Data, publication 750-

TD001, for continuous and overload current ratings for each catalog number.

Feedback Devices There are three different feedback option modules available for PowerFlex 750-
Series AC Drives:
• Single Incremental Encoder (20-750-ENC-1)
• Dual Incremental Encoder (20-750-DENC-1)
• Universal Feedback (20-750-UFB-1)
The Dual Incremental Encoder and Universal Feedback modules each support
up to two encoders while the Single Incremental Encoder supports one encoder.
Multiple feedback option modules can be installed in the drive, however there is a
limit of two feedback modules if using Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP.
For more information on the option modules, including specifications and wiring
information, see the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions,
publication 750-IN001.
For more information on encoder feedback options, including connections and

compatibility, see Appendix E of the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming
Manual, publication 750-PM001.
Flying Start The Flying Start feature is used to start into a rotating motor, as quick as possible,
and resume normal operation with a minimal impact on load or speed.
When a drive is started in its normal mode it initially applies a frequency of 0 Hz

and ramps to the desired frequency. If the drive is started in this mode with the
motor already spinning, large currents are generated. An over current trip can
result if the current limiter cannot react quickly enough. The likelihood of an
over current trip is further increased if there is a residual flux (back emf ) on the
spinning motor when the drive starts. Even if the current limiter is fast enough to
prevent an over current trip, it can take an unacceptable amount of time for
synchronization to occur and for the motor to reach its desired frequency. In
addition, larger mechanical stress is placed on the application.
In Flying Start mode, the drive’s response to a start command is to synchronize

with the motors speed (frequency and phase) and voltage. The motor then
accelerates to the commanded frequency. This process prevents an over current
trip and significantly reduce the time for the motor to reach its commanded
frequency. Because the drive synchronizes with the motor at its rotating speed
and ramps to the proper speed, little or no mechanical stress is present.
The Sweep function is currently not in the PowerFlex 750-Series drives frame 8
and larger.

Configuration
Flying Start can be configured by setting P356 [FlyingStart Mode] to the

following:
• 0 “Disabled”
• 1 “Enhanced”
• 2 “Sweep”
Disabled
Disables the feature.
Enhanced
An advanced mode that performs the motor reconnect quickly by using the
motor’s CEMF as a means of detection. This mode is the typical setting for this
feature.
Sweep
The Frequency Sweep mode is used with output sine wave filters. It attempts a
reconnect by outputting a frequency starting at P520 [Max Fwd Speed]+ P524
[Overspeed Limit] and decreasing according to a slope that is modified by P359
[FS Speed Reg Ki] until there is a change in the monitored current indicating the
speed of the spinning motor has been found. If the motor was not found from the
forward sweep, the drive sweeps in the reverse direction from P521 [Max Rev
Speed]+ P524 [Overspeed Limit].

Scope Plots
Flying Start - Sweep Mode
This plot shows a coasting motor. When a start is commanded, the output
frequency jumps up to P520 [Max Fwd Speed]+ P524 [Overspeed Limit] at
some current. As the sweep frequency decreases the current is monitored. When
the sweep frequency matches the frequency of the coasting motor, the current
reverses and detection is complete. The motor is accelerated back to commanded
speed.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Sweep Mode - Decelerating Load
Current Speed Frequency Frequency Sweep
Coasting Motor
Start Pressed
Slope determined by P359
Detection

Flying Start - Sweep Slope A
This plot shows when the drive starts to sweep for the spinning motor, the
frequency sweep has a certain slope associated with it. By modifying P359 [FS
Speed Reg Ki] you can change the slope of this sweep.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Sweep Slope A
Current Speed Frequency
Note the slope of the frequency sweep.
Adjust P359 [FS Speed Reg Ki]
Flying Start - Sweep Slope B
This plot shows the result of increasing P359 [FS Speed Reg Ki]. The slope is
extended.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Sweep Slope B
Note the slope of the frequency sweep.
Adjust P359 [FS Speed Reg Ki]

In the two samples shown above, the motor was decelerating. The sweep function
and slope manipulation work the same if the motor was spinning at some
constant speed.
Flying Start - Sweep Dip A
This plot shows the effect of modifying P360 [FS Speed Reg Kp]. In this plot a
motor is spinning at some constant speed when the drive is issued a start
command and the sweep routine is started. Note the current dip when the
parameter is set to its lowest value and the drive has determined the frequency of
the rotating motor. See the next plot when this parameter set to its highest
setting.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Rotating Load - P360 = 1, Default = 75
Note current dip.
Flying Start - Sweep Dip B
This plot shows the effect of modifying P360 [FS Speed Reg Kp]. In this plot a
motor that is spinning at some constant speed when the drive is issued a start
command and the sweep routine is started. Note the current dip when the
parameter is set to its highest value and the drive has determined the frequency of

the rotating motor. See the previous plot when this parameter set to its lowest
setting.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Rotating Load - P360 = 9000, Default = 75
Note current dip.
Flying Start - Sweep Reverse Rotating Motor
This plot shows the Sweep mode when the motor is rotating opposite from the
commanded frequency. It starts the same as explained above. If it didn't detect the
motor’s speed as it reaches 3 Hz it begins to sweep in the opposite direction.
From here the process continues the same as before.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Rotating Reverse - Sweep Mode
Acceleration to
Sweep Forward Commanded Speed
Controlled Decel
Speed and Direction determined
Motor Spinning Reverse - Sweep Reverse

Drive is off
Flying Start - Enhanced Mode

This plot shows a very short time base of the Enhanced mode. If the drive detects
the counter EMF of the motor it can instantly re-connect to the motor and
accelerate to the commanded speed. If the drive cannot measure the CEMF (this
is where the plot picks up) it sends current pulses to the motor in an attempt to
excite the motor allowing the drive to detect the speed of the motor. This usually
happens only at very low speeds. Once the drive has detected the motor it
accelerates to the commanded speed.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Enhanced Mode
TP 138 Current Speed Frequency Output Current
Motor “caught,” Normal Accel
Attempt to measure
counter EMF Current pulses, motor excitation

Flying Start - Enhanced Mode Reverse
Here is a motor spinning in the opposite direction of the commanded speed. In

Enhanced mode the detection takes a very short time and the motor is controlled
to zero speed and accelerated to the commanded speed.
PowerFlex 753 Flying Start - Rotating Reverse - Enhanced Mode
No Sweep necessary in Enhanced Mode
P357 [FS Gain]

Sweep mode - The amount of time the detection signal (current) must be below
the setpoint. A very short time entered could cause false detections. Too long of a
time and detection could be missed.
Enhanced mode - It’s the Kp in the current regulator used in the detection
process. Used along with P358.
P358 [FS Ki]

Sweep mode - Integral term in voltage recovery, indirectly connected to time;
higher value can shorten recovery time but can cause unstable operation.
Enhanced mode - It’s the Ki in the current regulator used in the detection
process. Used along with P357.
P359 [FS Speed Reg Ki]

Sweep mode - The amount of time to sweep the frequency. A short time entered
produces a steep slope on the frequency. A higher value (longer time) produces a
flatter frequency sweep. Shown above.
Enhanced mode - It’s the Ki in the speed regulator used in the detection process.
Used along with P358.

P360 [FS Speed Reg Kp]

Sweep mode - Sets level the current must drop below. A larger value requires less
change in current to indicate detection.
Enhanced mode - It’s the Kp in the speed regulator used in the detection process.
Used along with P357.
P361 [FS Excitation Ki]

Sweep mode - Integral term used to control the initial output voltage
Enhanced mode - Integral term used in the current regulator, which controls the
motor excitation if the detection process deemed it necessary to excite the motor.
P362 [FS Excitation Kp]

Sweep mode - Proportional term used to control the initial output voltage
Enhanced mode - Proportional term used in the current regulator, which controls
the motor excitation if the detection process deemed it necessary to excite the
motor.
P363 [FS Reconnect Dly]

Delay time used between the issued start command and the start of the reconnect
function. This is mainly used for power loss situations so the restart doesn't occur
too quickly causing possible faults.
P364 [FS Msrmnt CurLvl]

There are two different measurement methods used when in Enhanced mode. If
this parameter is set to zero the second method is cancelled and reconnect is
attempted after the first measurement. Any other level change in this parameter
could help the second measurement routine. Usually a higher number helps
more.
Cooling Tower Fans Application Example
In some applications, such as large fans, wind or drafts can rotate the fan in the
reverse direction when the drive is stopped. If the drive were started in the normal
manner, its output begins at zero Hz, acting as a brake to bring the reverse
rotating fan to a stop and then accelerating it in the correct direction. This
operation can be very hard on the mechanics of the system including fans, belts
and other coupling devices.

Draft/wind blows idle fans in reverse direction. Restarting at zero speed and
accelerating damages fans and could break belts. Flying start alleviates the
problem.
There could be occasions when the sweep as well as the CEMF detection fails at
low speeds. This is due to the low levels of motor detection signals. It has been
discovered that Sweep mode is more successful in these cases than Enhanced
mode.
When in Sweep mode the frequency is always swept in the direction of the
commanded frequency first.
Motor detection at low speeds can be difficult. Rather than get a false detection,
the sweep reverses at 3 Hz.

Hand-Off-Auto Many legacy drive installations included a circuit (such as a Hand-Off-Auto

switch) that provided 3-wire start and stop signals simultaneously to the drive.
PowerFlex 750-Series drives do not start unless there is a full input cycle between
the stop and start signals. P176 [DI HOA Start] adds a delay to the start signal,
allowing the required time interval between the start and stop signals. This
enables the use of a single 3-wire control circuit to start and stop the drive.
Hand-Off-Auto Start
If P161 [DI Start] and P176 [DI HOA Start] are both configured, a “DigIn Cfg
B” alarm results. You cannot use both Digital Input Start and Digital Input
Hand-Off-Auto Start at the same time.
Hand-Off-Auto Example
A Motor Control Cabinet has an Hand-Off-Auto switch wired as shown in the

figure below.
O
H A
+24V XOO DI 0: Stop
OOX
XOO
DI 1: Start
When the switch is turned to Off, the switch is open between the source and
Stop (DI:0) and between Stop and Start (DI:1). This causes the drive to be in an
asserted stop. When the switch is turned to Auto, the control signal reaches the
Stop input but not the Start. The drive can be stopped and started by another
location. When the switch is turned to Hand, both the Stop and Start ports are
energized.
In order for the drive to start, the Stop signal must be received prior to the Start.
With the wiring above, the signals are nearly simultaneous, too fast to be sure that
the drive is ready to start. This causes the switch to either be unreliable or not
work at all. This can be remedied by adding a time delay to the start signal. By
changing Digital Input 1 from DI Start to DI Hand-Off-Auto Start, the drive

automatically adds this time delay and makes sure that the system is ready to start
before it receives the command.
O
H A
+24V XOO DI 0: Stop
OOX
XOO
DI 1: HOA Start
Using Hand-Off-Auto with Auto/Manual
To take control of the drive speed when switching from Auto to Hand on the H-
O-A switch, the Auto/Manual feature can be used. See Auto/Manual on page 27
for more on Auto/Manual Control.
In the circuit below, a speed potentiometer was added to the analog input to
provide a speed reference to the drive. When the H-O-A switch is moved from
Auto to Hand, the digital input block requests manual control and issues a start
command to the drive. If the digital input port receives manual control, the drive
accelerates to the reference speed from the analog input. All attempts to change
the speed except from the analog input are blocked. If the drive is stopped while
in Hand, switch the H-O-A switch to Off and then back to Hand to restart the
drive.
If another port has manual control of the drive, but does not have exclusive
ownership of the logic commands (due to P326 [Manual Cmd Mask]), turning
the switch to Hand causes the drive to begin moving but for the analog input to
have no control over the speed.
O
H A
XOO
+24V DI 0: Stop
OOX
XOO
DI 1: HOA Start and
Manual Control
+10V Analog IN 0: DI Manual

Speed Reference
Speed Potentiometer

For this circuit, set the following parameters (P301 [Access Level] must be set to
1 “Advanced” to see P563 [DI ManRef Sel]).
Parameter No. Parameter Name Value
158 DI Stop Digital Input 0
172 DI Manual Control Digital Input 1
176 DI HOA Start Digital Input 1
324 Logic Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 (Digital In)
326 Manual Cmd Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 (Digital In)
327 Manual Ref Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 (Digital In)
563 DI Manual Reference Select Anlg In0 Value
The drive requests Manual mode, starts and tracks the reference speed coming
from the Analog Input when the H-O-A switches to Hand. (The HIM still reads
Auto. This display changes only when the HIM has control of Manual mode).
Using Hand-Off-Auto with a Start Relay
The Hand-Off-Auto switch can also be wired to ability to start the drive through
a separate start relay.
In the circuit below, the run relay closes the circuit to both the stop and start
inputs when the H-O-A switch is in Auto. Using this option, the drive can be
started only if the H-O-A switch is in Hand or in Auto and the Run Relay is
energized. No network or HIM control of the drive is possible.
O
H A
+24V XOO DI 0: Stop
OOX
Start Relay
DI 1: HOA Start
The above circuit can also be accomplished with a single digital input. Unlike
P161 [DI Start], P176 [DI HOA Start] can share the same physical input with
P158 [DI Stop]. The circuit can thus become the following.
O
H A
+24V XOO DI 0: Stop and
HOA Start
OOX
Start Relay

To use the H-O-A switch, the run relay and allow for network or HIM control,
the circuit can be wired as in the figure below.
O
H A
+24V XOO DI 0: Stop
OOX
XOO DI 1: HOA Start

OOX
Start Relay
Here, the stop input is high when the H-O-A switch is in the Hand or Auto
position. This eliminates the asserted stop caused when the stop input is low,
allowing for the drive to be started from several sources when the H-O-A switch
is in the Auto position.
Masks A mask is a parameter that contains one bit for each of the possible ports for the
respective PowerFlex 750-Series drive. Each bit acts like a valve for issued
commands. Closing the valve (setting a bit value to 0) stops the command from
reaching the drive. Opening the valve (setting a bit value to 1) lets the command
pass through the mask into the drive.
Table 6 - Mask Parameters and Functions

Parameter No. Parameter Name Description
222 Dig In Filt Mask(1) Digital Input Filter Mask. Filters the selected digital input.
324 Logic Mask Enables/disables ports to control the logic command (such as start
and direction). Does not mask Stop commands.
325 Auto Mask Enables/disables ports to control the logic command (such as start
and direction), while in Auto mode. Does not mask Stop
commands.
326 Manual Cmd Mask Enables/disables ports to control the logic command (such as start
and direction), while in Manual mode. Does not mask Stop
commands.
327 Manual Ref Mask Enables/disables ports to control the speed reference while in
Manual mode. When a port is commanding Manual mode, the
reference is forced to the commanding port if the respective bit in
this parameter is set. If an alternate speed reference source is
desired, use P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel] to select the source.
885 Port Mask Act(2) Active status for port communication. Bit 15 “Security”
determines if network security is controlling the logic mask
instead of this parameter.
886 Logic Mask Act(2) Active status of the logic mask for ports. Bit 15 “Security”
determines if network security is controlling the logic mask
instead of this parameter.


(2)
887 Write Mask Act Active status of write access for ports. Bit 15 “Security” determines
if network security is controlling the write mask instead of this
parameter.
888 Write Mask Cfg Enables/disables write access (parameters, links, and so forth.) for
DPI ports. Changes to this parameter become effective only when
power is cycled, the drive is reset or Bit 15 of P887 [Write Mask
Actv], transitions from “1” to “0.”
2 Dig In Filt Mask(3) Digital Input Filter Mask. Filters the selected digital input.
(1) Used only by the PowerFlex 753 main control board.
(2) Read only parameter.
(3) Used only by I/O Module models 20-750-2263C-1R2T and 20-750-2262C-2R. (Modules with 24V DC inputs.)
The individual bits for each parameter are as follows.
Table 7 - Mask Parameters with Bit Designations

P222 [Dig In P324 [Logic P325 [Auto P326 P327 P885 [Port P886 [Logic P887 [Write P888 [Write P2 [Dig In
Filt Mask] (1) Mask] Mask] [Manual [Manual Ref Mask Act] Mask Act] Mask Act] Mask Cfg] Filt Mask](4)
Cmd Mask] Mask]
Bit 0 Reserved Digital In Digital In Digital In Digital In Digital In Digital In Reserved Reserved Input 0
Bit 1 Input 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Input 1
Bit 2 Input 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Input 2
Bit 3 Reserved Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Port 3 Input 3
Bit 6 Reserved Port 6 Port 6 Port 6 Port 6 Port 6 Port 6 Port 6 Port 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved Port 7 Reserved Reserved Reserved Port 7 Reserved Port 7 Port 7 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved Port 10(2) Reserved Reserved Reserved Port 10(2) Reserved Port 10(2) Port 10(2) Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved Port 11(2) Reserved Reserved Reserved Port 11(2) Reserved Port 11(2) Port 11(2) Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Port 13(3) Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved Port 14 Port 14 Port 14 Port 14 Port 14 Port 14 Port 14 Port 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Security Security Security Security Reserved
(1) Used only by the PowerFlex 753 main control board.
(2) PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 drives and larger only.
(3) PowerFlex 755 drives only.
(4) Used only by I/O Module models 20-750-2263C-1R2T and 20-750-2262C-2R. (Modules with 24V DC inputs.)

Example
A PowerFlex 755 drive is controlled via the embedded ethernet (Port 13)
remotely by a PLC. Normal operation prevents any type of control from being
issued from the remote HIM (Port 2). However, the ability to manually control
the drive via the HIM is needed in some cases. To assure these two modes of
control, masks are set as follows.
This masks out (disables) the remote HIM (Port 2) to control the logic
command word (such as start, jog and direction) when the drive is in Auto mode
and lets (enables) the HIM to control the logic command word when the drive is
in Manual mode.

Owners An owner is a parameter that contains one bit for each of the possible port
adapters. The bits are set high (value of 1) when its adapter is currently issuing
that command, and set low (Value of 0) when its adapter is not issuing that
command.
Parameters and Functions

• P919 [Stop Owner] indicates which port is issuing a valid stop command.
• P920 [Start Owner] indicates which port is issuing a valid start command.
• P921 [ Jog Owner] indicates which port is issuing a valid jog command.
• P922 [Dir Owner] indicates which port has exclusive control of direction
command.
• P923 [Clear Flt Owner] indicates which port is currently clearing a fault.
• P924 [Manual Owner] indicates which port has requested manual control
of all drive logic and reference functions.
• P925 [Ref Select Owner] indicates which port is issuing a valid reference
select.
The bits for each parameter can be broken down as follows.

Port 13 (1)
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Ownership falls into two categories.
Exclusive: Only one adapter at a time can issue the command and only one bit in
the parameter is high.
Non Exclusive: Multiple adapters can simultaneously issue the same command
and multiple bits can be high.
Some ownership must be exclusive; that is, only one adapter at a time can issue
certain commands and claim ownership of that function. For example, it is not
allowable to have one adapter command the drive to run in the forward direction
while another adapter is issuing a command to make the drive run in reverse.
Direction control ownership is exclusive.
Conversely, any number of adapters can simultaneously issue stop commands.

Stop control ownership is not exclusive.

Ownership Example
The operator presses the HIM Stop button to stop the drive. When the operator
attempts to restart the drive by pressing the HIM Start button, the drive does not
restart. The operator needs to determine why the drive will not restart. The
operator first views the Start Owner to see if the HIM is issuing a valid Start.
When the start button on the HIM is pressed, a valid start is being issued as
shown below.
Stop Asserted AUTO

0.00 Hz F
Port 00 Dev Param 920
Start Owner
x00x xxxx x000 0010
Bit 01 Port 1
ESC PAR#
Because the start command is not maintained causing the drive to run, the
operator views the Stop Owner. Note that the status bar on the HIM indicates
that a stop has been asserted, but it does not indicate from which port the stop
command is originating. Notice that bit 0 is a value of “1,” indicating that the
Stop device wired to the Digital Input terminal block is open, issuing a Stop
command to the drive. Until this device is closed, a permanent Start Inhibit
condition exists and the drive will not restart.
Stop Asserted AUTO

0.00 Hz F
Port 00 Dev Param 919
Stop Owner
x00x xxxx x000 0001
Bit 00 Digital In
ESC PAR#

Power Loss The drive contains a sophisticated algorithm to manage initial application of
power as well as recovery from a partial power loss event. The drive also has
programmable features that can minimize the problems associated with a loss of
power in certain applications.
Terms and Definitions

Term Definition
Vbus The instantaneous DC bus voltage.
Vmem The average DC bus voltage. A measure of the average bus voltage determined by heavily filtering bus
voltage. Just after the pre-charge relay is closed during the initial power-up bus pre-charge, bus memory
is set equal to bus voltage. Thereafter it is updated by ramping at a very slow rate toward Vbus. The filtered
value ramps at 2.4V DC per minute (for a 480VAC drive). An increase in Vmem is blocked during
deceleration to prevent a false high value due to the bus being pumped up by regeneration. Any change to
Vmem is blocked during inertia ride through.
Vslew The rate of change of Vmem in volts per minute.
Vrecover The threshold for recovery from power loss.
Vtrigger The threshold to detect power loss.
The level is adjustable. The default is the value in the PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Level table. If “Pwr Loss
Lvl” is selected as an input function AND energized, Vtrigger is set to Vmem minus [Pwr Loss Level]. Vopen
is normally 60V DC below Vtrigger (in a 480VAC drive). Both Vopen and Vtrigger are limited to a minimum
of Vmin. This is a factor only if [Pwr Loss Level] is set to a large value.
Important: When using a value of P451/P454 [Pwr Loss A/B Level] that is larger than default, you must
provide a minimum line impedance to limit inrush current when the power line recovers. Provide an input
impedance that is equal to or greater than the equivalent of a 5% transformer with a VA rating 5 times the
drive’s input VA rating.
Vinertia The software regulation reference for Vbus during inertia ride through.
Vclose The threshold to close the pre-charge contactor.
Vopen The threshold to open the pre-charge contactor.
Vmin The minimum value of Vopen.
Voff The bus voltage below which the switching power supply falls out of regulation.
Table 8 - PowerFlex 750-Series Bus Levels

Class 200/240V AC 400/480V AC 600/690V AC
Vslew 1.2V DC 2.4V DC 3.0V DC
Vrecover Vmem – 30V Vmem – 60V Vmem – 75V
Vclose Vmem – 60V Vmem – 120V Vmem – 150V
Vtrigger1,2 Vmem – 60V Vmem – 120V Vmem – 150V
Vtrigger1,3 Vmem – P451/P454 [Power Vmem – P451/P454 [Power Vmem – P451/P454 [Power
Loss A/B Level] Loss A/B Level] Loss A/B Level]
Vopen Vmem – P451/P454 [Power Vmem – P451/P454 [Power Vmem – P451/P454 [Power
Loss A/B Level] Loss A/B Level] Loss A/B Level]
Vopen4 153V DC 305V DC 382V DC
Vmin 153V DC 305V DC 382V DC
Voff – 200V DC –

In the following diagram, the x-axis across the bottom indicates what the input
voltage is into the drive and the y-axis indicates the corresponding DC Bus
Voltage. Then the levels of each event are indicated in the graph. For example if I
measure at the input of my drive, 450 volts - phase to phase, I find that voltage
across the bottom. Now the various voltage levels can be derived according to that
voltage level.
Line Loss Mode = Coast Line Loss Mode = Decel Line Loss Mode = Continue
Recover Recover Recover
Closer Closer Closer
Trigger Trigger Trigger
Open Open Open
DC Bus Volts
DC Bus Volts
DC Bus Volts
AC Input Volts AC Input Volts AC Input Volts
Restart after Power Recovery
If a power loss causes the drive to coast, and power recovers, the drive returns to
powering the motor if it is in a Run Permit state. The drive is in a Run Permit
state if the following is true:
• 3 Wire mode - it is not faulted and if all Enable and Not Stop inputs are
energized.
• 2 Wire mode - it is not faulted and if all Enable, Not Stop, and Run inputs
are energized.
Power Loss Modes
The drive is designed to operate at a nominal input voltage. When voltage falls
below this nominal value by a significant amount, action can be taken to preserve
the bus energy and keep the drive logic alive as long as possible. The drive has
three methods of dealing with low bus voltages.
• “Coast” - Disable the drive and allow the motor to coast. (default)
• “Decel” - Decelerate the motor at a rate that regulates the DC bus until the
load’s kinetic energy can no longer power the drive.
• “Continue” - Allow the drive to power the motor down to 50% of the
nominal DC bus voltage. When power loss occurs, P959 [Alarm Status A]
Bit 0 turns on if the P449 [Power Loss Actn] is set to 1 “Alarm.”
If the P449 [Power Loss Actn] is set to 3 “FltCoastStop,” an F3 “Power Loss” fault
occurs when the power loss event exceeds P452/455 [Pwr Loss A/B Time].

The drive faults with a F4 “UnderVoltage” fault if the bus voltage falls below
Vmin and the P460 [UnderVltg Action] is set to 3 “FltCoastStop.”
The pre-charge relay opens if the bus voltage drops below Vopen and closes if the
bus voltage rises above Vclose.
If the bus voltage rises above Vrecover for 20 ms, the drive determines the power
loss is over. The power loss alarm is cleared.
If the drive is in a Run Permit state, the reconnect algorithm is run to match the
speed of the motor. The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the set
speed.
Coast
This is the default mode of operation. The drive determines a power loss has
occurred if the bus voltage drops below Vtrigger. If the drive is running, the
inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts.
Bus Voltage 680V
620V
560V
500V
407V
305V
Motor Speed
Power Loss
Output Enable
Pre-Charge
Drive Fault
Decel
This mode of operation is useful if the mechanical load is high inertia and low
friction. By recapturing the mechanical energy, converting it to electrical energy
and returning it to the drive, the bus voltage is maintained. As long as there is
mechanical energy, the ride through time is extended and the motor remains fully
fluxed.
If AC input power is restored, the drive can ramp the motor to the correct speed
without the need for reconnecting. The drive determines a power loss has
occurred if the bus voltage drops below Vtrigger.
If the drive is running, the inertia ride through function is activated.
The load is decelerated at the correct rate so that the energy absorbed from the
mechanical load regulates the DC bus to the value Vinertia.

The inverter output is disabled and the motor coasts if the output frequency
drops to zero or if the bus voltage drops below Vopen or if any of the Run Permit
inputs are de-energized.
If the drive is still in inertia ride through operation when power returns, the drive
immediately accelerates at the programmed rate to the set speed. If the drive is
coasting and it is in a Run Permit state, the reconnect algorithm is run to match
the speed of the motor. The drive then accelerates at the programmed rate to the
set speed.
Bus Voltage 680V
620V
560V
500V
407V
305V
Motor Speed
Power Loss
Output Enable
Pre-Charge
Drive Fault
Continue
This mode provides the maximum power ride through. The input voltage can
drop to 50% and the drive is still able to supply drive rated current (not drive
rated power) to the motor.
Bus Voltage 680V
620V
560V
365V
305V
Motor Speed
Power Loss
Output Enable
Pre-Charge
Drive Fault
ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage, a minimum line impedance must

be provided to limit inrush current when the power line recovers. Provide an
input impedance that is equal to or greater than the equivalent of a 5%
transformer with a VA rating 6 times the drive’s input VA rating.
Drive damage can occur if proper input impedance is not provided as explained
below. If the value for [Power Loss Level] is greater than 18% of [DC Bus Memory],
you must provide a minimum line impedance to limit inrush current when the
power line recovers. Provide input impedance that is equal to or greater than the
equivalent of a 5% transformer with a VA rating 5 times the drives input VA rating.

Process PID Loop The internal PID function provides closed loop process control with
proportional and integral control action. The function is designed to be used in
applications that require simple control of a process without the use of a separate
stand-alone loop controller.
The PID function reads a process variable input to the drive and compares it to a
desired setpoint stored in the drive. The algorithm then adjusts the output of the
PID regulator, changing drive output frequency to attempt zero error between
the process variable and the setpoint.
The Process PID can be used to modify the commanded speed or can be used to
trim torque. There are two ways the PID Controller can be configured to modify
the commanded speed.
• Speed Trim - The PID Output can be added to the master speed reference.
• Exclusive Control - PID can have exclusive control of the commanded
speed.
The mode of operation between speed trim, exclusive control, and torque trim is
selected in P1079 [PID Output Sel].
Speed Trim Mode
In this mode, the output of the PID regulator is summed with a master speed
reference to control the process. This mode is appropriate when the process needs
to be controlled tightly and in a stable manner by adding or subtracting small
amounts directly to the output frequency (speed). In the following example, the
master speed reference sets the wind/unwind speed and the dancer pot signal is
used as a PID Feedback to control the tension in the system. An equilibrium
point is programmed as PID Setpoint, and as the tension increases or decreases
during winding, the master speed is trimmed to compensate and maintain
tension near the equilibrium point.
0 Volts
Equilibrium Point Dancer Pot

P1067 [PID Ref Sel] P1072 [PID Fdbk Sel]
10 Volts
Master Speed Reference

When the PID is disabled the commanded speed is the ramped speed reference.
Slip
+
Comp
Slip Adder
+ Open
Linear Ramp Loop
Spd Ref and S Curve Spd Cmd
Process
+ PID
+
PID Ref
Process PID
Controller
PID Fbk PID Disabled Speed Control
When the PID is enabled the output of the PID Controller is added to the
ramped speed reference.
Slip
+ Comp
Slip Adder
+ Open
Linear Ramp Loop
Process
+ PID
+
PID Ref
Process PID
Controller
PID Fbk PID Enabled Speed Control
Exclusive Mode
In this mode, the output of PID regulator is the speed reference, and does not
“trim” a master speed reference. This mode is appropriate when speed is
unimportant and the only thing that matters is satisfying the control loop. In the
pumping application example below, the reference or setpoint is the required
pressure in the system. The input from the transducer is the PID feedback and
changes as the pressure changes. The drive output frequency is then increased or
decreased as needed to maintain system pressure regardless of flow changes. With

the drive turning the pump at the required speed, the pressure is maintained in
the system.
Pump
Pressure
Motor Transducer
PID Feedback Desired Pressure

P1067 [PID Ref Sel]
However, when additional valves in the system are opened and the pressure in the
system drops, the PID error alters its output frequency to bring the process back
into control. When the PID is disabled the commanded speed is the ramped
speed reference.
Slip
+
Comp
Slip Adder
+ Open
Linear Ramp Loop
Process
PID
PID Ref
Process PID
Controller
PID Fbk PID Disabled Speed Control
When the PID is enabled, the speed reference is disconnected and PID Output
has exclusive control of the commanded speed, passing through the linear ramp
and S curve.
Slip
+
Comp
Slip Adder
+ Open
Linear Ramp Loop
Process
PID
PID Ref
Process PID
Controller
PID Fbk PID Enabled Speed Control

PID Output Select
Parameter 1079 [PID Output Sel]

• “Not Used” (0) - PID output is not applied to any speed reference.
• “Speed Excl” (1) - PID output is the only reference applied to the speed
reference.
• “Speed Trim” (2) - PID output is applied to speed reference as a trim value.
(Default)
• “Torque Excl” (3) - PID output is only reference applied to torque
reference.
• “Torque Trim” (4) - PID output is applied to torque reference as a trim
value.
• “Volt Excl” (5) - PID output is only reference applied to voltage reference.
• “Volt Trim” (6) - PID output is applied to voltage reference as a trim value.
PID Configuration
Parameter 1065[PI Cfg] is a set of bits that select various modes of operation.
The value of this parameter can only be changed while the drive is stopped.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
1065 PID Cfg RW 16-bit

PID Configuration Integer
Main configuration of the Process PID controller.
APPLICATIONS
Process PID
Anti Windup
Options
Percent Ref
Zero Clamp
Preload Int
Stop Mode
Ramp Ref
Fdbk Sqrt
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PID Preload
This feature steps the PID Output to a preload value for better dynamic response
when the PID Output is enabled. Refer to the diagram below. If PID is not
enabled, the PID Integrator can be initialized to the PID Preload Value or the
current value of the commanded speed. The operation of Preload is selected in
the PID Configuration parameter. By default, Preload Command is off and the
PID Load Value is zero, causing a zero to be loaded into the integrator when the
PID is disabled. As shown in Diagram A below, when the PID is enabled the PID
output starts from zero and regulates to the required level. When PID is enabled
with PID Load Value is set to a non-zero value the output begins with a step as
shown in Diagram B below. This can result in the PID reaching steady state

sooner, however if the step is too large the drive can go into current limit and
extend the acceleration.
Diagram A Diagram B
PID Enabled
PID Preload Value

PID Output
Speed Command
PID Preload Value = 0 PID Preload Value > 0
Preload command can be used when the PID has exclusive control of the
commanded speed. With the integrator preset to the commanded speed there is
no disturbance in commanded speed when PID is enabled. After PID is enabled
the PID output is regulated to the required level.
PID Enabled
Start at Speed Command

PID Output
Speed Command
Preload to Command Speed
When the PID is configured to have exclusive control of the commanded speed
and the drive is in current limit or voltage limit the integrator is preset to the
commanded speed so that it knows where to resume when no longer in limit.
Ramp Ref
The PID Ramp Reference feature is used to provide a smooth transition when
the PID is enabled and the PID output is used as a speed trim (not exclusive
control). When PID Ramp Reference is selected in the PID Configuration
parameter, and PID is disabled, the value used for the PID reference is the PID
feedback. This causes the PID error to be zero. Then when the PID is enabled the
value used for the PID reference ramps to the selected value for PID reference at
the selected acceleration or deceleration rate. After the PID reference reaches the
selected value the ramp is bypassed until the PID is disabled and enabled again. S-
curve is not available as part of the PID linear ramp.

Zero Clamp
This feature limits the possible drive action to one direction only. Output from
the drive is from zero to maximum frequency forward or zero to maximum
frequency reverse. This removes the chance of doing a “plugging” type operation
as an attempt to bring the error to zero. This bit is active only in trim mode.
The PID has the option to limit operation so that the output frequency always
has the same sign as the master speed reference. The zero clamp option is selected
in the PID Configuration parameter. Zero clamp is disabled when PID has
exclusive control of speed command.
For example, if master speed reference is +10 Hz and the output of the PID
results in a speed adder of –15 Hz, zero clamp limits the output frequency to not
become less than zero. Likewise, if master speed reference is –10 Hz and the
output of the PID results in a speed adder of +15 Hz, zero clamp limits the
output frequency to not become greater than zero.
Feedback Square Root
This feature uses the square root of the feedback signal as the PID feedback. This
is useful in processes that control pressure, because centrifugal fans and pumps
vary pressure with the square of speed.
The PID has the option to take the square root of the selected feedback signal.
This is used to linearize the feedback when the transducer produces the process
variable squared. The result of the square root is normalized back to full scale to
provide a consistent range of operation. The option to take the square root is
selected in the PID configuration parameter.
100.0
75.0
Normalized SQRT (Feedback)
50.0
25.0
0.0
-25.0
-50.0
-75.0
-100.0
-100.0 -75.0 -50.0 -25.0 0.0 25.0 50.0 75.0 100.0
Normalized Feedback

Stop Mode
When P370/371 [Stop Mode A/B] is set to 1 “Ramp” and a Stop command is
issued to the drive, the PID loop continues to operate during the decel ramp until
the PID output becomes more than the master reference. When set to 0 “Coast,”
the drive disables PID and performs a normal stop. This bit is active in Trim
mode only.
Anti-Wind Up
When P1065 [PID Cfg] Bit 5 “Anti Windup” is set to 1 “Enabled” the PID loop
automatically prevents the integrator from creating an excessive error that could
cause loop instability. The integrator is automatically controlled without the
need for PID Reset or PID Hold inputs.
Percent Ref
When using Process PID control the output can be selected as percent of the
Speed Reference. This works in Speed trim mode only, not in Torque Trim or
Exclusive mode.
Examples
Percent Ref selected, Speed Reference = 43 Hz, PID Output = 10%, Maximum
Frequency = 130 Hz. 4.3 Hz is added to the final speed reference.
Percent Ref not selected, Speed Reference = 43 Hz, PID Output = 10%,
Maximum Frequency = 130 Hz. 13.0 Hz is added to the final speed reference.
PID Control
P1066 [PID Control] is a set of bits to dynamically enable and disable the
operation of the process PID controller. When this parameter is interactively
written to from a network it must be done through a data link so the values are
not written to EEprom.
PID Enable
The PID loop can be enabled/disabled. The Enabled status of the PID loop
determines when the PID regulator output is part or all of the commanded
speed. The logic evaluated for the PID Enabled status is shown in the following
ladder diagram.

The drive must be in Run before the PID Enabled status can turn on. The PID
remains disabled when the drive is jogged. The PID is disabled when the drive
begins a ramp to stop, except when it is in Trim mode and the Stop mode bit in
P1065 [PID Cfg] is enabled.
When a digital input is configured as “PI Enable,” the PID Enable bit of P1066
[PID Control] must be turned On for the PID loop to become enabled. If a
digital input is not configured as “PI Enable” and the PID Enable bit in [PID
Control] is turned On, then the PID loop can become enabled. If the PID Enable
bit of [PID Control] is left continuously, then the PID can become enabled as
soon as the drive goes into Run. If analog input signal loss is detected, the PID
loop is disabled.
DigInCfg DigIn PI_Control PI_Status
Running Running .PI_Enable .PI_Enable .PI_Enable Signal Loss .Enable
DigInCfg PI_Control
.PI_Enable .PI_Enable
PID Hold
The Process PID Controller has the option to hold the integrator at the current
value so if some part of the process is in limit the integrator maintains the present
value to avoid windup in the integrator. The logic to hold the integrator at the
current value is shown in the following ladder diagram. There are three
conditions under which Hold turns on.
• If a digital input is configured to provide PID Hold and that digital input
is turned on then the PID integrator stops changing. Note that when a
digital input is configured to provide PID Hold that takes precedence over
the PID control parameter.
• If a digital input is not configured to provide PID Hold and the PID Hold
bit in the PID Control parameter is turned on the PID integrator stops
changing.
• If the current limit or voltage limit is active then the PID is put into Hold.
DigInCfg DigIn PI_Status
.PI_Hold .PI_Hold .PI_Hold
DigInCfg PI_Control
.PI_Hold .PI_Hold
Current Lmt
or Volt Lmt

PI Reset
This feature holds the output of the integral function at zero. The term “anti
windup” is often applied to similar features. It can be used for integrator
preloading during transfer and can be used to hold the integrator at zero during
“manual mode.”
For example a process whose feedback signal is below the reference point,
creating error. The drive increases its output frequency in an attempt to bring the
process into control. If, however, the increase in drive output does not zero the
error, additional increases in output is commanded. When the drive reaches
programmed Maximum Frequency, it is possible that a significant amount of
integral value has been “built up” (windup). This can cause undesirable and
sudden operation if the system were switched to manual operation and back.
Resetting the integrator eliminates this windup.
Invert Error
This feature changes the “sign” of the error, creating a decrease in output for
increasing error and an increase in output for decreasing error. An example of this
is an HVAC system with thermostat control. In Summer, a rising thermostat
reading commands an increase in drive output because cold air is being blown. In
Winter, a falling thermostat commands an increase in drive output because warm
air is being blown. The PID has the option to change the sign of PID Error. This
is used when an increase in feedback needs to cause an increase in output. The
option to invert the sign of PID Error is selected in the PID Configuration
parameter.

PID Status
P1089 [PID Status] parameter is a set of bits that indicate the status of the
process PID controller.
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
1089 PID Status RO 16-bit

PID Status Integer
Status of the Process PI regulator.
PID Enabled
PID In Limit
Options
PID Reset
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PID Hold
APPLICATIONS
Process PID
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “PID Enable” – PID controller is enabled.

Bit 1 “PID Hold” – Hold PID integrator.
Bit 2 “PID Reset” – Reset PID integrator.
Bit 3 “PID In Limit” – PID in limit.
PID Reference and Feedback
The selection of the source for the reference signal is entered in P1067 [PID Ref
Sel]. The selection of the source for the feedback signal is selected in P1072 [PID
Fdbk Sel]. The reference and feedback have the same limit of possible options.
Options include DPI adapter ports, MOP, preset speeds, analog inputs, pulse
input, encoder input and PID setpoint parameter.
The value used for reference is displayed in P1090 [PID Ref Meter] as a read only
parameter. The value used for feedback is displayed in P1091 [PID Fdbk Meter]
as a read only parameter. These displays are active independent of PID Enabled.
Full scale is displayed as ±100.00%.
PID Reference and Feedback Scaling
The analog PID reference can be limited by using P1068 [PID Ref AnlgHi] and
P1069 [PID Ref AnlgLo]. [PID Ref AnlgHi] determines the high value, in
percent, for the analog PID reference. [PID Ref AnlgLo] determines the low
value, in percent, for the PID reference.
The analog PID feedback can be limited by using P1068 [PID Ref AnlgHi] and
P1069 [PID Ref AnlgLo]. [PID Ref AnlgHi] determines the high value, in
percent, for the PID feedback. [PID Ref AnlgLo] determines the low value, in
percent, for the PID feedback.

Example
Display P1090 [PID Ref Meter] and P1091 [PID Fdbk Meter] as positive and
negative values. Feedback from our dancer comes into Analog Input 2 as a 0-10V
DC signal.
• P1067 [PID Ref Sel] = 0 “PI Setpoint”
• P1070 [PID Setpoint] = 50%
• P1072 [PID Fdbk Sel] = 2 “Analog In 2"
• P1068 [PID Ref AnlgHi] = 100%
• P1069 [PID Ref AnlgLo] = –100%
• P1073 [PID Fdbk AnlgHi] = 100%
• P1074 [PID Fdbk AnlgLo] = 0%
• P61 [Anlg In1 Hi] = 10V
• P62 [Anlg In2 Lo] = 0V
PI Feedback Scaling
• P675 [Trq Ref A Sel] = “Analog In 1”
• P1073 [PID Fdbk AnlgHi] = 100%
• P1074 [PID Fdbk AnlgLo] = 0%
Now 5V corresponds to 50% on the PID Feedback, and we try to maintain a PID
setpoint of 50% (5V).
PID Setpoint
This parameter can be used as an internal value for the setpoint or reference for
the process. If P1067 [PID Ref Sel] points to this parameter, the value entered
here becomes the equilibrium point for the process.
PID Error
The PID Error is then sent to the Proportional and Integral functions, which are
summed together.
PID Error Filter P1084 [PID LP Filter BW] sets up a filter for the PID Error.
This is useful in filtering out unwanted signal response, such as noise in the PID
loop feedback signal. The filter is a Radians/Second low pass filter.

PID Gains
Parameters P1086 [PID Prop Gain], P1087 [PID Int Time], and P1088 [PID
Deriv Time] determine the response of the PID.
Proportional control (P) adjusts output based on size of the error (larger error =
proportionally larger correction). If the error is doubled, then the output of the
proportional control is doubled. Conversely, if the error is cut in half then the
output of the proportional output is cut in half. With only proportional control
there is always an error, so the feedback and the reference are never equal. [PID
Prop Gain] is unit less and defaults to 1.00 for unit gain. With [PID Prop Gain]
set to 1.00 and PID Error at 1.00% the PID output is 1.00% of maximum
frequency.
Integral control (I) adjusts the output based on the duration of the error. (The
longer the error is present, the harder it tries to correct). The integral control by
itself is a ramp output correction. This type of control gives a smoothing effect to
the output and continues to integrate until zero error is achieved. By itself,
integral control is slower than many applications require and therefore is
combined with proportional control (PI). [PID Int Time] is entered in seconds.
If [PID Int Time] is set to 2.0 seconds and PI Error is 100.00% the PI output
integrates from 0 to 100.00% in 2.0 seconds.
Derivative Control (D) adjusts the output based on the rate of change of the error
and, by itself, tends to be unstable. The faster that the error is changing, the larger
change to the output. Derivative control is usually used in torque trim mode and
is usually not needed in speed mode.
For example, winders using torque control rely on PD control not PI control.
Also, P1084 [PID LP Filter BW] is useful in filtering out unwanted signal
response in the PID loop. The filter is a Radians/Second low pass filter.
PID Lower and Upper Limits/Output Scaling
The output value produced by the PID is displayed as ±100% in P1093 [PID
Output Meter].
P1082 [PID Lower Limit] and P1081 [PID Upper Limit] are set as a percentage.
In exclusive or speed trim mode, they scale the PID Output to a percentage of
P37 [Maximum Freq]. In torque trim mode, they scale the PID Output as a
percentage of rated motor torque.

Example
Set the PID lower and Upper limits to ±10% with Maximum Frequency set to
100 Hz. This lets the PID loop adjust the output of the drive ±10 Hz.
P1081 [PID Upper Limit] must always be greater than P1082 [PID Lower
Limit].
Once the drive has reached the programmed Lower and Upper PID limits, the
integrator stops integrating and no further “windup” is possible.
PID Output Mult

P1080 [PID Output Mult] enables additional scaling of the PID loop output.
Example
The application is a velocity controlled winder. As the roll builds up, the output
gain can be reduced to allow the dancer signal to be properly reacted to by the
PID loop without changing tuning of the PID loop.
PID Deadband
P1083 [PID Deadband] conditions the PID reference. If the PID reference has
undesired rapid changes, the deadband can help smooth out these transitions.
Reset Parameters to Factory 1. Access the Status Screen on the 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-CS6 Human
Interface Module.
Defaults
Stopped AUTO
0.00 Hz F
Host Drive
240V 4.2A
20G...D014
00
ESC REF PAR# TEXT
2. Use the left-right arrow keys to scroll to the port of the device whose
parameters you want to set to factory defaults (for example, Port 00 for the
Host Drive or the respective port number for the drive’s connected
peripherals).
3. Press the Folder key next to the green Start key to display its last-viewed
folder.
4. Use the left-right arrow keys to scroll to the Memory folder.

5. Use the up-down arrow keys to select Set Defaults.
Stopped AUTO
0.00 Hz F
MEMORY
HIM CopyCat
Set Defaults
00
ESC
6. Press the Enter (5) key to display the Set Defaults screen.
Stopped AUTO Stopped AUTO

0.00 Hz F 0.00 Hz F
Port 00 Set Defaults Port xx Set Defaults
Host and Ports (Preferred) This Port Only
This Port Only
ESC INFO ESC INFO
For Host Drive For Connected Peripheral
7. Use the up-down arrow keys select the appropriate action.

• Host and Ports (Preferred): Selects the Host device and all ports for a
factory default action.
• This Port Only: Selects only this port for a factory default action. (For
a description of a selected menu item, press the INFO soft key)
8. Press the Enter (5) key to display the warning pop-up box to reset defaults.
Host and Ports (preferred) Pop-up Box This Port Only Pop-up Box
Stopped AUTO Stopped AUTO

0.00 Hz F 0.00 Hz F
WARNING WARNING
Sets most parameters in the Use MOST to reset typical ▲
Host device and all ports settings on this port
to factory defaults. (preferred). Use ALL to
Continue? reset all settings. ▼
ESC ENTER ESC ALL MOST
Press the ENTER soft key to affirm and set most parameters Press the MOST soft key to set MOST settings for the selected
for the Host Drive and port devices to factory defaults. In this port device to factory defaults. In this case, refer to the Host
case, refer to the Host Drive and port device user manuals for Drive User Manual for the settings that will NOT be restored.
the settings that will NOT be restored—or press the ESC soft Press the ALL soft key to set ALL settings for the selected port
key to cancel. device to factory defaults—or press the ESC soft key to cancel.
A pop-up Fault warning display follows the parameter changes. This can be reset
by pressing the clear soft key. And the following confirm pop-up box can be
cleared by pressing the enter soft key. Pressing the escape key twice returns the
display to the Status screen.
Refer to the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6/-C6S HIM (Human Interface Module)

User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001, for further information on using the
HIM and the resetting of parameters.

Sleep/Wake Mode The purpose of the sleep/wake function is to Start (wake) the drive when an
SleepWake RefSel signal is greater than or equal to the value in P354 [Wake
Level], and Stop (sleep) the drive when an analog signal is less than or equal to the
value in P352 [Sleep Level]. Setting P350 [Sleep Wake Mode] to 1 “Direct”
enables the sleep/wake function to work as described.
An Invert mode also exists that changes the logic so that an analog value less than
or equal to P354 [Wake Level] starts the drive and an SleepWake RefSel signal
greater than or equal to P352 [Sleep Level] stops the drive.
Related Sleep/Wake parameters noted below.

350 Sleep Wake Mode Enables/disables the Sleep/Wake function.
351 SleepWake RefSel Selects the source of the input controlling the sleep/wake function.
352 Sleep Level Defines the SleepWake RefSel signal level that stops the drive.
353 Sleep Time Defines the amount of time at or below 352 [Sleep Level] before a Stop is
issued.
354 Wake Level Defines the SleepWake RefSel signal level that starts the drive.
355 Wake Time Defines the amount of time at or above 354 [Wake Level] before a Start is
issued.
Sleep/Wake Operation
Drive
Run
Sleep/Wake
Function
Start
Stop
Sleep Timer
Satisfied
Sleep Level
Satisfied
Wake Timer
Satisfied
Wake Level Wake Sleep Wake Sleep
Time Time Time Time
Satisfied
Wake Level
Sleep Level Example Conditions
Wake Time = 3 Seconds
Analog Signal Sleep Time = 3 Seconds

Requirements
In addition to enabling the sleep function with P350 [Sleep Wake Mode], the
following conditions must be met:
• A proper value must be programmed for P352 [Sleep Level] and P354
[Wake Level].
• A sleep/wake reference must be selected in P351 [SleepWake RefSel].
• At least one of the following must be programmed (and input closed) in
P155 [DI Enable], P158 [DI Stop], P163 [DI Run], P164 [DI Run
Forward], or P165 [DI Run Reverse].
Conditions to Start/Restart
ATTENTION: Enabling the sleep/wake function can cause unexpected machine

operation during the Wake mode. Equipment damage and/or personal injury
can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use
this function without considering the Table 9 below and applicable local,
national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines.
Table 9 - Conditions Required to Start Drive (1) (2) (3)

Input After Powerup After a Drive Fault After a Stop Command
Reset by HIM or Software “Stop” Reset by HIM, Network/Software, or HIM, Network/Software or Digital Input
Digital Input “Clear Faults” “Stop”
Stop(4) Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed
Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct mode:
New Start or Run Command(5) New Start or Run Command(5) SleepWake RefSel Signal > Sleep Level(7)
Invert mode:
SleepWake RefSel Signal < Sleep Level(8)
New Start or Run Command(5)
Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed
Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct mode:
New Start or Run Command(5) SleepWake RefSel Signal > Sleep Level(7)
Invert mode:
New Start or Run Command(5)
Run Run Closed New Run Command(6) Run Closed New Run Command
Run Forward Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct mode:
Run Reverse SleepWake RefSel Signal > Sleep Level(7)
Invert mode:
(1) When power is cycled, if all conditions are present after power is restored, restart occurs.
(2) If all conditions are present when [Sleep-Wake Mode] is “enabled,” the drive starts.
(3) The active speed reference. The Sleep/Wake function and the speed reference can be assigned to the same input.
(4) Cannot use P159 [DI Cur Lmt Stop] or P160 [DI Coast Stop] as the only Stop Input. This causes the drive to go into a Sleep Cfg Alarm - Event No. 161.
(5) Command must be issued from HIM, TB or network.
(6) Run Command must be cycled.
(7) SleepWake Ref Sel signal does not need to be greater than the wake level.
(8) SleepWake Ref Sel signal does not need to be less than the wake level.

For Invert function, refer to the [Anlg Inn LssActn] parameter.
Normal operation requires that P354 [Wake Level] be set greater than P352
[Sleep Level]. However, there are no limits that prevent the parameter settings
from crossing, but the drive will not start until such settings are corrected. These
levels are programmable while the drive is running. If P352 [Sleep Level] is made
greater than P354 [Wake Level] while the drive is running, the drive continues to
run as long as the P351 [SleepWake RefSel] signal remains at a level that doesn’t
trigger the sleep condition. P353 [Sleep Time] is also factored into this as well.
Once the drive goes to sleep in this situation, it is not allowed to restart until the
level settings are corrected (increase P354 [Wake Level], or decrease P352 [Sleep
Level]). If however, the levels are corrected prior to the drive going to sleep,
normal Sleep/Wake operation continues.
Timers
P353 [Sleep Time]

P355 [Wake Time]
Timers determine the length of time required for Sleep/Wake levels to produce
true functions. These timers start counting when the Sleep/Wake levels are met
and count in the opposite direction whenever respective level is not met. If the
timer counts all the way to the user specified time, it creates an edge to toggle the
Sleep/Wake function to the respective condition (sleep or wake). On powerup,
timers are initialized to the state that does not permit a start condition. When the
analog signal satisfies the level requirement, the timers start counting.
Interactive Functions
Separate start commands are also honored (including a digital input start), but
only when the sleep timer is not satisfied. Once the sleep timer times out, the
sleep function acts as a continuous stop. There are two exceptions that ignore the
Sleep/Wake function.
1. When a device is commanding local control, that is HIM in Manual mode

or a digital input programmed to P172 [DI Manual Ctrl].
2. When a jog command is being issued.
When a device is commanding local control, the port that is commanding it has
exclusive start control (in addition to ref select), essentially overriding the Sleep/
Wake function, and allowing the drive to run in the presence of a sleep situation.
This holds true even for the case if digital input is programmed to P172 [DI
Manual Ctrl], a digital input start or run is able to override a sleep situation.

Sleep/Wake Sources
The P351 [SleepWake RefSel] signal source for the sleep/wake function can be
any analog input, whether it is being used for another function or not, a
DeviceLogix software source (P90 [DLX Real OutSP1] thru P97 [DLX Real
OutSP8]), or a valid numeric edit configuration. Configuring the sleep/wake
source is done through P351 [SleepWake RefSel].
Also, [Anlg Inn Hi] and [Anlg Inn Lo] parameters have no effect on the function,
however, the factory calibrated result, [Anlg Inn Value] parameter, is used. In
addition, the absolute value of the calibrated result is used, thus making the
function useful for bipolar direction applications.
The analog in loss function, configured by the [Anlg Inn LssActn] parameter, is
unaffected and therefore operational with the sleep/wake function, but not tied
to the sleep or wake levels and is triggered off the [Anlg Inn Raw Value]
parameter.

PM001, for more details.

Start Permissives Start permissives are conditions required to permit the drive to start in any mode,
such as run, jog, or auto-tune. When all permissive conditions are met, the drive
is considered ready to start. The ready condition is confirmed through the ready
status in P935 [Drive Status 1].
Permissive Conditions
• No faults can be active.
• No Type 2 alarms can be active.
• The DI Enable input, if configured, must be closed.
• The DC bus precharge logic must indicate it is a start permissive.
• All Stop inputs must be negated nor any drive functions are issuing a stop.
• No configuration changes (parameters being modified) can be in-progress.
• The drive’s safety option module logic must be satisfied.
If a CIP Motion connection is active and if alignment is set to “Not Aligned”

then the “CommutNotCfg” bit is high (on). To clear this start inhibit, from the
Axis Properties within the Logix Designer application, run a Commutation Test,
enter the proper value into the Offset and then set the Alignment to “Controller
Offset.”

If all permissive conditions are met, a valid start, run or jog command starts the
drive. The status of all current inhibit conditions are reflected in P933 [Start
Inhibits] and the last inhibit conditions are reflected in P934 [Last StrtInhibit]
details are shown below.
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
933 Start Inhibits RO 32-bit

Start Inhibits Integer
Indicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running.
CommutNotCfg
Options
Profiler (1)
Precharge
Database
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Startup
Faulted
Enable
Safety
Alarm
Sleep
Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) PowerFlex 755 drives only. 0 = False, 1 = True
Bit 0 “Faulted” – Drive is in a faulted state. See P951 [Last Fault Code].
Bit 1 “Alarm” – A Type 2 alarm exists. See P961 [Type 2 Alarms].
Bit 2 “Enable” – An Enable input is open.
Bit 3 “Precharge” – Drive is in precharge. See P321 [Prchrg Control], P11 [DC Bus Volts].
Bit 4 “Stop” – Drive is receiving a stop signal. See P919 [Stop Owner].
DIAGNOSTICS
Status
Bit 5 “Database” – Database is performing a download operation.

Bit 6 “Startup” – Startup is active and preventing a start. Go to Start-Up Routine and abort.
Bit 7 “Safety” – Safety option module is preventing a start.
Bit 8 “Sleep” – Sleep function is issuing a stop. See P 350 [Sleep Wake Mode], P351 [SleepWake RefSel].
Bit 9 “Profiler” – Profiler function is issuing a stop. See P1210 [Profile Status].
Bit 10 “CommutNotCfg” – The associated PM motor commutation function has not been configured for use.
934 Last StrtInhibit RO 32-bit
Last Start Inhibit Integer
Displays the Inhibit that prevented the last Start signal from starting the drive. Bits are cleared after the next successful start sequence.
See parameter 933 [Start Inhibits] for bit descriptions.
CommutNotCfg
Options
Precharge
Database
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Profilier
Startup
Faulted
Enable
Safety
Alarm
Sleep
Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False, 1 = True

Stop Modes Stop Mode A/B can be configured as a method of stopping the drive when a stop
command is given. A normal stop command and the run input changing from
true to false results in a normal stop command. However, when using
TorqueProve, P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] with Bit 0 enabled, [Stop Mode A/B] must
be set to 1 “Ramp.”
P392 [Stop Dwell Time] can also be used with a stop command. This can be used
to set an adjustable time between detecting zero speed and turning off the drive
output.
The PowerFlex 750 series offers several methods for stopping a load. The stop
method or mode is defined by parameters 370/371 [Stop Mode A/B] These
modes include the following:
• Coast
• Ramp
• Ramp to Hold
• DC Brake
• DC Brake Auto Off
• Current Limit
• Fast Brake
Additionally, P388 [Flux Braking In] can be selected separately (not part of the
Stop mode selection) to provide additional braking during a Stop command or
when reducing the speed command. For Stop commands, this provides additional
braking power during “Ramp” or “Ramp to Hold” selections only. If “Fast Brake”
or “DC Brake” is used, “Flux Braking” is active only during speed changes (if
enabled).
A “Ramp” selection always provides the fastest stopping time if a method to

dissipate the required energy from the DC bus is provided (that is Dynamic
Braking resistor, regenerative brake, and so forth.). The PowerFlex Dynamic
Braking Selection Guide presented in Appendix A of the Reference Manual,
explains Dynamic Braking in detail.
The alternative braking methods to external hardware brake requirements, can be

enabled if the stopping time is not as restrictive. Each of these methods dissipates
energy in the motor (use care to avoid motor overheating).

Braking Methods
Method Use when application Requires Braking Power
Coast Power is removed from the motor and it coasts to zero speed None
Ramp The fastest stopping time or fastest ramp time for speed changes (external The most
brake resistor or regenerative capability required for ramp times faster than
the methods below). High duty cycles, frequent stops or speed changes. (The
other methods can result in excessive motor heating).
Ramp to Hold Same as ramp above only when zero speed is reach the drive outputs a DC Same as “Ramp”
brake current to be sure the motor shaft doesn't move after it has stopped.
This continues until the drive is started again.
DC Brake DC braking is immediately applied (does not follow programmed decel ramp). Less than Ramp or
May have to adjust P397 [DC Brake Kp]. Fast Brake
DCBrkAutoOff Applies DC braking until zero speed is reached or DC brake time is reached, Less than Ramp or
whichever is shorter. Fast Brake
Current Lmt Max torque / current applied until zero speed Big Stuff
Fast Brake High slip braking for maximum braking performance above base speed. More than DC
Brake / DC Brake
Auto Off
Coast
Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Output Current
Motor Speed
Command Speed
Time
Stop Command Coast Time is load dependent
Coast is selected by setting P370/371 [Stop Mode A/B] to 0 “Coast.” When in

Coast to Stop, the drive acknowledges the Stop command by shutting off the
output and releasing control of the motor. The load/motor will coast or free spin
until the kinetic energy is dissipated.
• On Stop, the drive output goes immediately to zero (off ).
• No further power is supplied to the motor. The drive has released control.
• The motor coasts for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the
system (Inertia, friction, and so forth).

DC Brake
Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Output Current
Motor Speed
Command Speed
Time
(B) (C) (A)
Stop Command
DC Hold Time
This method uses DC injection of the motor to Stop and/or hold the load. DC
Brake is selected by setting P370/371 [Stop Mode A/B] to 3 “DC Brake.” You
can also choose the amount of time the braking is applied and the magnitude of
the current used for braking with P395 [DC Brake Time] and P394 [DC Brake
Level]. This mode of braking generates up to 40% of rated motor torque for
braking and is typically used for low inertia loads with infrequent Stop cycles:
• On Stop, 3 phase drive output goes to zero (off ).
• Drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase to provide the current
level programmed in P394 [DC Brake Level]. This voltage causes a
stopping brake torque. If the voltage is applied for a time that is longer
than the actual possible stopping time, the remaining time is used to
attempt to hold the motor at zero speed (decel profile “B” on the diagram
above).
• DC voltage to the motor continues for the amount of time programmed in
P395 [DC BrakeTime]. Braking ceases after this time expires.
• After the DC Braking ceases, no further power is supplied to the motor.
The motor/load may or may not be stopped. The drive has released
control of the motor/load (decel profile “A” on the diagram above).
• The motor, if rotating, coasts from its present speed for a time that is
dependent on the remaining kinetic energy and the mechanics of the
system (inertia, friction, and so forth).
• Excess motor current and/or applied duration, could cause motor damage.
Motor voltage can exist long after the Stop command is issued. The right
combination of Brake Level and Brake Time must be determined to
provide the safest, most efficient stop (decel profile “C” on the diagram
above).

Ramp
Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Output Current
Motor Speed
Output Current
Command Speed
Output Voltage
DC
Hold
Level
Time
Stop Command Zero Command Speed DC Hold Time
This method uses drive output reduction to stop the load.
Ramp To Stop is selected by setting parameters 370/371[Stop Mode A/B] to 1

“Ramp.” The drive ramps the frequency to zero based on the deceleration time
programmed into parameters 537/538 [Decel Time 1/2]. The normal mode of
machine operation can utilize [Decel Time 1]. If the machine Stop requires a
faster deceleration than desired for normal deceleration, [Decel Time 2] can be
activated with a faster rate selected. When in Ramp mode, the drive
acknowledges the Stop command by decreasing or ramping the output voltage
and frequency to zero in a programmed period (Decel Time), maintaining
control of the motor until the drive output reaches zero. The drive output is then
shut off. The load/motor follows the decel ramp. Other factors such as bus
regulation and current limit can alter the actual decel rate.
Ramp mode can also include a timed hold brake. Once the drive has reached zero
output hertz on a Ramp-to-Stop and both parameters 395 [DC Brake Time] and
P394 [DC Brake Level] are not zero, the drive applies DC to the motor
producing current at the DC Brake Level for the DC Brake Time:
• On Stop, drive output decreases according to the programmed pattern
from its present value to zero. The pattern can be linear or squared. The
output decreases to zero at the rate determined by the programmed P520
[Max Fwd Speed] or P521 [Max Rev Speed] and the programmed active
(Decel Time n).
• The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus
or current regulation.
• When the output reaches zero the output is shut off.
• The motor, if rotating, coasts from its present speed for a time that is
dependent on the mechanics of the system (inertia, friction, and so forth).

Ramp to Hold
Bus Voltage Bus Voltage
Output Voltage Output Voltage
Output Current Output Current
Motor Speed Motor Speed

Output Current
Command Speed Command Speed
Output Voltage
DC
Hold
Level
Time
DC Hold for
Stop Command Zero Command Speed indeterminate Start Command
amount of time.
This method combines two of the methods above. It uses drive output reduction
to stop the Load and DC injection to hold the load at zero speed once it has
stopped:
• On Stop, drive output decreases according to the programmed pattern
from its present value to zero. The pattern can be linear or squared. The
output decreases to zero at the rate determined by the programmed P37
[Maximum Freq] and the programmed active P537/538 [Decel Time 1/2]
• The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus
or current regulation.
• When the output reaches zero 3 phase drive output goes to zero (off ) and
the drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase to provide the current
level programmed in P394 [DC Brake Level]. This voltage causes a
holding brake torque.
• DC voltage to the motor continues until a Start command is reissued or
the drive is disabled.
• If a Start command is reissued, DC Braking ceases and the drive returns to
normal AC operation. If an Enable command is removed, the drive enters a
Not Ready state until the enable is restored.

Fast Brake
Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Output Current
Motor Speed
Command Speed
Time
Stop Command
This method takes advantage of the characteristic of the induction motor

whereby frequencies greater than zero (DC braking) can be applied to a spinning
motor that provides more braking torque without causing the drive to regenerate:
• On Stop, the drive output decreases based on the motor speed, keeping the
motor out of the regen region. This is accomplished by lowering the
output frequency below the motor speed where regeneration does not
occur. This causes excess energy to be lost in the motor.
• The method uses a PI based bus regulator to regulate the bus voltage to a
reference (that is 750V) by automatically decreasing output frequency at
the proper rate.
• When the frequency is decreased to a point where the motor no longer
causes the bus voltage to increase, the frequency is forced to zero. DC
brake is used to complete the stop if the DC Braking Time is non-zero,
then the output is shut off.
• Use of the current regulator verifies that over current trips don’t occur and
allow for an easily adjustable and controllable level of braking torque.
• Use of the bus voltage regulator results in a smooth, continuous control of
the frequency and forces the maximum allowable braking torque to be
utilized at all times.
IMPORTANT For this feature to function properly the active [Bus Reg Mode A/B] must be
set to 1 “Adjust Freq” and not be 0 “Disabled.”

Example
Block Diagram
Current Regulator
Brake
Level
Bus Voltage
Gain
Reference
Frequency
Bus Voltage

Current Limit Stop

Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Current Limit
Output Current
Motor Speed
Time
Stop Command Zero Speed
Current Limit stop is not typically set up as the normal Stop mode. Usually the
normal stop is programmed at some ramp rate. For the current limit stop a digital
input is used for the function. However, you certainly could set the normal stop
as CurrentLimit Stop
Current limit stop ramp rate is 0.1 second and is not programmable
Example
Current Limit Stop
DC Bus Voltage Motor Current P685 Motor Speed
DC Bus Voltage
In this example the current limit was set high enough to allow the full rating of
the drive to be used in the stop sequence.

Example
Current Limit - Lowered Limit
DC Bus Voltage Motor Current P685 Motor Speed
DC Bus Voltage
In this example the current limit was set at some value such that when the stop
was issued the output current was clamped at that setting. Note the decel time is
extended.
Voltage Class PowerFlex drives are sometimes referred to by voltage class, which identifies the
general input voltage to the drive. P305 [Voltage Class] includes a range of
voltages. For example, a 400V class drive has an input voltage range of 380…480V
AC. While the hardware remains the same for each class, other variables, such as
factory defaults, catalog number, and power unit ratings change. In most cases the
voltage of a drive can be reprogrammed to another value within the class by
resetting the defaults to something other than factory settings.
P305 [Voltage Class], is required by the drive when parameter downloads occur
and is generally not programmed individually. This parameter provides a “Low
Voltage” and “High Voltage” setting. The default value is dependent upon the
voltage that matches the catalog number (for example 400V or 480V). For
example, a drive shipped as 400V (catalog code “C”) has a default of “Low
Voltage” for P305 [Voltage Class]. A drive shipped as 480V (catalog code “D”)
has a default of “High Voltage.”
When a change is made to P305 [Voltage Class], the continuous current rating of
the drive changes by an amount equal to the published difference between catalog
numbers. With a change to the current rating, review P422 [Current Limit 1]
and P423 [Current Limit 2].
Also note that a Reset to Defaults “All” resets the voltage to the original factory
setting.

Chapter 2
Feedback and I/O
Topic Page
Analog Inputs 105
Analog Outputs 113
Digital Inputs 119
Digital Outputs 130
PTC Motor Thermistor Input 152
Analog Inputs There are two analog inputs per I/O module. Up to four I/O modules can be
mounted in the drive ports. See the PowerFlex 750-Series Installation
Instructions, publication 750-IN001, for valid ports. Accessing the analog input
parameters is done by selecting the port that the module is mounted in, then
accessing the Analog Input group of parameters.

Chapter 2 Feedback and I/O
Analog Input Specifications

Terminal Name Description Related
Param (5)
Sh Shield Terminating point for wire shields when an
Sh EMC plate or conduit box is not installed.
Ptc– Motor PTC (–) Motor protection device (Positive 40

Ptc+ Motor PTC (+) Temperature Coefficient). on Port X
Ao0– Analog Out 0 (–) Bipolar, ±10V, 11 bit & sign, 2 k ohm 75
Ao0+ Analog Out 0 (+) minimum load. on Port X
Sh
Sh
PTC–
4-20 mA, 11 bit & sign, 400 ohm maximum
PTC+ Ao1– Analog Out 1 (–) load. 85
Ao0–
Ao0+
Ao1– Ao1+ Analog Out 1 (+) on Port X
Ao1+
–10V
10VC
+10V
–10V –10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.
Ai0–
Ai0+
Ai1–
10VC 10 Volt Common For (–) and (+) 10 Volt references.
Ai1+
24VC
+24V
+10V +10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.
DiC
Di0
Di1
Ai0– Analog Input 0 (–) Isolated (3), bipolar, differential, 11 bit & 50, 70
Di2
Di3
Ai0+ Analog Input 0 (+) sign. on Port X
Di4
Di5 Voltage mode: ±10V @ 88k ohm input
Ai1– Analog Input 1 (–) impedance. 60, 70
Ai1+ Analog Input 1 (+) Current mode: 0-20 mA @ 93 ohm input on Port X
impedance.
24VC 24 Volt Common (1) Drive supplied logic input power.
+24V +24 Volt DC (1) 200 mA max per I/O module
600 mA max per drive
Di C Digital Input Common Common for Digital Inputs 0…5
Di 0 Digital Input 0 (2) 24V DC - Opto isolated 1
Di 1 Digital Input 1 (2) Low State: less than 5V DC on Port X
Di 2 Digital Input 2 (2) High State: greater than 20V DC 11.2 mA DC
115V AC, 50/60 Hz (4) - Opto isolated
Di 3 Digital Input 3 (2)
Low State: less than 30V AC
Di 4 Digital Input 4 (2) High State: greater than 100V AC
(1) Not present on 120V versions.
(2) Digital Inputs are either 24 Volts DC (2262C) or 115 Volts AC (2262D) based on module catalog number. Be sure applied voltage is
correct for I/O module.
(3) Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provides high common mode
immunity.
(4) For CE compliance use shielded cable. Do not exceed 30 m (98 ft) cable length.
(5) I/O Module parameters also have a Port designation.

Feedback and I/O Chapter 2
Analog Scaling
[Anlg Inn Lo]

[Anlg Inn Hi]
A scaling operation is performed on the value read from an analog input to

convert it to units usable for some particular purpose. Control the scaling by
setting parameters that associate a low and high analog value (in volts or mA)
with a low and high target (in Hz).
Example 1
• P255 [Anlg In Type], Bit 0 = “0” (Voltage)
• P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = “Analog In 1”
• P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi] = 60 Hz
• P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] = 0 Hz
This is the default setting, where 0V represents 0 Hz and 10V represents 60 Hz

providing 1024 steps (10 bit analog input resolution) between 0 and 60 Hz.
10
9
8
7
6
Input Volts
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Output Hertz
Example 2
Consider the following setup:
• P520 [Max Fwd Speed] = 45 Hz
• P522 [Min Fwd Speed] = 15 Hz

This configuration is used when non-default settings are desired for minimum
and maximum speeds, but full range (0…10V) scaling from 0…60 Hz is still
desired.
P522 [Min Fwd Speed] P520 [Max Fwd Speed]
P61 [Anlg In1 Hi]
10V
Motor Operating Range

Frequency Deadband Frequency Deadband
0…2.5 Volts 7.5…10 Volts
Command Frequency
P62 [Anlg In1 Lo]

0V
0 Hz 15 Hz 45 Hz 60 Hz
P548 [Spd Ref A AnlgLo] Slope defined by (Analog Volts)/(Command Frequency) P547 [Spd Ref A AnlgHi]
In this example, a deadband from 0…2.5V and from 7.5…10V is created.

Alternatively, the analog input deadband could be eliminated while maintaining
the 15 and 45 Hz limits with the following changes:
Example 3
This is an application that requires only 30 Hz as a maximum output frequency

but is still configured for full 10V input. The result is that the resolution of the
input has been doubled, providing 1024 steps between 0 and 30 Hz.
10
9
8
7
6
Input Volts
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Output Hertz

Example 4
• P255 [Anlg In Type], Bit 0 = “1” (Current)
• P61 [Anlg In1 Hi] = 20 mA
• P62 [Anlg In1 Lo] = 4 mA
This configuration is referred to as offset. In this case, a 4…20 mA input signal

provides 0…60 Hz output, providing a 4 mA offset in the speed command.
20
18
16
14
12
Input mA
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Output Hertz
Example 5
This configuration is used to invert the operation of the input signal. Here,
maximum input (10V) represents 0 Hz and minimum input (0V) represents
60 Hz.
10
9
8
7
6
Input Volts
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Output Hertz

Example 6
This configuration is used when the input signal is 0…5V. Here, minimum input
(0V) represents 0 Hz and maximum input (5V) represents 60 Hz. This provides
full scale operation from a 0…5V source.
5
4.5
4
3.5
3
Input Volts
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Output Hertz
Example 7
• P675 [Trq Ref A Sel] = “Analog In 1”
• P677 [Trq Ref A AnlgHi] = 200%
• P678 [Trq Ref A AnlgLo] = 0%
This configuration is used when the input signal is 0…10V. The minimum input
of 0V represents a torque reference of 0% and maximum input of 10V represents
a torque reference of 200%.
10
9
8
7
6
Input Volts
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Torque Ref %

Square Root
The square root function can be applied to each analog input through the use of
P256 [Anlg In Sqrt]. Enable the function if the input signal varies with the square
of the quantity (for example drive speed) being controlled.
If the mode of the input is bipolar voltage (-10…10V), then the square root
function returns 0 for all negative voltages.
The function uses the square root of the analog value as compared to its full scale
(for example 5V = 0.5 or 50% and 0.5 = 0.707 ) and multiplies it times the full scale of
what it controls (for example 60 Hz).
The complete function can be describes as follows:

 ------------------------------------------------------------
Analog Value - [Analog In x Lo]-   (  Speed Ref A Hi  – [Speed Ref A Lo] ) + [Speed Ref A Lo]
 [Analog In x Hi] - [Analog In x Lo] 
Setting high and low values to 0V, 10V, 0 Hz, and 60 Hz, the expression reduces
to the following:
 Analog Value-   60 Hz
-----------------------
 10V 
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Analog Input Loss Detection
Signal loss detection can be detected for each analog input. P47 [Anlg In Loss
Sts] bits 0, 1, 2 indicate if the signal is lost. Bit 0 indicates that one or both signals
are lost. P53 [Anlg In0 LssActn] and P63 [Anlg In1 LssActn] defines what action
the drive takes when loss of any analog input signal occurs.
Selects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as
an analog signal less than 1V or 2 mA. The signal loss event ends and normal
operation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or
3 mA.
• “Ignore” (0) – No action is taken.
• “Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated.
• “Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to
run. Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major
fault.
• “FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
• “Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
• “Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
• “Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value.
• “Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P52 [Anlg In0 Lo] or P62 [Anlg In1
Lo].
• “Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P51 [Anlg In0 Hi] or P61 [Anlg In1
Hi].
If the input is in Current mode, 4 mA is the normal minimum usable input value.
Any value below 3.2 mA is interpreted by the drive as a signal loss, and a value of
3.8 mA is required on the input for the signal loss condition to end.
If the input is in Unipolar Voltage mode, 2V is the normal minimum usable input
value. Any value below 1.6V is interpreted by the drive as a signal loss, and a value
of 1.9V is required on the input for the signal loss condition to end. No signal loss
detection is possible while an input is in Bipolar Voltage mode. The signal loss
condition never occurs even if signal loss detection is enabled.

Analog Outputs There are two analog outputs per I/O module. Up to five I/O modules can be
mounted in the drive ports. See 750-IN001 for valid ports. Accessing the analog
output parameters is done by selecting the port that the module is mounted in
then accessing the Analog Output group of parameters.
Analog Output Specifications

Terminal Name Description Related
Param (4)
Sh Shield Terminating point for wire shields when an
Sh EMC plate or conduit box is not installed.
Ptc– Motor PTC (–) Motor protection device (Positive 40

Ptc+ Motor PTC (+) Temperature Coefficient). on Port X
Ao0– Analog Out 0 (–) Bipolar, ±10V, 11 bit & sign, 2 k ohm 75
Ao0+ Analog Out 0 (+) minimum load. on Port X
Sh
Sh
PTC–
4-20 mA, 11 bit & sign, 400 ohm maximum
PTC+ Ao1– Analog Out 1 (–) load. 85
Ao0–
Ao0+
Ao1– Ao1+ Analog Out 1 (+) on Port X
Ao1+
–10V
10VC
+10V
–10V –10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.
Ai0–
Ai0+
Ai1–
10VC 10 Volt Common For (–) and (+) 10 Volt references.
Ai1+
24VC
+24V
+10V +10 Volt Reference 2k ohm minimum.
DiC
Di0
Di1
Ai0– Analog Input 0 (–) Isolated (2), bipolar, differential, 11 bit & 50, 70
Di2
Di3
Ai0+ Analog Input 0 (+) sign. on Port X
Di4
Di5 Voltage mode: ±10V @ 88k ohm input
Ai1– Analog Input 1 (–) impedance. 60, 70
Ai1+ Analog Input 1 (+) Current mode: 0-20 mA @ 93 ohm input on Port X
impedance.
24VC 24 Volt Common Drive supplied logic input power.
+24V +24 Volt DC 200 mA max per I/O module
600 mA max per drive
Di C Digital Input Common Common for Digital Inputs 0…5
Di 0 Digital Input 0 (1) 24V DC - Opto isolated 1
Di 1 Digital Input 1 (1) Low State: less than 5V DC on Port X
Di 2 Digital Input 2 (1) High State: greater than 20V DC 11.2 mA DC
115V AC, 50/60 Hz (3) - Opto isolated
Low State: less than 30V AC
Di 4 Digital Input 4 (1) High State: greater than 100V AC
(1) Digital Inputs are either 24 Volts DC (2262C) or 115 Volts AC (2262D) based on module catalog number. Be sure applied voltage is
correct for I/O module.
(2) Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provides high common mode
immunity.
(3) For CE compliance use shielded cable. Do not exceed 30 m (98 ft) cable length.
(4) I/O Module parameters also have a Port designation.

Analog Output Configuration
Parameters 75 and 85 [Anlg Outn Select] are use to specify the signal used on
Analog Outputs 1 and 2, respectively. These parameters can be programmed to
the following selections.
Parameter No. Parameter Name
1 Output Frequency
2 Commanded SpdRef
3 Mtr Vel Fdbk
4 Commanded Trq
5 Torque Cur Fdbk
6 Flux Cur Fdbk
7 Output Current
8 Output Voltage
9 Output Power
11 DC Bus Volts
Scaling
The scaling for the analog output is defined by entering analog output voltages
into two parameters, P91 [Anlg Out1 Lo] and P90 [Anlg Out1 Hi]. These two
output voltages correspond to the bottom and top of the possible range covered
by the quantity being output. Scaling of the analog outputs is accomplished with
low and high analog parameter settings that are associated with fixed ranges (see
the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001,) for
each target function. Additionally, the PowerFlex 755 contains an adjustable scale
factor to override the fixed target range. P77 [Anlg Out0 Data] and 82 [Anlg
Out0 Val] are described in the following charts.

Case 1
P77 [Anlg Out0 Data] P78 [Anlg Out0 DataHi] P79 [Anlg Out0 DataLo] P82 [Anlg Out0 Val] P80 [Anlg Out0 Hi] P81 [Anlg Out0 Lo] P76 [Anlg Out0 Stpt]
Case 1: This shows P77 [Anlg Out0 Data] the units are consistent with the
selection of P75 [Anlg Out0 Sel]. In this case, the analog out select is set to P3
[Mtr Vel Fdbk] and the units are in rpm. P80 [Anlg Out0 Hi], P81 [Anlg Out0
Lo], P78 [Anlg Out0 DataHi], and P79 [Anlg Out0 DataLo] are all at default.
The motor was started and ramped to 1800 rpm. Note that P82 [Anlg Out0 Val]
remained zero.
Case 2: Here the P80 [Anlg Out0 Hi] is changed to 9 and P81 [Anlg Out0 Lo] is
changed to 1. As the motor ramps up and down, there is no change in the value or
scaling of P77 [Anlg Out0 Data]. Note that P82 [Anlg Out0 Val] is still zero.
Case 3: Now P78 [Anlg Out0 DataHi] is changed to 1800 and P79 [Anlg Out0
DataLo] is left at zero. When started P82 [Anlg Out0 Val] starts at 1 and reaches
9 when the motor speed is at maximum.
Case 4: In this section the P80 [Anlg Out0 Hi] and P81 [Anlg Out0 Lo] were
reversed in value. Now when the motor ramps up and down P82 [Anlg Out0 Val]
is just the opposite. It starts out at 9 and is at 1 at full speed.

Case 2
P77 [Anlg Out0 Data] P78 [Anlg Out0 DataHi] P79 [Anlg Out0 DataLo] P82 [Anlg Out0 Val]
[Anlg Outn Sel] = Mtr Vel
[Anlg Outn DataHi] = 1500
[Anlg Outn Val]

[Anlg Outn DataLo] = 500
When the motor speed reaches 500 rpm, [Anlg Outn Val] begins to increase from 0.
When the motor speed reaches 1500 rpm, [Anlg Outn Val] is at maximum of 10.

Case 3
P77 [Anlg Out0 Data] P78 [Anlg Out0 DataHi] P79 [Anlg Out0 DataLo] P82 [Anlg Out0 Val] P80 [Anlg Out0 Hi] P81 [Anlg Out0 Lo]
[Anlg Outn Hi] = 8

[Anlg Outn Lo] = 2
[Anlg Outn DataHi] = 1500

[Anlg Outn DataLo] = 500
[Anlg Outn Val]

When the motor speed reaches 500 rpm, [Anlg Outn Val] begins to increase from 2.
When the motor speed reaches 1500 rpm, [Anlg Outn Val] is at maximum of 8.
Absolute (Default)
Certain quantities used to drive the analog output are signed, for example the
quantity can be both positive and negative. You have the option of having the
absolute value (value without sign) of these quantities taken before the scaling
occurs. Absolute value is enabled separately for each analog output via the bit
enumerated P71 [Analog Out Abs].

Setpoint
Setpoint is a possible source for an analog output. It can be used to control an

analog output from a communication device using a DataLink. Change P75
[Anlg Out0 Sel] to 76 [Anlg Out0 Stpt]. Then map a datalink to P76 and you’ll
be able to drive the analog output over a network.

Digital Inputs Physical inputs are programmed to desired digital input functions. These
parameters cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Technical Information
The PowerFlex 753 drive has three digital inputs on its main control board:
• Di 0 – Configured for 115V AC or 24V DC
– Shared common (Di C) between Di 0ac and Di 0dc terminals
– TB3 - bottom of the main control board
• Di 1 and Di 2 – Configured for 24V DC
– Shared common (Di C) for Di 1 and Di 2
– TB1 - lower front of the main control board
PowerFlex 753 Main Control Board I/O TB1 wiring examples are included in
the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions, publication 750-
IN001.
The PowerFlex 755 drive has one digital input on its main control board:
• Di0 – configured for 115V AC or 24V DC
– Shared common (Di C) between Di 0ac and Di 0dc terminals
– TB1 - bottom of the main control board
There are also PowerFlex 750-Series option modules that expand the amount of
digital inputs that can be used in both the PowerFlex 753 and 755 drives.
20-750-2262C-2R / 20-750-2263C-1R2T
• Six 24V DC input terminals:
– Labeled as Di 0, Di 1, Di 2, Di 3, Di 4 and Di 5
– Shared common (Di C)
– TB1 - front of the option module
20-750-2262D-2R
• Six 115V AC input terminals:
– Labeled as Di 0, Di 1, Di 2, Di 3, Di 4 and Di 5
– Shared common terminal (Di C)
– TB1 - front of the option module
PowerFlex 750-Series Option Modules I/O TB1 wiring examples are included in
the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions, publication 750-
IN001.

Configuration
Digital inputs can be programmed to a desired function defined by Parameters

155 to 201 below. These parameters cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Number Parameter Name Number Parameter Name Number Parameter Name
155 DI Enable 170 DI Jog 2 Forward 187 DI PwrLoss ModeB
156 DI Clear Fault 171 DI Jog 2 Reverse 188 DI Pwr Loss
157 DI Aux Fault 172 DI Manual Ctrl 189 DI Precharge
158 DI Stop 173 DI Speed Sel 0 190 DI Prchrg Seal
159 DI Cur Lmt Stop 174 DI Speed Sel 1 191 DI PID Enable
160 DI Coast Stop 175 DI Speed Sel 2 193 DI PID Hold
161 DI Start 176 DI HOA Start 193 DI PID Reset
162 DI Fwd Reverse 177 DI MOP Inc 194 DI PID Invert
163 DI Run 178 DI MOP Dec 195 DI Torque StptA
164 DI Run Forward 179 DI Accel 2 196 DI Fwd End Limit
165 DI Run Reverse 180 DI Decel 2 197 DI Fwd Dec Limit
166 DI Jog 1 181 DI SqTqPs Sel 0 198 DI Rev End Limit
167 DI Jog 1 Forward 182 DI SqTqPs Sel 1 199 DI Rev Dec Limit
168 DI Jog 1 Reverse 185 DI Stop Mode B 200 DI PHdwr OvrTrvl
169 DI Jog 2 186 DI BusReg Mode B 201 DI NHdwr OvrTrvl
Operation for DI Run type parameters can be defined by P150 [Digital In Cfg]:
• “Run Edge” (0) – Control function requires a rising edge (open to close
transition) for the drive to run.
• “Run Level” (1) – As long as a separate “Stop” command is not issued, the
level alone (no rising edge required) determines whether the drive runs.
When set to 1 “Run Level” the absence of a run command is indicated as a
stop asserted and P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 0 is low.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is
used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering
applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry
guidelines.

Functional Descriptions
DI Enable
Closing this input lets the drive run when a Start command is issued. If the drive
is already running when this input is opened, the drive will coast stop and
indicate “not enabled” on the HIM (if present). This is not considered a fault
condition, and no fault is generated. If this function is not configured, the drive is
considered enabled.
IMPORTANT If the ENABLE (J1) jumper is removed, the Di 0 becomes a hardware enable.
For the PowerFlex 753, Di 0 is found on TB3 and for the PowerFlex 755, Di 0 is
found on TB1.
A combination of the hardware enable and a software enable can be utilized;

however, the drive will not run if any of the inputs are open.
DI Clear Fault
The “Clear Fault” digital input function lets an external device reset drive faults
through the terminal block. An open to closed transition on this input causes an
active fault (if any) to be reset.
DI Aux Fault
This input function is normally closed and lets external equipment fault the
drive. When this input opens, the drive faults on a F2 “Auxiliary Input” fault
code. If this input function is not configured, the fault will not occur.
DI Stop
An open input causes the drive to stop and become “Not Ready.” A closed input
lets the drive run when given a Start or Run command. If “Start” is configured,
then “Stop” must also be configured, otherwise, a digital input configuration
alarm occurs.
P370 [Stop Mode A] and P371 [Stop Mode B] dictate the drive’s stop action.
Refer to Stop Modes on page 96 for more details.
DI Cur Lmt Stop

With this digital input function, an open input causes the drive to current limit
stop. The drive acknowledges the stop command by setting the motor speed
reference to zero, causing the drive to bring the motor down to zero speed as fast
as the power limits, torque limits, and current limits allow. When the drive
output reaches zero, the output transistors are shut off.
DI Coast Stop
With this digital input function, an open input causes the drive to Coast-to-Stop.
The drive acknowledges the stop command by shutting off the output transistors
and releasing control of the motor. The load/motor will coast or free spin until
the mechanical energy is dissipated.

DI Start
An open to closed transition while the drive is stopped causes the drive to run in
the current direction, unless the “Stop” input function is open. If “Start” is
configured, then a “Stop” must also be configured.
DI Fwd Reverse
This digital input function is one of the ways to provide direction control when
the “Start” or “Run” functions (not combined with direction) are used. An open
input sets direction to forward. A closed input sets direction to reverse. If state of
input changes and drive is running or jogging, the drive changes direction.
DI Run Forward, DI Run Reverse

These digital input functions cause the drive to run and with a specific direction,
as long as the configured input is held closed. Also, these “2-wire” settings prevent
any other connected device from starting the drive. An open to closed transition
on one input or both inputs while the drive is stopped causes the drive to run
unless the “Stop” input function is configured and open.
The table below describes the basic action taken by the drive in response to
particular states of these input functions.
Run Forward Run Reverse Action
Open Open Drive stops, terminal block relinquishes direction ownership.
Open Closed Drive runs in reverse direction, terminal block takes direction ownership.
Closed Open Drive runs in forward direction, terminal block takes direction ownership.
Closed Closed Drive continues to run in current direction, but terminal block maintains
direction ownership.
It is not necessary to program both “Run Forward” and “Run Reverse.” These
two functions operate with or without each other.
IMPORTANT Direction control is an “Exclusive Ownership” function (see Owners). This means that
only one control device (terminal block, DPI device, HIM, and so forth) at a time is
allowed to control direction at a time. The terminal block must become direction
“owner” before it can be used to control direction. If another device is currently the
direction owner (as indicated by P922 [Dir Owner]), it is not possible to start the drive
or change direction by using the terminal block digital inputs programmed for both
Run and Direction control (for example Run/Fwd).
DI Run
This digital input function is similar to “Run Forward” and “Run Reverse”
settings. The only difference being that direction is determined by another input
or another device’s command (HIM or communication adapter).
DI Jog 1 Forward, DI Jog 1 Reverse, DI Jog 2 Forward, DI Jog 2 Reverse

Jog is a non-latched command such as Run, but overrides the normal speed
reference and uses P556 [ Jog Speed 1] or P557 [ Jog Speed 2] respectively.
An open to closed transition on one input or both inputs while the drive is
stopped causes the drive to jog unless the “Stop” input function is configured and

open. The table below describes the actions taken by the drive in response to
various states of these input functions.
Jog Forward Jog Reverse Action
Open Open Drive stops if already jogging, but can be started by other means. Terminal block
relinquishes direction ownership.
Open Closed Drive jogs in reverse direction. Terminal block takes direction ownership.
Closed Open Drive jogs in forward direction. Terminal block takes direction ownership.
Closed Closed Drive continues to jog in current direction, but terminal block maintains
direction ownership.
The drive will not jog while the drive is running or while the “Stop” input is open.
Start has precedence.
DI Jog 1, DI Jog 2
These digital input functions are similar to “Jog Forward” and “Jog Reverse” with
the only difference being that direction is determined by another input or
another device’s command (HIM or communication adapter). In addition, these
settings use either P556 [ Jog Speed 1] or P557 [ Jog Speed 2], respectively. In
Unipolar mode, the absolute value is used along with a separate direction
command. In Bipolar mode, the polarity of P556 [ Jog Speed 1] or P557 [ Jog
Speed 2] determines the direction of jog.
DI Manual Ctrl
The digital input function works in conjunction with the overall Auto/Manual
function. When this input is closed, it overrides other speed references, but only
if another device (HIM) did not have ownership of the Manual state. If the
digital input is successful in gaining manual control, the speed reference comes
from P563 [DI ManRef Sel], which can be set to any of the Analog Inputs, Preset
Speeds, MOP Reference, or an applicable Port Reference.
Associated with this digital input function, there is the ability to configure the
drive to switch smoothly from an automatic (communicated) speed reference to
manual speed reference produced by the Human Interface Module (HIM).
When the drive is commanded to switch from the automatic (communicated)
speed reference to the manual reference via a digital input, it preloads the last
value from the speed feedback into the HIM. Then the operator can modify the
manual reference on the HIM. This avoids a step change in speed that otherwise
occurs from the switch. Use this feature by configuring P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel],
P331 [Manual Preload], P172 [DI Manual Ctrl], and P563 [DI ManRef Sel].
This feature requires revision 2.001 of 20-HIM-A6 firmware or later.
DI Speed Sel 0, 1, and 2

These digital input functions can be used to select the speed reference. The open/
closed state of all the speed select digital input functions combine to select which
source is the speed reference.

DI Speed Sel 2 DI Speed Sel 1 DI Speed Sel 0 Auto Reference Source (Parameter)
0 0 0 Reference A (P545 [Spd Ref A Sel])
0 0 1 Reference A (P545 [Spd Ref A Sel])
0 1 0 Reference B (P550 [Spd Ref B Sel])
0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 (P573 [Preset Speed 3])
Refer to Speed Reference on page 251 for more details.
DI HOA Start
This digital input function provides Hand-Off-Auto control. It functions like a
three-wire start signal; with the exception, that it does not require the DI Stop to
be high for a full input cycle before the drive looks for a rising edge on DI HOA
Start. Use this feature by configuring P176 [DI HOA Start].
DI MOP Inc, DI MOP Dec

These digital input functions are used to increment and decrement the Motor
Operated Potentiometer (MOP) value inside the drive. The MOP is a reference
value that can be incremented and decremented by external devices. The MOP
value has a configurable preload that is retained through a power cycle. For the
drive to use the MOP value as the current speed reference, either P545 [Speed
Ref A Sel], P550 [Speed Ref B Sel], or P563 [DI ManRef Sel] must be set to
P558 [MOP Reference].
DI Accel 2, DI Decel 2
These digital input functions toggle between primary and secondary ramp rates.
For example, with a digital input programmed to P179 [DI Accel 2], an open
digital input follows P535 [Accel Time 1]. A closed digital input follows P536
[Accel Time 2].
DI SpTqPs Sel 0 and 1

These digital input functions provide the ability to switch between different
Speed/Torque/Position modes, (P309 [SpdTrqPsn Mode A], P310 [SpdTrqPsn
Mode B], P311 [SpdTrqPsn Mode C], and P312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode D]) from
digital input combinations. See Speed Torque Position on page 266 for a
complete description of these modes and the digital input combinations that
activate each mode.
DI Stop Mode B
This digital input function selects between two different drive Stop modes. If the
input is open, then P370 [Stop Mode A] selects which Stop mode to use. If the
input is closed, then P371 [Stop Mode B] selects which Stop mode to use. If this
input function is not configured, then P370 [Stop Mode A] always selects which
Stop mode to use. See also Stop Modes on page 96 for more details.

DI BusReg Mode B
This digital input function selects how the drive regulates excess voltage on the
DC bus. If the input is open, then P372 [Bus Reg Mode A] selects which bus
regulation mode to use. If the input is closed, then P373 [Bus Reg Mode B]
selects which bus regulation mode to use. If this input function is not configured,
then P372 [Bus Reg Mode A] always selects which bus regulation mode to use.
See also Bus Regulation on page 41 for more details.
DI PwrLoss ModeB
This digital input function selects between two different drive power loss modes.
If the input is open, P450 [Pwr Loss Mode A] dictates the drive’s action during
the Power Loss mode. If the input is closed, P371 [Stop Mode B] dictates the
drive’s action during the power loss. If this input function is not configured, P450
[Power Loss Mode A] always dictates the drive’s action during the power loss. See
also Power Loss on page 72 for more details.
DI Pwr Loss
The drive contains a sophisticated algorithm to manage initial application of
power as well as recovery from a partial power loss event. This digital input
function is used to force the drive into a power loss condition. If this input is
open, the drive’s internal algorithm dictates the power loss condition. If the input
is closed, the algorithm is overridden and the drive is externally forced into a
power lost condition. P449 [Power Loss Actn] configures the drive’s response to a
power loss time out condition and P452 [Pwr Loss A Time] or P455 [Pwr Loss B
Time] set the time that the drive remains in Power Loss mode before a fault
occurs. See also Power Loss on page 72 for more details.
DI Precharge
This digital input function is used to manage disconnection from a common DC
bus. If the input is closed, this indicates that the drive is connected to common
DC bus and normal precharge handling can occur, and that the drive can run
(start permissive). If the physical input is open, this indicates that the drive is
disconnected from the common DC bus, and the drive enters the precharge state
and initiates a coast stop immediately to prepare for reconnection to the bus. If
this input function is not configured, then the drive assumes that it is always
connected to the DC bus, and no special precharge handling is done.
DI Prchrg Seal
This digital input function is used to force a unique fault when an external
precharge circuit opens. P323 [Prchrg Err Cfg] dictates the action taken when an
external precharge circuit has opened.
DI PID Enable
If this digital input function is closed, the operation of the Process PID loop is
enabled. If this input function is open, the operation of the Process PID loop is
disabled.

DI PID Hold
If this input function is closed, the integrator for the Process PID loop is held at
the current value. If this input function is open, the integrator for the Process
PID loop is allowed to increase.
DI PID Reset
If this input function is closed, the integrator for the Process PI loop is reset to 0.
If this input function is open, the integrator for the Process PI loop integrates
normally.
DI PID Invert
If this input function is closed, the PI Error is inverted. If this input function is
open, the PI Error is not inverted.
DI Torque StptA
This digital input function is used to force P676 [Trq Ref A Stpt] as the source
for Torque Reference A, regardless of the setting in P675 [Trq Ref A Sel]. Used
when the drive is in a mode that is commanding torque. Refer to P309
[SpdTrqPsn Mode A], P310 [SpdTrqPsn Mode B], P311 [SpdTrqPsn Mode C],
and P312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode D].
DI Fwd End Limit, DI Rev End Limit

These digital input functions are used to trigger a Forward End Limit and/or a
Reverse End Limit. The resulting action depends on whether the drive is
operating as a speed, torque or position regulator. The mode of operation is
indicated by P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 21 “Speed Mode,” Bit 22 “PositionMode,”
and Bit 23 “Torque Mode.” When the drive is operating as a speed regulator, the
resulting action is to execute a “Fast Stop” command. After the drive stops in this
case, it only restarts in the opposite direction (if given a new start command).
This function is usually used with a limit switch near the point where the drive
needs to stop. When the drive is operating as a torque regulator, the resulting
action is to execute a “Fast Stop” command. After the drive stops in this case, it
restarts and continues operation (if given a new start command). When the drive
is operating as a position regulator, the resulting action is to execute a “Fast Stop”
command. After the drive stops in this case, it restarts and continues to move
towards the position reference (if given a new start command).
DI Fwd Dec Limit, DI Rev Dec Limit

These digital input functions are used to trigger a Forward Decel Limit and/or a
Reverse Decel Limit. The resulting action depends on whether the drive is
operating as a speed, torque or position regulator. The mode of operation is
indicated by P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 21 “Speed Mode,” Bit 22 “PositionMode”
and Bit 23 “Torque Mode.” When the drive is operating as a speed regulator, the
resulting action is to override the speed reference and decelerate to Preset Speed
1. This function is usually used with a limit switch and initiates the slowing down
process prior to encountering the End Limit. When the drive is operating as a
torque regulator, the drive ignores this signal and continues operating at its
torque reference. When the drive is operating as a position regulator, the drive
ignores this signal and continues moving towards its position reference.

DI PHdwr OvrTrvl, DI NHdwr OvrTrvl

These digital input functions are used to trigger a Positive Hardware Over-travel
and/or a Negative Hardware Over-travel. The resulting action is to immediately
fault and produce zero torque. After the drive is stopped, the condition needs to
be cleared and the fault needs to be reset. The drive restarts (if given a new start
command), and continues operation. It follows any speed reference, position
reference, or torque reference. The drive’s direction is not modified or limited
after the restart. This function is usually used with a limit switch in a position
beyond the “End Limit,” as an extra safety limit to prevent torque from damaging
the machine in an over-travel situation.
Status
For the PowerFlex 753 main control board Digital Inputs (Di) 0, 1, and 2, P220
[Digital In Sts] Bits 0, 1 and 2 represents its respective inputs status. For the
PowerFlex 755 main control board Digital Inputs (Di) 0, P220 [Digital In Sts]
Bit 0 represents its respective digital input status. For the PowerFlex 750-Series
Option Module Digital Inputs (Di) 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, P1 [Dig In Sts] Bits 0, 1, 2,
3, 4, and 5 represents its respective digital input status. When the bit associated
with the digital input is on, depicted by a 1, this means that the drive recognizes
that the digital input is on. When the bit associated with the digital input is off,
represented by a 0, this means that the drive recognizes that the digital input is
off.
Configuration Conflicts
If you configure the digital inputs so that one or more selections conflict with
each other, one of the digital input configuration alarms is asserted. As long as the
Digital Input Conflict exists, the drive will not start. These alarms are
automatically cleared by the drive as soon as the parameters are changed to
remove the conflicts. These are examples of configurations that cause an alarm:
• Configuring both the “Start” input function and the “Run Forward” input
function at the same time. “Start” is used only in “3-wire” Start mode, and
“Run Forward” is used only in “2-wire” Run mode, therefore, do not
configured at the same time.
• Configuring the same toggle input function (for instance “Fwd Reverse”)
to more than one physical digital input simultaneously.
These alarms, called Type 2 Alarms, are different from other alarms in that it is
not possible to start the drive while the alarm is active. It is possible for any of
these alarms to occur while the drive is running, because all digital input
configuration parameters can be changed only while the drive is stopped.
Whenever one or more of these alarms is present, the drive ready status becomes
“not ready” and the HIM displays a conflict message. In addition, the drive status
light flashes yellow. Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual,
publication 750-PM001, for a complete list of Type 2 Alarms.

DigIn Cfg B
Digital input conflict. Input functions that cannot exist at the same time have
been selected. Correct Digital Input configuration.
DigIn Cfg C
Digital input conflict. Input functions that cannot be assigned to the same digital
input have been selected. Correct Digital Input configuration.
Block Diagrams
Figure 8 - PowerFlex 753
[Dig In Filt Mask] [Digital In Sts]
In2 Filter
[Dig In Filt]
In1 Filter
Com
[Dig In Filt Mask]

In0
(24V DC)
In0
(115V AC)
Com
Figure 9 - PowerFlex 755

[Digital In Sts]
In0
(24V DC)
In0
(115V AC)
Com

Figure 10 - PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module

[Dig In Sts]
[Dig In Filt]
In5 Filter
[Dig In Filt Mask]
[Dig In Filt]
In4 Filter
[Dig In Filt Mask]
[Dig In Filt]
In3 Filter
[Dig In Filt Mask]
[Dig In Filt]
In2 Filter
[Dig In Filt Mask] [Dig In Filt]
In1 Filter
[Dig In Filt Mask]
[Dig In Filt]
In0 Filter
[Dig In Filt Mask]
Com

Digital Outputs The PowerFlex 753 has one transistor output and one relay output embedded on
its main control board.
The transistor output is on TB1 at the lower front of the main control board.
Terminal Name Description Rating
T0 Transistor Output 0 Transistor Output 48V DC, 250 mA maximum load.
Open drain output.
The relay output is on TB2 at the bottom of the main control board.
R0NC Relay 0 N.C. Output Relay 0 normally closed 240V AC, 24V DC, 2A max
contact Resistive Only
R0C Relay 0 Common Output Relay 0 Common
R0NO Relay 0 N.O. Output Relay 0 normally open contact 240V AC, 24V DC, 2A max
General Purpose (Inductive) / Resistive
Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions,

publication 750-IN001, for PowerFlex 753 Main Control Board I/O wiring
examples.
The PowerFlex 755 has no outputs embedded on its Main Control Board.
There are PowerFlex 750-Series Option Modules that expand the amount of
digital outputs that can be used in both the PowerFlex 753 and 755 drives.
Catalog numbers 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R provide two relay

outputs on TB2 at the front of option module.
R0C Relay 0 Common Output Relay 0 common
R1C Relay 1 Common Relay 1 common
Output
R1NO Relay 1 N.C. Output Relay 1 normally open contact 240V AC, 24V DC, 2A max

Catalog number 20-750-2263C-1R2T provides one transistor output and two

relay outputs on TB2 at the front of option module.
R0C Relay 0 Common Relay 0 common
Output
T0 Transistor Output 0 Transistor Output 24VDC = 1A max
TC Transistor Output Transistor Output Common 24VDC = 0.4 Max for U.L. applications.
Common Resistive
T1 Transistor Output 1 Transistor Output 24VDC = 1A max 24VDC = 0.4 Max for
U.L. applications. Resistive
Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions,

publication 750-IN001, for PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module I/O wiring
examples.
Configuration
Each digital output can be programmed to change state based on one of many
different conditions. These conditions can fall into different categories.
• Drive status conditions (fault, alarm, and reverse).
• Level conditions (DC bus voltage, current, and frequency)
• Controlled by a digital input.
• Controlled by the network.
• Controlled by DeviceLogix software.

Drive Status Conditions
For PowerFlex 750-Series drives utilizing an option module, the table below
shows an overview of the selectable configurations for the drive’s digital output
Sel parameters.
(1)
220 Digital In Sts Status of the digital inputs resident on the main control board (Port 0).
227(1) Dig Out Setpoint Controls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be
used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.
233(1) RO0 Level CmpSts Status of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor
output.
720 PTP PsnRefStatus Displays the current operating status of the Point-To-Point Position
Planner in the Position Referencing.
724 Psn Reg Status Indicates status of position control logic.
730 Homing Status Indicates status of position control logic.
933 Start Inhibits Indicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running.
935 Drive Status 1 Present operating condition of the drive.
936 Drive Status 2 Present operating condition of the drive.
937 Condition Sts 1 Status of conditions that can result in the drive taking action (faulting),
based on configuration of protective functions.
945 At Limit Status Status of dynamic conditions within the drive that are either active or a
limit is being applied.
952 Fault Status A Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as faults.
These conditions are from P937 [Condition Sts 1].
953 Fault Status B Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as faults.
959 Alarm Status A Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as
alarms. These events are from P937 [Condition Sts 1].
960 Alarm Status B Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as
alarms.
961 Type 2 Alarms Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as
alarms.
1089 PID Status Status of the Process PI regulator.
1103(2) Trq Prove Status Displays the status bits for TorqProve.
1210(2) Profile Status Indicates status of speed profile/position indexer control logic.
1(3)(4) Dig In Sts Status of the digital inputs.
7(3)(4) Dig Out Setpoint Controls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be
used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.
13(3)(4) RO0 Level CmpSts Status of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor
output.
50(5) DLX DigOut Sts Provides the individual on/off status of the DLX Logic Command word bits.
51(5) DLX DigOut Sts2 Provides the individual on/off status of the 16 DLX DOPs.
(3) Option modules can be used in Ports 4, 5, and 6 of PowerFlex 753 drives.
(4) Option modules can be used in Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of PowerFlex 755 drives.
(5) Port 14: DeviceLogix software parameters.
Refer the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001,

for specific parameter bit level details.

Related PowerFlex 753 selection parameter information is noted below.

230 RO0 Sel Selects the source that energizes the relay output.
240 TO0 Sel Selects the source that energizes the relay or transistor output.
Depending on the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module or Modules installed in

the drive, related selection parameter information is noted below.
20 RO1 Sel or TO0 Sel Selects the source that energizes the relay or transistor output.
30 TO1 Sel Selects the source that energizes the transistor output.
Example
Below is an example of a PowerFlex 753 drive’s utilizing an embedded digital
output Sel parameter being configured such that the output energizes when a
fault is present on the drive.

Example
For parameters that are not configurable through the parameter properties’
“Value” tab pull-down graphic user interface (GUI), you can utilize the “Numeric
Edit” tab to alternatively configure the digital output for a desired function.
Below is an example of a PowerFlex 755 drive utilizing a PowerFlex 750-Series

option module’s digital output “Sel” parameter being configured such that the
output energizes when an alarm is present on one of the drive’s inverter section.
You can see below that you cannot select Port 10, Inverter section in the Value tab
pull-down GUI.

We look through the Port 10, Inverter section parameters and find that P13
[Alarm Status] Bit 0 shows if there is an active alarm on Inverter 1 section.

Within the Numeric Edit tab we can configure the digital output for the desired
function. See below.

Once the parameter is configured within the Numeric Edit tab, you can Click
OK, or you can go back to the Value tab to see what populates in the pull-down
GUI, then Click OK.
Level Conditions
A desired level function needs to be programmed into the “Level Sel” parameter,
depending on the output being used. If the value for the specified function
(frequency, current, and so forth) is greater than equal to or less than the
programmed limit dictated by the “Level” parameter, the output activates or
deactivates depending on how the “Sel” parameter is configured.
Notice that the Level Select parameters do not have units. The drive assumes the
units and the minimum/maximum values from the selected parameter function.
For example, if the “Level Sel” is programmed for P943 [Drive Temp Pct], which
indicates operating temperature of the drive power section (heat sink), its units
are in percentage of the maximum heat sink temperature with minimum/
maximum values of -200/200 percent.

For the PowerFlex 750-Series drives utilizing an Option Module, the table below
shows an overview of the selectable configurations for the drive’s Digital Output
“Level Sel” parameters.
1 Output Frequency Output frequency present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).
2 Commanded Value of the active Speed/Frequency Reference.
SpdRef
3 Mtr Vel Fdbk Estimated or actual motor speed, with feedback.
4 Commanded Trq Final torque reference value after limits and filtering are applied. Percent
of motor rated
5 Torque Cur Fdbk Based on the motor, the amount of current that is in phase with the
fundamental voltage component.
6 Flux Cur Fdbk Amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage
component.
7 Output Current The total output current present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).
8 Output Voltage Output voltage present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).
9 Output Power Output power present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W).
10 Output Powr Fctr Output power factor.
11 DC Bus Volts DC bus voltage.
13 Elapsed MWH Accumulated output energy of the drive.
14 Elapsed kWH Accumulated output energy of the drive.
260(1) Anlg In0 Value Value of the Analog input after filter, square root, and loss action.
418 Mtr OL Counts Accumulated percentage of motor overload.
419 Mtr OL Trip Time Displays the inverse of the motor overload time.
558 MOP Reference Value of the MOP (Motor Operated Potentiometer) Reference to be used as
a possible source for P545 and P550.
707 Load Estimate Displays an estimated load torque value for the drive.
940 Drive OL Count Indicates power unit overload (IT) in percentage.
943 Drive Temp Pct Indicates operating temperature of the drive power section (heat sink) in
percentage of the maximum heat sink temperature.
1090 PID Ref Meter Present value of the PI reference signal.
1091 PID Fdbk Meter Present value of the PI feedback signal.
1092 PID Error Meter Present value of the PI error.
1093 PID Output Meter Present value of the PI output.
1567(2) FrctnComp Out Displays the torque reference output of the Friction Compensation
function.
50(3)(4) Anlg In0 Value Value of the Analog input after filter, square root, and loss action.
60(3)(4) Anlg In1 Value Value of the Analog input after filter, square root, and loss action.
90 … 97(5) DLX Real Out SP1 - Eight 32-bit Real scratchpad registers for DLX program output use.
SP8
(3) Option modules can be used in Ports 4, 5, and 6 of PowerFlex 753 drives.
(4) Option modules can be used in Ports 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of PowerFlex 755 drives.
(5) Port 14: DeviceLogix software parameters

Related PowerFlex 753 drives Level Select parameter information noted below.
231 RO0 Level Sel Selects the source of the level that is compared.
232 RO0 Level Sets the level compare value.
233 RO0 Level CmpSts Status of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor
output.
240 TO0 Sel Selects the source that energizes the relay or transistor output.
241 TO0 Level Sel Selects the source of the level that is compared.
242 TO0 Level Sets the level compare value.
243 TO0 Level CmpSts Status of the level compare, and a possible source for the transistor output.
Depending on the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module(s) installed in the drive,

related Level Select parameter information noted below.
11 RO0 Level Sel Selects the source of the level that is compared.
12 RO0 Level Sets the level compare value.
output.
20 RO1 Sel or TO0 Sel Selects the source that energizes the relay or transistor output.
21 RO1 Level Sel or Selects the source of the level that is compared.
TO0 Level Sel
22 RO1 Level or TO0 Sets the level compare value.
Level
or TO0 Level output.
CmpSts
30 TO1 Sel Selects the source that energizes the transistor output.
31 TO1 Level Sel Selects the source of the level that is compared.
32 TO1 Level Sets the level compare value.

Example
Below is an example of a PowerFlex 753 drive utilizing an embedded digital
output Select, Level Select and Level parameters being configured such that the
output energizes when the drive’s operating temperature of the drive power
section (heat sink) in percentage of the maximum heat sink temperature is greater
than 50 percent.
Controlled By Digital Input
A digital output can be programmed to be controlled by a digital input. For

example, when the input is closed, the output is energized, and when the input is
open, the output is de-energized. Note that the output is controlled by the state
of the input, even if the input has been assigned a normal drive function (Start,
Jog, and so forth).

Example
In this example, the drive is utilizing a 24V DC, Two Relay Option Module in
Port 7. One of the drive’s digital input functions, P164 [DI Run Forward] is
programmed for Port 7: Digital In Sts.Input 1, with Option Module P10 [RO0
Sel] is programmed for Port 7: Dig In Sts.Input 1 and P20 [RO1 Sel] is
programmed for Port 7: Dig In Sts.Input 3.
As you can see with the picture above, when the Digital Inputs 1 (pink highlight)
and 3 (yellow highlight) are true (on) their respective Digital Outputs are true
(on) as well.

Controlled by Network
This configuration is used when it is desired to control the digital outputs over
network communication instead of a drive related function. In the case for the
PowerFlex 753 embedded digital outputs, P227 [Dig Out Setpoint] is utilized
and in the case for the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module, P7 [Dig Out
Setpoint] is utilized. To complete the configuration for control over a network, a
datalink must be configured for the respective Digital Output Setpoint
parameter.
Related PowerFlex 753 Setpoint parameter information noted below.
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
227 753 Dig Out Setpoint RO 16-bit

Digital Output Setpoint Integer
Controls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.
FEEDBACK & I/O
Digital Outputs
Relay Out 0
Options Trans Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False

1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Depending on the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module(s) installed in the drive,

related Setpoint parameter information noted below.
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
7 Dig Out Setpoint RW 16-bit

Digital Output Setpoint Integer
Controls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.
Trans Out 1(2)
Trans Out 0(1)
Options
Relay Out 0
Digital Outputs
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I/O
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Output De-energized

1 = Output Energized
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T

= “Relay Out 1” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R
(2) Bit 2 is only used by I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T

Example
For this example, our setup includes a PowerFlex 755 utilizing a 20-750-2262C-
2R 24VDC I/O Option Module and a ControlLogix™ L63 processor. The drive’s
Option Module, P10 [RO0 Sel] is configured for Port 7: Dig Out Setpoint.Relay
Out 0. We are utilizing the Logix Designer application, which includes the Drives
Add-On Profiles (AOPs). This gives us the ability to communicate and control
the PowerFlex 755 drive over its embedded ethernet port via a datalink P7 [Dig
Out Setpoint], Relay Out 0.
Below is a picture of the PowerFlex 755 drive Datalink configuration.
Below is a picture of the PowerFlex 755 drive Datalink configuration from

DriveExecutive™.<span id=”fck_dom_range_temp_1332343477042_759” />

Utilizing the Drive Add-On Profiles and a datalink, we can use the created
descriptive controller tag (highlighted below) to communicate over a network to
control the relay output.
The picture below shows the result of controlling the digital output over the
network (yellow highlight).
Controlled by DeviceLogix software

DeviceLogix software control technology provides you with the flexibility to
customize a drive to more closely match your application needs. DeviceLogix
software controls outputs and manages status information locally within the
drive allowing you to operate the drive independently or complimentary to
supervisory control helping to improve system performance and productivity.
You can use the PowerFlex 750-Series DeviceLogix software to read inputs/write
outputs and exclusively control the drive.

Example
In the example below, we are using two real world inputs, such as limit switches
being wired into a PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module, and using a
DeviceLogix software program to control a digital output.
The picture below shows the DeviceLogix software Digital Input configuration.
P33 [DLX DIP 1] is configured for Port 7: Dig In Sts.Input 1 and P35 [DLX
DIP 3] is configured for Port 7: Dig In Sts.Input 3. This setup lets us bring in two
real world inputs into DeviceLogix software.
We then utilize a DeviceLogix software program so that when both Digital Input
1 and Digital Input 3 are true (on), the resultant is the DeviceLogix software
Digital Output 1 (DOP 1) turns on.
The picture below shows that the Option Module, P10 [RO0 Sel] is configured
for DeviceLogix software Port 14: DLX DigOut Sts2.DLX DOPSts1. This links
together the DeviceLogix software Digital Output 1 (DOP 1) to the drive’s
physical output, such that when the DOP 1 is high (on), the drive’s Option
Module relay output energizes.

The picture below shows the status of the DeviceLogix software inputs and
outputs via P49 [DLX DigIn Sts] and P51 [DLX DigOut Sts2].
The picture below shows the status of the DeviceLogix software inputs and
outputs via P1 [Dig In Sts] and P5 [Dig Out Sts].
Invert
There is a logical invert function associated with the PowerFlex 750-Series drive’s
digital outputs. For the PowerFlex 753, it is configured by P226 [Dig Out Invert],
and for the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module, it is configured by P6 [Dig
Out Invert]. This invert function changes the output status bit from a zero, false
state, to a one, true state, and vice versa.
This logical invert function requires power to be applied to the drive’s control
module for the drive’s logic to be active. This can be obtained from powering up
the drive’s control module by either applying power to the drive’s input section or
from an external 24VDC being wired into the Auxiliary Power Supply Option
Module.

PowerFlex 753 Invert parameter information noted below.
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
226 753 Dig Out Invert RO 16-bit

Digital Output Invert Integer
Inverts the selected digital output.
FEEDBACK & I/O
Digital Outputs
Relay Out 0
Trans Out 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Depending on the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module(s) installed, Invert

parameter information noted below.
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
6 Dig Out Invert RW 16-bit

Digital Output Invert Integer
Inverts the selected digital output.
Trans Out 1(2)
Trans Out 0(1)
Options
Relay Out 0
Digital Outputs
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I/O
0 = Output Not Inverted

Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Output Inverted
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.

= “Relay Out 1” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R.
(2) Bit 2 is used only by I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T.
Example
In this example, the drive is utilizing a 24VDC, two relay Option Module in Port
7 with P10 [RO0 Sel] is programmed for Port 7: Dig In Sts.Input 1. Notice below
when the Invert bit for Relay Out 0, when the input status is true (1), the digital
output status bit is false (0).

On/Off Time
Each digital output has two user-controlled timers associated with it. The On
timer defines the delay time between a False-to-True transition (condition
appears) on the output condition and the corresponding change in state of the
digital output. The Off timer defines the delay time between a True-to-False
transition (condition disappears) on the output condition and the corresponding
change in the state of the digital output. Either timer can be disabled by setting
the corresponding delay time to zero.
PowerFlex 753 On/Off parameters noted below.

234 RO0 On Time Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay.
235 RO0 Off Time Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay.
244 TO0 On Time Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.
245 TO0 Off Time Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay or
transistor.
Depending on the PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module(s) installed, On/Off

parameters noted below.
14 RO0 On Time Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay.
15 RO0 Off Time Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay.
24 RO1 On Time or Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
TO0 On Time the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.
25 RO1 Off Time or Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
TO0 Off Time the disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay or
transistor.
34 TO1 On Time Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the occurrence of a condition and activation of the transistor.
35 TO1 Off Time Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between
the disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the transistor.
Whether a particular type of transition (False-to-True or True-to-False) on an

output condition results in an energized or de-energized output depends on the
output condition. If a transition on an output condition occurs and starts a timer,
and the output condition goes back to its original state before the timer runs out,
then the timer is aborted and the corresponding digital output does not change
state.

Example
For example, in the diagram below, a digital output is configured for P935 [Drive
Status 1], Bit 27 “Cur Limit,” the On Time is programmed for two seconds and
the Off Time is programmed for 0 seconds.
Relay Activates
On Delay = 2 Seconds
Current Limit Occurs
0 5 10
Relay Does Not Activate
On Delay = 2 Seconds
Cyclic Current Limit

(every other second)
0 5 10
Status
The [Dig Out Sts] parameter displays the status of the digital outputs and can be
used for troubleshooting the digital outputs. When the bit in associated with the
digital output is on, this means that the logic in the drive is telling that digital
output to turn on. When the bit associated with the digital input is off, this
means that the logic in the drive is telling that digital output to turn off.
PowerFlex 753 related Status parameter information noted below.

No. Display Name Values Read-Write
Full Name Data Type
Group
Description
File
225 753 Dig Out Sts RO 16-bit

Digital Output Status Integer
Status of the digital outputs.
FEEDBACK & I/O
Digital Outputs
Relay Out 0
Trans Out 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
5 Dig Out Sts RO 16-bit

Digital Output Status Integer
Status of the digital outputs.
Trans Out 1(2)

Trans Out 0(1)
Options
Relay Out 0
Digital Outputs
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I/O
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Output De-energized

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 = Output Energized
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.

= “Relay Out 1” for I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R.
(2) Bit 2 is used only by I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T.
Block Diagrams
Figure 11 - PowerFlex 753 Drive
RO0 Off Time

235 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert 225 0 NC
226 0
Relay Out0 0 Timer
Source Common
Parameter 1
Selection Inv
NO
230 234
RO0 Sel RO0 On Time
TO0 Off Time

245 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert 225 1
226 1 24V Common
Transistor Out0 0 Timer
Source
Parameter 1 NO
Selection Inv
240 224
TO0 Sel TO0 On Time
RO0 Level Sel TO0 Level Sel

231 RO0 Level CmpSts 241 TO0 Level CmpSts
RO0 Level 233 1 0 TO0 Level 243 1 0
Source Source
Parameter A A≥B Parameter A A≥B
Selection Selection
A<B A<B
RO0 Level 232 B TO0 Level 242 B

Figure 12 - PowerFlex 750-Series Option Module

Outputs
RO0 Off Time

15 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert 5 0 NC
6 0
Relay Out0 0 Timer
Source Common
Parameter 1
Selection Inv
NO
10 14
RO0 Sel RO0 On Time
RO1/TO0 Off Time

25 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert 5 1
6 1
Relay Out1 NC
Transistor Out0 0
Timer
Source
Parameter 1 Common
Selection Inv
20 24
NO
RO1/TO0 Sel RO1/TO0 On Time
*-1R2T (1-Relay / 2-Transistor) I/O Modules Only

TO1 Off Time
35 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert 5 2
6 2
Transistor Out1 0 Timer
Source NO
Parameter
Inv 1
Selection
30 34
TO1 Sel TO1 On Time
Output Compare
RO0 Level Sel RO1/TO0 Level Sel
11 RO0 Level CmpSts 21 RO1/TO0 Level CmpSts
RO0 Level 13 1 0 RO1/TO0 Level 23 1 0
Source Source
A A≥B Parameter
A A≥B
Parameter
Selection Selection
A<B A<B
RO0 Level B RO1/TO0 Level 22 B
12

TO1 Level Sel
31 TO1 Level CmpSts
TO1 Level 33 1 0
Source
Parameter
A A≥B
Selection
A<B
TO1 Level 32 B

PTC Motor Thermistor Input A PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) sensing device, also known as a motor
thermistor, embedded in the motor windings can be monitored by the drive for
motor thermal protection. The motor windings are typically equipped with three
PTC sensors (one per phase) wired in series as shown in schematic below. The
miniaturized sensors have a low resistance below the rated response temperature,
and increase their resistance (exponentially) in the rated response temperatures
range. The rated response temperature is defined by the PTC sensor. Motors with
different thermal insulation classes (Class F or H) are equipped with different
PTC sensors, each with its own response temperature such as 120, 130, and 140
Degrees C. Unlike the PT100 or KTY thermistors, which have a linear relation
between temperature and resistance, the PTC thermistor is used for a
temperature level indication rather than a direct measurement in degrees C.
Figure 13 - PTC characteristic temperature/resistance curve according to IEC-34-11-2
4,000 R Resistance in sensor circuit in ohms
ϑ Temperature
1,330
TNF Rated response temperature tolerance

550 limit in degrees C
250
Defined cutoff values
100
R[Ω]
20
10
-20 ˚C TNF – 20K TNF + 15K
0 ˚C TNF – 5K TNF + 5K
TNF
Hardware and Connection

The PTC thermistor leads are connected to the PTC+ and PTC- terminals of
either the PowerFlex 753 main control board TB1 or to TB1 of one of the
optional I/O cards, catalog numbers 20-750-2262C-2R, 20-750-2263C-1R2T,
20-750-2262D-2R.
PTC thermistors of ATEX certified motors connect to the ATEX option

module, 20-750-ATEX, which is mounted onto one of the 11-Series I/O cards,
catalog numbers 20-750-1132C-2R, 20-750-1133C-1R2T, 20-750-1132D-2R.

Figure 14 - PTC Connection
Configuration with PTC connected to PowerFlex 753 Main Control

Board
Port 0: P250 [PTC Cfg] = 0 “Ignore,” 1 “Alarm,” 2 “Flt Minor,” 3 “FltCoastStop,”

4 “Flt RampStop,” or 5 “Flt CL Stop”
Status is shown in Port 0: P251 [PTC Sts]
Configuration with Optional I/O Board
Port X (I/O Module): P40 [PTC Cfg] = 0 “Ignore,” 1 “Alarm,” 2 “Flt Minor,” 3
“Flt CoastStop,” 4 “Flt RampStop,” or 5 “Flt CL Stop”
Status is shown in Port X (I/O Module): P41 [PTC Sts] and Port X (I/O
Module): P42 [PTC Raw Value]
Configuration with 11-Series I/O module fitted with ATEX Option
Status is shown in Port X (I/O Module): P41 [ATEX Sts] The fault action is not
configurable when the ATEX module is used.

Fault or Alarm Operation
The reaction to an increased PTC resistance depends on the respective PTC

configuration, such as alarm or fault. When the ATEX module is used, the result
is always fault. When the PTC resistance exceeds 3.2 kOhm a fault or alarm is
triggered. The function is reset when the resistance drops below 2.2 kOhm. A
short circuit is detected when the resistance value drops below 100 Ohm. If the
drive was configured to fault then the fault must be cleared once the PTC
function is reset (value is below threshold).

Chapter 3
Diagnostics and Protection
Topic Page
Alarms 155
Current Limit 156
DC Bus Voltage/Memory 158
Drive Overload 158
Faults 162
Input Phase Loss Detection 166
Motor Overload 168
Overspeed Limit 172
Password 173
Real Time Clock 174
Reflected Wave 179
Security 185
Shear Pin 188
Slip Compensation 192
Slip Regulator 194
Alarms Alarms are indications of situations that are occurring within the drive or
application that are annunciated to the user. These situations can affect the drive
operation or application performance. Conditions such as power loss or analog
input signal loss can be detected and displayed for drive or operator action.
There are two types of alarms.

• Type 1 Alarms are conditions that do not cause the drive to trip or shut
down, but, if the condition persists, it can lead to a drive fault.
• Type 2 Alarms are conditions that are caused by improper programming
and prevent the drive from starting until programming is corrected. An
example of a Type 2 alarm is when a start function is assigned to a digital
input without a stop function also assigned to a digital input.
The Troubleshooting section of the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual,

publication 750-PM001, contains a list of drive-specific faults and alarms, their
type of fault or alarm, and what action can be configured if applicable.

Chapter 3 Diagnostics and Protection
In a Control Logix program do not set P410 [Motor OL Actn] to 1 “Alarm.”

There is an anomaly in drives with firmware version 8.001 or earlier that prevents
an overload from being asserted in P959 [Alarm Status A] and in P937
[Condition Sts 1] Bit 2 “Motor OL.” Neither of these parameters are used under
this circumstance to initiate any programmed alarm routine.
Leaving P410 [Motor OL Actn] at one of the fault settings or Flash Updating the
drive to a firmware version greater than 8.001 resolves this anomaly. Instructions
on Flash Updating drives are provided in drive firmware Release Notes
publications.
Current Limit There are five ways that the drive can protect itself from over current or overload
situations.
Method Description
Hardware Over Current This is a feature that instantly faults the drive if the output current exceeds this value.
The value is fixed by hardware and is typically 250% of drive rated amps. The fault code
for this feature is F12 “HW OverCurrent.” This feature cannot be defeated or mitigated.
Software Over Current This protection mode occurs when peak currents do not reach the hardware over
current value and are sustained long enough and high enough to damage certain drive
components. If this situation occurs, the drives protection scheme causes an F36 “SW
OverCurrent” fault. The point at which this fault occurs is fixed and stored in drive
memory.
Software Current Limit This is a feature that attempts to reduce current by folding back output voltage and
frequency if the output current exceeds a programmable value. P422/423 [Current
Limit 1/2], selected by P421 [Current Lmt Sel], are programmable up to 150% of drive
rating. The reaction to exceeding this value is programmable with Shear Pin fault.
Enabling this parameter creates an F61 or F62 “Shear Pin n” fault. Disabling this
parameter causes the drive to use fold back to attempt load reduction.
Heat Sink Temperature The drive constantly monitors the heat sink temperature. If the temperature exceeds
Protection the drive maximum, a F8 “Heatsink OvrTemp” fault occurs. The value is fixed by
hardware at a nominal value of 100 degrees C. This fault is generally not used for over
current protection due to the thermal time constant of the heat sink. It is an overload
protection.
Drive Overload Protection Refer to Drive Overload on page 158.

Diagnostics and Protection Chapter 3
Figure 15 - Current Limit Frequency Fold-back Examples
P7 [Output Current] P424 [Active Cur Lmt] P1 [Output Frequency] P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk]
Load is removed.
Running at 60 Hz Frequency is folded back.
Current limit set to 8 amps.

Load hits current limit.
Frequency
Amps
Frequency is folded back more

aggressively as the load continues to
increase.
Gradual increase in load.
Start
Seconds

DC Bus Voltage/Memory P11 [DC Bus Volts] is a measurement of the instantaneous value. P12 [DC Bus
Memory] is a heavily filtered value or average bus voltage. Just after the pre-
charge relay is closed during initial powerup, bus memory is set equal to bus
voltage. Thereafter it is updated to the six-minute average of the instantaneous
DC bus voltage.
Bus memory is used as a comparison value to sense a power loss condition. If the
drive enters a power loss state, the bus memory is also used for recovery (for
example pre-charge control or inertia ride through) upon return of the power
source. Update of the bus memory is blocked during deceleration to prevent a
false high value caused by a regenerative condition.
Drive Overload The purpose of the drive thermal overload feature is to protect the drive’s power
module when operation exceeds the design limitations. This feature does not
protect the motor, this is handled by the motor overload protection feature (see
Motor Overload on page 168).
The drive thermal overload function utilizes two methods to protect the drive.
Inverse time protection based on the average output current and a thermal
manager that models the temperature of the IGBTs based on measured power
module temperature and operating conditions. Each method can reduce the
PWM switching frequency or reduce current limit. When rated conditions are
exceeded, even after applying one of the measures mentioned above, and the load
on the drive is not reduced, a F64 “Drive Overload” fault is generated. The fault
detection mechanism cannot be disabled. Only the ability to fold back PWM
frequency and current limit can be disabled.
The drive monitors the temperature of the power module based on a measured
temperature and a thermal model of the power module. As the temperature rises
and P940 [Drive OL Count] increases, the drive can lower the PWM frequency
to decrease the switching losses in the power module. If the temperature
continues to rise, the drive can reduce current limit to try to decrease the load.
This is the factory default response, configurable by P420 [Drive OL Mode], to
increasing drive temperature. If the drive temperature becomes critical, P940
[Drive OL Count] = 100%, the drive faults.
If the drive is operated in a low ambient temperature condition the drive can
exceed rated levels of current before the monitored temperature becomes critical.
To guard against this situation the drive thermal overload also includes an inverse
time algorithm. When this scheme detects operation beyond rated limits, current
limit can be reduced or a fault can be generated.

Inverse Time Protection
The following curves show an example of the boundary operations of a

20G1AxC770 drive. The curve is defined by the drive’s continuous rating and the
respective overload capacities. These are voltage class and duty rating dependant
and are configurable by P305 [Voltage Class] and P306 [Duty Rating]. This
particular example has six different overload ratings.
• Low Voltage/Normal Duty or High Voltage/Normal Duty
• Low Voltage/Heavy Duty or High Voltage/Heavy Duty
• Low Voltage/Light Duty or High Voltage/Light Duty
Light Duty is only available to frame 8 and larger drives.
If the load on the drive exceeds the level of current as shown on one of the curves,
the inverse time protection increments the overload counter. Current limit can
fold back to 100% of the drive rating when the drive over load count reaches
97.35% until the 10/90 or 5/95 duty cycle has been achieved. For example, 60
seconds at 110% is followed by 9 minutes at 100%, and 3 seconds at 150% is
followed by 57 seconds at 100%. With the threshold for where to take action
slightly above the rated level the drive only folds back when drive ratings are
exceeded. If fold back of current limit is not enabled in P940 [Drive OL Mode],
an F64 “Drive Overload” fault occurs when operation exceeds the rated levels.
Drive Overload Curve
Normal Duty / Low Voltage

Normal Duty / High Voltage
Heavy Duty / Low Voltage
Heavy Duty / High Voltage
Light Duty / Low Voltage
Light Duty / High Voltage
Current (Amps)
Time to Trip (Seconds)

Normal Duty and Heavy Duty Operation
Applications require different amounts of overload current. Sizing a drive for

Normal Duty provides 110% for 60 seconds and 150% for 3 seconds. For a heavy
duty application, one larger drive rating than the motor is used and therefore
provides a larger amount of overload current in comparison to the motor rating.
Heavy duty sizing provides at least 150% for 60 seconds and 180% for 3 seconds.
These percentages are with respect to the connected motor rating.
Thermal Manager
The thermal manager assures that the thermal ratings of the power module are
not exceeded. The operation of the thermal manager can be thought of as a
function block with the inputs and outputs as shown below.
Inverter Overload (IT)

940 Drive OL Count
Power Device Characteristics
941 IGBT Temp Pct

NTC Heatsink and
Pwr EE Data Junction Degree 942 IGBT Temp C
Calculator
Duty Cycle Drive Temp Pct
943
Drive OL Mode 420 944 Drive Temp C
PWM Frequency 38 424 Active Cur Lmt
DC Bus Volts 11 d14 Active PWM Freq

Output Current 7 Drive Thermal Manager
Alarm Status B
Current Limit 1 422 960 0 IGBT OT

1 Heatsink OT
Current Limit 2 423
4 Drive OL
Other Reference Sources Parameter
Selection 5 CurLmt Reduc
6 PWMFrq Reduc
Fault Status B
Current Limit Sel
421
953 2 Drive OL
3 Heatsink OT
4 TransistorOT
5 SinkUnderTmp
6 Excess Load
The following is a generalization of the calculations done by the thermal

manager. The IGBT junction temperature is calculated based on the measured

drive temperature and a temperature rise that is a function of operating

conditions. When the calculated junction temperature reaches a maximum limit,
the drive faults. This fault cannot be disabled. This maximum junction
temperature is stored on the power board EEPROM along with other
information to define the operation of the drive overload function. These values
are not user adjustable. In addition to the maximum junction temperature, there
are temperature thresholds that select the points at which the PWM frequency
begins to fold back, and at which current limit begins to fold back. P960 [Alarm
Status B] alarm bits provide status as to when the fold back points are being
reached regardless of whether or not the drive is configured to fold back. Bit 6
“PWMFrq Reduc” is the alarm bit for PWM fault and is 10 °C (50 °F) below the
fault level. Bit 5 “CurLmt Reduc” is the alarm bit for current limit fold back and
is 5 °C (41 °F) below the fault level. The over temperature fault level is reduced
when running at output frequencies lower than 5 Hz.
Configuration
P420 [Drive OL Mode] lets the user select the action to perform with increased
current or drive temperature. When this parameter is set to option 0 “Disabled,”
the drive will not modify the PWM frequency or current limit. When set to 2
“Reduce PWM” the drive only modifies the PWM frequency. This is typically
used on hoisting applications. Option 1 “Reduce CLmt” only modifies the
current limit. When setting this parameter to 3 “Both-PWM 1st” the drive
modifies the PWM frequency first and then the current limit, if necessary, to
keep the drive from faulting with a F64 “Drive Overload” or F8 “Heatsink
OvrTemp” fault.
Temperature Display
The drive temperature is measured (NTC on the heat sink) and displayed as
percentage of drive thermal capacity in P943 [Drive Temp Pct] and IGBT
thermal capacity in P941 [IGBT Temp Pct]. These two parameters are
normalized to the thermal capacity of the drive, which is frame dependent, and
displays thermal usage in percent of maximum (100% = drive Trip). The heat
sink temperature, P944 [Drive Temp C], and IGBT temperature, P942 [IGBT
Temp Pct], in degrees C are also provided as test points. These cannot directly be
related to a trip point as the maximums are defined as a percent.

Low Speed Operation
When operation is below 5 Hz, the IGBT duty cycle is such that heat builds up
more rapidly in the power device. The thermal manager increases the calculated
IGBT temperature at low output frequencies and causes corrective action to take
place sooner. Consult technical support when prolonged operation at low output
frequencies is required so proper drive derating can be applied. Also consider that
when a drive is in current limit the output frequency is reduced to try to reduce
the load. This works fine for a variable torque load, but for a constant torque load
reducing the output frequency does not lower the current (load). Lowering
current limit on a constant torque load pushes the drive down to a region where
the thermal issue becomes worse. In this situation the thermal manager increases
the calculated losses in the power module to track the worst case. So if the
thermal manager normally provides 150% for 3 seconds at high speeds, it can
only provide 150% for one second before generating a fault at low speeds. Some
applications, such as hoisting and lifting, can benefit from the disabling of
current limit fold back.
Faults Faults are events or conditions occurring within and/or outside of the drive.
These events or conditions by default are considered to be of such significant
magnitude that drive operation is discontinued. Faults are annunciated by the
STS (Status) indicator on the drive, a HIM, communications network and/or
contact outputs.
Drive Response to Faults
When a fault occurs, the fault condition is latched, requiring the user or
application to perform a fault reset to clear the latched condition. The condition
that caused the fault determines the user response. If the condition that caused
the fault still exists after a fault reset, the drive faults again and the fault condition
is latched.
• In response to a fault, the drive takes a predetermined action based on fault

type. Drive response to some fault types are user configurable. With non-
configurable faults the drive output is turned off and a “coast to stop”
sequence occurs. The Troubleshooting section of PowerFlex 750-Series
Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001, provides details on both
types of faults.
• The fault code is entered into the first buffer of the fault queue (see Fault
Queue below for rules).
• Additional data on the status of the drive at the time that the fault
occurred is recorded. This information is always related to the most recent
fault queue entry captured by P951[Last Fault Code]. When another fault
occurs, this data is overwritten.

The following data/conditions are captured and latched into non-volatile drive
memory.
• P952 [Fault Status A]
P953 [Fault Status B]
Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as faults.
• P954 [Status1 at Fault]
P955 [Status2 at Fault]
Captures operating conditions of the drive at the time of the fault.
• P957 [Fault Amps]
Motor amps at the time of the fault.
• P958 [Fault Bus Volts]
DC Bus volts at time of the fault.
• P956 [Fault Frequency]
Output Hertz at the time of fault.
• P962 [AlarmA at Fault]
P963 [AlarmB at Fault]
Captures and displays P959/960 [Alarm Status A/B] at the last fault.
Fault Queue
Faults are also logged into a fault queue such that a history of the most recent
fault events is retained. Each recorded event includes a fault code (with associated
text) and a fault “time of occurrence.” PowerFlex 750-Series drives have a 32 event
queue.
The fault queue records the occurrence of each fault event that occurs while no
other fault is latched. Each fault queue entry includes a fault code and a time
stamp value. New fault events are not logged to the fault queue if a previous fault
has already occurred, but has not yet been reset. Only faults that actually trip the
drive are logged. No fault that occurs while the drive is already faulted is logged.
The fault queue is a first-in, first-out (FIFO) queue. Fault queue entry 1 is always
the most-recent entry (newest). Entry 32 is always the oldest. As a new fault is
logged, each existing entry is shifted by one. The previous entry 1 moves to entry
2, previous entry 2 moves to entry 3, and so on. If the queue is full when a fault
occurs, the oldest entry is discarded.
The fault queue is saved in nonvolatile storage at power loss and its content
retained when power is cycled.

Fault Code and Time Stamp
The fault code with descriptive text for each entry can be viewed with a HIM.
Once the fault code is displayed, pressing the enter key again on the HIM
displays the time stamp associated with that fault code. The time stamp is the
elapsed time since the fault occurred.
When using one of the available software tools (DriveExecutive, DriveExplorer,

Connected Component Workbench, or Logix Designer), the fault code,
descriptive text, and time stamp are displayed simultaneously.
Resetting or Clearing a Fault
A latched fault condition can be cleared by the following methods.

• An off to on transition on a digital input configured as DI Clear Fault.
• Pressing the “CLR” soft key or Stop button on the HIM once a fault has
been displayed.
• A DPI peripheral (several ways).
• Performing a reset to factory defaults via parameter write.
• Cycling power to the drive such that the control board goes through a
power-up sequence.
Resetting faults clears the faulted status indication. If any fault condition still
exists, the fault is re-latched and another entry made in the fault queue.
Clearing the Fault Queue

Performing a fault reset does not clear the fault queue. This can be done from a
menu selection of the HIM or from a DPI command through the
communications port.

Fault Configuration
The drive can be configured such that some conditions do not trip the drive.
The following is a brief list of drive configurable faults. Some of these faults are
explained in more detail in their own section of this document.
Accessories such as encoder or I/O cards have additional configurable faults.

Refer to the Troubleshooting section of the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming
• P409 [Dec Inhibit Actn]
• P410 [Motor OL Actn]
• P435 [Shear Pin 1 Actn]
• P438 [Shear Pin 2 Actn]
• P444 [OutPhaseLossActn]
• P449 [Power Loss Actn]
• P462 [InPhase LossActn]
• P466 [Ground Warn Actn]
• P493 [HSFan EventActn]
• P500 [InFan EventActn]
• P506 [MtrBrngEventActn]
• P510 [MtrLubeEventActn]
• P515 [MchBrgEventActn]
• P519 [MchLubeEventActn]
• P865 [DPI Pt1 Flt Actn]
• P1173 [TorqAlarm TOActn]

Input Phase Loss Detection Occasionally, three-phase power sources can fail on one phase while continuing
to deliver power between the remaining 2 phases (single-phase). Operating above
50% output under this single-phase condition can damage the drive. If such a
condition is likely, we recommend that Input Phase Loss Detection be enabled.
The drive can be programmed to turn on an alarm bit or issue a drive fault (minor
or major). The drive accomplishes this by interpreting voltage ripple on the DC
bus.
Configuring Input Phase Loss Action

P462 [InPhase LossActn]
The following bits configure Input Phase Loss action:

• “Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. This can seriously degrade the drive.
fault.
An input phase loss is indicated in P937 [Condition Sts 1] Bit 4 “InPhaseLoss.”

If a fault action has been selected as a result of an input phase loss, P952 [Fault
Status A] Bit 4 “InPhaseLoss” is set.
If an alarm action is selected as a result for the input phase loss, P959 [Alarm
Status A] Bit 4 “InPhaseLoss” is set.

P463 [InPhase Loss Lvl]
Sets the threshold at which the DC bus voltage ripple triggers an F17 “Input
Phase Loss” fault. Input phase loss is assumed when the DC bus voltage ripple
exceeds the tolerance set by this parameter for a certain time period of time.
Setting a larger value permits a higher bus voltage ripple without causing the drive
to fault but also results in more heating in the bus capacitors shortening their life
or possibly resulting in failure. The default value of 325 is equal to the expected
ripple level for a full rated motor running at half load with single phase input.
This is just a different way of saying that if you know you are going to run single
phase, derate the drive by 50%.
Loading conditions on the motor could also have an effect on this parameter.
Particularly shock loads.
Motor Overload The motor overload protection feature uses an IT (inverse time) algorithm to
model the temperature of the motor and follows the same curve as a physical class
10 overload device.
Motor Overload Curve
Trip Time (Seconds)
Cold
Hot
Full Load Amps (%)
P26 [Motor NP Amps] is used by the overload feature to establish the 100% level
(y axis) shown in the graph above.
Setting P410 [Motor OL Actn] to zero disables the motor thermal overload. For
multiple motor applications (more than one motor connected to one drive),
separate external overloads for each motor are required, and the drive’s motor
overload can be disabled.

Operation of the overload is based on three parameters.

• P26 [Motor NP Amps] is the base value for motor protection.
• P413 [Mtr OL Factor] is used to adjust for the service factor of the motor.
Within the drive, motor nameplate FLA is multiplied by motor overload
factor to select the rated current for the motor thermal overload. This can
be used to raise or lower the level of current that causes the motor thermal
overload to trip without the need to adjust the motor FLA. For example, if
motor nameplate FLA is 10 Amps and motor overload factor is 1.2, then
motor thermal overload uses 12 Amps as 100%.
IMPORTANT Some motors have a service factor that is only for use with sine wave
(non-drive) power. Check with the motor manufacturer to see if the
nameplate service factor is valid or must be reduced when operated by
a drive.
Charging Overload Factor

Continuous Rating
OL % = 1.20
OL % = 1.00
OL % = 0.80
% of Base Speed
• P414 [Mtr OL Hertz] is used to further protect motors with limited speed
ranges. Because many motors do not have sufficient cooling ability at lower
speeds, the overload feature can be programmed to increase protection in
the lower speed areas. This parameter defines the frequency where derating
the motor overload capacity begins. For all settings of overload Hz other
than zero, the overload capacity is reduced to 70% when output frequency
is zero. During DC injection braking, the motor current can exceed 70%
of FLA, but this causes the motor overload to trip sooner than when
operating at base speed. At low frequencies, the limiting factor can be the
drive overload rather than the motor overload.

Charging Overload Hz
Continuous Rating
OL % = 10
OL % = 25
OL % = 50
Duty Cycle for the Motor Overload
When the motor is cold, this function enables 3 minutes at 150%. When the
motor is hot, it enables 1 minute at 150%. A continuous load of 102% is allowed
to avoid nuisance faults. The duty cycle of the motor overload is defined as
follows. If operating continuous at 100% FLA, and the load increases to 150%
FLA for 59 seconds and then returns to 100% FLA, the load must remain at
100% FLA for 20 minutes to reach steady state.
1 Minute 1 Minute
150%
100%
20 Minutes

The ratio of 1:20 is the same for all durations of 150%. When operating
continuous at 100%, if the load increases to 150% for 1 second the load must
then return to 100% for 20 seconds before another step to 150%.
%FLA Cold Trip Time Hot Trip Time
105 6320 5995
110 1794 1500
115 934 667
120 619 375
125 456 240
130 357 167
135 291 122
140 244 94
145 209 94
150 180 60
155 160 50
160 142 42
165 128 36
170 115 31
175 105 27
180 96 23
185 88 21
190 82 19
195 76 17
200 70 15
IMPORTANT If the application requires high overload current for long durations (for
example 150% for 60 seconds), heavy duty sizing (between drive and motor)
is required.
Activating Motor Overload

To turn on Motor Overload protection, configure P410 [Motor OL Actn]. This
activates the function. Default setting is 3 “FltCoastStop.” The following bits
configure P410 [Motor OL Actn].
fault.

Table 10 - Other Parameters

411 Mtr OL at Pwr Up Motor Overload at Power Up parameter configures the motor overload
feature regarding the state of the overload counter at power up.
• “Assume Cold” (0) – P418 [Mtr OL Counts] will be reset to zero the next
time the drive is powered up.
• “UseLastValue” (1) – The value of P418 [Mtr OL Counts] will be
retained at power down and restored the next time the drive is
powered up.
• RealTimeClk (2) – The value of P418 [Mtr OL Counts] begins to
decrease at drive power down, reflecting the cooling of the motor, and
stops at drive power-up or when zero is reached. This option is only
available when the real time clock is active on the drive.
412 Mtr OL Alarm Lvl You can have the drive issue an alarm when the P418 [Mtr OL Counts]
reaches a certain level. Enter this value in P412 [Mtr OL Alarm Lvl]. This
alarm level is different than, and independent of, the alarm action
selected by P410 [Motor OL Actn].
413 Mtr OL Factor Motor Overload Factor parameter sets the minimum level of current (in
percent or P26 [Motor NP Amps]) that causes the motor overload counter
to increment. Current levels below this value decrement the overload
counter. For example, a service factor of 1.15 implies continuous operation
up to 115% of nameplate motor current.
414 Mtr OL Hertz Motor Overload Hertz parameter selects the output frequency below
which the motor operating current is derated (more sensitive) to account
for the reduced self-cooling capability of typical motors, operating at
slower speeds. For motors with extra low speed cooling capacity (for
example 10:1 or blower cooled), reduce this setting to take full advantage
of the motor being used.
415 Mtr OL Reset Lvl Motor Overload Reset Level parameter sets the level that resets a motor
overload condition, and lets a fault (if selected as the motor overload
action) be manually reset.
416 MtrOL Reset Time Motor Overload Reset Time parameter displays the time it takes to restart
the drive after a motor overload fault has occurred and the value in P418
[Mtr OL Counts] is less than the P415 [Mtr OL Reset Lvl].
418 Mtr OL Counts Motor Overload Counts parameter displays the accumulated percentage of
motor overload. Continuously operating the motor over 100% of the
motor overload setting increases this value to 100% and cause the action
selected in P410 [Motor OL Actn] to be taken.
419 Mtr OL Trip Time Motor Overload Trip Time parameter displays the inverse of the motor
overload time, equal to the number of seconds before P418 [Mtr OL
Counts] reaches 100%, and the motor overload action is taken.
Overspeed Limit An overspeed condition results when the motor speed falls outside of its normal
operating range. The forward motor rotation limit is P520 [Max Fwd Speed] +
P524 [Overspeed Limit] and the reverse motor rotation limit is P521 [Max Rev
Speed] - P524 [Overspeed Limit]. In Flux Vector Control mode or Scalar
Control mode with encoder, the motor speed used is a 2msec averaged value of
P131 [Active Vel Fdbk]. In Scalar Control mode without an encoder, the
overspeed check uses P1 [Output Frequency]. The overspeed condition must
exist for at least 16 milliseconds before it causes a fault to occur.

CIP Motion
When a PowerFlex 755 drive is running as a CIP Motion drive, then attribute
695 “Motor Overspeed User Limit” specifies the overspeed trip point directly.
This attribute has units of percent of motor rated speed. So, if attribute 695 is set
to 120% then the overspeed fault occurs at or above 120% rated speed.
Interior Permanent Magnet

For Interior Permanent Magnet motor control mode, an additional limit is
placed on the Speed Limit + Overspeed threshold. This threshold is not allowed
to exceed the setting in P1641 [IPM Max Spd] and is a +/- check. P1641 [IPM
Max Spd] is set to the speed at which the motor produces the voltage limit of the
drive. If the drive faults while the motor is rotating at this speed, the motor
produces a voltage at the output of the drive. This voltage could damage the drive
if the limit is exceeded. This limit is calculated while performing the rotate
portion of the Autotune tests. For example, if P1641 calculated to be 57.82 Hz,
then the overspeed limit threshold is set by the Speed Limit + Overspeed Limit
parameters and the results are limited to a value of +/- 57.82 Hz.
Password All parameter configuration settings for the drive and its connected peripherals
can be protected from unauthorized access through the keypad by using a
password.
When the host drive is password protected, parameter settings for the drive and
its connected peripherals can be viewed but not changed until after the existing
password value is entered. When attempting to edit a parameter value while
logged out, the HIM prompts you for the password before allowing access.
Password protection also applies to the following.

• Drive start-up procedure
• Factory defaults
• User sets
• Copy Cat function
For detailed instructions on enabling and disabling password protection, refer to

the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 and 20-HIM-C6S HIM (Human Interface Module)
User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.

Real Time Clock The PowerFlex 755 is equipped with a real-time clock with a battery backup.
This enables programming of real time in the drive, and keeping that time even if
the drives power is removed. This enables actual timestamps instead of runtime
timestamps for faults and events. It is also used in the runtime accumulation of
maintenance items such as total run time, number of times fans are running and
so forth. If a battery is installed and the time values are set, time is accumulated.
Approximate battery life is 4.5 years with drive unpowered, or lifetime if drive is
powered.
The real time clock on the drive can be set two different ways. It can either be set
from the HIM, or from DriveExecutive/DriveExplorer.
Setting the Real Time Clock via Drive HIM
1. Access the Status screen.

2. If Port 00 (Host Drive) is not shown above the ESC soft key, use the
or key to scroll to Port 00.
3. Press the key to display its last-viewed folder.
4. Use the or key to scroll to PROPERTIES folder.
5. Use the or key to select Set Date and Time.
6. Press the (Enter) key to display its last-viewed folder.

7. Press the EDIT soft key to access the Set Date and Time mode screen,
which highlights the present time zone line.
8. To select the time zone (set the drive to the current time zone).
• Press the ZONES soft key to display the Select Time Zone screen.
• Use the or key to select your basic time zone region (for
example, Full List).
• Press the (Enter) key to enter your selection.

• Use the or key to select your specific time zone (for
example, Chicago), and press the (Enter) key to enter it.

9. To set the date (set the drive to the current date).
• Press the ▲ soft key to select the year in the top line, and use the
numeric keys to enter the correct year.
To delete an erroneous date (or time) entry, use the ← soft key. Also, a
partial or complete date (or time) value will not update until you press the
► soft key to enter the data. You have to press the ? soft key a second time

to advance to another field or press the ESC soft key to return to the
previous screen.
• Press the ► soft key to select the month in the top line, and use the
numeric keys to enter the correct month.
• Press the ► soft key to select the day in the top line, and use the numeric
keys to enter the correct day.
10. To set the time (set the drive to the current time).
• Press the ► soft key to select the hour in the top line, and use the
numeric keys to enter the correct hour.
• Press the ► soft key to select the minutes in the top line, and use the
numeric keys to enter the correct minute.
• Press the ► soft key to select the seconds in the top line, and use the
numeric keys to enter the correct seconds.
11. Press the ESC soft key to return to the previous screen.
Setting the Real Time Clock via Drive Software
To set the real time clock using a software package like DriveExecutive or
DriveExplorer™ software the procedure is the same.
1. First press the at the top center of the application.
This dialog box appears.
2. Click the Status and Feedback tab.

3. Click Display Alarms/Faults Dialog.
A new dialog box appears.
4. Click the Device System Time tab.

5. If necessary, change the values in the Set Time Zone and Set Device Time
dialog boxes.
Installing Battery
To install the battery, first locate the main control board. The location of the
main control board is in the far right location of the control POD. The main
control board for the PowerFlex 753 and 755 drives are shown below.

Figure 16 - PowerFlex 753 Main Control Board
Figure 17 - PowerFlex 755 Main Control Board
The battery is installed in pointer position 3. The battery receptacle requires a

user-installed CR1220 lithium coin cell battery that provides power to the Real
Time Clock. Installing a battery preserves the Real Time Clock setting in the
event power to the drive is lost or cycled. Approximate battery life is 4.5 years
with drive unpowered, or lifetime if drive is powered. Install the battery with “+”
facing out.

Removing Battery
To remove the battery, simply use a screwdriver to press down on the metal tab
going across the battery. Prying the battery out of its holder can result in
permanent damage to the main control board.
Reflected Wave Reflected waves are a phenomenon associated with long cables and fast changes
in voltage levels. They were first identified on power transmission lines that are
hundreds of miles long. When the power is switched on at one end, the step in
voltage travels the length of the transmission line and is reflected back to the
switch. The voltage at the far end often surges to twice the initial value of the
voltage. Because the voltages involved are quite high, for example 230,000V or
more, a surge of 460,000V can result in a damaging arcing fault.
Adjustable speed drives, using IGBT switches that turn on and off within a few
nanoseconds, experience the same phenomenon at the AC motor terminals. This
can cause motor failures within months or even weeks of commissioning the
motor with a drive.
A PWM AC drive provides variable voltage and variable frequency to a motor

from a DC bus voltage. It creates the sinusoidally varying voltage to the motor by
continually changing the duty cycle of the IGBT switches in a pulse-width-
modulated fashion. Because the motor is largely an inductive load, the current
that flows is an integration of the voltage with a lagging phase angle. Figure 18
shows what the drives line-to-line output voltage looks like. The peaks of the
output voltage are equal to the value of the DC bus in the drive. Only the widths
and polarities change.

Figure 18 - PWM Voltage at the Drive Output Terminals

DC Bus Volts
0 Volts
Ideally, the voltage waveform at the motor looks exactly the same as the output of
the drive. However, the voltage at the motor has individual on/off pulses that
make up the PWM voltage waveform along with a ringing that occurs at every
switching transition. This is shown in Figure 19. The peaks of the ringing
waveform can easily reach two times the peak of the voltage pulses at the drive
(the DC bus voltage). After a short time, the ringing dies away and the motor sees
the normal DC bus voltage level. It is this peak level of the ringing voltage that
causes motor failure.
Figure 19 - PWM Voltage at the Motor Terminals

2X to 4X Voltage Spike
0 Volts
Shorten the time sweep or magnify these pulses and the ringing effect at the
motor terminals can be seen.

When the voltage at the motor terminals exceeds the insulation rating of the
motor, corona begins to appear. This corona deteriorates the insulation system,
eventually leading to a fault to ground. Such a failure is shown below.
The level of the DC bus voltage has a direct effect on the peak level of the ringing
surge voltage. If the drive operates at 230V AC, the DC bus voltage is about
310V DC and two times peak only reaches 620Vpk. This peak will not damage
most motors. However, a 460V AC drive operates at 620V DC bus voltage and
1240Vpk and a 575V AC drive operates at 775V DC and 1550Vpk.
Non-inverter grade motors have insulation systems rated to 1000V and 1200V
depending on their construction.
• 1000V motors are assembled without phase paper.
• 1200V motors are assembled with phase paper and slot insulation.
Non-inverter grade motors will fail if operated from a 460V or 575V drive.
There are three ways to eliminate the effects of reflected waves on motors.
1. Match the motor surge impedance to the cable surge impedance.

2. Reduce the dv/dt.
These methods reduce or eliminate reflected wave and surge voltage at the
motor.
3. Better insulate the motor so the effects of the surge voltage will not
damage the motor.
For inverter applications, NEMA updated the standard MG 1-1998, section 31

regarding motor insulation systems. An inverter duty motor needs to withstand
surge voltages that are 3.1 times the rated motor voltage and rise times greater
than 0.1 μs. This is 1488V for a 460V motor. to provide better protection, some
motor manufacturers have started producing 1600V rated insulation for inverter
grade motors. However, even if a motor can withstand 1600V surges, it can still
fail if the insulation cannot hold up under rated motor temperatures.

The Terminator
Is it possible to match the surge impedance of the motor to the cable? There is a
device called the terminator that does this, shown in the figure below. It is an RC
network at the motor that matches the load surge impedance to the cable.
Figure 20 shows the surge voltages when using the terminator. The overshoot is
very low, with no ringing to speak of. Due to losses, this device is good for cable
lengths up to 600 ft, and for carrier frequencies less than or equal to 4 kHz.
However, its key advantage is that this one device works well for any motor in the
range from 0.5 to 500hp because it does not have to handle the motor current,
being a parallel device.
Line Reactor
What if we go the other way, matching the surge impedance of the cable to the
motor? There are several products available that do this. They all consist of the
addition of a line reactor at the output of the drive. See the figure below. A 3%
line reactor by itself also reduces the dV/dt, but a big disadvantage is that it
reduces the voltage available to the motor by 3%. This is useful for cables up to
about 600 ft. A better device is what we call a “reflected wave reduction” device
where the line reactor is reduced to about 0.2%, and a resistor is placed in parallel
with each of the reactors. This reduces the dV/dt and has a voltage drop of only
0.2% instead of 3%. It can be used with cables up to about 1200 ft.

A method to reduce just the dV/dt is to use shielded cable between the drive and
the motor. The inherent capacitance between the lines and the shield help keep
the surge voltage at 1200V up to 600 ft with PWM drives.
Sine Wave Filter
Instead of matching impedances or reducing the dV/dt of the individual pulses

coming from the drive, create a filter that enables the lower fundamental
frequencies to pass, and block or absorb the higher frequencies caused by the fast
switching IGBTs and the carrier frequency of the PWM waveform? There are
two types that are on the market today. One that consists of an LC filter and
another that consists of output line reactors along with tuned LC sections.

Waveforms
The waveforms A, B, and C in the figure below describe the different mitigations
solutions shown on top of each other.
A - Unprotected motor
B - Line Reactor at the Drive
C - Terminator or RWR
Figure 20 - Waveform Comparison
Line-Line Motor Voltage (VPK)
Time (μs)
Here are waveforms using a sine wave filter at 30 and 60 Hz. As you can see there
are no issues with reflected wave when using a sine wave filter.

Security The Security feature provides drive access protection.
Ports
This feature provides write access protection for individual communication ports
in the drive. The HIM or communication modules with software tools can be
used to change any port to read only.
A password can also be used with the HIM to prevent writing to parameters
through the keypad. See Password on page 173.
The following drive peripherals can be used to control access.

• 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S keypads
• 20-750-n and 20-COMM-n communication options
• 20-COMM-n legacy communication options
Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Technical Data, publication

750-TD001 for suitability and details.
The following software tools can be used to control access.

• Connected Components Workbench™ (CCW) version 2.0 or later
(freeware)
• DriveExplorer version 6.04.99 (freeware)
• DriveExecutive version 5.03 or later
By default, every DPI port in the drive is configured to allow read and write
access.
To change the write access on an individual DPI port, change the bit setting of
the associated port in P888 [Write Mask Cfg]. Changing the bit value from 1
(read/write) to 0 with a HIM provides read only capability. Using software such
as DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, or CCW can also be used to turn the bit off.
Below is an example of using CCW to change port 4 to read only.

Any changes to P888 [Write Mask Cfg] will not take effect until one of the
following three events occur.
• Power is removed and reapplied.
• A drive reset (not reset to defaults) is performed.
• P887 [Write Mask Act] Bit 15 transitions from 1 to 0.
The status of a port’s write access can be verified at P887 [Write Mask Act]. For
example, to verify that write access was disabled, P887 [Write Mask Act] Bit 4
“Port 4” equals 0.
The port that is being used to make security changes (for example a network
adapter connected to Port 5) can only change other ports and not itself to read
only. This is to prevent the complete lockout of a drive with no future way to
regain write access.
DPI (Network)
Network Security can only be activated with external software programs that
have security capabilities, for example, FactoryTalk® software.
When P885 [Port Mask Act] Bit 15 “Security,” P886 [Logic Mask Act] Bit 15
“Security,” and P887 [Write Mask Act] Bit 15 “Security” are set to 1 “Read/
Write,” Network Security has been enabled by an external program like
FactoryTalk and is controlling the logic mask and write mask instead of the
parameter. These bits can only be enabled/disabled via the network program.
A port that is being used to communicate to the drive and set the masks or
network security can only make changes to other ports and not itself. This is to
prevent a complete lockout from a drive.

When the writing capabilities of ports 1, 2, or 3 have been masked, via parameter
888 [Write Mask Cfg] or Network Security, the HIM displays the following
message when trying to edit a parameter.
• A6-HIM: Security is enabled. Access Denied
• A3-HIM with Firmware that has Security Functionality: Security Enable.
Access Denied
• A3-HIM with Firmware that does not have Security Functionality: Device
State has Disabled Function
Software used to interface with the drive also indicates if the writing capabilities
have been disabled by P888 [Write Mask Cfg] or Network Security, via the
communication port being used.
Below are examples of parameters viewed with drive software via DriveExplorer
or CCW when the connected port has been write disabled. The parameter value
is grayed out and a lock is displayed.
DriveExplorer Connected Components Workbench
Attempting to edit a parameter or clicking on the lock results in one the

following screens being displayed when using DriveExecutive or CCW software.
Drive Explorer Connected Components Workbench

Shear Pin As a default, the drive folds back when the output current exceeds the current
limit level. However, the shear pin feature can be used to instantly fault the drive
when output current exceeds a programmed amount. Additionally, the drive can
be programmed to ignore this condition during acceleration and deceleration
which often requires current that otherwise causes a shear pin fault. Also, the
condition can be ignored for a programmable amount of time.
Activating Shear Pin
To turn on either Shear Pin 1 or Shear Pin 2, configure [Shear Pin n Actn]. This
activates the function. Selection between P435 [Shear Pin 1 Actn] and P438
[Shear Pin 2 Actn], cannot be made by a digital input. These parameters can be
set over a communication network. The options for each shear pin action are the
same. Default for each is 0 “Ignore.” The following are the settings for P435 and
P438.
fault.
Ignore During Acceleration
There are situations where a fast acceleration of the motor causes the drive to
output current to the motor near or at the current limit value for shear pin and
fault the drive while in acceleration. To avoid this condition set P434 [Shear Pin
Cfg] Bit 0 “Shear1NoAcc” or Bit 1 “Shear2NoAcc” to 1 to ignore during
acceleration.
Shear Pin Level
A shear pin level must be programmed for the drive to monitor. This level, when
exceeded, starts a timer that must expire before performing the [Shear Pin n
Actn]. This level is entered into P436 [Shear Pin 1 Level] or P439 [Shear Pin 2
Level]. The units are amps. Default is drive rated amps. Maximum is rated amps
multiplied by 1.5.

Shear Pin Time
If an immediate action is to be taken, set shear pin time to 0. If the shear pin level
is to be ignored for a period of time, enter that value into P437 [Shear Pin 1
Time] or P440 [Shear Pin 2 Time].
Generally, some value greater than 0 is entered in shear pin time to eliminate any
faults on very short peak current spikes. Thus eliminating nuisance tripping.
Fault Indication
A unique fault (Shear Pin 1, F61) or (Shear Pin 1, F62) is generated if the
function is activated and the condition occurs.
Application Example
By programming the Shear Pin feature, the drive faults, stopping the excess
torque before mechanical damage occurs.
Shear Pin - Gradual Loading
P7 [Output Current] P436 [Shear Pin1 Level] P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk]
Motor Speed
Drive Faults
Shear Point 1 Level
Frequency
Amps
Increasing Load
Seconds

Shear Pin - Shock Load
P7 [Output Current] P436 [Shear Pin1 Level] P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk]

Motor Speed Drive Faults
Shear Point 1 Level Shock Load
Frequency
Amps
Seconds
Acceleration Fault Anomaly
It is possible for the drive to trip during acceleration on a shear pin fault even
when P434 [Shear Pin Cfg] Bits 0 or 1 in are set. This occurs when the accel time
is set to something very small. The firmware looks at the internal “at speed” bit to
indicate when acceleration is complete. This bit could be set internally faster than
what appears the motor is indicating by sight. For example, if the accel time is set
to something like 0.5 seconds and P434 Bit 0 is set. The drive will most likely trip
on shear pin fault.
There are a couple ways to avoid this.

• Set the accel time longer. This reduces the current requirement.
• Enter a shear pin time longer than the acceleration time.
Using Both Shear Pin 1 and 2

If your application requires a notification of an impending Shear Pin fault. You
can set Shear Pin 1 to give an Alarm at a certain current level, then set Shear Pin 2

to issue the actual fault at a higher current level or a slightly longer Shear Pin
time.
Shear Pin - Alarm then Fault
P7 [Output Current] P436 [Shear Pin1 Level] P439 [Shear Pin2 Level]
P952 [Fault Status A] P959 [Alarm Status A] P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk]
Drive Faults
Motor Speed
Shear Pin 2 Time
Load Changes
Shear Pin 1
Time
Alarm Alarm
Indication Indication
Fault
Indication
Other Points
The Shear Pin feature is not to be taken as a precise current reactionary feature.
There can be as much as +/- 5% error in the current feedback signal used to
determine shear point levels. Therefore it could be possible that the timer trip
point is being set and reset until the entire current reference is above a setpoint.

Slip Compensation When slip compensation mode is selected, the drive automatically adds the
appropriate amount of output frequency to maintain a consistent motor speed
independent of load. During drive commissioning, P621 [Slip RPM at FLA] is
set based on entered motor nameplate information. This parameter can be
adjusted to provide more or less compensation.
See the motor speed compensation figure below for a comparison of operation
with and without slip compensation. This shows that over time, slip
compensation corrects for changes in load (curved lines). In contrast, open loop
operation shows that no correction is made based on load.
Open Loop Slip Compensation Slip Compensation

Mode Active 1.5 p.u. Load Active
Load Load 1.0 p.u. Load
Applied Applied 0.5 p.u. Load
Rotor Speed
0.5 p.u. Load Load

1.0 p.u. Load Removed
1.5 p.u. Load
Slip @
F.L.A.
0
0 Time
Internally, the drive converts the rated slip in RPM to rated slip in frequency. To
more accurately determine the rated slip frequency in hertz, an estimate of flux
current is necessary. This parameter is either a default value based on motor
nameplate data or the autotune value. The drive scales the amount of slip
compensation to the motor rated current. The amount of slip frequency added to
the frequency command is then scaled by the sensed torque current (indirect
measurement of the load) and displayed.
Slip compensation also affects the dynamic speed accuracy (ability to maintain
speed during shock loading) as illustrated in the rotor speed response figure
below. Initially, the motor is operating at some speed and no load. Some time
later, an impact load is applied and the rotor speed decreases as a function of load
and inertia. Finally, the impact load is removed and the rotor speed increases
momentarily until the slip compensation is reduced based on the applied load.

The responsiveness to an impact load can be adjusted with P622 [Slip Comp
BW]. However, too high setting can cause unstable operation and overshoot.
Impact Load
Removed
Increasing Slip
Impact Load Comp Gain
Applied
Speed Rotor Speed

Increasing Slip
Reference
Comp Gain
0
0 Time
Baking Line Application Example
The diagram below shows a typical application for the slip compensation feature.
The PLC controls the frequency reference for all four of the drives. Drive No. 1
and Drive No. 3 control the speed of the belt conveyor. Slip compensation is used
to maintain the RPM independent of load changes caused by the cutter or dough
feed. By maintaining the required RPM, the baking time remains constant and
therefore the end product is consistent.
Dough Stress
Relief Cookie Line
Cutters Oven
Drive Drive Drive Drive

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
PLC

Slip Regulator The slip regulator is used to compensate for temperature changes in an induction
motor when FOC is used. The slip regulator uses a model of the motor to
determine the desired d-axis voltage for a given operating point. A PI regulator is
then used to change the drive’s slip gain controlling the d-axis motor voltage.
This in turn compensates for motor temperature (resistance) changes. The
operation of the slip regulator is limited to regions where there is sufficient
voltage (feedback or estimate) for the regulator to converge.
As default the slip regulator is enabled.
Do not disable this regulator. If you feel you need to disable this function, consult
the factory for verification.

Chapter 4
Motor Control
Topic Page
Carrier (PWM) Frequency 196
Dynamic Braking 197
Flux Braking 216
Flux Regulator 218
Flux Up 218
High Resolution Feedback 220
Inertia Adaption 221
Inertia Compensation 223
Load Observer 225
Motor Control Modes 226
Motor Types 235
Notch Filter 244
Regen Power Limit 247
Speed Reference 251
Speed Regulation 260
Torque Reference 262
Speed Torque Position 266

Chapter 4 Motor Control
Carrier (PWM) Frequency P38 [PWM Frequency] sets the carrier frequency at which the inverter output
IGBTs (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors) switch. In general, use the lowest
possible switching frequency that is acceptable for the particular application. An
increased carrier frequency causes less motor heating and lowers the audible noise
from the motor. However, it causes the IGBTs to heat up faster than by using the
factory default PWM frequency of 4 kHz or 2 kHz depending on drive’s the
frame size. The higher switching frequency smoothes the current waveform. This
reduces vibration in the motor windings and laminations reducing audible noise.
This is desirable in applications where motors are installed close to control rooms
or in domestic environments. See Figure 21 and note the output current at 2 kHz
and 4 kHz. The smoothing of the current waveform continues 12 kHz.
The maximum carrier frequency per frame size and the derating guidelines
according to PWM frequency can be found in the PowerFlex 750-Series AC
Drives Technical Data, publication 750-TD001.
Figure 21 - Current at 2 kHz and 4 kHz PWM Frequency
2 kHz 4 kHz
Some undesirable effects of higher switching frequencies include higher cable

charging currents, higher potential for common mode noise and an increased risk
of motor winding insulation breakdown due to the reflected wave phenomenon.
Refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM Drives, publication
DRIVES-IN001 for further information. A very large majority of all drive
applications will perform adequately at 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Some applications require a fixed minimum PWM frequency (that is, using a sine
wave filter in the output of the drive). In this case, P40 [Mtr Options Cfg] Bit 9
“PWM FreqLock” should be set to prevent the drive from lowering its carrier
frequency due to a drive overload condition.

Motor Control Chapter 4
Dynamic Braking When an induction motor’s rotor is turning slower than the synchronous speed
set by the drive’s output power; the motor is transforming electrical energy
obtained from the drive into mechanical energy available at the drive shaft of the
motor. This process is referred to as motoring.
When the rotor is turning faster than the synchronous speed set by the drive’s
output power, the motor is transforming mechanical energy available at the drive
shaft of the motor into electrical energy that can be transferred back into the
utility grid. This process is referred to as regeneration.
On most AC PWM drives, the AC power available from the fixed frequency
utility grid is first converted into DC power by means of a diode rectifier bridge
or controlled SCR bridge, before being inverted into variable frequency AC
power. These diode or SCR bridges are very cost effective, but can handle power
in only one direction, and that direction is the motoring direction. If the motor is
regenerating, the bridge is unable to conduct the necessary negative DC current,
and the DC bus voltage increases until the drive trips on a Bus Overvoltage fault.
There are bridge configurations, using either SCRs or Transistors that have the
ability to transform DC regenerative electrical energy into fixed frequency utility
electrical energy but are expensive. A more cost effective solution is to provide a
Transistor Chopper on the DC bus of the AC PWM drive that feeds a power
resistor, which transforms the regenerative electrical energy into thermal heat
energy, which is dissipated into the local environment.
This process is generally called Dynamic Braking, with the Chopper Transistor
and related control and components called the Chopper Module, and the power
resistor called the Dynamic Brake Resistor. The entire assembly of Chopper
Module with Dynamic Brake Resistor is sometime referred to as the Dynamic
Brake Module.
Chopper Modules are designed to be applied in parallel if the current rating is

insufficient for the application. One Chopper Module is the designated Master
Chopper Module, while any other Modules are the designated Follower Modules.
Two lights have been provided on the front of the enclosure to indicate Chopper
Module operation – the DC Power light and the Brake On light. The DC Power
light is lit when DC power has been applied to the Chopper Module. The Brake
On light is lit when the Chopper Module is operating or chopping and is a
flickering type of indication.
Update: As of December of 2010, Rockwell Automation no longer has a

Chopper Module product as well as a Dynamic Braking Module product. The
light configuration stated above was specific to the Rockwell Automation
product.

How it Works
There are two different types of control for dynamic braking, hysteretic control
and PWM control. Each used by themselves in a standard stand alone product
has no advantage over the other. The preferred control is the PWM method
when the application is common DC bus. This advantage is described below.
Hysteretic Control
The hysteretic method of dynamic braking uses a voltage sensing circuit to
monitor the DC bus. As the DC bus voltage increases to the Vdc_on level the
brake IGBT is turned on and is left on until the voltage drops to the Vdc_off level,
which is not so desirable in common DC bus applications—see below. Some
PowerFlex drives allow the Vdc_off level, [DB Threshold], to be adjusted if the
application required it. Setting this level lower makes the dynamic braking more
responsive but could lead to excessive DB activation.
Vdc
Vdc
Vdc_on
Vdc_off
on
off t
Switched from 50 Hz to 100 Hz

PWM Control
This type of control to operate the brake IGBT is similar to the way output
voltage to the motor is controlled. As the DC bus voltage increases and hits some
predetermined limit the brake IGBT is turned on/off according to a control
algorithm switched at 1 kHz. This type of control virtually eliminates bus ripple.
The big advantage is when this type of control is in a common bus configuration.
Vdc
Vdc_on+25
Vdc_on+25 –2.5
Vdc_on
t
Brake IGBT
on
off
t
Duty Cycle
Linear PWM Hysteretic Full on
100%
90%
Duty Cycle
750 772.5 775

DC Bus Voltage

Common DC Bus Applications
In a common bus configuration when a dynamic braking resistor is installed on

each drive sharing the DC bus, it’s possible that the brake IGBT in some drives
will not turn on, giving the impression that the drive is not functioning correctly
or seeing one drive’s brake IGBT failing consistently while the other drives are
fine. Looking at the below diagram, it shows the DC bus level for two drives on
common bus. The delta between these voltages are exaggerated for clarity. As the
voltage increases, the Drive #1 IGBT turns on and decreases the voltage level
before Drive #2 sees voltage high enough to be told to turn on. This results in
Drive #1 doing all the dynamic braking. Now this situation could be alright as
long as the minimum ohmic value for resistance is not violated and the regen
event isn’t so great that a single resistor can’t handle the power. Of course, if there
is a large regen event where the voltage continues to rise after Drive #1 has turned
on, Drive #2 fires its IGBT when it reaches the voltage limit.
Vdc
Vdc_on
Vdc_off
DB IGBT
Drive #1
on
off t
DB IGBT
Drive #2
on
off t

Here are two drives with PWM DB control on a common bus. Because one drive
turns on at a certain duty cycle the bus voltage is likely to continue to rise
guaranteeing that the other drive’s IGBT turns on (at a different duty cycle).
Vdc
Drive #2
Vdc_on
Vdc_off
Vdc
Drive #1
DB IGBT
Drive #1
on
off t
DB IGBT
Drive #2
on
off t
How to Select A Chopper Module and Dynamic Brake Resistor
In general, the motor power rating, speed, torque, and details regarding the
Regenerative mode of operation is needed to estimate what Chopper Module
rating and Dynamic Brake Resistor value to use. A rule of thumb to use is that a
Dynamic Brake Module can be specified when regenerative energy is dissipated
on an occasional or periodic basis. When a drive is consistently operating in the
Regenerative mode of operation, consider utilizing equipment that transforms
the electrical energy back to the fixed frequency utility.
The peak regenerative power of the drive must be calculated to determine the
maximum Ohmic value of the Dynamic Brake Resistor and to estimate the
minimum current rating of the Chopper Module. The Rating of the Chopper
Module is chosen from the Brake Chopper Module manual. Once the Chopper
Module current rating is known, a minimum Dynamic Brake Resistance value is
also known. A range of allowable Dynamic Brake Ohmic values is now known.
These values exist from the minimum value set by the Chopper Transistor
current rating to a maximum value set by the peak regenerative power developed
by the drive to decelerate or satisfy other regenerative applications. If a Dynamic
Brake Resistance value less than the minimum imposed by the choice of the
Chopper Module is made and applied, damage can occur to the Chopper
Transistor. If a Dynamic Brake Resistance value greater than the maximum
imposed by the choice of the peak regenerative drive power is made and applied,

the drive can trip off due to transient DC bus overvoltage problems. Once the
choice of the approximate Ohmic value of the Dynamic Brake Resistor is made,
the wattage rating of the Dynamic Brake Resistor can be made.
The wattage rating of the Dynamic Brake Resistor is estimated by applying the
knowledge of the drive motoring and regenerating modes of operation. The
average power dissipation of the Regenerative mode must be estimated and the
wattage of the Dynamic Brake Resistor chosen to be slightly greater than the
average power dissipation of the drive. If the Dynamic Brake Resistor has a large
thermodynamic heat capacity, the resistor element is able to absorb a large
amount of energy without the temperature of the resistor element exceeding the
operational temperature rating. Thermal time constants in the order of 50
seconds and higher satisfy the criteria of large heat capacities for these
applications. If a resistor has a small heat capacity, the temperature of the resistor
element could exceed the maximum temperature limits during the application of
pulse power to the element and could exceed the safe temperature limits of the
resistor.
The peak regenerative power can be calculated in English units (Horsepower), in

The International System of Units (SI) (Watts), or in the per unit system (pu),
which is dimensionless for the most part. In any event, the final number must in
Watts of power to estimate Dynamic Brake Ohmic value. Calculations in this
page are demonstrated in SI units.
Speed, Torque, Power Profile
The following figure is a typical dynamic braking application. The top trace
represents speed and is designated by the omega symbol. In the profile the motor
is accelerated to some speed, it holds that speed for a period of time and is then
decelerated. This deceleration is not necessarily to zero speed. The cycle is then
repeated.
The middle trace represents motor torque. Torque starts out high as the motor is
accelerated then drops down to maintain the commanded speed. Then the
torque turns negative as the motor is decelerated. The cycle is then repeated.
The bottom trace represents motor power. Power increases as the motor speed
increases. Power decreases some to maintain the commanded speed then goes

negative when deceleration starts. (this point called -Pb is the first value that
needs to be calculated). The cycle is then repeated.
ω(t)
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t1 + t4 t
T(t)
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t1 + t4 t
P(t)
0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t1 + t4 t
-Pb
Dynamic Braking Module (no longer a Rockwell Automation product)
Figure 22 shows a simplified schematic of a Chopper Module with Dynamic

Brake Resistor. The Chopper Module is shown connected to the positive and
negative DC bus conductors of an AC PWM Drive. The two series connected
Bus Caps are part of the DC bus filter of the AC Drive. The significant power
components of the Chopper Module are the protective fusing, the Crowbar
SCR, the Chopper Transistor (an IGBT), the Chopper Transistor Voltage
Control (hysteretic voltage comparator), and a freewheel diode for the Dynamic
Brake Resistor.
The protective fuse is sized to work in conjunction with the Crowbar SCR.
Sensing circuitry within the Chopper Transistor Voltage Control determines if
abnormal conditions exist within the Chopper Module. One of these abnormal
conditions is a shorted Chopper Transistor. If this condition is sensed, the
Chopper Transistor Voltage Control fires the Crowbar SCR, shorting the DC

bus, and melting the fuse links. This action isolates the Chopper Module from
the DC bus until the problem can be resolved.
The Chopper Transistor is an Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT). There are
several transistor ratings that are used in the various Chopper Module ratings.
The most important rating is the collector current rating of the Chopper
Transistor that helps to determine the minimum Ohmic value used for the
Dynamic Brake Resistor. The Chopper Transistor is either ON or OFF,
connecting the Dynamic Brake Resistor to the DC bus and dissipating power, or
isolating the resistor from the DC bus.
The Chopper Transistor Voltage Control regulates the voltage of the DC bus
during regeneration. The average value of DC bus voltage is 375V DC (for 230V
AC input), 750V DC (for 460V AC input), and 937.5V DC (for 575V AC
input). The voltage dividers reduce the DC bus voltage to a low enough value
that is usable in signal circuit isolation and control. The DC bus feedback voltage
from the voltage dividers is compared to a reference voltage to actuate the
Chopper Transistor.
The Freewheel Diode (FWD) in parallel with the Dynamic Brake Resistor
enables any magnetic energy stored in the parasitic inductance of that circuit to
be safely dissipated during turn off of the Chopper Transistor.
Figure 22 - Chopper Module Schematic

+DC Bus
Fuse
FWD Bus Caps

Voltage
Dynamic Divider
Brake To Voltage
Resistor Control
Signal
Common Crowbar
SCR
To
Voltage Chopper
Divider Transistor Voltage
FWD Divider
To Voltage
Control Bus Caps
Chopper Transistor
Voltage Control To
Voltage
Fuse Control
To -DC Bus
Crowbar
SCR Gate
Sizing the Dynamic Brake Module Gather the following information.
1. The nameplate power rating of the motor in watts, kilowatts, or

horsepower.
2. The nameplate speed rating of the motor in rpm or rps.

3. The motor inertia and load inertia in kilogram-meters2, or lb•ft2.

4. The gear ratio, if a gear is present between the motor and load, GR.
5. Review the Speed, Torque Power profile of the application.
Equations used for calculating Dynamic Braking values use the following
variables.
2N
(t) = The motor shaft speed in Radians/second, or Rad  s = ---------- RPM
60
N(t) = The motor shaft speed in Revolutions Per Minute, or RPM
T(t) = The motor shaft torque in Newton-meters, 1.01 lb•ft - 1.355818N•m
P(t) = The motor shaft power in Watts, 1.0HP = 746 Watts
-Pb = The motor shaft peak regenerative power in Watts
Step 1 – Determine the Total Inertia
JT = Jm + GR2 x JL
JT = Total inertia reflected to the motor shaft, kilogram-meters2, kg•m, or

pound-feet2, lb•ft2
Jm = Motor inertia, kilogram-meters2, kg•m2, or pound-feet2, lb•ft2
GR = The gear ratio for any gear between motor and load, dimentionless
JL = Load inertia, kilogram-meters2, kg•m, or pound-feet2, lb•ft2 – 1 lb•ft2 =

0.04214011 kg•m2
Step 2 – Calculate the Peak Braking Power
JT   2
P b = -----------------
t3 – t2
JT = Total inertia reflected to the motor shaft, kg•m
2N
 = rated angular rotational speed, Rad  s = ----------
60
N = Rated motor speed, RPM

t3 - t2 = total time of deceleration from rated speed to 0 speed, in seconds
Pb = peak braking power, watts (1.0 HP = 746 Watts)
Compare the peak braking power to that of the rated motor power, if the peak
braking power is greater that 1.5 times that of the motor, the deceleration time,
(t3 - t2), needs to be increased so that the drive does not go into current limit. Use
1.5 times because the drive can handle 150% current maximum for 3 seconds.
Peak power can be reduced by the losses of the motor and inverter.
Step 3 – Calculating the Maximum Dynamic Brake Resistance Value
2
V
d
R db1 = -------
Pb
Vd = The value of DC bus voltage that the chopper module regulates at and is
equal to 375V DC, 750V DC, or 937.5V DC
Pb = The peak braking power calculated in Step 2
Rdb1 = The maximum allowable value for the dynamic brake resistor
Choose a Dynamic Brake resistance value that is less than the value calculated in
Step 3. If the value is greater than the calculated value, the drive can trip on DC
bus overvoltage. Remember to account for resistor tolerances.
Step 4 – Choosing the correct Dynamic Brake Module

Cat. No. Resistance Wattage
240 Volt
KA005 28 ohms 666 watts
KA010 13.2 ohms 1650 watts
KA050 N/A N/A
460 Volt
KB005 108 ohms 1500 watts
KB010 52.7 ohms 2063 watts
KB050 10.5 ohms 7000 watts
600 Volt
KC005 108 ohms 1500 watts
KC010 52.7 ohms 2063 watts
KC050 15.8 ohms 8000 watts
In the table above, choose the correct Dynamic Brake Module based upon the
resistance value being less than the maximum value of resistance calculated in
Step 3. If the Dynamic Brake Resistor value of one Dynamic Brake Module is not
sufficiently low, consider using up to three Dynamic Brake Modules in parallel,
such that the parallel Dynamic Brake resistance is less than Rdb1 calculated in

Step 3. If the parallel combination of Dynamic Brake Modules becomes too

complicated for the application, consider using a Brake Chopper Module with a
separately specified Dynamic Brake Resistor.
Step 5 – Estimate average power
It is assumed that the application exhibits a periodic function of acceleration and

deceleration. If (t3 - t2) = the time in seconds necessary for deceleration from
rated speed to 0 speed, and t4 is the time in seconds before the process repeats
itself, then the average duty cycle is (t3 - t2)/t4. The power as a function of time is
a linearly decreasing function from a value equal to the peak regenerative power
to 0 after (t3 - t2) seconds have elapsed. The average power regenerated over the
interval of (t3 - t2) seconds is Pb/2. The average power in watts regenerated over
the period t4 is:
 t3 – t2  Pb
P av = ------------------  ------
t4 2
Pav = Average dynamic brake resistor dissipation, in watts
t3 - t2 = Elapsed time to decelerate from rated speed to 0 speed, in seconds
t4 = Total cycle time or period of process, in seconds
Pb = Peak braking power, in watts
The Dynamic Brake Resistor power rating of the Dynamic Brake Module (singly
or two in parallel) that is chosen must be greater than the value calculated in Step
5. If it is not, then a Brake Chopper Module with the suitable Dynamic Brake
Resistor must be specified for the application.
Step 6 – Calculate Percent Average Load
The calculation of AL is the Dynamic Brake Resistor load expressed as a percent.

Pdb is the sum of the Dynamic Brake Module dissipation capacity and is
obtained from the table in Step 4. This gives a data point for a line to be drawn on
the curve in Figure 3. The number calculated for AL must be less than 100%. If
AL is greater than 100%, an error was made in a calculation or the wrong
Dynamic Brake Module was selected.
P av
AL = --------  100
P db
AL = Average load in percent of Dynamic Brake Resistor
Pav = Average dynamic brake resistor dissipation calculated in Step 5 (Watts)

Pdb = Steady state power dissipation capacity of resistors obtained from the table
in Step 4 (Watts)
Step 7 – Calculate Percent Peak Load
The calculation of PL in percent gives the percentage of the instantaneous power

dissipated by the Dynamic Brake Resistors relative to the steady state power
dissipation capacity of the resistors. This gives a data point to be drawn on the
curve of Figure 3. The number calculated for PL commonly falls between 300%
and 600% for the Dynamic Brake Modules. A calculated number for PL of less
than 100% indicates that the Dynamic Brake Resistor has a higher steady state
power dissipation capacity than is necessary.
Pb
PL = --------  100
P db
PL = Peak load in percent of Dynamic Brake Resistor
Pav = Peak braking power calculated in Step 2 (Watts)
Pdb = Steady state power dissipation capacity of resistors obtained from the table
in Step 4 (Watts)
Step 8 – Plot PL and AL on Curve
Draw a horizontal line equal to the value of AL (Average Load) in percent as

calculated in Step 6. This value must be less than 100%. Pick a point on the
vertical axis equal to the value of PL (Peak Load) in percent as calculated in Step
7. This value will be greater than 100%. Draw a vertical line at (t3 - t2) seconds
such that the line intersects the AL line at right angles. Label the intersection
Point 1. Draw a straight line from PL on the vertical axis to Point 1 on the AL
line. This line is the power curve described by the motor as it decelerates to
minimum speed.
KA, KB, KC Transient Power Capacity
600
500
400
Power (%)
300
200
100
0
0 5 10 15 20
Time (Seconds)

If the line you drew lies to the left of the constant temperature power curve of the
Dynamic Brake Resistor, then there is no application problem. If any portion of
the line lies to the right of the constant temperature power curve of the Dynamic
Brake Resistor, then there is an application problem. The application problem is
that the Dynamic Brake Resistor is exceeding its rated temperature during the
interval that the transient power curve is to the right of the resistor power curve
capacity. It is prudent to parallel another Dynamic Brake Module or apply a
Brake Chopper Module with a separate Dynamic Brake Resistor.
Sizing the Chopper and Resistors
Chopper and Resistors (no longer a Rockwell Automation product)
Sizing the chopper module is the same as the dynamic brake module with a
couple of added steps. Because the chopper is separate from the resistors, an
additional calculation for current needs to be made. Additionally a calculation
for watt-seconds or joules needs to be made for resistor sizing.
JT = Jm + GR2 x JL

Jm = motor inertia, kilogram-meters2, kg•m, or pound-feet2, lb•ft2
GR2 = the gear ratio for any gear between motor and load, dimensionless
JL = load inertia, kilogram-meters2, kg•m, or pound-feet2, lb•ft2 (1.0 lb•ft2 =

0.04214011 kg•m)
JT   2
P b = -----------------
t3 – t2
2N
60

t3 - t2 = total time of deceleration from the rated speed to 0 speed, seconds
Pb = peak braking power, watts (1.0HP = 746 Watts)
braking power is greater that 1.5 times that of the motor, then the deceleration
time, (t3 - t2), needs to be increased so that the drive does not go into current
limit. Use 1.5 times because the drive can handle 150% current maximum for 3
seconds.
2
Vd
R db1 = ------
pb
Vd = The value of DC bus voltage that the chopper module regulates at and is
equal to 375V DC, 750V DC, or 937.5V DC
The choice of the Dynamic Brake resistance value will be less than the value
calculated in Step 3. If the value is greater than the calculated value, the drive can
trip on DC bus overvoltage. Remember to account for resistor tolerances.
Step 4 – Choosing the Chopper Module
Vd
I dl = ----------
R dbl
Idl = The minimum current flowing through the chopper module transistor
Vd = The value of DC bus voltage chosen in Step 3
Rdbl = The value of the dynamic brake resistor calculated in Step 3
The value of Id1 sets the minimum value of current rating for the Chopper
Module. When the Chopper Module choice has been made, the current rating of
the Module Transistor must be greater than or equal to the calculated value for
Id1. See the table below for rating values.

Drive Voltage Turn-On Voltage Cat. No. Peak Transistor Current Minimum DB Resistor
(Volts AC) (Volts DC) Rating (Amps) Value (Ohms)
230 375 WA018 50 9.0
WA070 200 2.3
WA115 400 1.25
460 750 WB009 25 37
WB035 100 9.0
WB110 400 2.5
575 935 WC009 25 46
WC035 75 15.5
WC085 400 3.0
Step 5 – Determine the Minimum Resistance
Each chopper module in the table above has a minimum resistance associated
with it. If a resistance lower than the value show in the table is connected to the
chopper module, the brake transistor is most likely be damaged.
Step 6 – Choosing the Dynamic Brake Resistance Value
To avoid damage to this transistor and get the desired braking performance, select
a resistor with a resistance between the maximum resistance calculated in Step 3
and the minimum resistance of the selected chopper module.
Step 7 – Estimating the Minimum Wattage requirements for the Dynamic

Brake Resistor

the period t4 is:
 t3 – t2  Pb
P av = ------------------  ------
t4 2
Pav = average dynamic brake resistor dissipation, watts
t3 - t2 = Elapsed time to decelerate from rated speed to 0 speed, seconds
t4 = Total cycle time or period of process, seconds
Pb = Peak braking power, watts

The Dynamic Brake Resistor power rating in watts that is chosen will be equal to
or greater than the value calculated in Step 7.
Step 8 – Calculate the requires Watt-Seconds (joules) for the resistor
To be sure the resistor’s thermal capabilities are not violated, a calculation to

determine the amount of energy dissipated into the resistor is made. This
determines the amount joules the resistor must be able to absorb.
Pb
P ws =  t 3 – t 2   ------
2
Pws = Required watt - seconds of the resistor
t3 - t2 = Elapsed time to decelerate from b speed to 0 speed, seconds
Internal Brake IGBT for PowerFlex 755 Drives
Sizing Resistors for an internal DB IGBT
Sizing resistors for the internal DB IGBT Uses the same formula's as previous,
and is very similar to the Chopper Module sizing.
J T = J m + GR 2  J L

Jm = motor inertia, kilogram-meters2, kg•m, or pound-feet2, lb•ft2
GR = The gear ratio for any gear between motor and load, dimensionless
JL = load inertia, kilogram-meters2, kg•m, or pound-feet2, lb•ft2 (1.0 lb•ft2 =

0.04214011 kg•m)

JT   2
P b = -----------------
t3 – t2
2N
60
t3 - t2 = total time of deceleration from the rated speed to 0 speed, seconds
Pb = peak braking power, watts (1.0HP = 746 Watts)
braking power is greater that 1.5 times that of the motor, then the deceleration
time, (t3 - t2), needs to be increased so that the drive does not go into current
limit. Use 1.5 times because the drive can handle 150% current maximum for 3
seconds.
2
Vd
R db1 = ------
pb
Vd = The value of DC bus voltage that the drive regulates at and is equal to 375V
DC, 750V DC, or 937.5V DC depending on input voltage
The choice of the Dynamic Brake resistance value will be less than the value
calculated in Step 3. If the value is greater than the calculated value, the drive can
trip on DC bus overvoltage. Remember to account for resistor tolerances.

Step 4 – Determine the Minimum Resistance
Each drive with an internal DB IGBT has a minimum resistance associated with
it. If a resistance lower than the minimum value for a given drive is connected, the
brake transistor will likely be damaged. Below is a table of minimum resistances
for frame 2 through 7 PowerFlex 750-Series drives.
Frame 400V 480V
ND kW Catalog Code Min Resistance Max DB Current ND HP Catalog Code Min Resistance Max DB Current
2 0.75 C2P1 31.6 25 1.0 D2P1 31.6 25
1.5 C3P5 31.6 25 2.0 D3P4 31.6 25
2.2 C5P0 31.6 25 3.0 D5P0 31.6 25
4.0 C8P7 31.6 25 5.0 D8P0 31.6 25
5.5 C011 31.6 25 7.5 D011 31.6 25
7.5 C015 31.6 25 10 D014 31.6 25
11 C022 22.6 34.9 15 D022 22.6 34.9
3 15 C030 31.6 25 20 D027 31.6 25
18.5 C037 31.6 25 25 D034 31.6 25
22 C043 16.6 47.6 30 D040 16.6 47.6
4 30 C060 15.8 50 40 D052 15.8 50
37 C072 15.8 50 50 D065 15.8 50
5 37 C072 7.9 100 50 D065 7.9 100
45 C085 7.9 100 60 D077 7.9 100
55 C104 7.9 100 75 D096 7.9 100
6 55 C104 3.3 239.4 75 D096 3.3 239.4
75 C140 3.3 239.4 100 D125 3.3 239.4
90 C170 3.3 239.4 125 D156 3.3 239.4
110 C205 3.3 239.4 150 D186 3.3 239.4
132 C260 3.3 239.4 200 D248 3.3 239.4
7 132 C260 2.4 329 200 D248 2.4 329
160 C302 2.4 329 250 D302 2.4 329
200 C367 2.4 329 300 D361 2.4 329
250 C456 1.65 478.8 350 D415 1.65 478.8
270 C477 1.65 478.8 400 D477 1.65 478.8
Step 5 – Choosing the Dynamic Brake Resistance Value
To avoid damage to this transistor and get the desired braking performance, select
a resistor with a resistance between the maximum resistance calculated in Step 3
and the minimum resistance of the drive IGBT.

Step 6 – Estimating the Minimum Wattage requirements for the Dynamic

Brake Resistor

the period t4 is:
 t3 – t2  Pb
P av = ------------------  ------
t4 2
Pav = Average dynamic brake resistor dissipation, in watts
t3 - t2 = Elapsed time to decelerate from rated speed to 0 speed, in seconds
t4 = Total cycle time or period of process, in seconds
Pb = Peak braking power, in watts
The Dynamic Brake Resistor power rating in watts that is chosen will be equal to
or greater than the value calculated in Step 6.
Step 7 – Calculate the requires Watt-Seconds (joules) for the resistor
To be sure the resistor’s thermal capabilities are not violated, a calculation to

determine the amount of energy dissipated into the resistor is made. This
determines the amount joules the resistor must be able to absorb
Pb
P ws =  t 3 – t 2   ------
2
Pws = Required watt - seconds of the resistor
t3 - t2 = Elapsed time to decelerate from b speed to 0 speed, seconds

Flux Braking Flux Braking is an independent feature from the P370/371 [Stop Mode A/B]
available in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. When enabled, flux braking is active
during the decel ramp of a speed change. Flux braking changes the Volts per
Hertz curve ratio outputting a higher voltage, relative to the normal V/Hz curve,
to the motor causing over fluxing thus reducing the speed faster than just the
decel ramp alone. This feature is not intended for high inertia loads because over
fluxing can cause excessive heating in the motor. Very long decel times can build
heat.
Flux Braking works in all motor control modes.
Table 11 - Flux Braking Parameters

Number Parameter Name Min / Max Default
388 Flux Braking En Disabled / Enabled Disabled
389 Flux Braking Lmt 100.00 / 250.00 % 125.00
390 Flux Braking Ki 0.0 / 1000000.0 10000.0
391 Flux Braking Kp 0.0 / 1000000.0 0.0 (Disabled)
Traces
In all of the following plots the Accel/Decel times are 0.5 s. P372/373 [Bus Reg
Mode A/B] is set to option 1 “Adjust Freq.” There is a fair amount of inertia
connected to the motor shaft. P370/371 [Stop Mode A/B] is set to 1 “Ramp” to
stop.
In the plot below the Flux Braking feature is disabled. Note the decel time. Here
the bus regulator is controlling the stop time.
Flux Braking - Disabled
Id Torque Ref Motor Speed DC Bus Voltage
No change in flux to the motor.

In the next plot all conditions are the same except the Flux Braking feature is
enabled. Note the flux to the motor is increased and the decel time is shorter.
Flux Braking - Enabled
Increased flux to the motor.

Note the decel time.
Compare to disabled.
Finally the same test with the gains set to maximum levels. Slightly faster decel.
The use of the gains vary with the connected load.
Flux Braking - Full Gains
Increased flux to the motor.

Note the decel time.
Compare to disabled.

Flux Regulator The flux regulator is used to control and limit the overall (fundamental) voltage
applied to an induction motor when FOC is used. The flux regulator controls
field weakening above base speed and maintains voltage margin for a current
regulator. A variation of the induction motor flux regulator is used for PM
motors for operation above base speed.
As default the flux regulator is enabled. When disabled, the current regulator
becomes de-tuned.
Do not disable this regulator. If you feel you need to disable this function, consult
the factory for verification.
Flux Up AC induction motors require flux to be established before controlled torque can
be developed. To build flux, voltage is applied. There are two methods to flux the
motor.
The first method is Automatic during a normal start. Flux is established as the
output voltage and frequency are applied to the motor. While the flux is being
established, the unpredictable nature of the developed torque can cause the rotor
to oscillate even though acceleration of the load can occur. In the motor, the
acceleration profile may not follow the commanded acceleration profile due to
the lack of developed torque.
Figure 23 - Accel Profile during Normal Start - No Flux Up

Frequency
Reference
Rated Flux
Frequency
Stator
Rotor
Oscillation due to flux

being established.
0
Time
The second method is Manual. In this mode, DC current is applied to the motor
so that the flux is established before rotation. The flux up time period is based on
the level of flux up current and the rotor time constant of the motor. The flux up
current is not user adjustable.

Figure 24 - Flux Up Current versus Flux Up Time

Flux Up Current = Maximum DC Current
Flux Up Current
Rated Flux Rated Motor Flux
Current
Motor Flux
0
T1
T2
T3
T4
Flux Up Time
Once rated flux is reached in the motor, normal operation begins and the desired
acceleration profile is achieved.
Rated Flux Reached
IR Voltage - SVC
Greater of IR Voltage or
Voltage Boost - V/Hz
Flux Up Stator Voltage
Voltage Rotor Speed
Motor Flux
Stator Freq
Flux Up Normal Operation

Time
Once rated flux is reached in the motor, normal operation begins and the desired
acceleration profile is achieved.

Parameters
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
43 Flux Up Enable Default: 1 = “Automatic” RW 32-bit

Flux Up Enable Options: 0 = “Manual” Integer
“Manual” (0) – Flux is established for P44 [Flux Up Time] before initial acceleration. 1 = “Automatic”
MOTOR CONTROL
Mtr Ctrl Options
“Automatic” (1) – Flux is established for a calculated time period based on motor
nameplate data before acceleration. P44 [Flux Up Time] is not used.
44 Flux Up Time Units: Secs RW Real
Flux Up Time Default: 0.0000
The amount of time the drive will use to try to achieve full motor stator flux. When a Min/Max: 0.0000 / 5.0000
Start command is issued, DC current at P26 [Motor NP Amps] level is used to build stator
flux before accelerating.
Applications
This function is usually associated with applications that require extended

acceleration times. Out of the box, the drive is set to “Automatic” and attempts to
get full motor stator flux based on motor nameplate information. In some cases
the loading and ramp curve during acceleration could have an adverse affect on
the drive's thermal manager. Some applications include mining conveyors or large
centrifuges. This function gives you the ability to manually be sure the motor
stator is fully fluxed up before acceleration by manually assigning a flux up time. It
can produce a better acceleration at low frequencies without excessive current.
High Resolution Feedback The Universal Feedback option module, PowerFlex 755 drives only, interpolates
any sine/cosine signal into 1,048,576 counts per revolution.
The interpolation cannot be changed. It is 1,048,576 counts per revolution

regardless of the native cycles per revolution of the sine/cosine. Interpolation is
modified to 24 bits when P8 [FB0 Cfg] or P38 [FB1 Cfg] Bit 1 “24-bit Resol” is
set.
An acceptable sine/cosine signal is a 1 volt peak-to-peak voltage with a 2.5 volt

offset. Most feedback manufactures Sick (SSI), Stegmann (Hiperface), and
Heidenhain (En Dat, non en dat) meet this requirement.

Inertia Adaption Inertia adaption is used to compensate for lost motion, which occurs when a gear
box and/or a springy coupling is present. Lost Motion describes the condition in
which an input to a mechanism creates no corresponding displacement at the
output. This is most noticeable in systems with large inertia ratios using a gear-
box or flexible couplings. The term inertia adaption refers to how this function
adapts or changes the dynamic inertia seen by the speed regulator. Inertia
adaption can allow an increase in the speed regulator bandwidth, normally
limited by the mechanical transmission, by up to four times. This feature is only
available on PowerFlex 755 drives. P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] must be set to vector
control and use a motor speed feedback device. Inertia adaption is not enabled by
default.
For example, a motor connected to a gearbox is shown.

Motor Gearbox Load
M1 M2
This gearbox can be represented by a spring (K) and gear backlash (BL).
Motor Load
K BL
M1 M2
When the speed of the motor increases, there is a period of time (represented by
Δ x = backlash) before the teeth of the gearbox engage. After that time, there is
some twisting (like a spring) in the shaft after the teeth of the gearbox engage.
This lost motion causes mechanical instability and limits how high the speed
regulator bandwidth can be set without causing instability. Inertia adaption
detects the lost motion and a higher speed regulator bandwidth can be achieved
without instability.
f
Slope due to springy nature
(K) of shafts after gearbox
teeth engage.
Δx
Backlash (BL) before

gearbox teeth engage.

Configuration
Inertia adaption only works if there is valid inertia value entered in P76 [Total
Inertia]. Total inertia is measured during an assisted startup procedure executed
from the HIM or software wizard. The inertia tune can be executed manually by
setting P70 [Autotune] to option 4 “Inertia Tune” and starting the drive.
Inertia Torque Add
Inertia Adapt 679
Total Inertia 1
76 Inertia
Motor Acceleration Feedback Adaption
0
0 Filtered Trq
Disabled Ref
Inertia Adapt BW 705
InertiaAdaptGain 677 657
Zero
Selected Trq Ref
Trq Ref Limited Torq Ref
From
Speed Reg + 0 –
685 + II + 662
Output + +
R
1 Notch Limit
0
Activate inertia adaption by setting P704 [InAdp LdObs Mode] to option 1

“InertiaAdapt.” Once activated, two filters are automatically updated, P705
[Inertia Adapt BW] and P710 [InertAdptFltrBW], when P636 [Speed Reg BW]
is set to a non zero value. Gradually increase P636 [Speed Reg BW] while
operating the motor and load. The final speed reg bandwidth exceeds the value
before inertia adaption was activated providing the system meets the criteria
mentioned below.
When Inertia adaption is activated, disable the two lead-lag filters present in the
speed regulator (setting OFF). These filters are in the speed feedback path P637
[SReg FB Fltr Sel] and at the output of the speed regulator P657 [SReg OutFltr
Sel]. Both filters are disabled by default.
The Inertia Adaption feature can be used in conjunction with inertia

compensation to minimize the acceleration torque required from the Speed
Regulator.

PM001, for detailed parameter explanation.
How does inertia adaption work?

• The inertia adaption algorithm uses a component of acceleration feedback
to create a sort of electronic inertia.
• Electronic inertia supplements the inertia lost when the load is suddenly
disconnected as through a gearbox or lost motion. In this way the velocity
regulator does not see a dramatic change in inertia that is normally
associated with load disconnect and potential instability.

Where is inertia adaption applied?

• Any system with an inertia ratio greater than 3:1 that is plagued by gear
noise or resonance that can’t achieve desired performance by ordinary
tuning. (Inertia ratio is the ratio of system inertia to motor inertia.)
• Most high performance tracking or electronic line shaft systems.
• Most geared systems requiring higher bandwidths and stiffness.
What could be a disadvantage when using inertia adaption?

• It can generate a shrill noise with rigid couplings that lack lost motion or
sufficient compliance. Do not use inertia adaption in such cases.
• It can produce a low level sound emanating from the motor. This is merely
the inertia adaption in action and the sound does not affect performance
nor does it harm the motor.
Inertia Compensation Inertia Compensation is active only in PowerFlex 755 drive and in Flux Vector
(FV) motor control modes selected by P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].
During speed changes, a certain level of torque to respond is required due to load
inertia. That level of torque is above the torque used to run at constant speed.
Inertia compensation attempts to predict the motor torque required to accelerate
and decelerate an inertial load. The Inertia compensation function calculates a
feed forward torque signal based on proportional acceleration or deceleration
rate of change of speed input and total inertia, also known as the derivative of
speed with respect to time. Then that P699 [Inertia Comp Out] signal torque
can be fed forward into the torque control, becoming an available input to the
P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] selector to be summed with P660 [SReg Output]
making for smoother accelerations and decelerations, especially with high inertia
loads.
Inertia Comp
Inertia CompMode Inertia Comp

Inert Comp Out
695 LPFBW
Filtered Spd Ref 698 699
Torque Feed
Disabled 0 Inertia
595 0 LPF Forward To
Comp Torque Control
Int Ramp Ref 1 d
Ext Ramped Ref dt 76 Total Inertia
2 d
700 696 Inertia Acc Gain
dt
596 3 697 Inertia Dec Gain
Speed Rate Ref
• Parameter 695 [Inertia CompMode] enables the Inertia Compensation

and selects possible velocity reference input sources of motor speed as
follows:
• “Disabled” (0) – Inertia compensation function is disabled. P699 [Inertia
Comp Out] is zero so the motor torque reference is not affected.

• “Int Ramp Ref ” (1) – Inertia compensation is enabled. The function is

configured to use the rate of change of P595 [Filtered Spd Ref ]. This is the
typical setting that should be used for inertia compensation on a stand-
alone drive.
• “Ext Ramp Ref ” (2) – Inertia compensation is enabled. The function is
configured to use the rate of change of P700 [Ext Ramped Ref ]. This
setting is available for applications that supply a ramped speed reference
external to the drive.
• “Spd Rate Ref ” (3) – Inertia compensation is enabled. The function is
configured to use the P596 [Speed Rate Ref ]. This parameter should
contain a value that represents the rate of change of the motor speed
reference. This setting is available for applications that supply a ramped
speed reference external to the drive.
Parameter 76 [Total Inertia] is calculated during the autotune and is used along
with the calculated acceleration or deceleration rate to calculate the torque adder.
Parameter 696 [Inertia Acc Gain] determines the gain for the inertia
compensation during acceleration. A gain of 1 results in 100% compensation.
Parameter 697 [Inertia Dec Gain] determines the gain for the inertia
compensation during deceleration. A gain of 1 results in 100% compensation.
Parameter 698 [Inertia Comp LPFBW] Inertia Compensation Low Pass Filter
Bandwidth. Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter for the inertia compensation
function. The output of this filter supplies P699.
Parameter 699 [Inertia Comp Out] Inertia Compensation Output. Displays the
output of the inertia compensation function.
Parameter 700 [Ext Ramped Ref ] External Ramped Reference. This parameter is
meant for an external motor speed ramp input signal. This signal will be used by
the inertia compensation function when P695 [Inertia CompMode] = 2 “Ext
Ramp Ref.” This parameter will be entered in units of Hz or RPM, depending on
the value of P300 [Speed Units].
Parameter 596 [Speed Rate Ref ] Speed Rate Reference. This parameter is shared
by both the Inertia Compensation and Speed Compensation functions.
A value shared by both the Inertia Compensation and Speed Compensation

functions (active only in FV motor control modes), typically supplied by an
external controller that is also providing a rate limited speed reference. The Speed
Rate Reference corresponds to the derivative with respect to time of the speed
reference signal. Units of time are in seconds.
For example, if the controller provides a 10 second reference ramp, the controller
would also supply a Speed Rate Ref value of 1 pu / 10 sec = 0.1 sec-1 while the
reference is accelerating. When the reference is constant, Speed Rate Ref should
be zero.
For additional illustration of the control refer to PF755 Control Block Diagrams
in the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001.

Load Observer The PowerFlex 755 load observer feature compensates for and greatly reduces
load disturbances and gives quicker system response. It minimizes the load torque
requirements of the speed regulator. The load observer attempts to determine a
load estimate value that matches the load torque present in the simplified load
model. This is a simplified motor/load model.
Load Torque (Disturbance)
–
Applied Torque + 1 Velocity Output
M*s
From a control point of view, load torque is an input that is just as real as velocity
reference, but lacks a parameter. Load torque is unavoidable because it is
effectively torque times speed that creates the power to run a load. Considering
this load model, the applied torque is the electromagnetic torque generated by
the motor control and load torque is clearly shown. M is the combined motor/
load mass (inertia). The applied torque must be greater than the load torque to
accelerate the system.
Load torque is not a parameter and thus is not directly accessible, but it can be
indirectly measured. Referring to the plant model we can directly measure the
applied torque, output velocity and the inertia is generally known or calculated.
This leaves load torque as the only unknown value. If we place all three known
quantities in a box that we call an observer, load torque can be estimated.
As the output of the load observer is added to the output of the speed regulator
the function minimizes the load torque requirement for the output of the speed
regulator. Because load observer affects the torque reference and the acceleration
feedback is required, this method can only be applied on P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]
Flux Vector control modes with motor feedback device. This feature is available
only on PowerFlex 755 drives.
Selected Filtered Trq
Trq Ref Ref
From
Speed Reg + –
685 + II + 689
Output + +
R
Notch
Load
Estimate
707
Load
2 Observer
Total Inertia 76 Load
Motor Acceleration Feedback Observer/ Disabled
Estimator 0
0
Load Observer BW 711
704
InAdp LdObs Mode

Configuration
Enable Load Observer by setting P704 [InAdp LdObs Mode] to 2

“LoadObserver.” The total inertia value P76 [Total Inertia] is required for this
feature. Ideally it is measured during the inertia test as part of the drive startup.
The next best approach is to manually enter a reasonably close (calculated) value.
In Load Observer mode, P711 [Load Observer BW] is used to set the natural
frequency of a low pass filter in radians per second (R/S). Typical values for Load
Observer Bandwidth range from 10 to 150 with the higher values being more
responsive to disturbances but with increased system noise. There is no nominal
best setting, but 40 R/S is a suggested starting point. This selection may not
function well in sloppy geared systems. Unlike with Inertia Adaption, there is no
automatic parameter setting associated with the Load Observer.
The Load Observer can also be used in conjunction with P695 [Inertia
CompMode]. When used together, both the load torque and acceleration torque
required from the speed regulator are minimized.
Where can Load Observer be used?
Load Observer can be used on systems where load disturbances are preventing a
further increase in drive performance. The Load Observer can be applied to both
periodic load disturbances, such as a piston pump, and random load disturbances.
Load observer can be applied on systems that are not suitable for Inertia
Adaption. Load Observer cannot be active at the same time as Inertia Adaption.
Motor Control Modes P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] selects the output mode of the drive to match the type of
motor control to use. The Default selection is a value of 1 = “Induction SV.” This
parameter is set during any of the assisted start up routines either via the HIM or
connected software tool wizard. The parameter settings follow.
• InductionVHz (0) – Induction motor, volts per Hertz control mode.
Connected to an induction motor. Used for variable torque applications
with improved efficiency energy savings and variable speed constant
torque applications such as conveyors. Can also be used in multi-motor or
synchronous motor applications.
• Induction SV (1) – Induction motor, sensorless vector control mode.
Connected to an induction motor. Used for most constant torque
applications. Provides excellent starting, acceleration, and running torque.
• Induct Econ (2) – Induction motor, economize control mode.
Used for additional energy savings in constant torque applications that
have constant speed reduced load periods.

• Induction FV (3) – Induction motor, flux vector control mode.

Connected to an induction motor. Used when high performance precise
speed regulation and/or position control closed loop is required. Can also
be configured with direct Torque Reference input. Can also be used open
loop with less precision.
• PM VHz (4) – Permanent magnet motor, volts per Hertz control mode.
Connected to a Surface Permanent Magnet motor (SPM) or Permanent
Magnet Synchronous Motor (PMSM). Used for variable torque
applications with improved efficiency energy savings and variable speed
constant torque applications such as conveyors. Also used in multi-motor
or synchronous motor open loop applications.
• PM SV (5) – Permanent magnet motor, sensorless vector control mode.
Connected to a Surface Permanent Magnet motor (SPM) or Permanent
Magnet Synchronous Motor (PMSM). Used for constant torque
applications. Provides excellent starting, acceleration, and running torque.
• PM FV (6) – Permanent magnet motor, flux vector control mode.
Connected to a Surface Permanent Magnet motor. Used when high
performance precise speed regulation and/or position control closed loop
is required. Can also be configured with direct Torque Reference input.
Can also be used open loop with less precision.
• SyncRel VHz (7) – Synchronous Reluctance motor, volts per Hertz
control mode.
Connected to a Synchronous Reluctance motor. Used for constant torque
applications such as conveyors. Used in multi-motor applications.
• SyncRel SV (8) – Synchronous Reluctance motor, sensorless vector control
mode.
Connected to a Synchronous Reluctance motor. Used for constant torque
applications such as conveyors. Avoid slow speed low inertia applications
that cause torque ripple effects.
• Adj VltgMode (9) – Adjustable voltage control mode.
Independent Frequency and Voltage regulators; Fixed Frequency and
Variable Voltage or Fixed Voltage and Variable Frequency. Typically used
for non-motor applications such as resistive and inductive heating
elements, vibration welding, power supplies, Electromagnetic stirring of
molten metal and some Linear Induction Motor LIM applications.
• IPM FV (10) – Interior permanent magnet motor, flux vector control
mode.
Connected to an Interior Permanent Magnet motor. Used when high
performance precise speed regulation and/or position control with closed
loop feedback is required. Can also be configured with direct Torque
Reference input. Can also be used open loop with less precision.

Volts/Hertz
Volts/Hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and

output frequency. Volts/Hertz works the same for Permanent Magnet and
SyncRel VHz as it does for induction VHz. The relationship can be defined in
two ways by setting P65 [VHz Curve] to 0 “Custom V/Hz” or 1 “Fan/Pump.”
V/Hz Control
Gate
Frequency Ref. V Ref. Voltage Signals
V/Hz Inverter Motor
Control
0 = “Custom V/Hz”
Custom Volts/Hertz enables a wide variety of patterns using linear segments. The
default configuration is a straight line from zero to rated voltage and frequency.
This is the same volts/hertz ratio that the motor sees if started across the line. As
seen in the diagram below, the volts/hertz ratio can be changed to provide
increased torque performance when required by programming five distinct
points on the curve.
• P60 [Start Acc Boost] - Used to create additional torque for breakaway
from zero speed and acceleration of heavy loads at lower speeds.
• P61 [Run Boost] - Used to create additional running torque at low speeds.
The value is typically less than the required acceleration torque. The drive
will lower the boost voltage to this level when running at low speeds (not
accelerating). This reduces excess motor heating that could be caused if the
higher start / accel boost level were used.
• P62 [Break Voltage] and P63 [Break Frequency] - Used to increase the
slope of the lower portion of the Volts/Hertz curve, providing additional
torque.
• P25 [Motor NP Volts] and P27 [Motor NP Hertz] - Set the upper portion
of the curve to match the motor design. Marks the beginning of the
constant power region.
• P36 [Maximum Voltage] and P37 [Maximum Frequency] - Slope the
portion of the curve used above base speed.
Maximum Voltage
Base Voltage
(Nameplate)
Break Voltage
Start/Accel Boost
Run Boost
Break Break Frequency Maximum

Frequency (Nameplate) Frequency

1 = “Fan/Pump”
When this option is chosen, the relationship is 1/x2. Therefore, at full frequency,
full voltage is supplied. At 1/2 rated frequency, 1/4 voltage is applied. This
pattern closely matches the torque requirement of a variable torque load
(centrifugal fan or pump – load increases as speed increases) and offers the best
energy savings for these applications.
Maximum Voltage
Base Voltage
(Nameplate)
Run Boost
Break Frequency Maximum

(Nameplate) Frequency
Sensorless Vector
Sensorless Vector mode uses a V/Hz core enhanced by excellent current
resolution, a slip estimator, a high performance current limiter and the vector
algorithms. The basic functions for SV are similar for all three motor types,
induction motor, permanent magnet motor, and synchronous reluctance motor,
however PM and SyncRel SV do not require Slip Frequency adjustments.
IM Sensorless Vector
Current Feedback - Total
Current Current Feedback
Torque 1 Est. Resolver
V/Hz Control
Gate
Speed Freq. + Freq. Ref. Current Elec. Freq. V Ref. Voltage Signals
V/Hz Inverter Motor
Limit Control
+
Torque 1 Est.
Vector V Vector
Torque 1 Est. Control
Slip Frequency Slip

Estimator

PM and SyncRel Sensorless Vector

V/Hz Control
Gate
Speed Freq. Freq. Ref. Current Elec. Freq. V Ref. Voltage Signals
V/Hz Inverter Motor
Limit Control
Vector V Vector
The algorithms operate on the knowledge that motor current is the vector sum of
the torque and flux producing components of current. Values can be entered to
identify the motor values or an autotune routine can be run to identify the motor
values (see Autotune on page 35). Sensorless vector offers better torque
production and a wider speed range than V/Hz. However, it is not appropriate to
use when more than one motor is connected to the same drive.
In Sensorless Vector control, the drive commands a specific amount of voltage to

develop flux.
Maximum Voltage
Base Voltage
(Nameplate)
urve
ul l L oad C
ate F ve
oxim d Cur
Appr No Loa
a te
oxim
Ap p r
Ir Voltage
Break Frequency Maximum

(Nameplate) Frequency
Sensorless Vector w/Economizer
Economizer mode consists of the Sensorless Vector control with an additional

energy savings function. When steady state speed is achieved, the economizer
becomes active and automatically adjusts the drive output voltage based on
applied load. By matching output voltage to applied load, the motor efficiency is
optimized. Reduced load commands a reduction in motor flux current. The flux
current is reduced as long as the total drive output current does not exceed 75%
of motor rated current as programmed in P26 [Motor NP Amps]. The flux
current is not allowed to be less than 50% of the motor flux current as
programmed in P75 [Flux Current Ref ]. During acceleration and deceleration,

the economizer is inactive and Sensorless Vector motor control performs

normally.
Maximum Voltage
Motor Nameplate Voltage
Increasing
Rated Flux Current Load
Vtotal
Reduced Flux Current, minimum

of 50% of Rated Flux Current
Ir Voltage
0
0 Motor Nameplate Maximum
Frequency
Frequency Frequency

Flux Vector Control
In Flux Vector mode, the flux and torque producing currents are independently
controlled and speed is indirectly controlled by a torque reference. Alternatively,
the drive can control torque instead of speed in flux vector mode. In either case,
this mode can be operated either with or without feedback and will provide the
fastest response to load changes.
Flux Vector control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high
performance. Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this
mode (refer to Autotune on page 35 for details). In Flux Vector control, the drive
takes the speed reference that is specified by the Speed Reference Selection block
and compares it to the speed feedback. The speed regulator uses Proportional
and Integral gains to adjust the torque reference for the motor. This torque
reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed. The torque
reference is then converted to the torque producing component of the motor
current.
This type of speed regulator produces a high bandwidth response to speed

command and load changes. Because Flux Vector controls the flux and torque
producing currents independently, a torque reference can be sent directly instead
of being generated from a speed reference via the Speed Regulator. The
independent flux control also enables flux to be reduced in order to run above
base motor speed.
Flux Vector
High Bandwidth Current Regulator
Current Feedback
V mag
Flux Reg.
Speed Freq. Speed Current Voltage
Torque Ref. Inverter Motor
Reg. Reg. Control
V ang
Torque Ref. Encoder

Adaptive Slip
Controller
Autotune Parameters
Speed Feedback

Permanent Magnet Motor Control
Permanent magnet motor control is selected by setting P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]
to the appropriate choices of motor type. Refer to Appendix D of the PowerFlex
750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001 for compatible list of
Allen-Bradley Servo motors and resolution criteria.
Surface Permanent Magnet (SPM) motor or Permanent Magnet Synchronous

Motor (PMSM) is a rotating electrical machine that has the stator phase
windings and rotor permanent magnets. The air gap magnetic field is provided by
these permanent magnets and hence it remains constant. The conventional DC
motor commutates itself with the use of a mechanical commutator whereas
SPM/PMSM needs electronic commutation for the direction control of current
through the windings. Because the SPM/PMSM motors in effect have their
armature coils at the stator, they need to be commutated externally with the help
of an external switching circuit. A three phase PWM inverter topology is used for
this purpose.
The torque is produced because the interaction of the magnetic fields causes the
rotor to rotate. In permanent magnet motors, one of the magnetic fields is created
by permanent magnets and the other is created by the stator coils. The maximum
torque is produced when the magnetic vector of the rotor is at 90 degrees to the
magnetic vector of the stator.
Motor data and an autotune are required for correct operation in this mode.
Refer to Autotune on page 35 for details.
PM Sensorless Vector
V/Hz Control
Gate
Speed Freq. Freq. Ref. Current Elec. Freq. V Ref. Voltage Signals
V/Hz Inverter Motor
Limit Control
Vector V Vector

PM Flux Vector Control

In flux vector mode, the flux and torque producing currents are independently
controlled and speed is indirectly controlled by a torque reference. Alternatively,
the drive can also control torque instead of speed in flux vector mode. In either
case, this mode can be operated either with or without feedback and will provide
the fastest response to load changes.
High Performance and precise control will require encoder feedback. Refer to the
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions, publication 750-
IN001, for a list of compatible High Resolution Stegmann encoder and
Heidenhain encoder feedback on the motor.
Current Feedback
V mag
Flux Reg.
Speed Ref. Speed Current Voltage
Inverter Motor
Reg. Reg. Control
Torque Ref. V ang
Torque Ref. Encoder
Speed Feedback
IPM Flux Vector Control

In IPM Flux Vector mode, the flux and torque producing currents continue to be
independently controlled. Speed is indirectly controlled by a torque reference
output command from the Speed Regulator. Alternatively, the drive can be
configured to control torque instead of speed in flux vector mode. In either case,
for precise control, this mode must be operated with encoder feedback in order
to provide the fastest response to load changes.
The Iq/Id reference calculation block will produce optimum Iq/Id current
reference that will try to establish maximum torque per amp control
performance.
IPM Flux Vector

Current Feedback
Id V mag
Iq/Id
Speed Freq. Speed Reference Current Voltage
Inverter Motor
Reg. Calculation Reg. Control
V ang
Iq
Torque Ref. Encoder
Speed Feedback

Motor Types The following explanation and descriptions of AC motor types are condensed
summaries derived from a variety of sources that focus on the history, evolution,
and feature benefits of the variety of motor designs. These designs are utilized in
all sectors of use and in vast variations of machinery, equipment, and processes.
The types of AC motors described here, powered by fixed utility frequency, are
limited to speeds based on the number of poles and winding construction.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) broaden practical speed ranges of these motor
types by converting utility power and applying appropriately selected VFD
electronic control modes specifically matched to these unique motor type
designs. Motor control modes set by P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] are also discussed in
Motor Control Modes on page 226 and the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming
The following topics are briefly discussed in this section.

• Basics of AC Motor Design
• Induction AC Motors
• Wound-rotor AC Motors
• Multispeed AC Motors
• Synchronous AC Motors
• Permanent Magnet Motor Control
• Synchronous reluctance motors
• AC Linear Electric Motors (LIMs)
Basics of AC Motor Design
AC motors come in a variety of designs, each with functional purpose and

benefits. Asynchronous and synchronous electric motors are the two main
categories of AC motors.
The Induction AC motor is a common form of asynchronous motor and is

basically an AC transformer with a rotating secondary. The primary winding
(stator) is connected to the power source and the shorted secondary (the rotor)
carries the induced secondary current. Torque is produced by the action of the
rotor (secondary) currents on the air-gap flux. The synchronous motor differs
greatly in design and operational characteristics, and is considered a separate class
of AC motor.

AC Induction Motors
P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] induction motor options.
• 0 = “Induction VHz”
• 1 = “Induction SV”
• 2 = “Induction Econ”
• 3 = “Induction FV”
AC Induction Motors (ACIMs) are the simplest and most rugged electric motor
and consist of two basic electrical assemblies: the wound stator and the rotor
assembly. The induction AC motor derives its name from currents flowing in the
secondary member (rotor) that are induced by alternating currents flowing in the
primary member (stator). The combined electromagnetic effects of the stator and
rotor currents produce the force to create rotation.
ACIMs typically feature rotors, which consist of a laminated, cylindrical iron

core with slots for receiving the conductors. The most common type of rotor has
cast-aluminum conductors and short-circuiting end rings. This AC motor
“squirrel-cage” rotates when the moving magnetic field induces a current in the
shorted conductors. The speed at which the AC motor magnetic field rotates is
the synchronous speed of the AC motor and is determined by the number of
poles in the stator and the frequency of the power supply: ns = 120f/p, where ns
= synchronous speed, f = frequency, and p = the number of poles (that is 120*60
Hz] / 4 = 1800 RPM). To control motor speed other than the fixed utility
frequency requires a VFD.
Synchronous speed is the absolute upper limit of AC motor speed. If the AC

motor’s rotor turns exactly as fast as the rotating magnetic field, then no lines of
force are cut by the rotor conductors, and torque is zero. When AC induction
motors are running, the rotor always rotates slower than the magnetic field. The
AC motor’s rotor speed is just slow enough to cause the proper amount of rotor
current to flow, so that the resulting torque is sufficient to overcome windage and
friction losses, and drive the load. The speed difference between the AC motor’s
rotor and magnetic field, called slip, is normally referred to as a percentage of
synchronous speed: s = 100 (ns - na)/ns, where s = slip, ns = synchronous speed,
and na = actual speed. Or it is listed on the nameplate as a base speed (1780
RPM) at rated FLA, frequency, and based on the number of poles.

Polyphase AC Induction Motors
Polyphase squirrel-cage AC motors are basically constant-speed machines, but

some degree of flexibility in operating characteristics results from modifying the
rotor slot design. These variations in AC motors produce changes in torque,
current, and full-load speed. Evolution and standardization have resulted in four
fundamental types of AC motors.
There are five basic NEMA designs for AC motors: A, B, C, D, and F. The speed-
torque curves for all five designs are shown on the following graph.
300
275
250
225
D
200
Torque - Percent of Full-Load
C
A B
175
F
150
125
Full-Load Torque
100
75
50
25
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Speed - Percent
Speed - Torque Curves of NEMA A, B, C, D, and F Motors
AC Motors - Designs A and B are general-purpose AC motors with normal

starting torques and currents and low slip. As shown, the characteristics of designs
A and B are quite similar. The primary difference between these two designs is
that the starting current for design B is limited by NEMA standards, but there is
no limitation on the starting current for design A.
AC Motors - Design C have high starting torque with normal starting current
and low slip. NEMA design C motor has a higher starting torque than either the
A or B designs. This torque is in the vicinity of 225% of full-load torque. Design
C AC motors are normally used where breakaway loads are high at starting, but
which normally run at rated full load and are not subject to high overload
demands after running speed has been reached.
AC Motors - Design D exhibit high slip AC motor starting torque, which is

approximately 280% of full-load torque, low starting current, and low full-load
speed. Because of the high slip, speed can drop when fluctuating loads are
encountered. The high starting torque of the design D motor makes it

particularly suited to handle hard-to-start loads. Another useful characteristic of

this motor is the sloping shape of its speed-torque curve. This lets the motor slow
down during periods of peak loads, enabling any flywheel energy that has been
stored by the load to be released. Typical applications include punch presses and
press brakes.
AC Motors - Design F exhibit low starting torque, low starting current, and low
slip. These AC motors are built to obtain low locked-rotor current. Both locked-
rotor and breakdown torque are low. Normally these AC motors are used where
starting torque is low and where high overloads are not imposed after running
speed is reached.
In summary, we see that when matching an AC motor to the requirements of a

specific load it is important to check the torque requirements of the load and the
torque capabilities of the motor in addition to speed and horsepower.
At least three torque values are important:

• Starting torque
• Breakdown torque
• Full-load torque.
Wound-rotor AC Motors

Squirrel-cage AC motors are relatively inflexible with regard to speed and torque
characteristics, but a special wound-rotor AC motor has controllable speed and
torque. Application of wound-rotor AC motors is markedly different from
squirrel-cage AC motors because of the accessibility of the rotor circuit. AC
motor performance characteristics are obtained by inserting different values of
resistance in the rotor circuit.
Wound-rotor AC motors are generally started with secondary resistance in the

rotor circuit. The AC motor resistance is sequentially reduced to permit the
motor to come up to speed. Thus, AC motors can develop substantial torque
while limiting locked-rotor current. This secondary AC motor resistance can be
designed for continuous service to dissipate heat produced by continuous
operation at reduced speed, frequent acceleration, or acceleration with a large
inertia load. External resistance gives AC motors a characteristic that results in a
large drop in rpm for a fairly small change in load. Reduced AC motor speed is
provided down to about 50% rated speed, but efficiency is low.
Retrofitting a Wound-rotor motor with a VFD is possible by eliminating the

switching and resistor control infrastructure and shorting the slip rings

connected to the rotor windings. CAUTION! Because wound-rotor motors

were not originally designed for use with inverters, the dielectric strength of the
motor construction cannot withstand the reflected wave voltages that can get
subjected at the motor connections (1.5 to 2.5 times drive’s bus voltage).
Appropriate mitigation must be considered. General rule of thumb, size the VFD
so that it is capable of providing continuous current at 125 to 135% of FLA of the
motor, due to elimination of resistors and its design for higher starting torque.
Multispeed AC Motors
Consequent-pole AC motors are designed for one speed. By physically

reconnecting the leads, a 2:1 speed ratio can be obtained. Typical synchronous
speeds for 60 Hz AC motors are: 3,600/1,800 rpm (2/4 pole), 1,800/900 rpm
(4/8 pole), and 1,200/600 rpm (6/12 pole).
Two-winding AC motors have two separate windings that can be wound for any
number of poles so that other speed ratios can be obtained. However, ratios
greater than 4:1 are impractical because of AC motor size and weight.
Power output of multispeed AC motors can be proportioned to each different

speed. These AC motors are designed with output horsepower capacity in
accordance with one of the load characteristics.
When retrofitted with a VFD, the motor is generally wired for the speed range
intended to be optimized. Autotuned per representative nameplate information
and operated as a single winding single speed induction motor.
Synchronous AC Motors
Synchronous AC motors are inherently constant-speed electric motors and they

operate in absolute synchronism with line frequency. As with squirrel-cage
induction AC motors, speed is determined by the number of pairs of poles and is
always a ratio of the line frequency.
Synchronous AC motors are made in sizes ranging from sub-fractional self-

excited units to large-horsepower, direct-current-excited AC motors. In the
fractional-horsepower range, synchronous AC motors are used primarily where
precise constant speed is required.

In large horsepower sizes applied to industrial loads, synchronous AC motors

serve two important functions. First, AC motors provide highly efficient means
of converting AC energy to mechanical power. Second, AC motors can operate at
leading or unity power factor, thereby providing power-factor correction.
There are two major types of synchronous AC motors: non-excited and direct-
current excited electric motors. Application of a VFD is to vary the desired
synchronous speed of the machine.
Permanent Magnet Motor Control
Permanent magnet motor control is selected by setting P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]
to the appropriate choices of motor type. Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series
Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001, Appendix D for compatible List
of Allen-Bradley Servo motors and resolution criteria.
Surface Permanent Magnet Motor (SPM) or Permanent Magnet

Synchronous Motor (PMSM)

• 4 = “PM VHz”
• 5 = “PM SV”
• 6 = “PM FV”
SPM or PMSM is a rotating electrical machine that has the stator phase windings
and rotor permanent magnets. The air gap magnetic field is provided by these
permanent magnets therefore it remains constant.
The conventional DC motor commutates itself with the use of a mechanical

commutator whereas SPM / PMSM needs electronic commutation for the
direction control of current through the windings. Because the SPM/PMSM
motors in effect have their armature coils at the stator, they need to be
commutated externally with the help of an external switching circuit. A three
phase PWM inverter (VFD) topology is used for this purpose.
The torque is produced because the interaction of the magnetic fields causes the
rotor to rotate. In permanent magnet motors, one of the magnetic fields is created
by permanent magnets and the other is created by the stator coils. The maximum
torque is produced when the magnetic vector of the rotor is at 90 degrees to the
magnetic vector of the stator.
Refer to Autotune on page 35 for details on the autotune.
The permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) can be thought of as a cross

between an AC induction motor and a brushless DC motor (BLDC). They have

rotor structures similar to BLDC motors which contain permanent magnets.

However, their stator structure resembles that of its ACIM cousin, where the
windings are constructed in such a way as to produce a sinusoidal flux density in
the air gap of the machine. As a result, they perform best when driven by
sinusoidal waveforms. However, unlike their ACIM relatives, PMSM motors
perform poorly with open-loop scalar V/Hz control, because there is no rotor coil
to provide mechanical damping in transient conditions.
Field Oriented Control is the most popular control technique used with PMSMs.
As a result, torque ripple can be extremely low, on par with that of ACIMs.
PMSM motors provide higher power density for their size compared to ACIMs.
This is because with an induction machine, part of the stator current is required
to “induce” rotor current in order to produce rotor flux. These additional
currents generate heat within the motor. In a PMSM, the rotor flux is already
established by the permanent magnets on the rotor.
Most PMSMs utilize permanent magnets which are mounted on the surface of
the rotor. This makes the motor appear magnetically “round,” and the motor
torque is the result of the reactive force between the magnets on the rotor and the
electromagnets of the stator. This results in the optimum torque angle being 90
degrees, which is obtained by regulating the d-axis current to zero in a typical
FOC application.
Interior Permanent Magnet Motor

• 10 = “IPMn VHz”
Some PMSMs have magnets that are buried inside of the rotor structure. These
motors are called Interior Permanent Magnet, or IPM motors. As a result, the
radial flux is more concentrated at certain spatial angles than it is at others. This
gives rise to an additional torque component called reluctance torque, which is
caused by the change of motor inductance along the concentrated and non-
concentrated flux paths.
This causes the optimum Field Oriented Control torque angle to be greater than
90 degrees, which requires regulating the d-axis current to be a fixed negative
ratio of the q-axis current. This negative d-axis current also results in field
weakening, which reduces the flux density along the d-axis, which in turn
partially lowers the core losses. As a result, IPM motors boast even higher power
output for a given frame size.
Refer to Autotune on page 35 for details on the autotune.
These motors are becoming increasingly popular as traction motors in hybrid

vehicles, as well as variable speed applications for appliances and HVAC. In the
servo motor world more and more designs are shifting away from SPM to IPM to

take advantage of inherent advantages. In principle, there are no size limitations

to IPM designs and these can be developed from small fractional horsepower to
large – hundreds of Hp ratings, creating potential applications that can benefit
from variable speed IPM control.
Synchronous Reluctance Motors

• 7 = “SyncRel VHz”
• 8 = “SyncRel SV”
Synchronous reluctance motors have an equal number of stator and rotor poles.
The projections on the rotor are arranged to introduce internal flux “barriers,”
holes which direct the magnetic flux along the so-called direct axis. Typical
numbers of poles are 4 and 6. Following example of a 4 pole rotor and 6 pole
stator.
As the rotor is operating at synchronous speed and there are no current-

conducting parts in the rotor, rotor losses are minimal compared to those of an
induction motor, thus potential energy savings in appropriate applications. Once
started and rotating at synchronous speed, the motor can operate with sinusoidal
voltage. So to start and control speed at frequencies other than utility requires a
variable-frequency drive.
AC Linear Electric Motors LIMs and LSMs

• 9 = “Adjustable Voltage”
The first linear electric motor was conceived by Wheatstone more than 100 years
ago. But large air gaps and low efficiencies prevented linear electric motors from
being widely used until recent advances in design and VFD controls.
Linear Induction Motors (LIMs)

In a LIM, the motor stator creates an Alternating Current (AC) field that induces
currents into the reaction plate (moving element), which is typically an
aluminum fin or plate. This creates eddy currents in the moving element which
react with the moving field in the stator to produce thrust. LIMs typically are
kept moving, avoiding holding stationary (equivalent to locked rotor) because of
significant heating of the reactor plate.

A linear electric motor in concept has rotary electric motor stator cores, unrolled
out over a linear path. The circular stator becomes a linear stator, being defined as
a single-sided linear induction electric motor (SLIM). Likewise, if the circular
stator is cut into two sections and flattened, the electric motor becomes a double-
sided linear induction electric motor (DLIM). The DLIM and SLIM both
require a two or three-phase stator (primary) winding and a flat metallic or
conductive plate-type armature (secondary) instead of a rotor.
The moving member in a linear induction motor is typically a solid conducting

plate or sheet. It does not contain coils or windings. However, a linear electric
motor can also be constructed so the primary moves and the secondary remains
stationary.
Linear induction motors LIMs are increasingly chosen for material-handling

applications and Amusement rides because they are quieter, more reliable, and
less expensive than rotary electric motors. And because linear electric motors do
not drive gearboxes or rotary-to-linear conversion devices, they can be more
efficient.
There are several important differences between linear and rotary electric
induction motors that require understanding. Unlike rotary electric motors, the
linear motor has a beginning and an end to its travel. First, the moving secondary
material enters the primary (stator field) at one end of the electric motor and exits
at the opposite end. Induced currents in the secondary material at the entry edge
resist air-gap flux buildup. And at the exit edge, the material retards the air-gap
flux decay. This results in an uneven air-gap flux distribution which contribute to
challenges in sizing VFDs and optimizing set up of control frequency and
voltage. VFD control uses either fixed V/Hz, or independently controlled
frequency and voltage.
Linear Synchronous Motors (LSMs)

Linear Synchronous Motors (LSMs) are significantly different than Linear
Induction Motors (LIMs) in the way that they produce electromotive forces or
motion.
Linear Synchronous Motors (LSMs) are similar in concept with stator cores,
arranged along a path for motion, rather than contained in a frame for rotary
motion. But the field in a LSM moving secondary element is usually provided by
permanent magnets. There are no significant currents induced. Magnets are
embedded in the moving element. This does allow for more definitive position
control and holding position without excessive heat generation. Generally some
sort of position sensor and feedback are necessary to implement control of LSMs
via VFD are necessary.
At the time of this writing there has been minimal experience applying VFDs to
control Linear Synchronous Motors (LSMs). Only this short description of its
construction is included.

Notch Filter A notch filter exists in the torque reference loop to reduce mechanical resonance
created by a gear train. P687 [Notch Fltr Freq] sets the center frequency for the 2
pole notch filter, and P688 [Notch Fltr Atten] sets the attenuation of the notch
filter in the vector control torque reference section. Attenuation is the ratio of the
notch filter input signal to its output at the P687 [Notch Fltr Freq]. An
attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1/30th of the input at the
specified frequency.
The notch filter is valid only in Flux Vector Motor Control modes (P35).
Figure 25 - Notch Filter Frequency

Gain Notch Filter K
0 db
Notch Filter Frequency Hz
Example
A mechanical gear train consists of two masses (the motor and the load) and
spring (mechanical coupling between the two loads).
Mechanical Gear Train
Bm BL
Kspring
Jm Jload
The resonant frequency is defined by the following equation:
 Jm + Jload 
ResonanceHz = Kspring  ---------------------------------
 Jm  Jload 
• Jm is the motor inertia (seconds)
• Jload is the load inertia (seconds)
• Kspring is the coupling spring constant (rad2 / sec)
The following graph shows a two mass system with a resonant frequency of 62
radians/second (9.87 Hz). One Hertz is equal to 2p radians/second.

Figure 26 - Resonance
Motor Torque
Motor PU
Roll PU
The following represents the same mechanical gear train but with [Notch Filter
Freq] set to 10.
Figure 27 - 10 Hz Notch
Motor Torque
Motor PU
Roll PU

To see the effects of the notch filter use test points T65 and T73 in torque
control. T65 is before the filter and T73 after. And test point Txx (before) and
Txx (after) in position control. See the partial block diagram below.
Notch Filter
Notch
Notch Fltr Freq Notch

Notch Fltr Atten
PsnNtchFltrDepth
PsnNtchFltrFreq

Regen Power Limit The P426 [Regen Power Lmt] is programmed as a percentage of the rated power.
The mechanical energy that is transformed into electrical power during a
deceleration or overhauling load condition is clamped at this level. Without the
proper limit, a bus overvoltage can occur. When using the bus regulator [Regen
Power Lmt] can be left at factory default, -50%.
When using dynamic braking or a regenerative supply, [Regen Power Lmt] can be
set to the most negative limit possible (–800%). When you have dynamic braking
or regenerative supply, but want to limit the power to the dynamic brake or
regenerative supply, [Regen Power Lmt] you can set a specific level. Values in this
parameter are valid only in a Flux Vector mode.
The following series of plots describes the difference between changing Regen
Power Limit versus changing the Negative Torque Limit. The beginning part of
every plot is identical, this is the acceleration of the motor. Once the stop is
commanded and deceleration begins, note the red trace in each. This represents
torque current. Because power is proportional to speed, as the speed decreases,
the torque current increases allowing more power to be dissipated.
Note the speed feedback in the RPL = -20%, the slower the motor gets the faster
it’s brought to zero speed and the torque current increases. The higher the value
in Regen Power Limit the more power is allow to pass through.
Focus on the torque current (red) trace as you scroll through the plots and note
the change in the shape as the regen power limit was increase. Then see how it is
clamped at a particular level when Negative Torque Limit is changed.
RPL = -20%
DC Bus Voltage Iq TrqRef P685 Motor Speed

DB Active

RPL = -50%

DB Active
RPL = 100%

DB Active

RPL = -200%
DB Active
NTL = -20%

NTL = -50%
NTL = -100%

Speed Reference The speed reference can come from a variety of sources. Some can be selected
through digital inputs or via bit manipulation of the Network Logic Command
Word:
• HIM (local or remote)
• Analog Input
• Preset Speed Parameters
• Jog Speed Parameters
• Auxiliary Velocity Feedback
• Network Communication
• Process PID Loop
• MOP Reference
• DeviceLogix software
Figure 28 - PowerFlex 753 Speed Reference Selection Overview

Speed Reference Selection
Spd Ref
Command
Spd Ref A
Ref A
Auto Speed Reference Control
Trim Ref A
+
Trim % Ref A
Jogging/ Limited
Spd Ref B Selected Spd Ref Oil Pump/ Limit Spd Ref
Direction Skip Fiber Speed Ref
Ref B
Auto
+ Autotune/
Homing/ Mode
Switch
Control Bands App. Stop
Trim Ref B
+ Overrides
Limit
Trim % Ref B
From
PI Regulator
Presets 3-7 Auto (Exclusive Mode)
DPI Ports 1-6 Manual
ENet Spd Ref
Vector Speed Control
Speed
Comp
Vector Ramp S-Curve
Flux Ramped
Vector Linear Vel Ref Motor Spd Ref
Vel Ref
Ramp & x Velocity Reg
Filter
S Curve Ref
Limit
From From Max Speed
Pt-Pt Profile PI Regulator Speed Ref
Generator (Trim Mode) Scale
Rate
Select From Pos Reg
Position Output
Regulator Filter
V/F Speed Control
Ramped
VF or SV Linear Speed Ref
Ramp & Frequency
S Curve Ref
Limit Limit
V/F Ramp S-Curve
Max Speeds Max Speed +
Droop From Overspeed Limit
Velocity Trim
Regulator Speed
From Status
PI Regulator Speed Feedback Status
From
(Trim Mode) Slip Comp Vector Ramp Status
F/F Ramp Status

PM001, Appendix A for more details on the PowerFlex 753 Control Block
Diagrams.

Figure 29 - PowerFlex 755 Speed Reference Selection Overview

Spd Ref
Command
Spd Ref A
Ref A
Trim Ref A
+
Trim % Ref A
Profiling/ Limited
Spd Ref B Jogging/
Selected Spd Ref Direction Limit Spd Ref Speed Ref
Lift App/ Skip Fiber
Ref B
Auto
+ Autotune/ Mode
Switch
Control Bands App.
Stop / Torque
Proving
Trim Ref B
+ Homing/
Overrides Limit
Trim % Ref B
From
PI Regulator
ENet Spd Ref
Inertia Inertia Comp

Comp Torque Ref
Friction Friction Comp

Comp Torque Ref
Vector Speed Control
Virtual
Encoder 640
Speed
Comp Filtered
SpdFdbk
Vector Ramp S-Curve
Flux Ramped
Vel Ref
Filter
S Curve Ref
Limit
From From Max Speed
Rate
Select From Pos Reg
Position Output
Regulator Filter
V/F Speed Control
Ramped
Ramp & Frequency
S Curve Ref
Limit Limit
V/F Ramp S-Curve
Velocity Trim
Regulator Speed
From Status
From
F/F Ramp Status

PM001, Appendix A, for more details on the PowerFlex 755 Control Block
Diagrams.

Network Reference
Speed Reference A is the normal speed reference used. To choose a source for this
reference, make a selection in P545 [Spd Ref A Sel]. Also, when the network
(Logic Command Word) is used as the speed reference, refer to the following
documentation for details of operation:
• PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Programming Manual, 750-PM001
• PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual,
750COM-UM001
• PowerFlex 20-750-ENETR Dual-port EtherNet/IP Option Module User
Manual, 750COM-UM008
• EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual, ENET-UM001
The Reference is a 32-bit REAL (floating point) piece of control data produced
by the controller and consumed by the adapter. The Feedback is a 32-bit REAL
(floating point) piece of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by
the controller.
When using a ControlLogix controller, the 32-bit REAL Reference is always

DINT 1 in the output image and the 32-bit REAL Feedback is always:
• DINT 1 in the input image when using the drive Add-On Profile.
• DINT 2 when using the Generic Profile.
For a PLC-5®, SLC™ 500 or MicroLogix™ 1100/1400 controller, the 32-bit REAL
Reference word is always words 2 (Least Significant Word) and 3 (Most
Significant Word) in the output image and the 32-bit REAL Feedback is always
words 2 (Least Significant Word) and 3 (Most Significant Word) in the input
image.
When using a drive Add-On Profile, the Reference and Feedback are
automatically formatted properly and displayed as a controller tag. When using
the Generic Profile, the I/O image is integer-based and the Reference and
Feedback are floating point. Because of this, a COP (Copy) instruction or User
Defined Data Type (UDDT) is required to correctly write values to the
Reference and read values from the Feedback. Refer to the PowerFlex 755
Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual or to the PowerFlex 20-750-
ENETR Dual-port EtherNet/IP Option Module User Manual for ladder logic
program examples.
When using the drive Add-On Profile, the controller tags for Reference and
Feedback are automatically and properly formatted. This eliminates the need for
data conversion using COP (copy) instructions or a UDDT to copy the DINT
data into a REAL word.

The Reference and Feedback 32-bit REAL value represents drive speed. The
scaling for the speed Reference and Feedback is dependent on drive P300 [Speed
Units]. For example, if P300 is set to Hz, a 32-bit REAL Reference value of 30.0
equals a Reference of 30.0 Hz. If P300 is set to RPM, a 32-bit REAL Reference
value of 1020.5 equals a Reference of 1020.5 RPM. Note that the commanded
maximum speed can never exceed the value of drive P520 [Max Fwd Speed].
Table 12 shows example References and their results for a PowerFlex 755 drive
that has its:
• P300 [Speed Units] set to Hz.
• P37 [Maximum Freq] set to 130 Hz.
• P520 [Max Fwd Speed] set to 60 Hz.
When P300 [Speed Units] is set to RPM, the other parameters are also in RPM.
Table 12 - PowerFlex 755 Drive Example Speed Reference/Feedback Scaling

Network Reference Value Speed Command Value(2) Output Speed Network Feedback Value
130.0 130 Hz 60 Hz(3) 60.0
65.0 65 Hz 60 Hz(3) 60.0
32.5 32.5 Hz 32.5 Hz 32.5
0.0 0 Hz 0 Hz 0.0
-32.5(1) 32.5 Hz 32.5 Hz 32.5
(1) The effects of values less than 0.0 depend on whether the PowerFlex 755 drive uses a Bipolar or Unipolar Direction mode. See the
drive documentation for details.
(2) For this example, drive P300 [Speed Units] is set to Hz.
(3) The drive runs at 60 Hz instead of 130 Hz or 65 Hz because drive P520 [Max Fwd Speed] sets 60 Hz as the maximum speed
When a network (communication adapter) is selected as the speed reference, a

32-bit word is used as the speed reference. If P308 [Direction Mode], is set to 1
“Bipolar,” the most significant bit (MSB) is used for direction control. Otherwise,
the MSB is ignored.
IMPORTANT When a 20-COMM Carrier (20-750-20COMM) is used to install a 20-COMM

adapter on a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the upper word (Bits 16…31) of the
Logic Command Word and Logic Status Word are not accessible. The upper
word is only used and accessible on PowerFlex 750-Series communication
modules (20-750-*) and the embedded EtherNet/IP on PowerFlex 755 drives.

Jog
When the drive is not running, pressing the HIM’s Jog soft button or a
programmed Jog digital input function or by Logic Command (sent over a
communication network) causes the drive to jog at a separately programmed jog
reference. This jog speed reference value is entered in P556 [ Jog Speed 1] or P557
[ Jog Speed 2].
Jogging
Drive Status 1
(Jogging)
935 17
0
1,0 1
Jog Speed 1 556
0,1
Jog Speed 2 557
Drive Logic Rslt Jog1

879 2 19 Jog2
Scaling of an Analog Speed Reference

Refer to Analog Inputs on page 105.
Polarity
The polarity configuration can be selected as unipolar, bipolar, or reverse
disabled via P308 [Direction Mode]. When in Unipolar mode, the sign of the
speed reference value (and therefore direction of motor rotation) is determined
by P879 [Drive Logic Rslt] Bit 4 “Forward” and Bit 5 “Reverse.” When in Bipolar
mode, the sign of the speed reference value determines the direction of motor
rotation. When in Reverse Disable mode, negative speed reference values are
rejected and a zero speed value is used in their place.
Direction Mode Control
Direction Mode
308
Bipolar 1
Rev Disable 2
Max
0
Unipolar 0
X
Forward
Command Logic
Unipol 1
(+1)
Fwd
Unipol 0
(-1)
Rev

Trim
The speed reference source, specified in P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] or P550 [Spd Ref
B Sel], can be trimmed by variable amount. You have the option to trim the speed
reference by a percentage of the reference and/or by a fixed amount and can
dictate whether it is a positive or negative value. Refer to the PowerFlex 750-
Series Trim Block Diagram below.
Speed Ref A Sel
545
* Note: Analog Hi, Lo
scaling only used when 930 Speed Ref Source
‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol Legend Speed Units
Analog Input is selected 300
(Hz / RPM) 616 SpdTrimPrcRefSrc
Disabled (0)
617 Spd Trim Source
Spd Ref A Stpt 546 591 Spd Ref Sel Sts
TrmPct RefA Sel Trim Ref A Sel
Preset Speed 1 571 608 600

Ref Ref Ref
Man Sel 2 Sel 1 Sel 0
Spd Ref Command
Preset Speed 2 572
[26H3] Drive Logic Rslt 879 6 14 13 12 d7
Preset Speed 3 573
Disabled (0) Disabled (0) Drive Status 1 935 9 14 13 12 11 10
Preset Speed 4 574 0
Man Ref Ref Ref Ref Ref To
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Preset Speed 5 575 TrimPct RefA Stpt 609 Default Trim Ref A Stpt 601 Default Spd Ref (2)
1
( Ref A Auto ) [6A1]
Preset Speed 6 576
Preset Speed 7 577 Port 1 Reference 871 Port 1 Reference 871 2
( Ref B Auto )
Port 2 Reference 872 Port 2 Reference 872
MOP Reference 558 Port 3 Reference 873 Port 3 Reference 873 3
573 ( Preset3 Auto )
[21F3]
Parameter Port 4 Reference 874 Port 4 Reference 874 4
Aux Vel Feedback 134 Selection 574 ( Preset4 Auto )
[3H5] Port 5 Reference 875 Port 5 Reference 875
Parameter Parameter
Port 6 Reference 876 Selection Port 6 Reference 876 Selection 5
Port 1 Reference 871 Default 575 ( Preset5 Auto )
Port 2 Reference 872 6

Anlg In1 PortVal Anlg In1 PortVal 576 ( Preset6 Auto )
Port 3 Reference 873 (option port) (option port)
7
Port 4 Reference 874 Anlg In2 PortVal Anlg In2 PortVal 577 ( Preset7 Auto )
(option port) (option port) 17

Port 5 Reference 875 871 ( DPI Prt1 Man )
Port 6 Reference 876
TrmPct RefA AnHi 610 * Trim RefA AnlgHi 602 * 872 ( DPI Prt2 Man )
18
Option Ports:
TrmPct RefA AnLo 611 Trim RefA AnlgLo 603
Analog, EtherNet, 19
873 ( DPI Prt3 Man )
DeviceLogix
* x x + 20
Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547 874 ( DPI Prt4 Man )
Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548 Speed Ref A Mult 21

549
22
Disabled (0) Disabled (0) Disabled (0) 29

( Int ENet Man )
Spd Ref B Stpt 551 TrimPct RefB Stpt 613 Trim Ref B Stpt 605 30
( DevLogix Man )
DI ManRef
Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552 TrmPct RefB AnHi 614 Trim RefB AnlgHi 606 AnlgHi 564 16
( DI Man Sel )
Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553 TrmPct RefB AnLo 615 Trim RefB AnlgLo 607 DI ManRef *
Other Ref Sources
* Parameter
Selection
* Parameter * Parameter AnlgLo
565 Parameter
Selection
Other Ref Sources Selection Other Ref Sources Selection
DI Man Ref Sel 563
Speed Ref B Sel 550 TrmPct RefB Sel 612 Trim Ref B Sel 604
Alt Man
Ref AnHi 329 31
x + ( Alt Man Sel )
Alt Man 330
* Parameter
Speed Ref B Mult 554 x Ref AnLo Selection
Alt Man Ref Sel 328
Example 1
The following example shows the configuration and resultant of the percent trim
function:
• P545 [Spd Ref A Sel] = P546 [Spd Ref A Stpt]
• P546 [Spd Ref A Stpt] = 20.00 Hz
• P608 [TrmPct RefA Sel] = P609 [TrmPct RefA Stpt]
• P609 [TrmPct RefA Stpt] = 25%
• P2 [Commanded SpdRef ] = 25.00 Hz

If the speed reference = 20 Hz and if the trim percentage = 25%, the resulting
trim is 20 Hz x 25% = 5 Hz, which when added to the speed reference = 25 Hz.
As the speed reference changes, the amount of trim also changes because it is a
percent of the speed reference. If the trim percentage = -25%, then the resulting
trim is 20 Hz x -25% = -5 Hz, the speed reference = 15 Hz.
Example 2
The following example shows the configuration and resultant of the fixed
amount trim function:
• P600 [Trim Ref A Sel] = P601 [Trim Ref A Stpt]
• P601 [Trim Ref A Stpt] = 10.00 Hz
If the speed reference = 20 Hz, and if the trim set point = 10 Hz, the speed
reference is 20 Hz + 10 Hz = 30 Hz. If the trim set point = -10 Hz, then the
speed reference = 10 Hz.
Example 3
The following example shows the configuration and resultant of utilizing both
the perfect and fixed amount trim function:
• P608 [TrmPct RefA Sel] = P609 [TrmPct RefA Stpt]
• P609 [TrmPct RefA Stpt] = 25%
• P600 [Trim Ref A Sel] = P601 [Trim Ref A Stpt]
• P601 [Trim Ref A Stpt] = 10.00 Hz
If the speed reference = 20 Hz, and if the trim percentage = 25%, that resulting
trim is 20 Hz x 25% = 5 Hz, and if the trim set point = 10 Hz, the speed reference
is 20 Hz + 5 Hz + 10 Hz = 35 Hz. If the trim percentage = -25% and the trim set
point = -10 Hz, then the speed reference = 5 Hz.

Min/Max Fwd/Rev Speed
Maximum and minimum speed limits are applied to the forward and reverse
reference. The minimum speed limits create a band that the drive will not run
continuously within, but ramps through. This is due to the forward or reverse
minimum speeds, P522 [Min Fwd Speed] and P523 [Min Rev Speed]
respectively. If the reference is positive and less than the Min Fwd Speed, it is set
to the Min Fwd Speed minimum. If the reference is negative and greater than
Min Rev Speed minimum, it is set to the Min Rev Speed minimum. If the
minimum is not 0, hysteresis is applied at 0 to prevent bouncing between the Min
Fwd Speed and Min Rev Speed minimums. If the reference is greater than the
forward or reverse maximum speeds, P520 [Max Fwd Speed] and P521 [Max
Rev Speed] respectively, the speed reference is clamped to the their respective
maximum limit.
Speed Ref Limits
Min Speed Limits Max Speed Limits
Limit Limit
Min Fwd Speed 522

Min Rev Speed 523
Max Fwd Speed 520

Max Fwd Speed 521
Internal Load Dependent
Max Limit (Lift Application)
Trq Prove Status

PowerFlex 755 (LoadTestActv) 1103 5
See example below:

• P520 [Max Fwd Speed] = 60 Hz
• P521 [Max Rev Speed] = -60 Hz
• P522 [Min Fwd Speed] = 20 Hz
• P523 [Min Rev Speed] = -20 Hz
The picture below depicts how the Min/Max Fwd/Rev Speed bands and its
influence the drive. The BLUE line depicts the desired speed reference (set point)

and the RED line depicts the drive’s commanded speed reference (actual). Notice
there are different results, depicted by the grey dotted line, along the graph.
2 [Commanded SpdRef]
546 [Spd Ref A Stpt]
520 [Max Fwd Speed]
522 [Min Fwd Speed]
523 [Min Rev Speed]
521 [Max Rev Speed]
Maximum Frequency
P37 [Maximum Freq] defines the maximum reference frequency. The actual
output frequency can be greater as a result of slip compensation and other types
of regulation.

Speed Regulation A number of parameter are used to control speed regulation.
Overall Operation for Sensorless Vector Control and Volts per Hertz
Control
The drive takes the speed reference and adjusts it using a proportional and
integral regulator to compensate for slip and the programmed limits.
Overall Operation for Flux Vector Control
The drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the speed reference control
loop and compares it to the speed feedback. The speed regulator uses
proportional and integral gains along with other advanced tuning features to
adjust the torque reference that is sent to the motor. The torque reference is used
to operate the motor at the specified speed. The regulator is designed for optimal
bandwidth for changing speed and load. If an alternate feedback device is used
with automatic tachometer switchover, the alternate values of these parameters
are used.
Desired Speed Regulator Bandwidth - P636 [Speed Reg BW]
The Speed Regulator Bandwidth sets the speed loop bandwidth and determines
the dynamic behavior of the speed loop. As bandwidth increases, the speed loop
becomes more responsive and can track a faster changing speed reference. A
change to this parameter causes an automatic update of P645 [Speed Reg Kp],
P647 [Speed Reg Ki], and P644 [Spd Err Fltr BW]. To disable the automatic gain
and filter update, set this parameter to a value of zero. The configuration settings
for Inertia Adaption (PowerFlex 755 only) is automatically selected when this
feature is enabled.
The maximum allowable value of this parameter is limited by the ratio of P646
[Spd Reg Max Kp] to P76 [Total Inertia], and the type of speed feedback source
in use (encoder versus open loop). For operation following an automatic tach
switchover, the bandwidth specified in P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] is used.
Total Inertia of Motor and Load - P76 [Total Inertia]

The Total Inertia is the time in seconds for a motor coupled to its load to
accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque. This value is calculated
during an Inertia Tune, after the motor has ramped up to speed and down and
back down to zero speed. Adjusting this parameter causes the drive to calculate
and change the speed regulator gains.

Speed Loop Damping - P653 [Spd Loop Damping]
Sets the damping factor of the vector speed loop’s characteristic equation.
Damping affects the integral gain when a non-zero bandwidth has been entered.
A damping factor of 1.0 is considered critical damping. Lowering the damping
produces faster load disturbance rejection, but can cause a more oscillatory
response. When the speed regulator bandwidth is zero, gains are set manually and
damping factor has no effect.
Integral Gain - P647 [Speed Reg Ki]
Sets the integral gain of the speed regulator (in FV Motor Control modes). This
value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in P636 [Speed
Reg BW], P645 [Speed Reg Kp] and P653 [Spd Loop Damping]. Integral gain
can be manually adjusted by setting P636 [Speed Reg BW] to a value of zero.
Integral gain has effective scaling of (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed).
Proportional Gain - P645 [Speed Reg Kp]
This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in P636

[Speed Reg BW] and P76 [Total Inertia]. The proportional gain can be manually
adjusted by setting P636 [Speed Reg BW] to a value of zero. Proportional gain
has effective scaling of (per unit torque) / (per unit speed). The maximum
allowable value of this parameter is limited by P76 [Total Inertia] and P646 [Spd
Reg Max Kp].
Feed Forward Gain - P643 [SpeedReg AntiBckup]
Controls over-shoot/under-shoot in the step response of the Vector Control

mode speed regulator. Over-shoot/under-shoot can be effectively eliminated
with a setting of 0.3, which removes backup of the motor shaft when zero speed is
reached. This parameter has no affect on the drive's response to load changes. A
value of zero disables this feature.
Servo Lock Gain - P642 [Servo Lock Gain] (PowerFlex 755 only)
Sets the gain of an additional integrator in the Vector Control mode speed
regulator. The effect of Servo Lock is to increase stiffness of the speed response to
a load disturbance. It behaves like a position regulator with velocity feed forward,
but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator. Gain is normally set
to less than 1/3 speed regulator bandwidth, or for the desired response. A value of
zero disables this feature.

Torque Reference The Torque Reference is a reference value in percent that represents the rated
torque development capability of the motor. During the autotune process,
measurements are made to determine the motor equivalent circuit including
connected impedance from drive terminals to the motor. Based on entered motor
nameplate information and autotune results, the Torque Reference is established
as 100% or 1 PU equal to the rated N•m (lb•ft) torque development capability
of the motor at Full Load ampere rating within ±5% without encoder feedback,
possibly within ±2% with encoder feedback.
True Torque control at the motor shaft can only occur when P35 [Motor Ctrl
Mode] is configured for one of the Flux Vector control mode choices. Likewise,
Torque Reference parameters are only active when Flux Vector control modes in
P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode], options 3 “Induction FV,” 6 “PM FV,” and 10 “IPM FV.”
Internal Torque Reference Source
The inherent Torque Reference source (default setting in any of the applicable
FV Control modes only) is the output from the Speed Regulator parameter,
P660 [SReg Output] in percent. As it passes through trimming and limiting
functions, it ultimately becomes a commanding torque reference, P690 [Limited
Trq Ref ], and an input to and for the inverter Current control to output voltage
and frequency to the motor and regulate torque producing vector of current
accordingly. Consequently, the motor develops torque as necessary to aid the
Speed Regulator to maintain minimal speed error between commanded speed
and speed feedback.

Figure 30 - Torque Reference Path

Max Fwd Speed Speed Control – Regulator
520
SReg Output
Final Speed Ref
660
597
Filtered Lead/Lag
640 PI Regulator Filter
Limit SpdFdbk
Lead/Lag
Filter
521
Droop RPM
Max Rev Speed Speed Reg Kp 645 620
at FLA
Active Vel Torque Reference
Speed Reg Ki 647
Fdbk
131 Speed Reg BW 636
( Spd Reg Out )

Torque Control
Actv SpTqPs
Mode
313 Torque Step
686 Inertia
Adaption
Limited Trq Ref
690
+
+ FOC
Speed/
FrctnComp Torque/ Perm Magn
Mode
+ Notch -
FrctnComp Position + +
Filter & Vector
1560 Out Mode + +
Control
1567 Selection Limit
Friction Comp Load

Current
Observer/ Processing
Estimator
640
Torque
Filtered 685 Limit
SpdFdbk Generation Motor
Selected Trq Ref
Trq Ref A Sel E1
675
Torque
Ref Gear
Trq Ref B Sel
Selection
680
Load
E2
PID Torque
Trim / Excl
Selection
1079
PID Output Sel
There are additional internal Torque Reference sources within the drive such as
from a variety of Position Regulator outputs for the motor to develop the
corresponding amount of torque necessary to follow a point to point position
profile, cam profile, maintain a set position or follow a Motion Planner directed
profile.
The torque reference can be trimmed by Friction Compensation, Inertia

Adaption, or Load Observer estimator as the application may dictate. Torque
Step, an amount of torque reference step change, can be injected to simulate a
load disturbance.
External Torque Reference Source

The Torque Reference can also be established via analog or communication
media as a Setpoint reference or brought into the drive externally from a variety
of sources including an independent controller or another drive (for load sharing
configurations).
When the PowerFlex drive is operated in Torque mode, an alternate source of

reference, generally an external signal, is directed to the Torque Control as an
active torque reference. Once the scaling is complete on both P675 [Trq Ref A

Sel] and P680 [Trq Ref B Sel], the output can be summed together and along
with the output of “Torque Trim,” to become P4 [Commanded Trq].
Figure 31 - Torque Control - Reference Scale and Trim

Trq Ref B Sel 680
scaling only used when
Analog Input is selected
0.0 ( Disabled )
Trq Ref B Stpt 681 ( Setpoint ) Default
From DIO Option Card ( Analog In 1 )

Parameter
Selection
Trq RefB AnlgHi 682
Trq Ref A Sel 675 Trq RefB AnlgLo 683
*
0.0 ( Disabled )
Trq Ref A Stpt
676 ( Setpoint ) Default

Default 0
Parameter 1
Selection PID Output Sel
Trq RefA AnlgHi 677
Trq RefA AnlgLo 678
* 1079
3 = Torque Excl
4 = Torque Trim
PID Output Meter
(PID Torque Trim)
3,4 Commanded
1093
Trq
Bit Other
0 4
Source
Parameter Other
DI Torque StptA 195 Selection x + To Torq Ctrl,
Trq Ref B Mult 684 Process Ctrl
3
0
Other
Trq Ref A Mult 679 x
3
0
For additional and expanded illustration of the Torque Control, refer to the
PowerFlex 755 Control Block Diagrams starting on page 375.
The following are key parameters related to the Torque Reference control
illustrated in Figure 30 and Figure 31.
P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] - Active Speed Torque Position Mode

Displays the Speed, Torque, Position Mode that is active, based on the dynamic
selection of modes A, B, C, and D, per P309…P312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode n], and
digital input conditions programmed via P181 [DI SpTqPs Sel 0] and P182 [DI
SpTqPs Sel 1]. In some cases, such as operation in the SLAT min/max modes, the
final regulation mode may be forced into Speed Regulation. Refer to the Speed,
Torque, and Position mode bits in P935 [Drive Status 1] that indicate the active
regulation mode of the drive when it is running.
P675 [Trq Ref A Sel] and P680 [Trq Ref B Sel] - Torque Reference A, B Select
Selects the source for a torque reference, used when the drive is configured to
command torque according to P309…312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode n]. The values of
the torque reference sources are added together to provide a single torque
reference.
P676 [Trq Ref A Stpt] and P681 [Trq Ref B Stpt] - Torque Reference A, B
Setpoint

A digital torque value to be used as a possible source for P675 and P680
respectively.
P677 [Trq Ref A AnlgHi] and P682 [Trq Ref B AnlgHi] - Torque Reference A,
B Analog High
Used only when an analog input is selected as a torque reference according to
P676 or P681. Sets the torque value that corresponds to [Anlg Inn Hi] on an I/O
module or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scaling
throughout the range.
P678 [Trq Ref A AnlgLo] and P683 [Trq Ref B AnlgLo] - Torque Reference A,
B Analog Low
Used only when an analog input is selected as a torque reference according to
P676 [Trq Ref A Stpt] or P681 [Trq Ref B Stpt]. Sets the torque value that
corresponds to [Anlg Inn Lo] on an I/O module or on the main control (product
dependent). This establishes scaling throughout the range.
P679 [Trq Ref A Mult] and P684 [Trq Ref B Mult] - Torque Reference A, B
Multiplier
A multiplier that is applied to the values referenced by P675 [Trq Ref A Sel] and
P680 [Trq Ref B Sel] respectively. A value of 1 leaves the reference unaffected.
Negative values invert the reference.
Refer to Speed Torque Position on page 266 for an explanation of Speed Torque
Position mode choices for operating in various specific modes utilizing Internal
and/or External torque reference sources.

Speed Torque Position The PowerFlex 750-Series drives have the ability to have four separate Speed
Torque Position modes with the following parameters:
• P309 [SpdTrqPsn Mode A]
• P310 [SpdTrqPsn Mode B]
• P311 [SpdTrqPsn Mode C]
• P312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode D]
Possible selections for the above Speed/Torque/Position parameters are as

follows:
• “Zero Torque” (0) – Drive operates as a torque regulator with P685
[Selected Trq Ref ] forced to a constant value of zero torque.
• “Speed Reg” (1) – Drive operates as a speed regulator. P685 [Selected Trq
Ref ] comes from P660 [SReg Output] plus P699 [Inertia Comp Out].
• “Torque Ref ” (2) – Drive operates as a torque regulator. P685 [Selected
Trq Ref ] comes from P4 [Commanded Trq]. Under some conditions such
as jogging or performing a ramp to stop operation, the drive automatically
bypasses this selection and temporarily switches to Speed Regulation
mode.
• “SLAT Min” (3) – Drive operates in “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque –
Minimum select” mode. This is a special mode of operation used primarily
in web handling applications. The drive typically operates as a torque
regulator, provided that the P4 [Commanded Trq] value is algebraically
smaller in value than the speed regulator’s output. The drive can
automatically enter Speed Regulation mode, based on conditions within
the speed regulator and the magnitude of the speed regulator’s output
relative to the torque reference.
• “SLAT Max” (4) – Drive operates in “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque –
Maximum select” mode. This is a special mode of operation used primarily
in web handling applications. The drive typically operates as a torque
regulator, provided that the P4 [Commanded Trq] value is algebraically
larger in value than the speed regulator’s output. The drive can
automatically enter Speed Regulation mode, based on conditions within
the speed regulator and the magnitude of the speed regulator’s output
relative to the torque reference.
• “Sum” (5) – Drive operates as a speed regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref ]
comes from P660 [SReg Output] plus torque adders summed with P4
[Commanded Trq].
• “Profilier” (6) PowerFlex 755 – Drive uses the Speed Profiler / Position
Indexer function. The drive operates as either a speed or position regulator.
Mode of operation depends on the configuration of the Step Types in the
Profiler/Indexer table.
• “Psn PTP” (7) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq
Ref ] has the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in
Point-to-Point mode and uses its Point-to-Point position reference.

• “Psn Camming” (8) PowerFlex 755 – Drive operates as a position

regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref ] has the same source as in Sum mode.
The position control is active in Position CAM mode and uses its PCAM
Planner position and speed reference.
• “Psn PLL” (9) PowerFlex 755 – Drive operates as a position regulator.
P685 [Selected Trq Ref ] has the same source as in Sum mode. The
position control is active in Position Phase Lock Loop mode and uses its
PLL Planner position and speed reference.
• “Psn Direct” (10) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected
Trq Ref ] has the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is
active in Direct mode and uses its Direct Position Reference.
• “Psn SpdlOrnt” (11) PowerFlex 755 – Drive operates in the Positioning
mode to position the load side of a machine to P1582 [SO Setpoint].
These modes selections only apply to the Flux Vector control modes in P35
[Motor Ctrl Mode], options 3 “Induction FV,” 6 “PM FV,” and 10 “IPM FV.”
These parameters select between speed regulation, torque regulation, or position
regulation operation of the drive. The source of P685 [Selected Trq Ref ] is
determined by the selection in these parameters when P181 [DI SpTqPs Sel 0]
and P182 [DI SpTqPs Sel 1] have selected “Disabled” or selected bits that are
logic low. In P935 [Drive Status 1], three bits are provided that indicate the
Regulation mode of the drive when it is running. Bit 21 “Speed Mode” is set
when the drive is running with the speed regulator active. Similarly, Bit 22
“PositionMode” and Bit 23 “Torque Mode” indicate when their respective
regulation modes are active. Under some conditions, the active Torque mode can
be forced into Speed mode regardless of the setting of Speed/Torque/Position.
P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] indicates this and reflects the mode selection that is in
use.

Figure 32 - PowerFlex 755 Firmware Flowchart

FrctnComp
FrctnComp Mode
Out
InertiaTrqAdd
1560 1567
Disabled 708 [24B4]
0 Inertia
Friction
0 Adaption
From Comp
1
Spd Ref Int Ramp Ref 1 Total Inertia 76 Inertia
[7A3] Motor Acceleration Adaption Disabled
1561 FrctnComp Trig 0
Feedback 0
Ext Ramped Ref 1562 FrctnComp Hyst
2
700
1563 FrctnComp Time Inertia Adapt BW 705
Filtered SpdFdbk
3 1564 FrctnComp Stick InertiaAdaptGain 706
640
1565 FrctnComp Slip ***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***
1566 FrctnComp Rated Logic Ctrl State Min/Max Cntrl

(Forced Spd) (Forced Spd)
Zero Torque 0
0 Selected Filtered Trq
Trq Ref Ref
Speed Reg 1 0 0 + - To Torq Ctrl
From Spd Reg 660 + 685 + II
+ 689 Current
[10I3] + + + [23a B2],
SReg Output Torq Reg 2 [10D5] R
1 Notch [23b B2],
SLAT [24D2],
Inertia Comp Out Min 3 1 [25D2]
Min Torque
686
From Spd Ref 699 Step
[7C4] SLAT Notch Fltr Freq 687
Max 4
Max Notch Fltr Atten 688
Load
Sum 5 Estimate
[25C5] 707
+
+ Load
Observer
6
Load 2
Profiler Total Inertia 76
Observer/
Motor Acceleration Disabled
Psn P2P 7 Estimator 0
Feedback 0
Psn Camming 8
[6A1], Load Observer BW 711
[6D2], 704
Commanded Trq Psn PLL 9 [10D5],
[11D2], InAdp LdObs Mode
From Torq Ref 4
[21H4] Psn Direct 10 [11I1],
[12H5],
[16H2]
SpdTrqPsn Mode A Actv SpTqPs
309
ABCD
Mode
Select
SpdTrqPsn Mode B 310 313
0 0 Drive Status 1
SpdTrqPsn Mode C 0 1
311 935 21 22 23
1 0 Select
SpdTrqPsn Mode D 312 1 1 Logic Torque Mode
PositionMode
DI SpTqPs Sel 1 182 SLAT Err Stpt 314 Speed Mode
DI SpTqPs Sel 0 181 SLAT Dwell Time 315
Mtr Option Cnfg
(Zero TrqStop)
(Trq ModeStop) 40 0 1 2
(Trq ModeJog)
The following are key parameters related to the Torque Reference control
illustrated in Figure 32.
P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] - Active Speed Torque Position Mode

Displays the Speed, Torque, Position Mode that is active, based on the dynamic
selection of modes A, B, C, and D, per P309…P312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode n], and
digital input conditions programmed via P181 [DI SpTqPs Sel 0] and P182 [DI
SpTqPs Sel 1]. In some cases, such as operation in the SLAT min/max modes, the
final regulation mode may be forced into Speed Regulation. Refer to the Speed,
Torque, and Position mode bits in P935 [Drive Status 1] that indicate the active
regulation mode of the drive when it is running.
P314 [SLAT Err Stpt] - Speed Limited Adjustable Torque, Error Setpoint
Sets the magnitude of P641 [Speed Error] at which the SLAT function will
release its Forced Speed Mode signal. This condition must exist for the time
specified by P315 [SLAT Dwell Time]. Once released, the drive can operate as a
torque regulator, depending on the relative levels of P660 [SReg Output] and P4

[Commanded Trq]. This parameter will be entered in units of Hz or RPM,

depending on the value of P300 [Speed Units].
P315 [SLAT Dwell Time] - Speed Limited Adjustable Torque, Dwell Time
Sets the time period that P641 [Speed Error] must exceed the P314 [SLAT Err
Stpt] magnitude in order to return to min/max torque mode.
P675 [Trq Ref A Sel] and P680 [Trq Ref B Sel] - Torque Reference A, B Select
Selects the source for a torque reference, used when the drive is configured to
command torque according to P309…312 [SpdTrqPsn Mode n]. The values of
the torque reference sources are added together to provide a single torque
reference.
P685 [Selected Trq Ref ] - Selected Torque Reference

Displays the torque value of the selected torque reference (dynamic selection
according to P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode]). This value will be summed with P686
[Torque Step]. The result is then applied to the input of the notch filter located
in the Vector torque reference section.
P686 [Torque Step] - Torque Step

Defines the amount of torque reference step change to simulate a load
disturbance, used to test the response. This value is added to the main torque
reference P685 [Selected Trq Ref ], and then applied to the input of the notch
filter located in the Vector control torque reference section.
P687 [Notch Fltr Freq] - Notch Filter Frequency

The center frequency for the Notch filter located in the Vector control torque
reference section. To disable, set to zero.
P688 [Notch Fltr Atten] - Notch Filter Attenuation

Sets the attenuation of the notch filter located in the Vector control torque
reference section. Attenuation is the ratio of the notch filter input signal to its
output at the P687 [Notch Fltr Freq]. An attenuation of 30 means that the notch
output is 1/30th of the input at the specified frequency.
Attenuation
Freq (Hz)
P689 [Filtered Trq Ref ] - Filtered Torque Reference

Displays the output of the notch filter defined by P687 and P688. If P704
[InAdp LdObs Mode] indicates that either the Inertia Adaption or Load
Estimate functions are active, then the filtered torque reference will also be
modified by these functions.

P690 [Limited Trq Ref ] - Limited Torque Reference

Displays the torque reference value after filtering (P689), power limits, torque
limits, and current limits have been applied. This parameter is the most effective
VFD representative Torque Reference value to be monitored for motor load
assessment and to be passed on to other drives for load sharing applications
involving multiple drives. It represents the percent of the rated torque being
developed at the motor shaft.
For additional and expanded illustration of the Torque Control, refer to the
PowerFlex 755 Control Block Diagrams starting on page 375.
Speed Torque Position Modes
Zero Torque
Operation in Zero Torque mode enables the motor to be fully fluxed and ready to
rotate when a speed command or torque command is given. This mode can be
used for a cyclical application where throughput is a high priority. The control
logic can select zero torque during the rest portion of a machine cycle instead of
stopping the drive. When the cycle start occurs, instead of issuing a start to the
drive, a Speed Regulator mode can be selected. The drive immediately accelerates
the motor without the need for flux up time.
IMPORTANT Zero Torque can excessively heat the motor if operated in this mode for
extended periods of time. A load or flux current is still present when the drive is
operating in Zero Torque mode. A motor with an extended speed range or
separate cooling methods (blower) can be required.
Speed Regulation
Operating as a speed regulator is the most common and simplest mode to set up.
Examples of speed regulated applications are blowers, conveyors, feeders, pumps,
saws, and tools. In a speed regulated application, the speed regulator output
generates the torque reference. Note that under steady state conditions the speed
feedback is steady while the torque reference is a constantly adjusting signal. This
is required to maintain the desired speed. In a transient state, the torque reference
changes dramatically to compensate for a speed change. A short duration change
in speed is the result of increasing or decreasing the load very rapidly.
For the PowerFlex 755 drive, the Inertia Compensation, Inertia Adaption, and
the Friction Compensation influence the output of the speed regulator.
Torque Regulation
A torque regulated application can be described as any process requiring some

tension control. An example is a winder or unwinder with material being drawn
or pulled with a specific tension required. The process also requires that another

element set the speed. Configuring the drive for torque regulation requires P309
[SpdTrqPsn Mode A] to be set to 2 “Torque Ref.” In addition, a reference signal
must be linked to the torque reference. For example, when Analog Input 0 is used
for the torque reference, P675 [Trq Ref A Sel] needs to be configured for “Anlg
In0 Value.”
When operating in a Torque mode, the motor current is adjusted to achieve the
desired torque. If the material being wound or unwound breaks, the load
decreases dramatically and the motor can potentially go into a runaway
condition.
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) Modes

The SLAT minimum and SLAT maximum modes are for applications that
require a smooth transition from a torque mode to a speed mode operation and
vice versa. When operating in a Torque mode, the motor current is adjusted to
achieve the desired torque. For example; web handling, center winders and center
unwinders or other mechanical drive train where the drive is normally following a
torque reference, but a break, disruption in flow or slippage could occur causing
the need to prevent a runaway situation, which is best controlled in speed mode.
Direction of the applied torque and direction of the material movement

determine whether SLAT minimum or SLAT maximum mode should be used.
SLAT Minimum
Choose SLAT minimum mode when material direction and speed reference is
considered “Forward” and a positive speed reference value for the Speed
Regulator. The Speed Regulator output then creates a positive Torque Reference
command value.
Typically configure a positive speed reference value slightly greater than what is
equivalent to maintain planned material line speed. This will in turn force the
speed regulator into saturation (the speed reference is slightly above the speed
feedback) commanding a “more positive” torque reference than what the torque
mode torque reference value is. In this scenario the drive would follow the torque
reference until there was a breakage or slippage in the application.
When the drive is following a torque reference (torque mode in SLAT minimum
mode), either one of two conditions will force the drive into following the speed
reference in (speed mode):
• The output of the speed regulator becomes less than the torque reference.
The reaction when triggered at the very point that the torque reference
value in speed mode is mathematically less than the value in torque mode,
generally results in greater velocity overshoot. This is the same condition
that would exist in minimum torque /speed mode without SLAT features.
The following plot represents the result without using SLAT features.

Figure 33 - Minimum Torque Speed without SLAT
Internal Torque
Command
At Speed
Relay
Load Step
(Decreased)
Speed
Feedback
Torque Regulator Speed Regulator
Or
• The speed error becomes negative (the speed feedback becomes greater
than the speed reference). This would force the control into speed
regulator mode, a condition called Forced Speed Mode FSM.
By forcing the drive to enter speed mode FSM, the transition occurs earlier than
it would have if the reaction was triggered at the very point that the torque
reference value in speed mode is mathematically less than the value in torque
mode, generally resulting in less velocity overshoot.
P314 [SLAT Err Stpt] and P315 [SLAT Dwell Time] allow setting some
hysteresis for turning off the forced speed mode. They are set to 0 as default so
that there is no hysteresis. In SLAT minimum mode, [SLAT Err Stpt] sets how
much less the speed feedback should be than the speed reference before turning
off the forced speed mode. The SLAT dwell time sets how long the speed error
must exceed the SLAT error set point before turning off the forced speed mode.
At the time that the drive switches from torque mode to forced speed mode, the
speed regulator output is loaded with the internal motor torque reference to
create a smooth transition. In order for the drive to switch from speed mode back
to torque mode, forced speed mode (if active) must first be turned off. Forced
speed mode will turn off when the speed error is greater than the SLAT error set
point for the SLAT dwell time.
With default parameter settings, this will occur when the speed error becomes
positive.
When forced speed mode is off, the drive will switch back to Torque mode when
the speed regulator output becomes greater than the torque reference.

Empirically setting values P314 [SLAT Err Stpt] and P315 [SLAT Dwell Time]
other than default may help create even smoother transitions.
P314 [SLAT Err Stpt] Speed Error < 0
P315 [SLAT Dwell Time] Forced Speed
Low Pass Off On Mode (FSM)
Filter
Speed Error > SLAT Setpoint

for SLAT Time
FSM State Controller
FSM - On Internal Torque

Speed Regulator Reference (ITR)
Application Dependant PI Output (SRO)
Speed Reference Bias + Regulator Min
– Speed Error Off
Select
Motor Speed Feedback
External Torque
Reference (ETR)
Paper Winder Application Example
The drive is set for SLAT Minimum mode, so that the drive normally runs in
Torque mode and follows P675 [Trq Ref A Sel]. [Trq Ref A Sel] comes from an
external controller and is approximately 60% of motor torque during the
snapshot (shown below). The speed reference, also from an external controller, is
set just above the speed feedback to saturate the speed regulator while in Torque
mode. The following snapshot captures what occurs in the drive during a break in
the web.
Figure 34 - SLAT Min to Forced Speed Mode
Small amount of overshoot

during web break.
Motor Speed Feedback (RPM)
Speed Regulator Saturated

Speed Regulator Out (%)
Motor Torque Reference (%) Speed Regulator is preloaded with

Motor Torque Reference.
Speed Error (RPM)
Speed Error becomes negative.
Web break occurs.

Torque Mode Speed Mode

SLAT Maximum Mode
Choose SLAT Maximum mode when material direction and speed reference is
considered “Reverse” and a negative speed reference value for the Speed
Regulator. The Speed Regulator output then creates a negative Torque Reference
command value.
In SLAT Maximum mode, a speed reference is typically configured to force the

speed regulator into saturation (the speed reference is slightly below the speed
feedback which is equivalent to maintain planned line speed). In this scenario the
drive follows the torque reference until there is breakage or slippage in the
application.
In SLAT Maximum mode, the drive switches from Torque mode to Speed mode
when either one of the two following conditions occur.
• The output of the speed regulator becomes more than the torque
reference. This is the same condition that exists in Maximum Torque/
Speed mode without SLAT features.
Or
• The speed error becomes positive (the speed feedback becomes less than
the speed reference). This forces the control into speed regulator mode, a
condition called Forced Speed Mode (FSM).
By forcing the drive to enter FSM, the transition occurs earlier than it would have
if the reaction was triggered at the very point that the torque reference value in
speed mode is mathematically more than the value in torque mode, generally
resulting in less velocity overshoot.
P314 [SLAT Err Stpt] and P315 [SLAT Dwell Time] allow for setting some
hysteresis for turning off the forced speed mode. They are set to 0 as default so
that there is no hysteresis. In SLAT maximum mode, [SLAT Err Stpt] sets how
much more the speed feedback (algebraically sign sensitive) should be than the
speed reference before turning off the forced speed mode. [SLAT Dwell Time]
sets how long the speed error must be less than the SLAT error set point before
turning off the forced speed mode.
At the time that the drive switches from torque mode to speed mode the speed
regulator output is loaded with the value from the torque reference to create a
smooth transition.
In order for the drive to switch from speed mode back to torque mode, forced
speed mode (if active) must first be turned off. FSM will turn off when the speed
error is less than the SLAT error set point for the SLAT dwell time.

With default parameter settings, this will occur when the speed error becomes
negative. When forced speed mode is off, the drive will switch back to torque
mode when the speed regulator output becomes less than the torque reference.
P314 [SLAT Err Stpt] Speed Error > 0

P315 [SLAT Dwell Time] Forced Speed
Low Pass Off On Mode (FSM)
Filter
Speed Error < SLAT Setpoint

for SLAT Time
FSM State Controller
FSM - On Internal Torque

Speed Regulator Reference (ITR)
Application Dependant PI Output (SRO)
+
Speed Reference Bias – Speed Error Regulator Max Off
Select
Motor Speed Feedback
External Torque
Reference (ETR)
Sum
Configuring the drive in this mode enables an external torque input to be

summed with the torque command generated by the speed regulator. This mode
requires both a speed reference and a torque reference to be linked. This mode
can be used for applications that have precise speed changes with critical time
constraints. If the torque requirement and timing is known for a given speed
change, then the external torque input can be used to preload the integrator. The
timing of the speed change and the application of an external torque command
change must be coordinated for this mode to be useful. The “Sum Spd/Trq”
mode will then work as a feed forward to the torque regulator.

Notes:

Chapter 5
Drive Features
Topic Page
Data Logging 277
Energy Savings 282
High Speed Trending 283
Position Homing 292
Data Logging This wizard logs the values of up to six parameters in a single drive at a specified
interval for some period of time, with the minimum sample rate one second. The
information is saved as a comma delimited *.csv file for use with Microsoft Excel
or any other spreadsheet program. Clicking Next lets you configure the data
logger. When data logging is completed, click Finish to close the wizard. If you
click Finish before the data logging is completed, only the data collected up to
that point is saved in the file. You can cancel the wizard at any time by clicking
Cancel or the Close icon. All logged data is lost, and the file is deleted.
Configuration Example
1. Connect to the drive that you want to trend via DriveExecutive,
DriveExplorer, Logix Designer Drive AOPs, or Connected Components
Workbench software tool.
2. Click the Show Wizard icon .

Chapter 5 Drive Features
Depending if you click the wand icon or down arrow icon a particular
wizard selection dialog box appears. Select the Data Logging Wizard.
3. Once the Welcome screen loads, click Next.

Drive Features Chapter 5
The data logging wizard can be configured to log up to six parameters at a

minimum sample rate of one second for a specified time or number of
samples.
4. To find a parameter that you want to log, select the Port, and then scroll
through the parameter lists, file folders, diagnostic items or use the find
function.
5. To add the parameter to the data log list, select the parameter on the left-
side list and click the right arrow .
That parameter appears in the first available line entry on the right side.
6. To remove a parameter from the data log list, select the parameter on the
right side and click the left arrow .
That parameter disappears from that line entry and all subsequent entries
are moved up.

In the configuration example below, the data logging wizard is configured

to log six drive parameters consisting of Output Frequency, Motor Velocity
Feedback, Torque Current Feedback, Output Current, Output Voltage,
and DC Bus Voltage parameter values.
7. Click Next.
This prompt for a save as dialog box that saves the data log information as a
comma delimited *.csv file for use with Microsoft Excel or any other
spreadsheet program.

8. To start the data logging, click Save.

As the data logging begins, a Time Left timer counts down as a blue
progress bar moves to the right.
When the data logging has finished, a Logging Complete message is

displayed.
Each column’s width is adjustable.

Below is a spreadsheet example of data logged. Use a spreadsheet program

to open the *.csv file.
Energy Savings Setting the motor control mode P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] to 2 “Induct Econ” or
Induction Economizer mode enables additional energy savings within the drive.
To be specific, additional energy savings can be realized in constant torque
applications that have constant speed reduced load periods.
Induction Economizer
Induction Economizer mode consists of the sensorless vector control with an
additional energy savings function. When steady state speed is achieved, the
economizer becomes active and automatically adjusts the drive output voltage
based on applied load. By matching output voltage to applied load, the motor
efficiency is optimized. Reduced load commands a reduction in motor flux
current.
To optimize the performance of the Induction Economizer mode, adjust the

following parameters:
• P47 [Econ At Ref Ki] - Integral gain that determines the response of the
output voltage when the output frequency is at reference.
• P48 [Econ AccDec Ki] - Integral gain that determines the response of the
output voltage when the output frequency is accelerating or decelerating to
the reference setpoint.
• P49 [Econ AccDec Kp] - Proportional gain that determines the response
of the output voltage when the output frequency is accelerating or
decelerating to the reference setpoint.

High Speed Trending The high speed trending wizard configures the internal trending of the drive,
downloads that trend configuration to the drive, and uploads the trended data
from the drive when finished. This information is saved as a comma delimited
*.csv file for use with Microsoft Excel or any other spreadsheet program.
The high speed trending can be configured to trend up to eight parameters with
4096 samples for each parameter, at a minimum sample rate of 1.024
milliseconds. It can also be configured to trend up to four parameters with 1024
samples for each parameter, at a minimum sample rate of 256 microseconds.
These are defined by the drive. Future drives may offer different options.
The PowerFlex 755 drives have the High Speed Trending functionality.
PowerFlex 753 drives do not have the High Speed Trending functionality.
You can run only one wizard at a time.
Configuration Example
1. Connect to the drive that you want to trend via DriveExecutive,

DriveExplorer, Logix Designer Drive AOPs, or Connected Components
Workbench software tool.
2. Click the Show Wizard icon .

Depending if you click the wand icon or down arrow icon a particular
wizard selection dialog box appears.
3. Select the High Speed Trend Wizard.

4. Once the Welcome screen loads, Click Next.
The Configure Trend window lets you customize the following high speed trend
details:
• Trend Mode – dictates number of trend buffers, total number of samples,
and the minimum interval sample rate.
• Pre-Trigger samples – dictates number of samples to include in the trend
before the trigger.
• Sample Interval – the time interval between trend data samples.
• Trigger Setup – dictates how the data trend is triggered
a. Comparing two parameters
b. Comparing a parameter against a constant
c. A test bit in a parameter

• Trend Buffers – dictates the drive and/or peripheral parameters and

diagnostic items that are trended.
5. To configure the Trigger Setup and Trend Buffers, click the Ellipse button

6. Select the parameter that you want to log by selecting the Port, and then
scroll through the parameter lists, file folders, diagnostic items or use the
find function and click Apply.
The best way to remove a parameter selection is to uncheck the check box in the
Use column.
“Not used” is downloaded instead of the selected parameter. The next time you
launch the wizard, that buffer has no parameter set.
In the example below, the trend buffers are configured with five drive parameters
consisting of Output Frequency, Motor Velocity Feedback, DC Bus Voltage,
Output Current, Output Voltage parameter values. The trend is configured for a
total of 4096 samples that include 500 samples before the trigger, at a sample rate
of 1.024 ms. The trigger of the high speed trend is the Motor Velocity Feedback
greater than zero.
This means the following:

• The drive starts trending.
• When the motor starts rotating forward, the trend starts wrapping up.
• The drive continues trending for about 3.7 seconds to use up the
remaining 3596 samples.

• The drive stops trending and is ready for uploading.
7. Click Download once the Download Succeeded message has

appeared and the Trend Status is Ready.

8. Click Start .
The Trend Status is Running and Download, Upload and Start buttons are
unavailable.
The trending is in process when you see the Trend Status is in the Finishing
state. You can stop the trend at any point in time by clicking Stop. You can
then upload all of the data gathered so far.

The trending has ended when the Trend Status has changed from
Finishing state to the Complete state.
Click Upload . This prompts a process that uploads the trend data
from the drive and saves the information as a comma delimited *.csv file for
use with Microsoft Excel or any other spreadsheet program.
Click Save to start the upload trend data process.

Below is an example of trended data. Use a spreadsheet program to open

the *.csv file.
Column C here lines up with what is displayed in DriveExplorer or any

other drive software tool. Column D shows the value that the drive is using
internally. Column D has more accurate data, but you may not have a use
for the extra precision. You cannot get the data in column D from any
other wizard or software tool.

Block Diagram

Position Homing The Homing function is a standalone function of the drive that moves the motor
to a home position defined by a switch that is connected to a homing input on a
feedback option module, digital input resident on the Main Control Board, or on
an I/O option module if there is no feedback module. This function is typically
run only once after the drive is powered up or if the drive has become lost. If a
universal feedback option module is used, the homing input is part of the general
Registration hardware. To perform the homing sequences that require this
module, the drive has to configure the Registration function on the module itself.
If a Position Absolute move is made, it is necessary to have performed either a

Find Home or a Position Redefine procedure at some time after drive powerup.
Until this is done, Bit 19 “Home Not Set” in [Profile Status] remains set,
preventing the profile from executing.
The Find Home state is entered from the Initialize Step state when the profile is
enabled with the Find Home bit set in the Profile Command parameter. The
drive performs a procedure to establish the home position. The procedure
consists of a move in Speed mode at the specified Find Home Speed. A digital
input is used to sense when the home position limit switch has been traversed. If
there is an encoder, the registration logic is used to latch the motor position when
the limit switch is reached as the home position. The Find Home function
handles three possible cases; Switch and Marker, Switch only, and Marker only.
Homing Input Selection
With Feedback Device

Both the universal feedback option modules and the encoder feedback option
modules provide a dedicated homing input. The homing input on the feedback
module that is selected by P135[Pos Fdbk Sel] is used for homing. If the marker
pulse from an encoder is used in the homing function it is also selected by
P135[Pos Fdbk Sel].
Without Feedback Device

If the drive does not have a feedback module and a selection in P135[Psn Fdbk
Sel] of “simulator feedback” is made the homing input that the drive uses is
selected from any digital inputs residing on an attached I/O module by P734 [DI
OL Home Limit]. There is no marker pulse input associated with “open loop”
homing.

Homing Activation
A homing function can be selected by either a digital input or a parameter. The

digital input is selected from any digital inputs residing on an attached I/O
module by Find Home or Return Home. To select the homing function from a
parameter set Bit 0 “Find Home” or Bit 3 “Return Home” of P731 [Homing
Control]. The homing sequence can be selected regardless of the mode selected
in P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode]. If the drive has a feedback option module, a vector
type control must be selected in P35 [Motor Cntl Mode] parameter. If there is no
feedback option module, any type of control can be selected.
When the Find Home function is selected by either a digital input or a parameter,
either Bit 1 “Home DI” or Bit 2 “Home Maker” or both must be selected in P731
[Homing Control].
When the Return Home function is selected by either a digital input or a

parameter, a selection of Bit 1 “Home DI” or Bit 2 “Home Maker” of P731
[Homing Control] is ignored.
To activate a Homing function, a drive start command is required if the drive is

stopped. If a drive is running, the drive must be “At Zero Speed” state when the
function is selected.
Drive Stopped During Activation

If the drive is stopped, a start command to drive is required to activate a homing
sequence.
Drive Started and “At Zero Speed” During Activation

If the drive has already started and “At Zero Speed” the rising edge or toggled bit
activates and latches the homing sequence.
Drive Started and not “At Zero Speed” During Activation

If the drive has already started and not “At Zero Speed” the rising edge is ignored
and the homing sequence will not start.
Homing to Limit Switch with Feedback

Upon activation of homing the drive starts moving in Speed Control mode, and
ramp to the speed and direction set in P735 [Find Home Speed] at the rate set in
P736 [Find Home Ramp]. When the limit/proximity switch is reached the
“Homing Input” is set. The position count is latched and is considered the home
position count. The drive then ramps to zero at the rate set in P736 [Find Home
Ramp]. The drive then performs a point-to-point position move back to the
home position count in speed of 1/10 of P735 [Find Home Speed]. When the
motor is “At Position” and “At Zero Speed,” the homing sequence is complete.

NOT Hold At Home, P731 Bit 7

If a position control type mode is selected in P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] the drive
continues running, holding position and transferring position reference back to
its previous source. If velocity control type mode is selected in P313 [Actv SpTqPs
Mode] the drive continues running holding zero velocity and transferring
velocity reference back to its previous source.
Hold At Home, P731 Bit 7

continues running, holding position; the drive then transfers position reference
back to its previous source once it receives a start command. If velocity control
type mode is selected in P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] the drive continues running
holding zero velocity; the drive then transfers velocity reference back to its
previous source once it receives a start command.
DigIn
Find Home Speed
Speed Control
Speed
Position
Pt-Pt Control
Homing to Marker Pulse with Feedback Upon activation of homing the drive
starts moving in Speed Control mode, and ramps to the speed and direction set
in P735 [Find Home Speed] at the rate set in P736 [Find Home Ramp]. When
the Marker Pulse input is set the position count is latched and is considered the
home position count after the marker pulse is reached, the drive then ramps to
zero in P736 [Find Home Ramp]. The drive then performs a point-to-point
position move back to the home position count in speed of 1/10 of P735 [Find
Home Speed]. When the motor is “At Position” and “At Zero Speed,” the homing
sequence completes.



Marker
Find Home Speed
Speed Control
Speed
Position
Pt-Pt Control
Homing to Switch and Marker Pulse with Feedback
P736 [Find Home Ramp]. As the motor moves toward the limit/proximity
switch, the marker pulse is triggering a register on the feedback module to latch
the current position count. When the limit/proximity switch is reached the
“Homing Input” is set. The last maker pulse position count that was latched prior
to the “Homing Input” being set is considered the home position count. The
drive then ramps to zero at the rate set in P736 [Find Home Ramp]. The drive
then performs a point-to-point position move back to the home position count
in speed of 1/10 of P735 [Find Home Speed]. When the motor is “At Position”
and “At Zero Speed”, the homing sequence completes.

continues running, holding position, and transferring position reference back to


Marker DigIn
Find Home Speed
Speed Control
Speed
Position
Pt-Pt Control
Find Home DI without Feedback Device
P736 [Find Home Ramp]. When the limit/proximity switch is reached the
“Homing Input” is set.
If P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 3 “Induction FV” P847 [Psn Fdbk] count is latched
and is considered the home position count. The drive then ramps to zero at the
rate set in P736 [Find Home Ramp]. The drive then performs a point-to-point
position move back to the home position count in speed of 1/10 of P735 [Find
Home Speed]. When the motor is “At Position” and “At Zero Speed, the homing
sequence completes.



holding zero velocity; drive then transfers velocity reference back to its previous
source once it receives a start command.
DigIn
Find Home Speed
Speed Control
Speed
Position
Pt-Pt Control
If P35[Motor Ctrl Mode] = 0 “Induction VHz” or 1 “Induction SV”

The drive then ramps to zero at the rate set in P736 [Find Home Ramp].
If the drive travels passed the proximity switch during decel

The drive reverses direction at a speed of 1/10 of P735 [Find Home Speed]. The
drive must then receive a rising edge of the proximity switch followed by a falling
edge pulse. Upon receiving the falling edge pulse the drive will decel at the rate set
in P736 [Find Home Ramp]. When the motor is “At Zero Speed,” the homing
sequence completes.
If the drive remains on proximity switch during decel

The drive reverses direction at a speed of 1/10 of P735 [Find Home Speed].
When the falling edge of the limit/proximity switch is reached the drive will
decel at rate set in P736 [Find Home Ramp]. When the motor is “At Zero
Speed,” the homing sequence completes.



holding zero velocity; drive then transfers velocity reference back to its previous
source once it receives a start command.
DigIn
Find Home Speed
Speed Control
Speed
Position
Pt-Pt Control

Chapter 6
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network

Applications for PowerFlex 755 AC Drives
Topic Page
Additional Resources for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Information 300
Coarse Update Rate 301
Control Modes for PowerFlex 755 Drives Operating on the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP 301
Network
Drive Nonvolatile (NV) Memory for Permanent Magnet Motor Configuration 308
Dual Loop Control 309
Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option Module (ETAP) 315
Hardware Over Travel Considerations 316
Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Instance to PowerFlex 755 Drive Parameter Cross-Reference 317
Motor Brake Control 338
Network Topologies 341
PowerFlex 755 and Kinetix 7000 Drive Overload Rating Comparison for Permanent Magnet Motor 345
Operation
PowerFlex 755 Drive Option Module Configuration and Restrictions 346
Regenerative/Braking Resistor 347
Safe Speed Monitor Option Module (20-750-S1) Configuration 350
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) 353
Supported Motors 357
System Tuning 363
Using an Incremental Encoder with an MPx Motor 372
PowerFlex 755 Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Block Diagrams 375

Chapter 6 Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Applications for PowerFlex 755 AC Drives
Additional Resources for These documents contain additional information on the Integrated Motion on
the EtherNet/IP Network for PowerFlex 755 AC drive applications.
Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network Resource Description
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Programming Manual, Provides detailed information on:
Information publication 750-PM001 • I/O, control, and feedback options
• Parameters and programming
• Faults, alarms, and troubleshooting
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Installation Instructions, Provides instructions for:
publication 750-IN001 • Mechanical installation
• Connecting incoming power, the motor, and basic
I/O
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Technical Data, Provides detailed information on:
publication 750-TD001 • Drive specifications
• Option specifications
• Fuse and circuit breaker ratings
Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network User Manual, Use this manual to configure an Integrated Motion on
publication MOTION-UM003 the Ethernet/IP network application and to start up
your motion solution using the ControlLogix™ system.
Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instructions Reference Provides details about the motion instructions that are
Manual, publication MOTION-RM002 available for a Logix5000 controller.
Kinetix® Motion Control Selection Guide, This selection guide is meant to help make initial
publication GMC-SG001 decisions for the motion control products best suited for
your system requirements. In addition, there are
technical data publications with product specifications
and design guide publications with selection
information, specific to each drive family, to determine
the accessories needed for your application.
The design guides also include the recommended
motor cables, performance specifications, and torque/
speed (rotary) and force/velocity (linear) curves for
each drive and motor/actuator combination.
You can view or download publications at

http:/www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. To order paper copies of
technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Software Tools
Integrated Architecture Builder can be downloaded at:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/en/e-tools/configuration.html
Motion Analyzer can be downloaded at: http://motion-analyzer.com/

Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Applications for PowerFlex 755 AC Drives Chapter 6
Coarse Update Rate The position loop for the PowerFlex 755 drive is updated at a rate of 1.024 ms
(1024 sec). During each position loop update the drive can either read or write
data to the embedded Ethernet port, but cannot do both operations during the
same update. Therefore the drive can receive only new updates every other
position loop update event. To read new information from the Motion Planner
(that is controller), the minimum coarse update rate must be 2.5 ms or greater to
be sure that no data packets are lost. If the PowerFlex 755 drive is operated at a
coarse update rate of less than 2.5 ms, data packets can be lost (resulting in the
drive interpolating between missed updates), and/or the drive can fault if enough
data packets are missed consecutively. Rockwell Automation recommends a
minimum coarse update rate of 3 ms for the PowerFlex 755 drive.
Control Modes for PowerFlex Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network is a feature available with
firmware revision 2.xxx and later for PowerFlex 755 drives. This feature provides
755 Drives Operating on the a common user experience as with Kinetix 6500 drives when used with Logix
Integrated Motion on the controllers, revision 19 and later, on the EtherNet/IP network:
EtherNet/IP Network
• The same motion profile provides a common configuration experience.
The PowerFlex 755 drive uses the Motion Properties/Axis Properties and
the same motion attributes as the Kinetix 6500 drive.
• The same motion instructions provide a common programming

experience.
Refer to the Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP appendix in the PowerFlex 750-

Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001, for more information.
Motion Drive Start (MDS) Instruction

For information regarding the MDS instruction, refer to the Logix5000
Controllers Motion Instructions Reference Manual, publication
MOTION-RM002.
For the PowerFlex 755 drive, the MDS instruction is valid only when the axis
configuration is set to one of these control modes:
• Frequency Control
• Velocity Loop
• Torque Loop
The MDS instruction is not valid when the axis configuration is set to Position
Loop.

Motion Drive Start Instruction Configuration
The MDS instruction is configured in a similar fashion to most motion

instructions, as seen in this example.
The MDS instruction is similar to a Motion Axis Jog (MAJ) instruction,

however the MDS instruction does not set the acceleration/deceleration rates.
The acceleration rate is dynamically set by the ramp attributes configured in a Set
System Value (SSV) instruction. See Ramp Attributes on page 304. Note that
PF755_Axis was configured for revolutions. Therefore, the speed units are
revs/sec.
Motion Drive Start (MDS) Sample Code
Start

Increase Speed
The speed is changed by updating the speed reference and then re-executing the
MDS instruction.
Decrease Speed
The speed is changed by updating the speed reference and then re-executing the
MDS instruction.

Torque Mode
When the axis configuration is in Torque Loop, the Speed attribute within the
MDS instruction is not used to command the speed of the drive. The speed is
determined by the amount of torque specified in the CommandTorque and/or
TorqueTrim attributes.
IMPORTANT You must command zero torque in the CommandTorque and TorqueTrim
attributes before you use the Motion Axis Stop (MAS) instruction to stop a
specific motion process on an axis or to stop the axis completely. To use the
MAS instruction, you must set Change Decel to No. Otherwise an instruction
error can occur. The deceleration rate is set based on the Ramp Deceleration
attribute. The Motion Servo Off (MSF) instruction is used to deactivate the drive
output for the specified axis and to deactivate the axis’ servo loop. If you
execute an MSF instruction while the axis is moving, the axis coasts to an
uncontrolled stop.
Ramp Attributes
The MDS instruction is validated if the Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP drive
device supports the following five ramp attributes:
• RampAcceleration
• RampDeceleration
• RampVelocity - Positive
• RampVelocity - Negative
• RampJerk - Control

These ramp attributes are available only when the PowerFlex 755 drive axis
configuration is set to Frequency Control or Velocity Loop. These ramp
attributes are not available when the axis configuration is set to Torque Loop or
Position Loop.
This table provides a cross reference between the PowerFlex 755 Integrated
Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Motion Ramp Attributes and the
corresponding drive parameters.
Ramp Attribute Drive Parameter
RampAcceleration P535 [Accel Time 1]
RampDeceleration P537 [Decel Time]
RampVelocity - Positive P520 [Max Fwd Speed]
RampVelocity - Negative P521 [Max Rev Speed]
RampJerk - Control P540 [S Curve Accel]
P541 [S Curve Decel]
Ramp Attribute Sample Code
The Ramp Attributes listed in the previous section are accessible via a Set System
Value (SSV) instruction, as shown in this example:

Position Mode, Velocity Mode, and Torque Mode Comparison
The PowerFlex 755 supports the following axis configurations:

• Frequency Control with No Feedback
• Position Loop with Motor Feedback, Dual Feedback or Dual Integral
Feedback
• Velocity Loop with Motor Feedback or No Feedback
• Torque Loop with Motor Feedback
The selection options of the axis configuration within the Logix Designer
application, Axis Properties, General tab are shown here.

When the axis configuration is set to Frequency Control, you can select one of
the following control methods that best suits the application:
• Basic Volts/Hertz
• Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz
• Sensorless Vector
• Induction FV
The selection options of the axis configuration within the Logix Designer
application Axis Properties, Frequency Control tab are shown here.
This table contains the possible axis configurations and corresponding control
modes of the PowerFlex 755 drive on the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP
Network.
Axis Configuration P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] P65 [VHz Curve]
Frequency Control:
Basic Volts/Hertz InductionVHz Custom V/Hz
Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz InductionVHz Fan/Pump
Sensorless Vector Induction SV Custom V/Hz
Sensorless Vector economy Induct Econ Custom V/Hz
Position Loop Induction FV Custom V/Hz
Velocity Loop Induction FV Custom V/Hz
Torque Loop Induction FV Custom V/Hz

For more detailed examples on PowerFlex 755 axis configurations, refer to the
Axis Configuration Examples for the PowerFlex 755 Drive chapter in the
Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User
Manual, publication MOTION-UM003.
Frequency Only
For information on the specific Frequency Control details, see the Motion
Instructions and Integrated Motion Control Modes appendix in the Logix5000
Controllers Motion Instructions Reference Manual, publication
MOTION-RM002.
Drive Nonvolatile (NV) A Kinetix drive can automatically read configuration data in a permanent magnet
motor/encoder’s nonvolatile memory, whereas the motor/encoder configuration
Memory for Permanent data must be manually entered and tuned in a PowerFlex 755 drive when
Magnet Motor Configuration configuring the drive and a permanent magnet motor for operation on the
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network.
The Drive NV option (shown in the screen example below) lets you start up a
PowerFlex 755 drive and permanent magnet motor using the motor/encoder
data that is entered and stored in the drive’s nonvolatile memory. This is useful
for a drive running in standalone mode that is being converted to operation on an
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network.
Use these settings to configure the drive module:

• Verify that the correct motor/encoder data is present in the drive.
• In the Axis Properties for the drive module, select the Motor category, and
from the Data Source pull-down menu, choose Drive NV.
• Verify that the feedback selection in the appropriate drive parameter
matches the selection in the Motor Feedback category for the axis.

Dual Loop Control This section explains how to configure a dual loop feedback application by using
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network for a PowerFlex 755 drive.
Dual Loop Application Description
A dual loop control application uses two encoders, one mounted on the motor
(typical), and one mounted on the load (as depicted in this block diagram). The
two encoders are connected to the PowerFlex 755 drive via separate feedback
option modules, one installed in port 5, and another installed in port 4.
Load
Motor
Mechanical Transmission
5:1 ratio
(Gearbox and Belt)
E E
Motor/Master Feedback Load Feedback Device -

Device - Port 5, Channel A Port 4, Channel A
(PowerFlex 755 Drive) (PowerFlex 755 Drive)
Dual Loop Control Configuration
These steps assume that you have created an axis for the PowerFlex 755 drive in
the Motion group and added a new PowerFlex 755 drive module in the Logix
Designer application. See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network
Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM003, for
complete procedures. Follow these steps to configure the dual loop control
(encoder) axis.
1. Create a feedback axis in the Motion group for the encoders

(Dual_Loop_Axis in this example).

2. Open the PowerFlex 755 drive module and click the Associated Axis tab.
3. From the Axis 1 pull-down menu, choose the feedback axis you created
(Dual_Loop_Axis in this example).
4. From the Motor/Master Feedback Device pull-down menu, choose Port 5
Channel A.
5. From the Load Feedback Device pull-down menu, choose Port 4 Channel
A.
6. Click OK.

7. Open the Axis Properties for the feedback axis (Dual_Loop_Axis).

8. From the Feedback Configuration pull-down menu, choose Dual
Feedback to allow the axis object to accept feedback from two sources.
9. Select the Motor Feedback category.

10. From the Type pull-down menu, choose the appropriate motor feedback.
11. In the Cycle Resolution box, type the appropriate value for your device.
12. From the Startup Method pull-down menu, choose the appropriate value
for your device.

13. Select the Load Feedback category.

14. From the Type pull-down menu, choose the appropriate load feedback
device.
15. From the Units pull-down menu, choose the appropriate value.
16. In the Cycle Resolution box, type the appropriate value for your device.
17. From the Startup Method pull-down menu, choose the appropriate value
for your device.
18. In the Turns box, type the appropriate value for your device.

19. Select the Scaling category.

20. From the Load Type pull-down menu, choose the appropriate value for
your device.
This example uses a Rotary Transmission.
21. In the Transmission Ratio boxes, type the appropriate values for your
device.
This example uses a ratio of 5:1.
22. In the Scaling Units box, type the appropriate value for your device.
23. In the Scaling Position Units box, type the appropriate value for your
device.
This example uses 30 position units for every 1.0 load encoder revolution
on a rotary axis (for example a dial), that unwinds to zero position after 90
units accumulate.
The velocity loop is controlled by the motor encoder feedback. Because a

mechanical transmission exists between the motor and load side, the
scaling units are potentially different between the two encoders.

24. To verify that the Motor to Load ratio is correct, select the Parameter List
category.
25. View the value of the FeedbackUnitRatio parameter. In this example the
ratio is 5:1, or 5 motor encoder revolutions to per load encoder revolution.
If the velocity loop is not performing well, that is, not following the
command and not accelerating or decelerating properly, verify that this
ratio is correct.
26. Continue by tuning this axis.

Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option The Dual-Port EtherNet/IP option module has two modes of operation, Adapter
mode (default) and Tap mode.
Module (ETAP)
Operation Mode Selection
The Tap mode is intended for use with PowerFlex 755 drives and uses the
ENET3 (DEVICE) port as a connection point to transfer Integrated Motion on
the EtherNet/IP Network data to the PowerFlex 755 drive’s embedded
EtherNet/IP adapter. The operation mode is selected by using the Operating
Mode jumper ( J4). For more information about setting the Operating Mode
jumper, see the PowerFlex 20-750-ENETR Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option
Module User Manual, publication 750COM-UM008.
IP Address Assignment
If the PowerFlex 755 drive is connected to a Stratix 6000™ or Stratix 8000

managed Ethernet switch and the drive is set for BOOTP mode, the “dynamic IP
address assignment by port” (Stratix 6000) or “DHCP persistence” (Stratix
8000) feature sets the IP address for the drive. For more details, see the Stratix
6000 Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual, publication 1783-UM001, or the
Stratix 8000 and Stratix 8300™ Ethernet Managed Switches User Manual,
publication 1783-UM003.
Option Module Placement
Install the Dual-Port EtherNet/IP option module in Port 4 or 5 of the PowerFlex

755 drive control pod. (When operating in Tap mode, drive Port 6 cannot be
used.)

Hardware Over Travel When a PowerFlex 755 drive is configured for Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network none of the I/O option modules are supported.
Considerations Therefore, inputs associated with over-travel limits must be wired into controller
input modules and then control must be programmed in the Logix Controller.
Operation of this control is accomplished by programming the controller to

monitor the over travel limits via digital inputs and setting the desired action
when over travel limits are exceeded. Possible actions include (but not limited
to), setting an alarm, stopping the motion planner, stopping the drive, or
performing a shutdown function.
The sample ladder logic code below depicts a possible solution for performing
hardware over travel control (the code is an example only and is not the only
solution for monitoring hardware over travel limits). Each individual application
determines the requirements for the necessary hardware over travel control. This
example monitors digital inputs and issues a motion axis stop if either input goes
false and generates an output indicator that could be used to annunciate the stop.

Integrated Motion on This section cross-references the Logix Designer Module Properties and Axis
Properties instance to the corresponding PowerFlex 755 drive parameter. See the
EtherNet/IP Instance to PowerFlex 755 Standard and Safety Drive Module Optional Attributes appendix
PowerFlex 755 Drive in this manual for details on optional attributes and the corresponding control
Parameter Cross-Reference mode functionality supported by a PowerFlex 755 drive module.
Frequency Control Axis Properties Configuration
General Axis Properties for Frequency Control

Frequency Control Axis Properties
Frequency Control Motion Axis Parameters

Table 13 - Frequency Control Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Instance Drive Parameter
Break Frequency P63 [Break Frequency]
Break Voltage P62 [Break Voltage]
Current Vector Limit P422 [Current Limit 1]
Flux Up Control P43 [Flux Up Enable] – Forced to Automatic
Flux Up Time P44 [Flux Up Time]
Frequency Control Method P65 [VHz Curve]
Maximum Frequency P37 [Maximum Freq]
Overtorque Limit P436 [Shear Pin1 Level]
Overtorque Limit Time P437 [Shear Pin 1 Time]
Run Boost P61 [Run Boost]
Skip Speed 1 P526 [Skip Speed 1]
Skip Speed Band P529 [Skip Speed Band]
Start Boost P60 [Start Acc Boost]
Undertorque Limit P442 [Load Loss Level]
Undertorque Limit Time P443 [Load Loss Time]
Velocity Droop P620 [Droop RPM at FLA]
Velocity Limit Negative P521 [Max Rev Speed]
Velocity Limit Positive P520 [Max Fwd Speed]

Velocity Control Axis Properties Configuration
General Axis Properties for Velocity Control
Velocity Control Axis Properties

Velocity Control Motion Axis Parameters
Table 14 - Velocity Control Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Acceleration Feed Forward Gain P696 [Inertia Acc Gain]
P697 [Inertia Dec Gain]
SLAT Configuration P309 [SpdTrqPsn Mode A]
SLAT Set Point P314 [SLAT Err Stpt]
SLAT Time Delay P315 [SLAT Dwell Time]
Velocity Droop P620 [Droop RPM at FLA]
Velocity Integrator Bandwidth P647 [Speed Reg Ki]
Velocity Integrator Hold P635 [Spd Options Ctrl]
Velocity Integrator Preload P652 [SReg Trq Preset]
Velocity Limit Negative P521 [Max Rev Speed]
Velocity Limit Positive P520 [Max Fwd Speed]
Velocity Loop Bandwidth P645 [Speed Reg Kp]
Velocity Low Pass Filter Bandwidth P644 [Spd Err Fltr BW]
Velocity Negative Feed Forward Gain P643 [SpdReg AntiBckup]
Velocity Offset P601 [Trim Ref A Stpt]

Torque Loop Axis Properties Configuration
General Axis Properties for Torque Loop
Torque Loop Axis Properties

Torque Loop Motion Axis Parameters
Table 15 - Torque Loop Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Flux Up Control P43 [Flux Up Enable] – Forced to Automatic
Flux Up Time P44 [Flux Up Time]
Overtorque Limit P436 [Shear Pin1 Level]
Overtorque Limit Time P437 [Shear Pin 1 Time]
Torque Limit Negative P671 [Neg Torque Limit]
Torque Limit Positive P670 [Pos Torque Limit]
Undertorque Limit P442 [Load Loss Level]
Undertorque Limit Time P443 [Load Loss Time]

Position Loop Axis Properties Configuration
General Axis Properties for Position Loop
Position Loop Axis Properties

Position Loop Motion Axis Parameters
Table 16 - Position Loop Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Position Integrator Bandwidth P838 [Psn Reg Ki]
Position Integrator Hold P721 [Position Control]
Position Lead Lag Filter Bandwidth P834 [Psn Out Fltr BW]
Position Lead Lag Filter Gain P833 [Psn Out FltrGain]
Position Loop Bandwidth P839 [Psn Reg Kp]
Position Notch Filter Frequency P830 [PsnNtchFltrFreq]
Velocity Feed Forward Gain P549 [Spd Ref A Mult]

Induction Motor Data Axis Properties Configuration
Induction Motor Data Axis Properties
Induction Motor Data Motion Axis Parameters

Table 17 - Induction Motor Data Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Induction Motor Rated Frequency P27 [Motor NP Hertz]
Motor Overload Limit P413 [Mtr OL Factor]
Motor Rated Continuous Current P26 [Motor NP Amps]
Motor Rated Output Power P30 [Motor NP Power]
Motor Rated Voltage P25 [Motor NP Volts]
Motor Type P35 [Motor Cntl Mode]
Rotary Motor Poles P31 [Motor Poles]
Rotary Motor Rated Speed P28 [Motor NP RPM]
Induction Motor Model Axis Properties Configuration
Induction Motor Model Motion Axis Parameters
Table 18 - Induction Motor Model Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Induction Motor Flux Current P75 [Flux Current Ref]
Induction Motor Rated Slip Speed P621 [Slip RPM at FLA]
Induction Motor Stator Leakage Resistance P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop]
Induction Motor Rotor Leakage Resistance P74 [Ixo Voltage Drop]
Induction Motor Stator Resistance P73 [IR Voltage Drop]

Permanent Magnet Motor Data Axis Properties Configuration
Permanent Magnet Motor Data Axis Properties
Permanent Magnet Motor Data Motion Axis Parameters

Table 19 - Permanent Magnet Motor Data Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Motor Overload Limit P413 [Mtr OL Factor]
Motor Rated Continuous Current P26 [Motor NP Amps]
Motor Rated Output Power P30 [Motor NP Power]
Motor Rated Peak Current P422 [Current Limit 1]
Motor Rated Voltage P25 [Motor NP Volts]
Motor Type P35 [Motor Cntl Mode]
Rotary Motor Poles P31 [Motor Poles]
Rotary Motor Rated Speed P28 [Motor NP RPM]
Permanent Magnet Motor Model Motion Axis Parameters
Table 20 - Permanent Magnet Motor Model Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

PM Motor Rotary Voltage Constant P86 [PM CEMF Voltage]
PM Motor Resistance P87 [PM IR Voltage]
PM Motor Inductance P88 [PM IXq Voltage]
P89 [PM IXd Voltage]

Motor Feedback Axis Properties Configuration
Motor Feedback Axis Properties
Motor Feedback Motion Axis Parameters

Table 21 - Motor Feedback Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Feedback n Accel Filter Bandwidth P705 [Inertia Adapt BW]
Feedback n Cycle Resolution ENC: P02 [Encoder PPR]
DENC: P02 [Encoder 0 PPR]
UFB: P15 [FB0 IncAndSC PPR]
Feedback n Turns UFB: P22 [FB0 SSI Turns]
UFB: P52 [FB1 SSI Turns]
Feedback n Type UFB: P06 [FB0 Device Sel]
UFB: P36 [FB1 Device Sel]
Feedback n Velocity Filter Bandwidth P639 [SReg FB Fltr BW]
Feedback n Velocity Filter Taps P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr]
Motor Load Feedback Axis Properties Configuration
Motor Load Feedback Axis Properties

Motor Load Feedback Motion Axis Parameters
Table 22 - Motor Load Feedback Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Feedback n Cycle Resolution ENC: P02 [Encoder PPR]

Load Axis Properties Configuration
Load Axis Properties
Load Motion Axis Parameters

Table 23 - Load Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Total Inertia P76 [Total Inertia]
Torque Offset + Torque Trim P686 [Torque Step]
• Torque Offset is summed together with the Torque
Trim value, which is sent synchronously to the drive
every Coarse Update Period. The Torque Trim value is
available for real time “active” torque corrections and
the Torque Offset value is available for constant system
torque compensation.
Load Backlash Axis Properties Configuration
Load Backlash Axis Properties
• Reversal Offset resides in the controller’s Motion Planner

Load Compliance Motion Axis Parameters
Table 24 - Load Compliance Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Torque Low Pass Filter Bandwidth P659 [SReg Outfltr BW]
Torque Notch Filter Frequency P687 [Notch Fltr Freq]

Load Observer Axis Properties Configuration
Load Observer Axis Properties
Load Observer Motion Axis Parameters

Table 25 - Load Observer Instance to Parameter Cross Reference

Load Observer Bandwidth P711 [Load Observer BW]
Load Observer Configuration P704 [InAdp LdObs Mode]
Load Observer Feedback Gain P706 [InertiaAdaptGain]
Module Properties Power Tab Configuration
Table 26 - Power Tab to Parameter Cross Reference

Regenerative Power Limit P426 [Regen Power Lmt]
Bus Regulator Action P372 [Bus Reg Mode A]
Shunt Regulator Resistor Type P382 [DB Resistor Type]
External Shunt Resistance P383 [DB Ext Ohms]
External Shunt Power P384 [DB Ext Watts]
External Shunt Pulse Power P385 [DB ExtPulseWatts]

Motor Brake Control When a PowerFlex 755 drive is configured for Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network none of the I/O option modules are supported. Normal
means of having the drive control the brake and utilizing drive’s I/O are not
supported. Motor brake control must be user-configured in the Logix controller.
The basic functionality involved is to enable the drive using an MSO instruction,
verify that the drive is enabled, and then apply power to disengage the motor
brake. The specific motor used and the application often dictates a time delay
between when the drive is enabled and the brake is disengaged. A very similar
sequence is followed with disabling the drive using an MSF instruction. In this
case the brake is engaged, and after a user-configured amount of time, the drive is
disabled. Figure 35 depicts this operation.
Figure 35 - Timing Diagram
Enable
Brake
MSO MSF
Time
The sample ladder logic code in Figure 36 on page 339 depicts a possible solution
for performing brake control (the code is an example only and is not the only
solution for performing brake control). Each individual application determines
the requirements for the necessary brake control.

Figure 36 - Sample Motor Brake Code

Along with normal modes of machine operation it is important to engage the

brake in the event of a fault. Fault status can be monitored in the Logix code and
the brake can be engaged in the event of a fault. Knowing what the configured
Stop Action is helps determine when to engage the brake in the event of a fault.
Application considerations can also be factored into this decision. This stop
action is configured on the Axis Properties / Actions screen (as shown in this
example).

Network Topologies This topic provides examples of network topologies that can be used when
implementing an Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Network application by
using on of the following programming software applications.
• RSLogix 5000, version 19 and later
• Studio 5000 environment, version 21 and later
Star Topology
A switch-level star configuration is a traditional Ethernet network layout where
devices are connected to a centralized network switch, point-to-point. The star
configuration is most effective when the devices are near a central network
switch. In a star network topology, all traffic that traverses the network (that is,
device-to-device) must pass through the central switch.
ControlLogix
1756-EN2T
or
1756-ENxTR
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Stratix 8000 Ethernet (Shielded) Cable
Other EtherNet/IP
Network
Compatible Devices
Programming Software
PowerFlex 755 PowerFlex 755 PowerFlex 755 PowerFlex 755
It is recommended that a managed switch with a transparent and/or boundary

clock, plus QoS and IGMP protocol support be used for this Network topology.
Although the ControlLogix is illustrated, the CompactLogix controller could

also be used.
Advantages/Disadvantages
The advantage of a star network is that if a point-to-point connection is lost to an

end device, the rest of the network remains operational.

The primary disadvantage of a star topology is that all end devices must typically
be connected back to a central location, which increases the amount of cable
infrastructure that is required and also increases the number of available ports
required by the central switch leading to a higher cost per node solution.
Linear Topology
In a linear topology, the devices are linked together via a two port embedded
switch or through an EtherNet/IP network tap (1783-ETAP), instead of being
connected back to a centralized network switch.
ControlLogix
HMI
1756-ENxTR
1585J-M8CBJM-x
EtherNet (shielded) Cable
Point I/O
Either a Dual Port EtherNet/IP Option Module or an EtherNet/IP network tap

(1783-ETAP) is required for this network topology (this diagram illustrates an
application using the dual port option card). For more information about
applying a Dual Port EtherNet/IP Option Module, see the PowerFlex 20-750-
ENETR Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option Module User Manual, publication
750COM-UM008.
Although the ControlLogix controller is illustrated, the CompactLogix

controller could also be used.
The advantages of a linear network include the following:

• The topology simplifies installation by eliminating long cable runs back to
a centralized switch.
• The network can be extended over a longer distance because individual
cable segments can be up to 100m.

• The network supports up to 50 mixed devices per line.
The primary disadvantage of a linear topology is that a connection loss or link

failure disconnects all downstream devices as well. To counter this disadvantage a
ring topology could be employed.
Ring Topology
A ring topology, or device-level ring (DLR), is implemented in a similar fashion
to linear topology. However, an extra connection is made from the last device on
the line to the first, closing the loop or ring. It is crucial to configure the Ring
Supervisor before connecting your linear topology into a ring topology.
ControlLogix
1585J-M8CBJM-x
1756-ENxTR
1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP
Point I/O
HMI
Either a Dual Port EtherNet/IP Option Module or an Ethernet/IP network tap

(1783-ETAP) is required for this network topology (this diagram illustrates an
application using ETAPs). For more information about applying a Dual Port
EtherNet/IP Option Module, see the PowerFlex 20-750-ENETR Dual-Port
EtherNet/IP Option Module User Manual, publication 750COM-UM008.
Although the ControlLogix is illustrated, the CompactLogix controller could

also be used.

The advantages of a ring network include the following:

• Simple installation
• Resilience to a single point of failure (cable break or device failure)
• Fast recover time from a single point of failure
The primary disadvantage of a ring topology is an additional setup (for example,

active ring supervisor) as compared to a linear or star network topology.
Linear/Star Topology
Network switches can be added to the end of the line, creating a linear/star
topology. Ethernet devices that do not have embedded switch technology can be
connected in a star topology off of the switch.
ControlLogix
1756-EN2T
or 1585J-M8CBJM-x Other EtherNet/IP
1756-ENxTR EtherNet (shielded) Cable Compatible Devices
Stratix 8000



Ring/Star Topology
Network switches can also be connected into a DLR via an Ethernet/IP tap,
creating a ring/star topology.
PowerFlex 755 1756-EN2T
or
1756-ENxTR
1585J-M8CBJM-x
1783-ETAP
Other EtherNet/IP
Compatible Devices
Stratix 8000


PowerFlex 755 and Kinetix The PowerFlex 755 drive can be configured for a normal duty or heavy duty
operation. The heavy duty rating has a lower continuous current rating and
7000 Drive Overload Rating therefore can produce more current during an overload.
Comparison for Permanent
Duty Rating 0 Hz 100% 110% 150% 180%
Magnet Motor Operation Normal 50% 100% One minute 3 seconds Not applicable
Heavy 65% 75% of normal – One minute of 3 seconds of
duty normal duty normal duty
The Kinetix 7000 drive overload capability is specific for each power structure.
However, the Kinetix 7000 can produce 100% current at 0 Hz.
With permanent magnet motors, the torque is directly proportional to the

current. Therefore, the overload ratings of the drive to which the motor is
connected provides the torque overload capability of the motor.

PowerFlex 755 Drive Option When the PowerFlex 755 drive is configured for an Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network application, only specific option modules are supported,
Module Configuration and and in some cases, the port in which the option module is installed in the control
Restrictions pod is restricted.
IMPORTANT The PowerFlex 750-Series I/O option modules (20-750-2262C-2R, 20-750-

2263C-1R2T, 20-750-2262D-2R) must not be used with the Integrated Motion
on the EtherNet/IP Network.
Supported Modules Valid Port Installation Location

Cat. No. Option Module Name
20-750-S Safe Torque Off 6
20-750-S1 Safe Speed Monitor 6
20-750-ENC Single Incremental Encoder 4…8
20-750-DENC Dual Incremental Encoder 4…8
20-750-UFB Universal Feedback 4…6
20-750-APS Auxiliary Power Supply 8
20-750-ENETR Dual-Port Ethernet/IP 4 and 5
If an unsupported option module is installed, the drive stops responding and the
HIM displays “CONFIGURING.”
Safety Option Modules (20-750-S, 20-750-S1)
This restriction and configuration setting must be used when using either of these
safety option modules with the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network:
• The option modules must be installed in port 6 of the drive control pod
only.
• The specific drive module and option catalog number must be selected
when adding the drive to the I/O tree in the project. For example, when
adding a PowerFlex 755 drive with a Safe Speed Monitor option module,
choose 755-EENET-CM-S1.
Feedback Option Modules (20-750-ENC, 20-750-DENC, and 20-750-

UFB)
Follow the same installation and configuration instructions provided in the

IN001.

Auxiliary Power Supply Option Module (20-750-APS)

IN001.
Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option Module (20-750-ENETR)

IN001.
Regenerative/Braking When using a PowerFlex 755 drive with a dynamic brake (shunt regulator) in an
Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP network the dynamic brake must be set up
Resistor as part of the I/O connection of the PowerFlex 755 embedded Ethernet/IP
module (EENET-CM-xx) properties. Failure to set up the dynamic brake
correctly could lead to mechanical damage of the machine. Dynamic brake
(shunt) resistor sizing is not covered in this document. For more information on
resistor sizing, see the Drives Engineering Handbook, publication DEH-1300-
10.
I/O Configuration for a Dynamic Brake (shunt regulator)
Follow these steps to configure a dynamic brake (shunt regulator) for a PowerFlex
755 drive in the Logix Designer application.
1. In the I/O Configuration, double-click the PowerFlex 755-EENET-CM-

xx module and select Properties.
The Module Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Power tab and configure the appropriate boxes according to your
application.
Regenerative Power Limit The amount of energy that the drive allows during regeneration. If an
external regenerative power supply or shunt (dynamic brake) resistor is used,
it is recommended that this value be set to -200.0%.
Important: If this value is set too low, the ability of the drive to stop a
motor is limited.
Bus Regulator Action • Disabled - This selection disables the drive’s internal DC bus voltage
regulation feature. Select this option if there is an external regenerative
brake or regenerative line supply connected to the drive DC bus.
• Shunt Regulator - This selection is used when either an external shunt
resistor is connected to the drive or the internal IGBT is controlling the
power dissipation to the resistor (the type of shunt resistor is selected
below).
• Adjustable Frequency - This selection let the drive either change the
torque limits or ramp rate of the velocity to control the DC bus voltage.
This option is not recommended for positioning applications because it
overrides the velocity and the system can overshoot or may not stop.
• Shunt then Adjustable Frequency - This selection lets the Shunt resistor
absorb as much energy as it is designed for, then transitions to adjustable
frequency control if the limit of the resistor has been reached.
• Adjustable Frequency then Shunt - This selection enables adjustable
frequency control of the DC bus. If adjustable frequency control cannot
maintain the DC bus within limits, the shunt resistor is activated.
Shunt Regulator Resistor Select the type of resistor connected to the drive. Internal resistors include
Type 20-750-DB1-D1 or 20-750-DB1-D2 for frames 1 and 2 drives, respectively.
External identifies that a user-selected resistor is used.
External Shunt When using an external shunt resistor select “Custom.”

External Shunt Resistance Enter the resistance of the external resistor connected to the drive terminal
block connections, BR1 and BR2. Verify that the resistance is equal to or
greater than the minimum resistance for the drive capabilities. See
“Minimum Dynamic Brake Resistance” in the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives
Technical Data, publication 750-TD001.
External Shunt Power Enter the continuous power dissipation rating (kW) of the external resistor.
Failure to specify the correct value can cause the drive to either stop sending
energy to the resistor prematurely or overheat the resistor. For example, if an
800 W rated resistor is installed, enter 0.8 in this field.
External Shunt Pulse The Watt-Second or Joules rating (kW) of the resistor. This is the amount of
Power energy that the resistor can withstand for one second to reach the maximum
temperature. Failure to specify the correct value can cause the drive to either
stop sending energy to the resistor prematurely or overheat the resistor.
3. Click OK.

Safe Speed Monitor Option When a PowerFlex 755 drive is configured for Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network the configuration of the Safe Speed Monitor functions are
Module (20-750-S1) accomplished via a web page.
Configuration
Configuring the Safe Speed Functions
The Safe Speed Monitor module web page differs from the Embedded EtherNet/
IP adapter (port 13) web page that is enabled by setting adapter parameter P52
[Web Enable] to 1 “Enabled.” The Safe Speed Monitor module web page is not
accessible until the drive has established a network connection to a Logix
processor and the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network connection
has been established. The web page is then accessed by entering the IP address of
the drive into a web browser (for example, http://192.168.1.20/). Currently,
safety configuration settings cannot be saved in the drive or downloaded to other
drives.

TIP The Safe Speed Monitor module parameters are not currently part of the Logix
platform and therefore, are not overwritten when a drive establishes a
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network connection. Therefore, it is
possible to program the Safe Speed Monitor functions with configuration
software (for example, Connected Components Workbench) or a HIM before a
network connection is established. This lets you save the safety configuration
in the software application or HIM. Configuration of the safety functions can be
accomplished in one of the following ways:
• Program the Safe Speed Monitor functions and then download the
program that includes the drive parameters to the Logix controller and
establish the network connection.
• Inhibit the drive in the Logix I/O tree and program the Safe Speed Monitor
functions.
• Disconnect the network cable between the drive and the controller and
program the Safe Speed Monitor functions.
Configuring the Stop Command
While there are different selections when operating the drive and Safe Speed
Monitor option module in Standard mode versus the Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network mode, the equivalent functions operate the same. In the
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network mode of operation, the Stop
Command is programmed in the Actions Category of the Module Properties
dialog box. It is important to realize that there is no option to have a ramped stop
selected here; only current limit and motor brake options are available. These
selections do not ensure that a consistent ramp is implemented each time. If a
repeatable ramped stop is desired, then the user can program a Stop Monitor
Delay as a part of the Safe Speed Monitor configuration and then monitor the
Safe Speed inputs from the controller and issue a ramped stop prior to the safety
core issuing the Stop Command signal (as shown in this diagram).

Programmed ramp stop to

be issued during Stop
Monitoring Delay Axis Properties
Category Stop Action
takes place here.
Timing Diagram for Safe Stop 1
Stop Request
Stop Monitoring Delay Stop Delay
[Stop Decel Tol]
Safe Torque-off
[Standstill Speed] Active
Time
SS_In Signal
SS_Out Signal
Motion Power (1)
Stop Command (1)
DC_Out Output (2)
(1) This signal is internal between the safety option module and the drive.
(2) The DC_Out output is shown configured as Power to Release.

Speed Limited Adjustable This topic describes how to configure a PowerFlex® 755 AC drive with embedded
Ethernet/IP for Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) operation using an
Torque (SLAT) Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP network in Logix Designer application.
For more information on SLAT refer to the following publications:
• See Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) Min Mode and SLAT Max
Mode in the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives with Phase II Control Reference
Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003.
• See Slat Configuration in the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP

Network Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM003.
Add a PowerFlex 755 Drive Module to Your Project

See the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Configuration and
Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM003, for specific instructions
on adding a PowerFlex 755 with embedded Ethernet/IP drive module to your
project. An example Module Properties dialog box for a PowerFlex 755 with
embedded Ethernet/IP is shown here.
Create and Configure an Axis for the PowerFlex 755 Drive

1. See the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Configuration
and Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM003, for specific
instructions on creating and configuring the axis for the PowerFlex 755
drive.

2. In the General dialog, from the Axis Configuration pull-down menu,

choose Velocity Loop.
3. Select the Velocity Loop category.

The Velocity Loop dialog box appears.
4. Click Parameters.
The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.

5. Configure the SLAT parameters. See Slat Configuration in the Integrated

Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Reference Manual, publication
MOTION-RM003, for a complete list and descriptions of the SLAT
parameters.
Program Commands
When using SLAT with Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP network you
must start the PowerFlex 755 drive with the MDS instruction as shown below.
The Speed reference is sent in the MDS instruction. Also, the torque command is
sent to “AxisTag.CommandTorque.” To make changes to the speed reference you
need to re-trigger the MDS instruction.
To use the Motion Axis Stop (MAS) instruction, you must set Change Decel to
“No.” Otherwise an instruction error occurs. The deceleration rate is set based on
the Ramp Deceleration attribute.

To view help for the MDS instructions, right-click MDS in the function block
and choose Instruction Help, or select the instruction and press F1. Additionally,
see “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) Min Mode and SLAT Max
Mode” in the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives with Phase II Control, Reference
Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003.
Changing the Accel/Decel Times for the MDS Instruction
If you are using the MDS instruction, the drive accelerates and decelerates at the
planner Max Acceleration and Deceleration values. To set the
“RampAcceleration” and “RampDeceleration” you need to use SSV instructions
to change the ramp rates. Below is an example of the SSV instructions:
• Set the RampAcceleration / RampDeceleration attribute to “x” revs/sec2
• Class Name = Axis
• Instance Name = “Axis Name”
• Attribute Name = RampAcceleration/RampDeceleration
• Source = Tag for value
Example: Velocity (Speed) command is 30 revs/sec and you want to reach that
speed from zero in 6.5 seconds. Ramp Acceleration needs to be set to 4.615 revs/
sec2.

Supported Motors The PowerFlex 755 can be used with a variety of both induction and permanent
magnet (PM) motors.
AC Induction Motors
An AC induction motor uses slip between the rotor and the stator to create
torque. Some motor manufacturers specify the synchronous speed instead of slip
speed on the motor nameplate. For example, a 4 pole, 60 hertz motor has a
synchronous speed of 1800 rpm. The drive algorithm cannot use the
synchronous speed, it needs the slip rpm. The slip rpm is the rotor speed when
the stator is at rated frequency and the motor is at full load. The rotor slips
behind the stator to create the torque. For a 4 pole, 60 hertz motor the slip rpm
range is 1700…1790 rpm. If the nameplate is showing synchronous speed (in our
example 1800 rpm), please contact the motor manufactures to receive the slip
rpm.
Some AC motors have two voltage ratings, a high voltage and a low voltage.
Follow the motor manufacture's wiring diagram to correctly wire the motor for
the proper voltage.
All motor manufactures provide an electrical specification including an electrical

model equivalent. If you believe that the PowerFlex drive family is not producing
the correct motor torque, please contact the motor manufacturer to receive the
electrical specification prior to contacting Rockwell Automation Technical
Support.
This list contains the name of manufacturers that produce motors that are
recommended for use with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Manufacturer Notes
Baldor Electric Company Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Baumuller Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Elin Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Electrical Apparatus Company (EAC) Induction motors work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Lenze Some Lenze motors have been stamped with synchronous speed versus slip
speed. Please contact Lenze to get the slip speed.
Marathon Electric Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives. Marathon stamps all pertinent
information on their nameplate including electrical model equivalent.
Reliance RPM AC motors are used in industry and work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Reuland Electric Company, Inc. Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives. Reuland stamps the motor with
synchronous speed and then supplies the slip frequency. You must calculate
the slip frequency in rpm and then subtract the slip rpm from the synchronous
speed to get the slip speed. Before contacting Rockwell Automation Technical
Support, please obtain the electrical specification sent with the motor.
Rockwell Automation 8720 and HPK motors work well with PowerFlex 755 drives. See the
appropriate motor manual for the proper nameplate voltage.
SEW-EURODRIVE SEW-EURODRIVE gear motors are widely used in industry and work well with
PowerFlex 755 drives. Some of the older motors were stamped with
synchronous speed versus slip speed. Please contact SEWS if the motor is
stamped with synchronous speed. If you are using an SEW motor with an
integral brake, please verify that the brake is properly suppressed for noise.

Manufacturer Notes
WEG Electric Corp. WEG motors can have a start winding and a run winding. Always wire the
drive to the run winding.
Wittenstein Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Wound rotor manufacturers Wound Rotors work with PowerFlex 755 drives. You must short the external
resistors when using these motors.
Permanent Magnet Motors

Most permanent magnet motors are compatible with the PowerFlex 755 drive.
You must obtain the motor manufacturer’s specification for the motor prior to
contacting Rockwell Automation Technical Support.
PowerFlex 755 drives cannot accept a resolver. Therefore, the motors must have
either a pulse encoder or absolute feedback device (for example, SSI, Heidenhain,
Stegmann/Sick hyperface).
This list contains the name of manufacturers that produce motors that are
recommended for use with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Manufacturer Notes
Baldor Electric Company Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives. Verify that you are using either the
Surface Mount (SM) or Interior Mounted (IPM) motors and select the
appropriate control algorithm.
KollMorgan Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives.
Oswald Electric Motors
PowerTec Work well with PowerFlex 755 drives, but cannot use resolver feedback.
Rockwell Automation MPL, MPM, and RDB motors work well with PowerFlex drives. Use Heidenhain
feedback for RDB motors.

Compatible HPK Motors
The following table contains a list of specifications for Bulletin HPK-Series™

high-power asynchronous motors that are compatible with PowerFlex 750-Series
drives. This information is provided to help configure PowerFlex 750-Series
drives with the appropriate motor data.
Cat. No. Base KW Volts Amps Hz Torque Peak Peak IM R1 R2 X1 X2 Xm

Speed (N•m) Torque Amps Amps
(N•m)
HPK-B1307C-MA42AA 1465 17.1 400 34.2 50 112 260 80 15.8 0.181 0.119 0.65 0.704 14.7
HPK-B1307C-SA42AA 1465 17.1 400 34.2 50 112 260 80 15.8 0.181 0.119 0.65 0.704 14.7
HPK-B1307E-MA42AA 2970 29.8 405 57.5 100 96 165 104 26.1 0.0485 0.0338 0.371 0.423 8.79
HPK-B1307E-MB44AA 2970 29.8 405 57.5 100 96 165 104 26.1 0.0485 0.0338 0.371 0.423 8.79
HPK-B1307E-MC44AA 2970 29.8 405 57.5 100 96 165 104 26.1 0.0485 0.0338 0.371 0.423 8.79
HPK-B1307E-SA42AA 2970 29.8 405 57.5 100 96 165 104 26.1 0.0485 0.0338 0.371 0.423 8.79
HPK-B1307E-SB44AA 2970 29.8 405 57.5 100 96 165 104 26.1 0.0485 0.0338 0.371 0.423 8.79
HPK-B1308E-MA42AA 2970 33.5 405 64.8 100 115 230 135 28.8 0.037 0.0275 0.296 0.364 7.71
HPK-B1308E-MB44AA 2970 33.5 405 64.8 100 115 230 135 28.8 0.037 0.0275 0.296 0.364 7.71
HPK-B1308E-SA42AA 2970 33.5 405 64.8 100 115 230 135 28.8 0.037 0.0275 0.296 0.364 7.71
HPK-B1308E-SB44AA 2970 33.5 405 64.8 100 115 230 135 28.8 0.037 0.0275 0.296 0.364 7.71
HPK-B1609E-MA42AA 2965 48.4 405 88.2 100 156 270 154 31.4 0.0326 0.0227 0.288 0.319 7.23
HPK-B1609E-SA42AA 2965 48.4 405 88.2 100 156 270 154 31.4 0.0326 0.0227 0.288 0.319 7.23
HPK-B1609E-SB44AA 2965 48.4 405 88.2 100 156 270 154 31.4 0.0326 0.0227 0.288 0.319 7.23
HPK-B1609E-X169 2965 48.4 460 88.2 154 156 270 154 154 154 154 154 154 154
HPK-B1611E-MA42AA 2975 57 408 105.7 100 183 400 240 47.6 0.0205 0.0152 0.167 0.219 4.82
HPK-B1611E-MB44AA 2975 57 408 105.7 100 183 400 240 47.6 0.0205 0.0152 0.167 0.219 4.82
HPK-B1611E-SA42AA 2975 57 408 105.7 100 183 400 240 47.6 0.0205 .0.0152 0.167 0.219 4.82
HPK-B1613E-MA42AA 2970 73.7 407 135.3 100 237 520 312 54.5 0.0164 0.0127 0.136 0.179 4.21
HPK-B1613E-MB44AA 2970 73.7 407 135.3 100 237 520 312 54.5 0.0164 0.0127 0.136 0.179 4.21
HPK-B1613E-SA42AA 2970 73.7 407 135.3 100 237 520 312 54.5 0.0164 0.0127 0.136 0.179 4.21
HPK-B1613E-SB44AA 2970 73.7 407 135.3 100 237 520 312 54.5 0.0164 0.0127 0.136 0.179 4.21

Cat. No. Base KW Volts Amps Hz Torque Peak Peak IM R1 R2 X1 X2 Xm

Speed (N•m) Torque Amps Amps
(N•m)
HPK-B2010E-MA42BA 2985 112 400 216 100 358 35 0.00519 0.00419 0.0626 0.097 2.03
HPK-B2010E-SA42BA 2985 112 400 216 100 358 35 0.00519 0.00419 0.0626 0.097 2.03
HPK-E1308E-MA42AA 2975 33.5 330 80 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1308E-MB44AA 2975 33.5 330 80 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1308E-MC44AA 2975 33.5 330 80 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1308E-SA42AA 2975 33.5 330 80 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1308E-SB44AA 2975 33.5 330 80 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1308E-SC44AA 2975 33.5 330 80 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1609E-MA42AA 2965 48.4 405 88.2 100 108 216 160 39 0.0233 0.0176 0.189 0.242 4.92
HPK-E1613E-SA42AA 2975 73.7 400 172 385 237 520 385 385 385 385 385 385 385

Third-Party Permanent Magnet Motors
The PowerFlex 755 drive can support third-party permanent magnet motors
without the need of custom profiles. However, the motor nameplate information
sometimes needs to be modified. Rockwell Automation Technical Support
requires the following information to assist you in modifying the motor data for
use with the drive. Please complete the following tables and email the
information to Rockwell Automation Technical Support at:
support@drives.ra.rockwell.com.
Table 27 - Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications and Evaluation

Motor Manufacturer
Model Number
Feedback Device
Type of Feedback If resolver, please complete resolver information
Feedback Manufacturer
Feedback Model Number
Technical Specifications
Item Symbol Value Units Notes
Maximum Mechanical Speed n rpm
Continuous Stall Torque Ms Nm (RMS not 0-peak)
Continuous Stall Current A A (RMS not 0-peak)
Peak Torque Mj Nm (RMS not 0-peak)
Torque Weight Ratio Tw Nm/Kg
EMF Constant Ke Vs/rad Vs/1000rpm
Torque constant Kt Nm/A
Reluctance Torque Tr Nm
(with respect to Stall Torque)
Winding Resistance R Ohms line to line
Winding Inductance L mH line to line
Rotor Inertia J kg-m2
Mechanical Time Constant Тm ms
Electrical Time Constant Тe ms
Mass M Kg
Radial Load Fr N
Axial Load Fa N
Insulation
Protection

Motor Nameplate Voltage V Volts

Motor Nameplate Power Pwr KW
Poles p
Table 28 - Drive Motor Parameter Values

Parameter Value Units
P1: Motor Nameplate volts Vrms Volts
P2: Motor Nameplate Amps Amps
P3: Motor Nameplate Frequency HZ
P4: Motor Nameplate RPM RPM
P5: Motor Name Plate Power KW
P7: Pole Pairs
Zpu
IXO Voltage drop Volts
IR Voltage Droop Volts
P523 Back Emf Volts
Provide a Speed Torque profile like in this example.
Synchronous motor for Torque - Speed Diagram AC Motor,

Torque (N•m)
converter drive. Frequency Controlled
Power (kW)
Overload Torque
Overload Power
Rated Power S1
Rated Torque
Speed (1/min)

System Tuning When using the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network connection
with the PowerFlex 755 drive, the tuning of the motion system is accomplished
via the Logix Designer application. This topic describes the axis hookup tests,
motor tests, and autotuning of the motion system required to measure the system
inertia. Manual tuning of the axis is also described in this section:
• For additional information on axis attributes and the Control Modes and
Methods, see the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network
Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM003.
• For start-up assistance of a Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP

Network Axis, see the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network
Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM003.
This topic assumes that you have completed all the steps necessary to configure
the drive module.
Axis Hookup Tests
The axis Hookup tests are the first tests to run when autotuning an axis. If you are
using a permanent magnet motor in your application, the Commutation test
must be run first, as part of the Hookup tests.
Motor and Feedback: This test is used to run the motor and verify the correct
direction of rotation, and also tests the motor feedback for the proper direction:
• The Test Distance value can be defined to be sure that the system does not
rotate too far.
• Click Start to initiate the test. The test completes and prompts you to
verify that the motor rotation direction was correct.

• When the test has been completed, click Accept Test Results to save the
results.
Motor Feedback: This test is used to test the polarity of the motor feedback:
• Click Start and manually rotate the motor in the positive direction for the
distance indicated in the Test Distance box.
results.
Commutation: When using a permanent magnet motor, this test must be run
first. The Commutation test is used to measure the commutation offset angle for
the permanent magnet motor.
results.
• Use the resulting Controller Offset value.
Marker: This test is used to check for the marker pulse on an incremental
encoder:
• Click Start and manually move the motor until a marker pulse is detected.
• When the marker pulse is detected the test stops. Click Accept Test
Results to save the results.
Motor Analyzer
The Motor Analyzer category offers three choices for calculating or measuring
motor electrical data.
Dynamic Motor Test: This test is the most accurate test method to determine
the motor model parameters. When this test is run the Resistance and Reactance

are measured then the motor is rotated to measure the flux current of the
Induction motor. The Rated Slip frequency is also calculated:
• This test is best run with the motor disconnected from the load as the
motor spins for some time and there are no travel limits.
results.
Static Motor Test: This test is used if the motor cannot rotate freely or is already
coupled to the load. When this test is run the Resistance and Reactance are
measured then the flux current of the motor is calculated. The Rated Slip
frequency is also calculated:
• The motor will not turn during this test.
results.
Calculate Model: This method calculates the Resistance, Reactance, and Flux
Current of the motor from basic model parameters and the motor parameters
data. No measurements are taken when using this calculation:
• Click Start to start the calculation.
results.
Autotune (inertia test)
The Autotune category measures the system inertia and calculates system
bandwidth tuning numbers. This table summarizes the application type tuning
defaults. An “X” indicates that the system value is selected by default and that the
Velocity and Acceleration Feedforward values are set to 100%.
Application Type System Value

Position Loop Position Velocity Loop Velocity Integrator Hold Velocity Acceleration
Bandwidth Integrator Bandwidth Integrator Feedforward Feedforward
Bandwidth Bandwidth
Custom: X X
(Advanced tuning)
Basic: X X
(Default tuning parameters)
Tracking: X X X X X
(Winding/unwinding, flying shear,
and web control applications)
Point-to-Point: X X X X
(Pick-and-place, packaging, cut-to-
length)
Constant Speed: X X X X
(Conveyors, line shaft, crank)

Application Type: Specify the type of motion control application to be tuned:
• Custom: This option lets you select the type of gains to use in the system.
You can individually select gains to be used with the check boxes that
display below Customize Gains to Tune heading.
• Basic: This selection is used for applications where following error and
final position is not critical. Basic tuning gains include Position Loop
proportional and Velocity Loop proportional.
• Tracking: This selection provides the most aggressive tuning. It is used to

keep following error to a minimum and applies to both Velocity
Feedforward and Acceleration Feedforward. This tuning selection uses
Position Loop proportional, Velocity Loop proportional, and Velocity
Loop integral.
• Point to Point: This selection is used for applications that use a move-to-
position and do not need to include a following error. Tuning gains for this
selection include Position Loop proportional, Position Loop integral, and
Velocity Loop proportional.
• Constant Speed: This selection is used for constant speed applications. It

is designed to keep velocity error to a minimum. It applies both Velocity
Feedforward and uses Position Loop proportional, Velocity Loop
proportional and Velocity Loop integral.

Loop Response: The Loop Response attribute is used to determine the

responsiveness of the control loops. Specifically, the Loop Response attribute is
used to determine the value for the Damping Factor (Z) used in calculating
individual gain values:
• High = 0.8
• Medium = 1.0
• Low = 1.5
Load Coupling: The Load Coupling attribute is used to determine how the loop
gains are de-rated based on the Load Ratio.
In high performance applications with relatively low Load Ratio values or rigid
mechanics, typically Rigid is selected. The gains are not de-rated.
For applications with relatively high Load Ratios and compliant mechanics,
Compliant is selected. The autotune algorithm divides the nominal loop
bandwidth values by a factor of the Load Ratio + 1.
Measure Inertia using Tune Profile: Check this box to calculate the inertia
tuned values as part of the autotune. The Inertia Test results are shown in the
Inertia Tuned grid control (bottom right of the dialog box) when the test
completes.
When Measure Inertia using Tune Profile is selected as a part of the Autotune
test, the PowerFlex 755 drive first jogs or rotates the motor in a single direction to
remove any backlash present in the system (as depicted in the chart below). After
the backlash has been removed, the “bump” profile is then applied to measure the
system inertia (system acceleration). Note that systems with a mechanical
restriction or travel limit may not complete the Autotune test.
Profile to Measure Inertia
Backlash Removal

• Motor with Load: Choose this selection to calculate tuning values based
on the load inertia. If selected, the load inertia is measured and then
applied to the Total Inertia attribute or Total Mass attribute. The Load
Ratio is also updated.
• Uncoupled Motor: Choose this selection to calculate tuning values based

on the motor inertia. If selected, the motor inertia is measured during the
test and is stored in the Rotary Motor Inertia attribute.
• Travel Limit: Enter a value that specifies the maximum distance to travel
for the selected tune operation when the system has a limited travel
distance. If the tuning test cannot complete within the distance specified
the tune fails and faults the axis.
• Speed: Enter a value that specifies the speed of the tune operation. A
speed that translates to a minimum of 25% of the motor nameplate RPM is
recommended.
• Torque: Enter a value in the range of 0…300 that specifies the torque value
to be applied to the tune operation. The default value is 100.
• Direction: Choose the direction of the move for the tune operation. The
available values include:
• Forward Unidirectional (default)

• Reverse Unidirectional
• Forward Bi-Directional
• Reverse Bi-Directional
Run the Autotune

To start the autotune procedure, click Start:
• When the Measure Inertia using Tune Profile check box is selected, the
request to start a tune is issued to the controller.
• Any pending edits in this dialog box need to be applied before you start the
test. If you have pending edits, a message box appears informing you that
pending edits are applied prior to executing the test. Click Yes to apply the
pending edits. If you choose No, the test is not be executed.
• Clicking Start issues a Motion Direct command to the controller, which
causes any parameters used by the motion direct command to validate
before starting the test.
• If the Motion Direct command does not execute due to an error condition,
an error message appears and the Test State returns to the Ready state.
• Click Stop to terminate an autotune operation that was started from a
source other than Start on this Autotune dialog box. When an Autotune is
started from Start on this dialog box, Stop is unavailable.
When the autotune has completed, click Accept Tuned Values to accept the
tuning results and before you can change any tuning categories.

Manual Tune
The Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP network axis includes a method for
manual tuning the axis gains. Clicking Manual Tune (as indicated in the example
here) opens the Manual Tuning window.

Manual Tuning Window
Tuning gains are measured in Hertz in the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP
network connection compared to the radians/second in the stand alone drive.
6.283185 Rad/Sec = 1 Hz.
The Manual Tuning window contains three sections:
Manual Tuning Section: This section lets you customize the configuration of
system tuning. The following two selections can be made:
• System Bandwidth: Changing this value adjusts the Position Loop and
Velocity Loop response. The value selected in this field changes the
Application Type selection in the Autotune window. Therefore, care must
be taken to NOT change this value after the individual gains have been
manually configured.
• System Dampening: Changing this value adjusts both the Dampening

factor and System Bandwidth values. Lowering the System Dampening
factor dramatically increases the System Bandwidth. Care must be taken
when changing this value to avoid machine damage. It is recommended
that small incremental adjustments be made to the System Dampening
while evaluating the overall system response. This value changes the
Application Type selection in the Autotune window. Therefore, care must
be taken to NOT change this value after the individual gains have been
manually configured.

• Position Loop: You can manually adjust the Loop Bandwidth, Integrator
Bandwidth, Integrator Hold and Error Tolerance values.
• Velocity Loop: You can manually adjust the Loop Bandwidth, Integrator
Bandwidth, Integrator Hold, and Error tolerance (when used as a Velocity
Loop) values.
Motion Generator Section: The Motion Generator is a subset of the Motion

Direct commands that lets you control the axis motion for tuning.
Additional Tune Section: This section enables adjustment of multiple settings

of the axis properties:
• Feedforward Tab: Lets you adjust the Velocity Feedforward percentage

and Acceleration Feedforward percentage.
• Compensation Tab: Lets you adjust the System Inertia percentage and
Torque Offset percentage.
• Filters Tab: Lets you adjust the Torque Low Pass Filter Bandwidth and
Torque Notch Filter Frequency.
• Limits Tab: Lets you adjust the Peak Torque Limit Positive / Negative
percentages and Velocity Limit Positive / Negative Units per Second
values.
• Planner Tab: Lets you adjust the Maximum Speed, Maximum

Acceleration, Maximum Deceleration, Maximum Acceleration Jerk, and
Maximum Deceleration Jerk values.

Using an Incremental The PowerFlex 755 drive supports incremental encoder feedback when using a
Rockwell Automation MPx motor. However, the Motor Device Specification
Encoder with an MPx Motor category in the Axis Properties configuration for the Logix Designer application
does not currently support MP-Series™ motors with incremental feedback catalog
numbers, as shown below. Only MP-Series motors with the suffix –M (Stegmann
Multi-turn Absolute), or –S (Single Turn Absolute) motors are supported.

To configure a PowerFlex 755 drive with an MPx motor equipped with

incremental encoder feedback, the MPx motor must be set up as a third-party
motor. Follow these steps to configure an MPx motor with incremental encoder
feedback for use with a PowerFlex 755 drive using the Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network.
1. In the Axis Properties dialog box for the drive, select these options (as
shown below):
• From the Data Source pull-down menu, choose Nameplate Datasheet.
• From the Motor Type pull-down menu, choose Rotary Permanent
Magnet.
2. You must manually enter the Nameplate / Datasheet – Phase to Phase
parameters information. See Appendix D - Permanent Magnet Motors in
the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001,
for a list of motor nameplate specification data.
TIP If you do not have a Programming Manual readily available, from the Data
Source pull-down menu, choose Catalog Number. Then, from the Motor Type
pull-down menu, choose the equivalent motor with the -M (Stegmann Multi-
turn Absolute) device. The Logix Designer application populates the
Nameplate / Datasheet – Phase to Phase parameters information with the
data that is stored in the database. Record this information for reference. Then,
change the Data Source selection to “Nameplate Datasheet.” The configuration
is transferred to the new selection. The motor data is the same regardless of
the selected feedback device.

3. Select the Motor Feedback category.

4. From the Type pull-down menu, choose Digital AqB.
5. Click OK to save your configuration.

PowerFlex 755 Integrated The block diagrams in this section highlight the Integrated Motion on the
Ethernet/IP Network attributes and path used in PowerFlex 755 drives control.
Motion on the EtherNet/IP When viewed in electronic format (PDF), or when printed in color, the standard
Network Block Diagrams drive control attributes and path appear in blue and the Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP Network attributes appear in black and the path appears in black
and uses heavier line weights.
Standard Drive Control

Limited Spd Ref Attributes and Path
593
Skip Bands
[6H4] 0
Skip Bands
935 17
526 Drive Status 1

Skip Speed 1
(Jogging)
Skip Speed 2 527 370 Skip Speed 1
371 Skip Speed 2
Skip Speed 3 528
372 Skip Speed 3
Skip Speed 529 373 Skip Speed Band
Band
Integrated Motion on
the Ethernet/IP Network
Attributes and Path
Legend and Definitions

Use the following legend and definitions when viewing the diagrams.
Definitions of the Per Unit system: Symbol Legend:

1.0 PU Position = Distance traveled / 1sec at Base Spd Drive Option Module Requires port number.
Parameters Parameters
1.0 PU Speed = Base Speed of the Motor
1.0 PU Torque = Base Torque of the Motor Read Only Parameter
Read / Write Parameter
Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration
Read / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration
Provides additional information
( ) = Enumerated Parameter
[ ] = Page and Coordinate
ex. 3A2 = pg 3, Column A, Row 2
= Constant value
‘d’ = Prefix refers to Diagnostic Item Number
ex. d33 = Diagnostic Item 33

Block Diagram Table of Contents

Block Diagram Page Block Diagram Page
Flux Vector Overview 377 Torque Control Overview - Interior Permanent 398
Magnet Motor
VF (V/Hz), SV Overview 378 Torque Control - Reference Scale and Trim 399
Speed / Position Feedback 379 Torque Control - Torque 400
Speed Control - Reference Overview 380 Torque Control - Current, Induction Motor and 401
Surface Permanent Magnet Motor
Speed Control Reference (Sheet 1) 381 Torque Control - Current, Interior Permanent 402
Magnet Motor
Speed Control Reference (Sheet 2) 382 Torque Control - Inertia Adaption 403
Speed Control Reference (Sheet 3) 383 Torque Control - Load Observer / Estimator 404
Speed Control Reference (Sheet 4) 384 Process Control (Sheet 1) 405
Speed Control Reference (Sheet 5) 385 Process Control (Sheet 2) 406
Speed Control - Regulator (Flux Vector) 386 MOP Control 407
Position Control - Reference 387 Inputs and Outputs - Digital 408
Position Control - Regulator 388 Inputs and Outputs - Analog 409
Position Control - Aux Functions 389 11-Series Inputs and Outputs – Digital 410
Position Control - Phase Locked Loop 390 11-Series Inputs and Outputs – Analog 411
Position Control - Position CAM 391 11-Series Inputs and Outputs – ATEX 412
Position Control - Profiler/Indexer (Sheet 1) 392 Control Logic 413
Position Control - Profiler/Indexer (Sheet 2) / 393 Inverter Overload IT 414
Position Control - Homing
Position Control / Aux Functions, Roll Position 394 Friction Compensation 415
Indicator
Position Control – Spindle Orient 395 Variable Boost Voltage Overview – Function 416
Inputs/Outputs
Position Control / Aux Functions, Position 396 Diagnostic Tools 417
Oriented Torque Boost
Torque Control Overview - Induction Motor and 397 High Speed Trending Wizard 418
Surface Permanent Magnet Motor

Position Control (pages: 11-19)
Psn Fdbk Sel Position Init

Psn Fdbk Preset
135 Psn Actual
User Home 836 PowerFlex 755
Feedback 847 Homing
Σ
Position
Psn 738
Option Flux Vector Overview
Fdbk Proportional Channel
Cards Selection
Load Psn [N]
Load Fdbk Integration Channel
FdbkSel [D]
Selection
136 Gear Rat
PTP Reference
Psn Reg Kp
Actv SpTqPs Mode
839 PsnReg
Pos Profiler PTP Command 776 Psn Selected 843
Profiler 313 Spd Out Speed Control – Regulator (page: 10)
Steps 1-16 Spd Profiler 784 Ref Max Fwd Speed
Psn Reg Ki
Actv SpTqPs Mode
Pos 722 520
PTP Ref Pt-Pt 838
( Psn Reg Spd Out )

Pt-Pt Ref Pt-Pt Mode 313 SReg Output
Sel 775 Position
Selection Selection Final Speed Ref
Planner 660
Psn Ref EGR +
Spd Out Speed + 597
Lead/ +
Spd PI Limit / Filtered Lead/Lag
815 x Lag 640 PI Regulator
PCAM Psn PCAM Σ Regulator Notch Limit SpdFdbk Filter
1392 Filter Lead/Lag
Planner Pos Filter
Select Filter
[N]
PLL Ext Spd Position 521
796 [D]
Spd Sel PLL Mode 848 Psn Gear Ratio
Pos Gear Rat
Droop RPM
Planner Selection Speed Reg Kp 645 620
PLL Psn 799 Max Rev Speed at FLA
Ref Sel Position + Psn Active Vel
+ 723 Speed Reg Ki 647
Offset Σ Command
Psn Direct Fdbk
Ref
Psn Ref 131 Speed Reg BW 636
Direct Ref
765 Selection
767
Select
( Spd Reg Out )

Psn Gear Ratio 848 x ( Spd Profiler Out ) ( Speed FF Ref )
Speed Control – Reference (pages: 4-7,9) Torque Control (pages: 20-25)
( Spd Comp Out )

PTP Speed Actv SpTqPs
Speed Ref A Sel 783 Actv SpTqPs Mode
FwdRef
545 Mode Inertia CompMode 695
Selected Spd Ref 313 Torque Step
PCAM Vel Out 1472 313 Speed Comp Sel 665 Inertia
Speed Ref B Sel 592 Inertia 686 Limited Trq Ref
Flux Vector Overview
Adaption
550 Comp Out 690
PLL Speed
( Scaled Spd Ref )

807 Speed FF +
TrmPct RefA Sel Speed Ref Out x Inertia Comp 699 +
Selection Speed/ FOC
Selection
608 FrctnComp Torque/ Perm Magn
& 848 + -
Speed Comp 667 Mode FrctnComp Notch
TrmPct RefB Sel Limits Ramped Position + Filter + & Vector
Actv SpTqPs Mode 594 Psn Gear Out Mode + +
PID Output Sel Spd Ref Speed 1560
612 Ratio
Control
313 Comp Out 1567 Selection Limit
Speed
Trim Ref A Sel Ref
1079
x Friction Comp Load
Current
600 TrimPct
Ref Speed Observer/ Processing
Trim + PID Speed Profiling Linear Lead/ + Estimator
Trim Ref B Sel Jogging
Ref Exclusive Selection Ramp & Lag + + X
Selection
604 Selection S Curve Filter + 640
Torque
Filtered 685 Limit
Preset Speed 1 571 Jog Speed 1 556 Generation
SpdFdbk Selected Trq Ref Motor
Preset Speed 2 572
Jog Speed 2 557 555 E1
Preset Speed 3 573 PID Speed Trq Ref A Sel
Virtual Encoder Trim Speed Ref
574 Selection Scale 675 Gear
Preset Speed 4 Torque
575 Trq Ref B Sel Ref
Preset Speed 5
1079 Selection
576 680 Load
Preset Speed 6
Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

577 PID Output Sel
Preset Speed 7 E2
PID Torque
Trim / Excl
Process Control (pages: 26,27) ( PID Output Meter ) Selection
PID Output Meter 1079

PID Ref Meter
PID 1093 PID Output Sel
PID Ref Sel 1067 Reference 1090
Selection
PID Fdbk Meter PID Regulator ( PID Output Meter )
PID
PID Fdbk Sel 1072 Feedback 1091
Selection Limit
PID LP
PID Prop Gain 1086 1084
Filter BW
PID Int Time 1087
PID Deriv Time 1088
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 1
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Applications for PowerFlex 755 AC Drives
377
Chapter 6
378
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
PowerFlex 755 Speed Contol – Trim Regulator (page: 9)
1 VF (V/Hz), SV Overview VHzSV

Final Speed Ref SpdTrimReg
597
623
PI Regulator Speed
Trim Reg
Active Vel Fdbk 131 Selection
Limit
Speed Control – Reference (pages: 4-6,8,9)
VHzSV Spd Reg Kp 663
Speed Ref A Sel Ramped Spd Ref 594
( Motor Speed Ref )

VHzSV Spd Reg Ki 664
545 Selected Spd Ref
2
Speed Ref B Sel 592 Slip
Linear Slip RPM at FLA 621
Comp
550 Ramp & + +
PID Output Sel 1079 S Curve + -
TrmPct RefA Sel Speed Ref
Selection
608 PID Speed
&
Limits Trim
TrmPct RefB Sel Selection
612 Droop RPM at +
FLA + ( Freq Adder )
Speed
Trim Ref A Sel Ref
1079 PID Output Sel
x
620 Droop
Output
600 TrimPct
3 Ref Frequency
Trim + PID Speed
Trim Ref B Sel Ref 1
Exclusive
Jogging
604 Selection ( Ramp Input Ref )
Selection
VF (V/Hz), SV Overview
Bus/Current +
Preset Speed 1 571 556 Limiter + V/Hz
572 (Freq Ramp)
Preset Speed 2 Jog Speed 1
Limit Current
Preset Speed 3 573 ( Ramp Rate )
557 Processing
Preset Speed 4 574

Jog Speed 2
Preset Speed 5 575
Max Fwd Speed 520
Preset Speed 6 576
4
Preset Speed 7 577 Max Rev Speed 521
Motor
Overspeed Limit 524
( PID Output Meter )
Process Control (pages: 26,27)

PID Output Meter
PID Ref Meter
PID 1093
PID Ref Sel 1067 Reference 1090
Selection
PID Fdbk Meter PID Regulator
5 PID
PID Fdbk Sel 1072 Feedback 1091
Selection Limit
PID LP
PID Prop Gain 1086 1084
Filter BW
PID Int Time 1087
PID Deriv Time 1088

6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 2
A B C D E F G H I
467 – Velocity Integrator Control

Spd Options Cntl Fdbk Loss
635 7 Detect
1 (Auto Tach SW) Speed/Posit Fdbk
2403 – Feedback n
Pri Vel FdbkFltr Drive Status 2
Velocity Filter Taps 936 5 [25H2], [26H2]
(FdbkLoss SwO)
126
454 – Velocity Feedback
Pri Vel Feedback Active Vel Fdbk
Pri Vel Primary
0
Fdbk Velocity Fdbk 127 131 To Spd Reg
Source Processing [9B4], [10A3], [24a B3], [24b B3]
Parameter
Selection
Alt Vel FdbkFltr Mtr Vel Fdbk
Pri Vel Fdbk Sel 125
2 Display
129 3
Filtering
Alt Vel Feedback

Alt Vel Alternate
1
Fdbk Velocity Fdbk 130
Source Processing
Parameter
Selection
Alt Vel Fdbk Sel 128 Primary To Inertia

d 0
Velocity Fdbk Adaption, Load
Processing dt Motor Accerlation Observer/Estimator
Derivative Fdbk [25G4], [26G4]
3
709 IA LdObs Delay
Speed / Position Feedback
Alternate
d 1
Velocity Fdbk
Processing dt
Derivative
4 1352 – Induction Motor 434 – Position Feedback

Rated Slip Speed Psn Fdbk
Slip RPM at FLA Virtual Enc EPR Psn Fdbk To Posit Ref,
847
453 – Velocity Reference 621 141 Source Posit Reg
VF or SV &
Parameter [11C5], [12A4], [12A5]
Final Speed Ref Open Loop 496 - Kj Open Loop Fdbk Selection

Open Loop
From Spd Ref 597 Virtual Encoder
137 Psn Fdbk Sel 135
[9D3] Total Inertia Virtual Enc EPR
Control Mode/ 76 1
141 [9I4] Aux Vel FdbkFltr
Feedback Mode 529 – Iq Current
Output Frequency
600 – Output Feedback 133
5 ***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***
Frequency 5
Simulator Fdbk
Torque Cur Fdbk Aux Vel Feedback
Motor Simulator Aux Velocity
Virtual Encoder
138 Aux Vel
Fdbk Fdbk 134 To Spd Ref
Source Processing [5A3]
494 – Torque Reference - Limited Limited Trq Ref Parameter
Selection
From Torq Ctrl Current 690
[24a E2], [24b E2] Aux Vel Fdbk Sel 132
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 3
379
Chapter 6
380
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1 Spd Ref
Speed Control – Reference Overview
Command
Spd Ref A
Ref A
Trim Ref A
+
Trim % Ref A
Profiling/ Limited
Spd Ref B Jogging/
Selected Spd Ref Direction Limit Spd Ref Speed Ref
2 Lift App/ Skip Fiber
Ref B Switch Stop / Torque
+ Autotune/ Mode Bands App.
Trim Ref B Auto Control Proving
Homing/
+ Overrides Limit
Trim % Ref B
From
PI Regulator
ENet Spd Ref
3
Inertia Inertia Comp
Vector Speed Control Comp Torque Ref
Virtual
Encoder
Speed
Comp Friction Friction Comp
Comp Torque Ref
Vector Ramp S-Curve
Flux Ramped
Speed Control - Reference Overview
Vel Ref 640

Filter
S Curve Ref Filtered
4 Limit SpdFdbk
From From Max Speed
Rate

Select From Pos Reg
Position Output
Regulator Filter
V/F Speed Control
Ramped
5 Ramp & Frequency
S Curve Ref
Limit Limit
V/F Ramp S-Curve
Velocity Trim
Regulator Speed
From Status
From
6 F/F Ramp Status
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 4
A B C D E F G H I
366 Velocity Fine Command
450 Velocity Command
Speed Ref A Sel Speed Control – Reference (1)
1 P760 Interp Vel Out 545
[11B5] * Note: Analog Hi, Lo
scaling only used when 930 Speed Ref Source
‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol Legend Speed Units
Analog Input is selected 300
(Hz / RPM) 616 SpdTrimPrcRefSrc
Disabled (0)
617 Spd Trim Source
Spd Ref A Stpt 546 433 – Velocity Feed Forward Command
TrmPct RefA Sel Trim Ref A Sel 591 Spd Ref Sel Sts
Preset Speed 1 571 608 600

Ref Ref Ref
Man Sel 2 Sel 1 Sel 0
Spd Ref Command
Preset Speed 2 572
[35H3] Drive Logic Rslt 879 6 14 13 12 d7
Preset Speed 3 573
2 Disabled (0) Disabled (0) 935 9 14 13 12 11 10
Drive Status 1
Preset Speed 4 574 0
Man Ref Ref Ref Ref Ref
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Preset Speed 5 575 TrimPct RefA Stpt 609 Default Trim Ref A Stpt 601 Default To
1
451 – Velocity Trim ( Ref A Auto ) Spd Ref (2)
Preset Speed 6 576
[6A1]
Preset Speed 7 577 Port 1 Reference 871 Port 1 Reference 871 2
( Ref B Auto )
Port 2 Reference 872 Port 2 Reference 872
MOP Reference 558 Port 3 Reference 873 Port 3 Reference 873 3
[29F3]
Parameter Port 4 Reference 874 Port 4 Reference 874 4
Aux Vel Feedback 134 Selection 574 ( Preset4 Auto )
[3H5] Port 5 Reference 875 Port 5 Reference 875
3 Parameter Parameter
Port 6 Reference 876 Selection Port 6 Reference 876 Selection 5
Default 575 ( Preset5 Auto )
Port 2 Reference 872 6
Anlg In1 PortVal Anlg In1 PortVal 576 ( Preset6 Auto )
Port 3 Reference 873 (option port) (option port)
7
Port 4 Reference 874 Anlg In2 PortVal Anlg In2 PortVal
(option port) (option port) 17
Port 5 Reference 875 871 ( DPI Prt1 Man )
Speed Control Reference (Sheet 1)

TrmPct RefA AnHi 610 * Trim RefA AnlgHi 602 * ( DPI Prt2 Man )
18
872
Option Ports:
TrmPct RefA AnLo 611 Trim RefA AnlgLo 603
4 Analog, EtherNet, 19
DeviceLogix
* x x + ( DPI Prt4 Man )
20
Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547 440 Kvff 874
Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548 Speed Ref A Mult 21
549 Velocity

Feedforward 22
Disabled (0) Disabled (0) Disabled (0) 29

( Int ENet Man )
Spd Ref B Stpt 551 TrimPct RefB Stpt 613 Trim Ref B Stpt 605 30
( DevLogix Man )
5 DI ManRef
Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552 TrmPct RefB AnHi 614 Trim RefB AnlgHi 606 AnlgHi 564 16
( DI Man Sel )
Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553 TrmPct RefB AnLo 615 Trim RefB AnlgLo 607
Parameter
DI ManRef 565 * Parameter
* * Parameter * Parameter
Other Ref Sources Selection Other Ref Sources Selection
AnlgLo Selection
Other Ref Sources Selection
DI Man Ref Sel 563
Speed Ref B Sel 550 TrmPct RefB Sel 612 Trim Ref B Sel 604
Alt Man
Ref AnHi 329 31
x + ( Alt Man Sel )
Alt Man 330
* Parameter
6 x Ref AnLo Selection
Speed Ref B Mult 554
Alt Man Ref Sel 328 PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 5
381
Chapter 6
382
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Position Control – Add Speed Reference Option
Position Control 446 Position Integrator Control

1 [23D5] Actv SpTqPs Mode (Add Spd Ref)
Speed Control – Reference (2)
313 721 10 Selected Spd
From
Position Ref
Spd Ref (1) (>= 6) 1
[5I2] Variable
592 Speed Profiling Jogging Lift App (Micro Positioning) Homing Boost
0
Non-position 0
(< 6)
Drive Status 1 Trq Prove Status Homing Status
0
[23D5] Actv SpTqPs Mode (Jogging) (Micro Psn) (Home Enabled) Boost Freq Ena
VF (V/Hz) Only
313 935 17 1103 2 730 1
PI Speed Exclusive
0 ≠6 0 0
0 0
2
[28B2] 1 Profiler 1 1
PID Output 6 Jog 1,0 1 1
OR 1093 556 x 1543
Meter Speed 1
[28E2]
Profile Status Jog 0,1 VB
PID Enable Position 557 Frequency
PID Control 1066 0 1210 10 Speed 2
Mode
Running 1 Position 1112
Drive Status 1 935 16 & 0 [35H3]
Speed Excl Drive Logic Jog1 MicroPsnScalePct
1079 0 Speed 879 2 19
Rslt Jog2
PID Output Sel = 1 Spd Ref x 848 Psn Gear Ratio
3 From Homing
[17H2]
Spd Ref x 848 Psn Gear Ratio
From Spd Profiler
[16H2]
Direction Mode Control Autotune Control Limit Switch Control Speed Ref Limits
Autotune Spd Ref Sel Sts Spd Ref Sel Sts

Direction Mode
(Decel Lmt Sw) (End Lmt Sw)
70 Min Speed Max Speed
308
4 591 13 591 14 Limits Limits
Limited Spd Ref
Bipolar 1 0,1 0 0
593
Rev Disable 2 1 To Spd Ref,
Max 1 Limit Limit
0 Process Ctrl

0
Unipolar 0 [7A2], [8A2], [28B2]
X
Autotune 2, 3, 4
Foward 571 Preset Speed 1
Control
Command
Logic
Min Fwd Speed 522
5
Min Rev Speed 523
Unipol 1
(+1) Fwd
473 Velocity Limit – Positive Max Fwd Speed 520
Unipol 0
(-1) Rev
474 Velocity Limit - Negative Max Rev Speed 521
Internal Load Dependent

Max Limit
(Lift Application)
6 Trq Prove Status
(LoadTestActv) 1103 5 PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 6
A B C D E F G H I
Commanded
Start/Stop Speed Control – Reference (3)
SpdRef
Drive Status 1
1 Vector Ramp and Rate Select
467 Velocity Integrator Control Flux Vector
2 (Running)
Fiber Application
Skip Bands 935 16 Spd Options Ctrl Spd Options Ctrl
Drive Status 1 OR Ramped Spd Ref (Delayed Ref)
(Stopping) (Ramp Disable) 635 1
1 936 9 635 8
Limited Spd 935 18 594 [28C2]
Ref Drive Status 2 (StpNoSCrvAcc) 635 2
Sync (Autotuning)
0 Traverse/ 0 1 0
593 Speed
Change P-Jump Not Stopping Spd Options Ctrl
Skip and Active
Virtual Encoder
[6H4] 935 17 0 (Ramp Hold) Ramp
Bands 0
1 635 0 S Curve Delayed Spd Ref
Drive Status 1 0 One 1
Skip Speed 1 526 1122 Sync Time Stopping 139
(Jogging) 376 Ramp Acceleration Accel Time 1 535 1,0 Scan
or Not Active
2 P Jump 1126 0,1 Delay
Skip Speed 2 527 370 Skip Speed 1 Accel Time 2 536
Virtual Enc EPR Virtual Enc Psn
371 Skip Speed 2 Max Traverse 1125 (Edges Per Rev)
[35H3] Drive Logic Rslt 879 8 9 142 [11C5]
Skip Speed 3 528 (Accel Time 1, 2) 141
372 Skip Speed 3 1,0
Traverse Inc 1123 Decel Time 1 537
Skip Speed 529 373 Skip Speed Band 377 Ramp Deceleration Virtual EncDelay
Band 0,1
Traverse Dec 1124 Decel Time 2 538 One
140 [11C5]
Drive Logic Rslt Scan
Fiber Control 1120 [35H3] 879 10 11
Int Ramp Ref (Decel Time 1, 2) Delay
539 Virtual Encoder
To Torq Ctrl Jog Acc Dec Time
Fiber Status 1121
(Friction Comp) 378 Ramp Jerk Control S Curve Accel, Decel 540 541
[23A1] Speed Control
3
Filtered Spd Ref Speed Ref Filter

Inertia Comp
Speed Comp 595
Inertia CompMode 0 Inertia Comp (kn * s)+ wn
Inert Comp 452 -Acceleration Speed Comp Sel s + wn
Out
695 LPFBW Feedforward 665
698 699 Lead Lag
Disabled Not Used 0 Speed Comp Out 0 Spd FF
0 Torq 0 x SpdRef FltrGain 590
Inertia From
0 LPF FF 667
Comp Ramped Ref 1 d Psn Ref
Int Ramp Ref 1 d To Torq 1 Spd Ref Filter 588
496 Kj 0 [11I5]
Ctrl dt
dt 76 Total Inertia [23B3] Rate Ref
4 Ext Ramped Ref 2 Speed 848 Spd Ref Fltr BW 589
596 935 17
2 d Comp
700 696 Inertia Acc Gain Speed Rate Psn Gear Ratio
dt Drive Status 1
3 Ref (Jogging)
596 697 Inertia Dec Gain Speed Comp Gain 666
Speed Rate Ref Final Speed Ref Limits
460 Kaff

At Limit Status
Max Speed Limit (MaxSpeed Lmt)
945 2
Spd Ref After
X Final Limit
5 PI Speed Trim 555 Position Reg Output [9A2]
Limit
Spd Ref Scale Max Fwd Speed 520
From 2 0 PsnReg Spd Out
1093 0 Max Rev Speed 521
Process Ctrl From Posit Reg 843
[28E3] PID Output Meter ≠2 1 [12I5] 473 Velocity Limit – Positive
0 0 438 Position 1
0 474 Velocity Limit - Negative
1079 935 17 Loop Output
935 17
PID Output Sel Drive Status 1
(Speed Trim) (Jogging) Drive Status 1
6
(Jogging)
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 7
383
Chapter 6
384
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Commanded
Start/Stop
Speed Control – Reference (4)
1 SpdRef
Limited Spd Ref Drive Status 1
VF (V/Hz), SV
2 (Running) V/F Ramp and Rate Select 467 Velocity Integrator Control
593 Fiber Application
Skip Bands Drive Status 1 935 16 Spd Options Ctrl
OR Ramp Rate
(Stopping) (Ramp Disable) 635 1 [9E4]
1 936 9
935 18 Ramped
Drive Status 2 (StpNoSCrvAcc) 635 2 Previous
Sync Spd Ref Scan
[9E5]
0 Traverse/ 0 (Autotuning) 1
[6H4] Speed 594
Change P-Jump Not Stopping Spd Options Ctrl
Skip Bands and Active (Ramp Hold) [9A2], [28C2]
935 17 0 Ramp
0
1 635 0 S Curve
2 526 Drive Status 1 0 Ramp Input
Skip Speed 1 1122 Sync Time Stopping
(Jogging) [9E4] Accel Time 1 535 1,0
or Not Active
Skip Speed 2 527 P Jump 1126 0,1
370 Skip Speed 1 Accel Time 2 536
Skip Speed 3 528 371 Skip Speed 2 Max Traverse 1125 376 Ramp Acceleration [35H3] Drive Logic Rslt 879 8 9
372 Skip Speed 3 (Accel Time 1, 2)
Traverse Inc 1123 1,0
Skip Speed 529 373 Skip Speed Band 377 Ramp Deceleration Decel Time 1 537
Band 0,1
Traverse Dec 1124 Decel Time 2 538
Drive Logic Rslt
Fiber Control 1120 [35H3] 879 10 11
(Decel Time 1, 2)
Jog Acc Dec Time 539
Fiber Status 1121
3 378 Ramp Jerk Control S Curve Accel, Decel 540 541
Speed Control
Final Speed Ref Limits

Max Speed
Limits
4
Spd Ref After
Final Limit
Limit [9A2]
473 Velocity Limit – Positive Max Fwd Speed 520

PI Speed Trim
474 Velocity Limit - Negative Max Rev Speed 521
From 2 0
1093
Process Ctrl
[28E3] PID Output Meter ≠2 1
0 0
5
1079 935 17
PID Output Sel Drive Status 1
(Speed Trim) (Jogging)
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 8
A B C D E F G H I
1 Speed Control – Reference (5)

41 Control Method 453 Velocity Reference
Motor Control Object
Motor Cntl Mode Final Speed Ref
35 To Spd Reg
597
Spd Ref After [10A3]
Final Limit Flux Vector Torque Ref
(3,6) Velocity Torque Torque
[7I5] OR [8H4]
Regulator Reference Control
594
At Limit Status 453 Velocity Reference
Ramped Spd Ref Limit (MaxSpeed Lmt) Final Speed Ref (Max Fwd/Rev +
[8G2] Overspeed Limit)
Max Fwd/Rev To Fdbk
Speed Limit OR 945 2 597 Speed Limit Limited
VF or SV [3B5] Limited
Speed Adder Freq Adder
(0-2,4,5,7,8)
(Hz)
X
621 Slip RPM at FLA
Limit Limit
At Limit Status
3 Filtered (100 R/S) 1.5
Iq Feedback (pu) 945 3 (OverSpd Lmt)
1352 – Induction Motor
RPM Hz X X Hz RPM 600 – Output Frequency
Rated Slip Speed
1 1 *Poles Speed to Freq Output
RPM Hz [NP Freq] [NP Spd]*Poles
Scaling Selected Frequency
[NP Spd] [NP Freq] 120 120
1 1 *Poles Freq Ref Freq Integral
(Hz) 1
[NP Spd] [NP Freq] 120 (Hz)
620 Droop RPM at FLA Ramp Input X
Bus/Current
[8E2] Ramp Rate

464 - Kdr (Motor Ctrl Limiter [3D5],
VHzSV Spd Reg Kp Interrupt) (Freq Ramp) [27E4],
663 (Hz / Sec) Limit Limit [27H3]
4 454 – Velocity Feedback Ramp Rate
X
Speed Fdbk VHzSV [8I1]
Active Vel Fdbk with Sensor SpdTrimReg Interrupt Time
0
From Fdbk 131 PI 623 Scaling
[3F2] Motor
Limit Freq

664 Motor Freq 1 (Hz)
To Ramp Integrator Speed to Freq Scaling
VHzSV Spd Reg Ki
Slip Comp BW 622 [8G1]
VF, SV Speed Regulator
Open Loop
Iq Feedback (pu) LPF Speed Fdbk
5 Freq Limit High (Hz)
1352 – Induction Motor 1 Freq Limit Low (Hz)
X Previous Reverse
Rated Slip Speed Ramped Spd Ref Prevention
RPM Hz
Slip RPM at FLA Speed Sensor Type [8I2]
1 1 *Poles
621 ***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***
[NP Spd] [NP Freq] 120
(Max Fwd/Rev +
Overspeed Limit)
Freq Limit
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 9
385
Chapter 6
386
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1 Speed Control – Regulator

Flux Vector
636 Speed Reg BW
* set param 636/648 = 0
to manually adjust 648 Alt Speed Reg BW
param 645/649 & 647/650 653 Spd Loop Damping
76 Total Inertia 805 Load Observer Configuration

InAdp LdObs Mode
2 704
0,2
nff ***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***

SpdReg FeedFwd
643
AntiBckup Speed Sensor
At Limit Status 3 Type
464 Knff 455 Velocity Error
(Spd Reg Lmt) SReg OutFltr Sel
Speed Error 467 Velocity Integrator Control
453 Velocity Reference 641 945 4 657
Sensorless
3 Final Speed Ref SReg Output
From - (kn * s)+ wn
597 + + + kp + s + wn Filter
660
Spd Ref - + Filter +
[9C2] Set=1 Stage, 2nd Order 1st Order To Torq Ctrl
Active Vel Fdbk P Gain Limit Lead Lag
+10% Clear=2 Stage LPass [23B2]
ks LPass
From (kn * s)+ wn 461 Kvp
131 s + wn Spd Options Cntl
Fdbk s -10% 635 05 Speed Reg Kp* 645 655 457 Velocity Loop Output
[3F2] 640 (SpdErrFilter) 710
Lead Lag ServoLck Limit 659
Alt Speed Reg Kp* 649 Spd Reg Pos Lmt
454 Velocity Feedback Spd Err Filt BW* 644 InertAdapt

Filtered SpdFdbk SReg Out
AltSpdErr FltrBW* 651 656 FltrBW*
SReg FB Fltr Sel 637 FltrBW
ki Spd Reg Neg Lmt
+ 502 Torque Low Pass Filter Bandwidth
SReg FB FltrGain 638 Servo Lock Gain 642 - s
Speed Control - Regulator (Flux Vector)
4
SReg FB Fltr BW 639 Hold / Reset I Gain 658
945 Spd Reg
At Limit Status 654 SReg Out
462 Kvi Int Out
1434+o Feedback n Velocity 469 Velocity Low Pass Filter FltrGain 0
PTP PsnRefStatus Speed Reg Ki* 647 456 Velocity Integrator Output
Filter Bandwidth Bandwidth 720 2
( PTP Int Hold) Alt Speed Reg Ki* 650

Spd Options Ctrl 635 3
(SpdRegIntRes) Droop
467 Velocity Integrator Control 4
(SpdRegIntHld) Droop RPM
(Jog No Integ) 620
6 at FLA
464 Kdr
Preset
5 SReg Trq Preset 652
468 Velocity Integrator Preload
492 Torque Reference [23E2]
Selected Trq Ref 685
Actv SpTqPs Mode 313 Bumpless

[23D5]
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 10
A B C D E F G H I
Profiler Reference & Interpreter Position Mode Selection

Point to Point parameter initializations Position Control – Reference
1 performed with Position Regulator
INACTIVE Pt-Pt Position Planner
Step 1-16 Values 1234 1244 1384 Profiler Actv SpTqPs Mode
PTP PsnRefStatus [23D5]
PTP Reference [P776], PTP Feedback 785 PTP Fwd Vel Lmt 313
[P777], PTP Command [P784] are 720 0 ZeroFFSpdRef
Step 1-16 Dwell 1235 1245 1385 loaded with Psn Actual [P836]. 786 PTP Rev Vel Lmt
Profile 1213 0-4 StrStepSel0-4 1 Ref Complete Zero Torque 0
Step 1-16 Batch 1236 1246 1386 Command 781 PTP Accel Time
8 Hold Step 2 PTP Int Hold
Step 1-16 Next 1237 1247 1387 Actv SpTqPs Mode 782 PTP Decel Time
Step 1-16 Action 1238 1248 1388 10 Restart Step [23D5] 3 SpdFFRef En Speed Reg 1
313 788 PTP Vel Override
PTP Speed
2 Pt-Pt Position Reference & Interpreter Profiler FwdRef Torque Reg 2
PTP 783
PTP Control 770 0 Vel Override PTP Mode 771 Command S Curve
PsnPTP SLAT Min 3
4 Intgrtr Hold 784 776
Absolute Absolute 0
5 Ref Pause Position [16H3], PTP
[17H2] Reference SLAT Max 4
PTP EGR From
Mult/Div Homing
Move Virtual
[17H2] 777 Encoder
787 Sum
PTP PTP 789 5
Ref Scale Control 770 1 PTP Feedback PTP S Curve
PTP Ref Sel 775 790 730 1 Home Enabled
3 778
PTP Setpoint Homing Status Profiler 6
PCAM Planner
780 Index
Index [N] 1
X [15G2]
Other Ref Position [D] PCAM Psn Select 1392 Psn PTP 7
PCAM Vel Out
Sources
Position Control - Reference
Parameter Gear Rat

Selection
PCAM 1472 Psn Selected
1393
PTP Psn Stpt PCAM Ref
Psn
Control Planner Camming 8
X Other Ref 1473 722
DI Indx Step 772 770 Reverse Move
2 Sources Parameter PCAM Psn Out To Posit
DI Indx StepRev 773 779 Selection Psn PLL
3 Preset Psn [15G2] 9 Reg
DI Indx StepPrst 774 PTP Index Preset PCAM Main [12A1]
4 Absolute Immediate 2
Pt X 0...15 1407 1391 PCAM Mode
361 Controller Position Command – Float Change Psn Direct 10
362 Controller Velocity Command PCAM Main
1408 1406 PCAM Main Types Psn Spindle Orient
364 Controller Torque Command Pt Y 0...15 11
Direct Position Reference Selection

Interpolator PLL Planner ≠0,1,2,3,4,5
Psn Ref 0
365 Position Fine Command 765 PLL Ext Spd Sel 796 PLL Speed Out
Select [14H3]
430 Position Command PLL Ext 807
Coarse Pos Trgt Psn Direct Stpt 797 Spd Ref
From Motion Interp Psn Out 766 Spd Stpt PLL Enc Out 0,1,2,3,4,5,10
Planner 759 Other Ref [14H4] 0
Parameter 809
Sources PLL
5 Selection
[5A1] Virtual EncDelay Control PLL Speed OutAdv
Interpolator 761 140 [14H3] Profiler 6
[7H2] PLL Psn 808
490 Torque Command Interp Trq Out 800
Parameter Stpt
Virtual Enc Psn PLL Enc Out Adv
760 142 Selection [14H4]
Other Ref Psn PTP 7
[7H2] Parameter 810
Interp Vel Out Sources Spd FF
Selection
Psn Fdbk To Spd
366 Velocity Fine Command 847 PLL Psn Ref Sel 799 Psn
[3H4] 8 Ref
450 Velocity Command Camming
[7G4]
Other Ref
Sources 767
6 Psn PLL 9
Psn Direct Ref
PF755 Rev_9.
Page 1
387
Chapter 6
388
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
*4 815 Psn Ref EGR Out

Electronic Gear Ratio
Psn Selected
1 Ref
Σ Psn Command Position Control – Regulator
From [N]
722 + 723 432 Position Reference
Posit Ref [D] +
Σ Parameter initializations performed with
[11I4] Psn Reg Status
Gear Rat Position Regulator INACTIVE
EGR is skipped when 446 Position Integrator Control 724 0 OffsetIntgrtr
Psn Offset 1 Sel 820 Point to Point Position Psn EGR Mult 816 Position Control 1. If Zero Psn [P721 Bit 04] is set, Psn
control is active. 1 Offset ReRef
431 Psn Offset 1 Psn EGR Div 817 Actual [P836] is loaded with
Position 721 0 Reserved 2 Psn Intgrtr Psn Fdbk [P847] – Zero Position
821
Trim 1 Intgrtr En [P725].
Position Reference Offset 3 Integ Lmt Lo
Other Ref
Parameter 2 Offset ReRef 4 Integ Lmt Hi 2. Else, if Homing function is enabled,
Sources
Selection Psn Actual [P836] is loaded with
2 3 OffsetVel En 5 Spd Lmt Lo
0 Virtual Psn Fdbk [P847] .
+ ReRef
Psn Offset 2 Sel 822 + Encoder 4 Zero Psn 6 Spd Lmt Hi
5 Intgrtr Hold
3. Else, Psn Command [P723] and
Psn Offset 2 1 Rate Lim 7 Psn Reg Actv
Psn Ref EGR Out [P815] are loaded
823 6 PsnWtch1Arm 8 Intgrtr Hold with Psn Actual [P836]
2 721 7 PsnWatch1Dir 9 PsnW1Detect
Other Ref *4. EGR is skipped when Point to
Sources Parameter Position Control 824
Selection
Position Control 8 PsnWtch2Arm 10 PsnW2Detect Point Position control is active
(OffsetReRef) 721 3
Psn Offset Vel (OffsetVel En) (included Profiler, PLL with PTP)
9 PsnWatch2Dir 11 InPsn Detect
446 Position Integrator Control
10 Add Spd Ref
Pos Fdbk Scaling
3
436 Position Error PI Regulator Speed Limits Notch Filter
Position Control Zero Psn
(Zero Psn) Position Actual
4 721 725 836 Psn Error
From Calib
+ 835 kp +
Const II
Position Control - Regulator
Homing -
Σ +
[13D4] Psn Reg Status R
[17H3] Xzero P Gain Limit Notch
Preset Σ 724 5 Spd Lmt Lo
Psn Fdbk
724 6 Spd Lmt Hi
847 Psn Gear Ratio 848 437 Position Integrator Output
Motor Speed 441 Kpp 839
( Gear Output Spd ) 831
[3H4] 780 Position Integral Feedback PsnReg IntgrlOut
4 Psn Reg Kp 844 200 PsnNtchFltrDepth
434 Position Feedback Psn Load Actual 837 842
PReg Pos Spd Lmt
830
Calib ki
Load Psn FdbkSel 136 + Σ Const
+ 845 -200 PsnNtchFltrFreq
- - s
PReg Neg Spd Lmt 783 Position Notch Filter
Psn Fdbk [3H4]
Σ I Gain Limit Psn Reg Status

Frequency
847 724 3 Integ Lmt Lo
[N]
Other Ref [D] 724 4 Integ Lmt Hi
438 Position Loop Output
Sources Output Filter
Parameter Gear Rat 838 PsnReg
Selection 840 PReg Pos Int Lmt
Psn Reg Ki Psn Spd Out
5 Modes
442 Kpi (kn * s)+ wn
841 PReg Neg Int Lmt s + wn
843
LdPsn Fdbk Mult 825 To Spd Ref
782 Position Lead Lag Filter Gain Lead Lag
Droop Spd/Trq
[7E5]
LdPsn Fdbk Div 826 Psn Out FltrGain 833 Modes
846 Psn Reg Droop
832 0
Psn Out Fltr Sel
1 721 Intgrtr Enbl Psn Out Fltr BW 834 Actv SpTqPs
& 313
Mode
Inv 5 721 Intgrtr Hold 781 Position Lead Lag Filter Bandwidth
6 [23D5]
Position Control 446 Position Integrator Control PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 12
A B C D E F G H I
1
Position Control – Aux Functions
Position Watch 1 Position Watch 2
2 Position Control Position Control

721 6 PsnWtch1Arm 721 8 PsnWtch2Arm
7 PsnWatch1Dir 9 PsnWatch2Dir
PsnWatch1 Stpt 747 Psn Reg Status PsnWatch2 Stpt 750 Psn Reg Status
724 9 PsnW1Detect 724 10 PsnW2Detect
Other Ref Other Ref
Sources Parameter Sources Parameter
Selection Position Watch 1 Selection Position Watch 2
3 PsnWatch1 Select 745 PsnWatch2 Select 748
746 749
PsnWatch1 DtctIn PsnWatch2 DtctIn
Position Control - Aux Functions
In Position Detect
Psn Reg Status
Psn Error 835 724 11 InPsn Detect

[12D3]

In Position Detect
In Pos Psn Band 726
In Pos Psn Dwell 727
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 13
389
Chapter 6
390
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1 Position Control – Phase Locked Loop
PLL Control
795 0 PLL Enable
1 Velocity FF
2 Ext Vel FF
3 Accel Comp - Bit4 enables PCAM function with PLL.
2 - Bit5 enables PTP function with PLL
PLL Ext SpdScale 4 PCAM Enable
- Bit6 enables Profiler function with PLL
798 5 PTP Enable Can not select multiple bits.
PLL Control PLL Control PLL Control PLL LPFilter BW PLL references must connect to
6 Prof Enable
appropriate outputs of the function.
795 2 795 1 795 3 802
PLL Ext Spd Stpt 797 Ext Velocity Accel
Vel FF FF Comp
1
X PLL Control
Other Ref
Sources Parameter 0 1 PLL BW 795 0 PLL Enable
Selection LPF
801
3 0 Delay 807 PLL Speed Out
PLL Ext Spd Sel 796 0 [11F5]
1
808 PLL Speed OutAdv
X to V [11F5]
Conv 0
0
Delay 809 PLL Enc Out
PLL Psn Stpt 800 [11F5]
+
Loop 1
+ + VE 810 PLL Enc Out Adv
Other Ref - Filter [11F5]
Sources 0
Position Control - Phase Locked Loop
Parameter
Selection
0
4
806 PLL Psn Out Fltr
PLL Psn Ref Sel 799
EGR

[ ]
[ ]
803 PLL Virt Enc RPM
5
PLL EPR Input 804 X X
811 PLL EPR Output
PLL Rvls Input 805 812 PLL Rvls Output
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 14
A B C D E F G H I
1 Position Control – Position CAM

PCAM Mode 1391 0 - Off
1 - Single step
2 - Continuous
3 - Persistent
PCAM ScaleYSetPt 1400
Y (slave)
Other Ref
Sources Parameter
2 Selection
1473 PCAM Psn Out
PCAM ScaleY Sel 1399 [11G4]
Y-span
Unwind X 1472 PCAM Vel Out
PCAM Psn Stpt 1393 [11G3]
Other Ref X (master)

Sources Parameter X-span
3 Selection
PCAM Psn Select 1392 Virtual Encoder
PCAM Psn Ofst 1394 PCAM Scale X 1397

Position Control - Position CAM
PCAM PsnOfst Eps 1395

PCAM VelScaleSP 1402
PCAM Span X 1396
Other Ref DI PCAM Start 1474
4 PCAM Span Y 1398 Sources Parameter
Selection PCAM Status 1471 PCAM Control 1390
Profile Definition
Single Mode 0 Start 0
PCAM VelScaleSel 1401 Contins Mode 1 ReverseX In 1
Pt X 0 1407 Pt Y 0 1408
PCAM Slope Begin 1403
Pt X 1 1441 Pt Y 1 1442 Persist Mode 2 ReverseY Out 2

PCAM Slope End 1404 In Cam 3 Aux Cam En 3
PCAM Pt X 15 Pt X 15 Start 4 Alt Slope 4
1437 Pt Y 15 1438 1469 Pt Y 15 1470
Main PCAM
ReverseX In 5 Offset En 5
Aux
Types 1406 0 - - 15 Types 1440 x 1 - 15 ReverseY Out 6 Reref Psn In 6
5
Aux Cam En 7 Unidirection 7
EndPnt 1405 EndPnt 1439
Alt Slope 8 Cndtnl Hold 8
Offset En 9
Reref Psn In 10
Unidirection 11
Cndtnl Hold 12
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 15
391
Chapter 6
392
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1
Position Control – Profiler/Indexer (1)
Step Step Step Step Step Step
1 2 3 4 15 16
Speed/Position
Type 1230 1240 1250 1260 1370 1380
Velocity 1231 1241 1251 1261 1371 1381
Spd Ref
Accel 1232 1242 1252 1262 1372 1382
To Spd Ref
Move Table [6C3]
Decel 1233 1243 1253 1263 1373 1383
1234 1244 1254 1264 1374 1384 Actv SpTqPs Mode
Value
Dwell 1235 1245 1255 1265 1375 1385 313 [22D5]
2
Batch 1236 1246 1256 1266 1376 1386
Profiler
Next 1237 1247 1257 1267 1377 1387 PTP
Action 1238 1248 1258 1268 1378 1388 Command
Time Other
Dig In 1239 1249 1259 1269 1379 1389 0 784
[11E2]
Prof DI Invert 1217 0 Hold Step
1 Abort Step Profile Command Profile Status

3 2 AbortProfile Counts Per Unit 1215 1213 0 StrStepSel0 1210 0 Step Bit 0 1212 Units Traveled
3 Vel Override 1 StrStepSel1 1 Step Bit 1
ProfVel Override 1216 Current
Starting
4 StrStepSel0 2 StrStepSel2 Step 2 Step Bit 2 Step
(0-16) (0-16)
5 StrStepSel1 3 StrStepSel3 3 Step Bit 3
6 StrStepSel2
4 StrStepSel4 4 Step Bit 4
7 StrStepSel3 5 Reserved 5 Reserved
8 StrStepSel4 6 Reserved 6 Reserved

9 Step1 Reserved Reserved
7 7
4 10 Step2 1218 DI Hold Step 8 Hold Step 8 Enabled
11 Step3 1219 DI Abort Step 9 Vel Override 9 Running
Position Control - Profiler/Indexer (Sheet 1)
12 Step4 1220 DI Abort Profile 10 Restart Step 10 Position Mode

13 Step5 1221 DI Vel Override 11 HomeNotSetAlarm 11 Dwell

14 Step6 1222 DI StrtStep Sel0 12 Prof Run Alarm 12 Holding
15 Step7 1223 DI StrtStep Sel1 13 In Position
16 Step8 1224 Alarm Status B 14 Complete
DI StrtStep Sel2
17 Step9 1225 DI StrtStep Sel3 960 7 Profile Actv 15 Stopped
5 18 Step10 1226 DI StrtStep Sel4 16 Resume
19 Step11 17 Restart Step
20 Step12 18 Vel Override
21 Step13 19 Home Not Set
22 Step14
23 Step15
24 Step16
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 16
A B C D E F G H I
1 Position Control – Profiler/Indexer (2) Position Control – Homing

Alarm Status B
960 8 Homing Actv
9 Not Home Set

Type = Position Absolute (Posit Abs)
Action Posit Blend Time Param Digin (+/-) Wait Step to Next End
Blend Blend Blend Digin
Velocity Move vel N/A N/A N/A Move vel Move vel N/A
Accel Move accel N/A N/A N/A Move accel Move accel N/A
Move decel N/A N/A N/A Move decel Move decel N/A
Speed Spd Ref
Decel
2 Value Absolute N/A N/A N/A Absolute Absolute N/A To Spd Ref
Target pos Target pos Target pos Find Home Speed 735 [6G3]
Dwell N/A N/A N/A N/A Dwell Time Dwell Time Dwell
Time
Batch N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Find Home Ramp 736
Next Next Step N/A N/A N/A Next Step Next Step N/A PTP
Next Step Position > N/A N/A N/A DigIn Position > Restart Command To Psn
Condition Value transition Value Indexer
Position 784 Ref
DigIn # N/A N/A N/A N/A Digin # N/A N/A
[11E3]
Type = Position Incremental (Posit Incr)

Action Posit Blend Time Param Digin (+/-) Wait Step to Next End Zero Position
Blend Blend Blend Digin User Home Psn 738 - 725
3 + To Psn
Velocity Move vel N/A N/A N/A Move vel Move vel N/A
Accel Move accel N/A N/A N/A Move accel Move accel N/A Psn Regulator
Decel Move decel N/A N/A N/A Move decel Move decel N/A Actual Home Psn - Actual [12B3]
Value Incremental N/A N/A N/A Incremental Incremental N/A + 836
Target pos Target pos Target pos 737
Dwell N/A N/A N/A N/A Dwell Time Dwell Time Dwell
Time
Batch N/A N/A N/A N/A Batch # Batch # N/A Psn Fdbk
Next Next Step N/A N/A N/A Next Step Next Step N/A
Next Step Position > N/A N/A N/A DigIn Position > Restart 847
Condition Value transition Value Indexer
DigIn # N/A N/A N/A N/A Digin # N/A N/A
4 Homing Control Homing Status

Type = Speed Profile 731 0 Find Home 730 0 Home Request
Action Posit Blend Time Blend Param Blend Digin Blend (+/-) Wait Step to Next End
Digin 1 Home DI 1 Home Enabled
Psn Fdbk
Velocity Move vel Move vel Move vel Move Vel Move vel Move vel N/A
Accel Move accel Move accel Move accel Move accel Move accel Move accel N/A Source 2 Home Marker 2 Homing
1. When Homing function is enabled,
Decel Move decel Move decel Move decel Move decel Move decel Move decel N/A Parameter
Return Home At Home Psn Actual [P836] is loaded with

Value Incremental Total Time Compare N/A Total Time Total Time N/A Selection 3 3
Target pos Param # (+/-) Psn Fdbk [P847] .
4 Psn Redefine
Dwell N/A N/A Compare Dwell Time Dwell Time Dwell Time Dwell Psn Fdbk
Param # Time 2. When Homing function is complete,
Sel 5 Homing Alarm
Batch N/A N/A N/A Batch # Batch # Batch # N/A
Next Next Step Next Step Next Step Next Step Next Step Next Step N/A Zero Position [P725] is loaded with
6 Home DI Inv
Next Step Position > Time > Param[Value] Digin [Value] Digin Time > Restart 135 Actual Home Position [P737] - User
Condition Value Value Compare to transition transition Value Profile 7 Hold At Home Home Position [P738].
5 Param[Dwell]
Then Psn Actual [P836] is loaded with
DigIn # N/A N/A N/A Digin # Digin # N/A N/A
Psn Fdbk [P847] - Zero Position
[P725].
732 DI Find Home
733 DI Redefine Psn 3. When Position Redefine is enabled,
Position Control - Profiler/Indexer (Sheet 2) / Position Control - Homing
Actual Home Position [P737] is loaded

734 DI OL Home Limit
with Psn Fdbk [P847] .
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 17
393
Chapter 6
394
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Roll Psn Offset

1505
Roll Psn Config Roll Psn Config

Roll Psn Config
1500 0 Enable 1500 3 EGR Select ReRef 1500 2 Rereference Roll Psn Status
1501 0 Enable
EGR1 Roll Psn Config 1 Rereference
2 1 [ ]
1500 1 Preset
RP Pos Fdbk Stpt 1502 [ ]

Roll Psn Preset
Psn Fdbk 847 1
EGR 1504
0 [ ] Modulo Divider
+ 0
+ Σ Mod 1511 RP Psn Out
Other Ref [ ]
Sources Parameter
Selection
X 1512 RP Unit Out
3
RP Pos Fdbk Sel 1503
X X
*1 *1
1506 1507 1508 1509 1510

RP EPR Input RP Rvls Input RP Rvls Output RP Unwind RP Unit Scale
4
Gear Ratio
*1: Product need to be within 32-bits integer range
RP Psn Out

1511
Position Control / Aux Functions, Roll Position Indicator
RP Unwind 1509
Position
0 Feedback
Input
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 18
A B C D E F G H I
SO Config
1580 0 Home DI
1
1
Home DI
Rising
0 Edge SO Status SO Config
Marker Pulse 1581 0 At SO Speed 1580 0 Home DI
1 Mode 1 Home DI Inv

Spindle Position Indicator
2 Orient Cplt 2 Recap Hm Psn
SO Offset 1583 ReCap
3 ShortestPath
EGR
2 [ ] Modulo Divider SO Position Out 4 Scale Invert
Psn Fdbk 847 + Σ Mod 1589

[ ] - Scale Invert
SO Config 1580 4
0 SO Unit Out
X 1590
135
Pos Fdbk Sel 1

ReCap ÷
3
X X
*1 *1
SO Offset SO Cnts per Rvls

1584 1585 1586 1583 1587 SO Unit Scale 1588
SO Fwd Vel Lmt SO Rev Vel Lmt
Position Control – Spindle Orient
SO EPR Input SO Rvls Input SO Rvls Output SO Status 1593 1594

1581 1 Mode
Gear Ratio
4
*1: Product need to be within 32-bits integer range

SO Setpoint
1582 Spindle Position Command Spindle Position Planner

SO Fwd Vel Lmt
Ramped Spd Ref 594
1593
SO Position Out
5
1589 1591 1592
SO Accel Time SO Decel Time
1587
SO Cnts per Rvls Limit
1594
0 Position Feedback Input
6
SO Rev Vel Lmt
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 19
395
Chapter 6
396
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
2
Torque
PsnTrqBst Trq Y4 1527 1528 PsnTrqBst TrqOut
PsnTrqBst Trq Y2 1525
PsnTrqBst Trq Y3 1526
3 RP Psn Out 1511
Psn Fdbk 847 Modulo Divide

by EPR
0
+ Mod
Other Ref +
Sources Parameter Position
Selection
PsnTrqBst RefSel 1517
4
1518 1519 1520 1522 1524
PsnTrqBstPsnOfst PsnTrqBst UNWCnt PsnTrqBst Ps X1 PsnTrqBst Ps X3 PsnTrqBst Ps X5
1521 1523
PsnTrqBst Ps X2 PsnTrqBst Ps X4

PsnTrqBst Ctrl PsnTrqBst Sts
Boost Enabled
1515 0 1516 0
Enable
1 In Position
5
Position Control / Aux Functions, Position Oriented Torque Boost
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 20
A B C D E F G H I
1
Torque Control – Overview
Induction Motor (IM) &
Surface Permanent Magnet Motor (SPM)
Spd Reg PI Out Inertia

Speed
Adaption
Inertia Comp Reg Select
2 Output
Trim Torque Step
Speed /
Filtered
Torque / Torque Ref
Te
+ - Torque
Position + Notch + Iq Current
Mode + Filter + Torque Current Rate Ref
Limit Calc Limit Limit
Select
Friction
Torq Ref 1
Torque
3 Comp
Reference
Torq Ref 2 Scale Load
and Observer/
Torq Trim Estimator
Trim
Pos Torque Limit

Regen Power Limit
4
Drive Voltage and Current
Current Ratings Pwr
Bus Torque Limit
+ Te
DC Bus Voltage Voltage + Limit Processing
Regulator Select and
Selection

Brake/Bus Config Calc
Neg Torque Limit
Power, Torque, and Current Limit Reference Generation

5
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Torque Control Overview - Induction Motor and Surface Permanent Magnet Motor
Page 21a
397
Chapter 6
398
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Torque Control – Overview

1 Interior Permanent Magnet Motor (IPM)
Voltage
Limit
Id
Te Current
Id Current Ref
Calc Limit
Spd Reg PI Out Inertia
Speed
Adaption
Inertia Comp Reg Select
2
Output
Trim Torque Step
Speed / Id
Filtered
Torque / + - Torque Ref Te Iq
Position + Notch + Iq Current
Mode + Filter + Torque Current Rate Ref
Limit Calc Limit Limit
Select
3 Friction
Torq Ref 1
Torque
Comp
Reference
Torq Ref 2 Scale Load
and Observer/
Torq Trim Estimator
Trim
Current
Limit
Pos Torque Limit
Regen Power Limit Processing
4
and
Drive Voltage and
Current Ratings
Selection
Pwr
Bus + Torque
Te
DC Bus Voltage Voltage + Limit
Regulator Select

Brake/Bus Config Calc
Neg Torque Limit

Torque Control Overview - Interior Permanent Magnet Motor
5 Power, Torque, and Current Limit Reference Generation
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 21b
A B C D E F G H I

1 scaling only used when Torque Control – Reference Scale & Trim
Analog Input is selected
Trq Ref B Sel 680
2
0.0 ( Disabled )
Trq Ref B Stpt 681 ( Setpoint ) Default

Parameter
761 – Interp Trq Out Selection
Trq RefB AnlgHi 682
Trq Ref A Sel 675 Trq RefB AnlgLo 683
*
3
0.0 ( Disabled )
Trq Ref A Stpt
676 ( Setpoint ) Default

Default 0
Parameter 1
Selection PID Output Sel
Trq RefA AnlgHi 677
Trq RefA AnlgLo 678
* 1079
4 3 = Torque Excl
PID Output Meter 4 = Torque Trim
Torque Control - Reference Scale and Trim
(PID Torque Trim)

[27E5]
3,4 Commanded
1093
Trq
Other

Bit
0 4
Source
Parameter Other
DI Torque StptA 195 Selection x + To Torq Ctrl,
Trq Ref B Mult 684 Process Ctrl
3 [23B4], [27A4]
0
5
Other
Trq Ref A Mult 679 x
3
0
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 22
399
Chapter 6
400
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
FrctnComp InertiaTrqAdd
FrctnComp Mode
Out
708 [25B4]
1 1560 1567
Torque Control – Torque Inertia
Disabled
496 - Kj Adaption
0 Friction
801 – Load Observer
0 1
Comp Total Inertia 76 Inertia Acceleration Estimate
From 1435 – Feedback n Accel Motor Acceleration Adaption Disabled
Spd Ref Int Ramp Ref 1 0
[7A3] Filter Bandwidth Feedback 0
1561 FrctnComp Trig
Ext Ramped Ref 1562 FrctnComp Hyst
2 Inertia Adapt BW 705
700
1563 FrctnComp Time
Filtered SpdFdbk InertiaAdaptGain 706
3 1564 FrctnComp Stick ***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY*** 809 - Kof
640
1565 FrctnComp Slip Logic Ctrl State Min/Max Cntrl 493 – Torque
2
1566 FrctnComp Rated (Forced Spd) (Forced Spd) Reference Filtered
Zero Torque 0
0 Selected Filtered Trq
457 Velocity Loop Output Trq Ref Ref
Speed Reg 1 - To Torq Ctrl
0 0 +
From Spd Reg 660 + 685 + + 689 Current
+ + II +
[10I3] SReg Output Torq Reg 2 R [24a B2],
1 [10D5]
Notch [24b B2],
SLAT
492 – Torque Reference [25D2],
Inertia Comp Out Min 3 1 [26D2]
Min 491 – Torque Trim
From Spd Ref 699 Notch Fltr Freq 687
Torque
[7C4] SLAT 686 Notch Fltr Atten 688
3 Max
Step
452 – Acceleration 4
Max
Feedforward 503 – Torque Notch 802 – Load Observer Load
Torque Control - Torque
Command Filter Freq Estimate

Sum 5 Torque Estimate
[26C5] 707
+
+ Load
496 - Kj Observer
6
Load 2
Profiler Total Inertia 76
Observer/
Motor Acceleration Disabled
Psn P2P 7 Estimator 0
Feedback 0
4
Psn Camming 8 [6A1],
[6D2], Load Observer BW 711
[10D5], 704
Commanded Trq Psn PLL 9 806 - Kop
[11D2], InAdp LdObs Mode
From Torq Ref [11I1],

4
[22H4] Psn Direct 10 [12H5], 805 – Load Observer Configuration
[16H2]
Psn SpdlOrnt 11 Actv
309 SpTqPs
40 – Control Mode SpdTrqPsn Mode A Mode
ABCD
833 – SLAT Select
5 SpdTrqPsn Mode B 310 313
Configuration 0 0 Drive Status 1
SpdTrqPsn Mode C 0 1
311 935 21 22 23
1 0 Select
SpdTrqPsn Mode D 312 1 1
834 – SLAT Setpoint Logic
835 – SLAT Delay Time Torque Mode
PositionMode
DI SpTqPs Sel 1 182 SLAT Err Stpt 314 Speed Mode
DI SpTqPs Sel 0 181 SLAT Dwell Time 315
Mtr Option Cnfg
6 (Zero TrqStop)
(Trq ModeStop) 40 0 1 2
PF755 Rev_9.a
(Trq ModeJog) Page 23
A B C D E F G H I
Torque Control – Current

1 Induction Motor (IM) & Surface Permanent Magnet Motor (SPM)
Flux Vector
At Limit Status 945 21 Trq Pos Lmt 25 Cur Lmt FV

22 Trq Neg Lmt 26 Therm RegLmt At Limit Status
23 Mtrng PwrLmt 27 BusVltgFVLmt 945 17 TrqCurPosLmt
494 – Torque Reference - 24 Regen PwrLmt 28 Mtr Vltg Lkg
18 TrqCurNegLmt
493 – Torque Reference - Filtered Limited
Filtered Trq 520 – Iq Current Command Limited Trq
Ref Ref
2 From Torq Te
689 690 Torque Current Ref
Ctrl Iq
[23H2] 505 – Torque Limit - Negative [3C6], [25E2], Calc
Limit Limit Rate Lim
[26E2]
Neg Torque Limit 671
{Trq Pos Lmt}
454 – Velocity Neg Pos
Active Vel Fdbk Flux
Feedback Limit Limit 425
From Fdbk 131 Active Neg Active Pos
Torque Limit Torque Limit Current Rate Lmt
[3F2]
625 – Regen Power Limit Regen Power Lmt 426 1
{Regen PwrLmt} Max
-1 Flux
3
Bus + Pwr
{BusVltgFVLmt} + -1
Regulator Te
Calc
1
Min
Motor Power Lmt Flux
427
{Mtrng PwrLmt}
800
Pos Torque Limit 670
{Trq Neg Lmt} Flux Flux
504 – Torque Limit - Positive
4
Voltage Ref/ Pk Torque Iq Current Limit
{Mtr Vltg Lkg} Limit
Generation Min Active Iq Current Limit
Is,Id
Iq Flux Vector

Calc Iq,Id (3,6)
530 – Id Current Feedback Flux Current Is

Fdbk Calc
Current Lmt Sel 421
Power VF or SV
1320 – Motor Rated Peak Current Current Lmt 1 422 Thermal Mgr Current Limit (0-2,4,5,7,8)
Unit
533 – Current Vector Limit 424 Active Cur Lmt
Thermal
Current Lmt 2 423
Parameter Protection [36D2]
Selection
{Therm RegLmt} Motor Ctrl Mode 35
{Cur Lmt FV}
6
1315 – Motor Type
Torque Control - Current, Induction Motor and Surface Permanent Magnet Motor
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 24a
401
Chapter 6
402
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Torque Control – Current

1 Flux Vector Interior Permanent Magnet motor (IPM)
At Limit Status 945 21 Trq Pos Lmt 25 Cur Lmt FV
22 Trq Neg Lmt 26 Therm RegLmt At Limit Status
23 Mtrng PwrLmt 27 BusVltgFVLmt 945 17 TrqCurPosLmt
24 Regen PwrLmt 28 Mtr Vltg Lkg
18 TrqCurNegLmt
Filtered Trq Limited Trq

Ref Ref
Iq
2 From Torq 689 690 Te Current
Ctrl
Iq Ref
[23H2] [3C6], [25E2], Id
Limit Limit Rate Lim
[26E2]
Neg Torque Limit 671
{Trq Pos Lmt} Calc
Active Vel Fdbk
425
From Fdbk 131 Active Neg Active Pos Is,Id
Torque Limit Torque Limit Current Rate Lmt
[3F2] Iq
Calc
Regen Power Lmt 426
{Regen PwrLmt}
Voltage
Max
-1 Limit
3 Id
+ Pwr Te Current
Bus Id
{BusVltgFVLmt} + Ref
Regulator Te Limit
Calc
Calc
Min
Motor Power Lmt 427
{Mtrng PwrLmt}

{Trq Neg Lmt}
4 Voltage Ref/
{Mtr Vltg Lkg} Limit
Generation

Torque Control - Current, Interior Permanent Magnet Motor
5
Current Lmt Sel 421
Power
Current Lmt 1 422 Thermal Mgr Current Limit
Unit
424 Active Cur Lmt
Thermal
Current Lmt 2 423
Parameter Protection [36D2]
Selection
{Therm RegLmt}
{Cur Lmt FV}
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 24b
A B C D E F G H I
1
Torque Control – Inertia Adaption
520 – Iq Current Command

493 – Torque Reference - Filtered 494 – Torque Reference - Limited
2 Limited
Filtered
Trq Ref Drive Status 2
Trq Ref [24a E2], [24b E2]
(Fdbk Loss Sw0)
Torque
[23H2] 689 Limits 690 936 5 [3E1]
1 Position
d
Notch Filter Primary FIR 0
Encoder dt
Output Total Inertia Filter Velocity Accel
504 – Torque Limit - Positive Derivative
Limit IA LdObs 1
System Model
Delay
709
Neg Torque Limit 671 d
3
FIR
Position dt
505 – Torque Limit - Negative Alternate Filter Velocity Accel
Encoder Derivative
805 – Load Observer Configuration

InAdp LdObs Mode
Speed Sensor ***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***
704 Type
Inertia Motor Acceleration Feedback
Torque Control - Inertia Adaption
Adaption 1 Else X
Filter X From Fdbk
[3E3]
Else LPass 1
4 0
0
801 – Load Observer Sensorless
708 1435 – Feedback n
Acceleration Estimate 705 706 76
InertiaTrqAdd Accel Filter Bandwidth
InertiaAdaptGain Total Inertia
[23H1] Inertia Adapt BW
809 - Kof 496 - Kj

Inertia Adaption
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 25
403
Chapter 6
404
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1
Torque Control – Load Observer / Estimator
2
520 – Iq Current Command
493 – Torque Reference - Filtered 494 – Torque Reference - Limited
Filtered Limited
Drive Status 2
Trq Ref Trq Ref [24a E2], [24b E2]
(Fdbk Loss Sw0)
Torque
[23H2] 689 690 936 5 [3E1]
Limits
1 Position
d
Notch Filter Primary FIR 0
Encoder dt
Output Total Inertia Filter Velocity Accel
504 – Torque Limit - Positive Derivative
Limit IA LdObs 1
3 505 – Torque Limit - Negative System Model
Delay
709
Neg Torque Limit 671 d
FIR
Position dt
Alternate Filter Velocity Accel
Encoder Derivative
805 – Load
***INTERNAL CONDITION ONLY***
Observer
Configuration
Load Observer BW
InAdp LdObs Mode
711 806 - Kop Speed Sensor
704 Type
Load Motor Acceleration Feedback
4 2
Observer Else
X From Fdbk
Torque Control - Load Observer / Estimator
Filter
Else
[3E3]
LPass 1
0 0
Sensorless

Load 10 R/S 76
Estimate
802 – Load Observer Total Inertia
707
Torque Estimate Filter 496 - Kj
[23G3] LPass
5
Load Observer / Estimator
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 26
A B C D E F G H I
DI PID Invert PID Deriv

1 Time Process Control (1)
194
PID Ref Sel
1088
1067 -1
Option E
Port:
PID Ref PID Ref Digital In
AnlgHi AnlgLo
- PID Status
Parameter + kd-S (PID In Limit)
1068 1069 PID Selection
Deadband PID Prop Gain PID Output 1089 3
PID Error D Gain Mult
1083 Invert Error Meter 1086
Parameter 1080
Selection 1065 1 PID Cfg 1092
0 0 PID Output
Option (Ramp Ref)
Analog Types Meter
Port: 0 1 +
x -1 kp + x 1093 [28A2]
Analog In +-
2 Scale 1 Filter +
Error Deadband
1 200% Limit
MOP Reference Limit LPass P Gain
[29F2] 558 1071 0 PID Upper Limit
Float Types Ramp 1066 3
PID Ref 1081
PID Setpoint PID Control 1084
Mult
(PID InvError) PID LP 1082
1070 Default 1090 1089 0
Filter BW PID Status PID Lower Limit
PID Ref PID Status 1089 1
Hold (PID Hold)
Meter (PID Enabled) [27C5] [9I4]
PID Fdbk Sel Output Frequency
PID Fdbk Per
1072 1091 1 Hz
Meter Unit
PID Fdbk Mult PID Cfg (Anti Conv
3 PID Output Sel Windup)
Option 1078
1079 1065 5 PID Cfg
Port: 0
[27E5] (Preload Int)
Analog In Float Types
1 PID Status 1065 3
x 1
MOP Reference (PID Enabled)
Process Control (Sheet 1)
PID Fdbk PID Fdbk AntiWind PID Output Sel

[29F2] 558 -1
AnlgHi AnlgLo 1089 0 1079
Up Z
1073 1074 PID Cfg [9I4]
1065 3 PID Preload
PID Fdbk (Fdbk Sqrt) Output Frequency 0 0
1085
Per
1077 Default Parameter 1 Hz 1
Unit 1
Selection
Conv
Commanded Trq 5
Analog Types DI PID Enable Vqs Command
[22H4] 4 0,2,3,4,6
191 Drive 0.0
4 Scale PID FBLoss SpSel
ki + InLimit Accel Conditional
Torque Cur Fdbk 1
1075 +
5 Analog Loss Option s 1
1,2 ҁ0 Drive Status 2 1
936 10 Port:
(PID FB Loss) Digital In Drive Status 1 I Gain Limit 0
Output Current 3,4 ҁ0 (Stopping) 0.0
[28D5] Parameter 0
PID Upper Limit
7 Selection 935 18 PID Control
1081

1079 1076 1087 (PID Reset)
Output Power PID Enable
PID Output Sel PID FBLoss TqSel PID Int Time 1082 2 1066
PID Status
9 1 1089 0
(PID Enabled) PID Lower Limit
0 PID Status
[27H3] 1 1089 2
PID Control (PID Reset)
Option 0 1066
(PID Enable) 935 16
Port: ҁ0
Digital In 191
5 Drive Status 1
Parameter DI PID Enable (Running)
DI PID Hold 192
Selection PID Reset
PID Output Sel PID
PID Hold Stop Option
1079
ҁ0 Mode Port:
PID Status
1 1089 1 2 0 Digital In
(PID Hold)
1 Parameter
[27G2] 193
Selection
Drive InLimit
DI PID Reset
1066 PID Control 18 935 1093
1 4 1065
(PID Hold)
PID Cfg Drive Status 1 PID Output Meter
6 (Stop Mode) (Stopping)
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 27
405
Chapter 6
406
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
PID FBLoss SpSel
PID Output Sel 1075

1 1079
Process Control (2)
Parameter
PID Output Selection
Meter Not MOP Reference
558 Float Types
Used 0 [29F2]
1093
[27I2] Spd Ref A Stpt
546 Default
Ramped Spd Ref

Speed
2 Excl 1 594
To Spd Ref
[6B2] [7G1] OR [8G2] >0
Limited -1
Spd Ref Neg Limit
PID Cfg 1 To Spd Ref
593 [6H4] 1
Speed (Percent Ref) [6B2]
Excl 6 1065
Speed
Trim 2 1 1 0
X
Pos Limit
0 0 0 To Spd Ref (Trim)

[7B5], [8A5]
2 1065 Drive Status 2

3 936 10
PID Cfg (PID FB Loss)
(Zero Clamp) [27C4]
Volt
Excl 5 PID FBLoss TqSel
Process Control (Sheet 2)
PID Voltage Output

Maximum Voltage 1076
36
Volt
Trim
6 X PID Voltage Trim Output
Parameter
Selection
MOP Reference
4 [29F2] Float Types
558
Trq Ref A Stpt

676 Default
PID Output Sel
1079
Torq Ref A

+
Torq Ref B 3
>0
-1
Torque Neg Limit
Excl 3 + 4 1
1 +
Torque
5 Trim 4 1 0 To Torq Ref
[22G4]
Pos Limit
0 0
2 1065
936 10
PID Cfg
(Zero Clamp) Drive Status 2
(PID FB Loss)
6 [27C4]
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 28
A B C D E F G H I
1
DI MOP Inc 177 MOP Control
MOP Rate Parameter
Indirect Option Port:
560
Digital In
MOP High Limit
MOP Inc
561
2
Calc 0
+ MOP Reference
Step
0 558
MOP Init Select 0 Limit

-
566
Reset / Save
MOP Control
562
3 Parameter
Disabled (0) Default Option Port: Indirect MOP Low Limit
MOP Init Stpt 567 Digital In
MOP Inc
MOP High Limit 561
MOP Low Limit 562

DI MOP Dec 178
Preset Speed 1 571

4
Parameter
Preset Speed 2 572 Selection
0 0 1
Preset Speed 3 573

Preset Speed 4 574 559 1 933 3
Save MOP Ref Start Inhibits
Preset Speed 5 575 (At Stop) (SW Coast Stp)
Preset Speed 6 576

0 0 1
5
Preset Speed 7 577
559 0 933 11
Save MOP Ref Start Inhibits
(At Pwr Down) (Bus PreChg)
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 29
407
Chapter 6
408
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Outputs
1 Inputs & Outputs – Digital

RO0 Off Time
Inputs
15 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert
Dig In Sts 5 0 NC
6 0
1 5 4 3 2 1 0
Relay Out0 0
Dig In Fltr Timer Common
Source
3 Parameter 1
Selection Inv
In5 NO
Filter 10 14
2 Dig In Fltr Mask RO0 Sel RO0 On Time

Dig In Fltr
2 5
3
RO1/TO0 Off Time
In4 Dig Out Sts
Filter 25
Dig Out Invert
5 1
Dig In Fltr Mask
Dig In Fltr 6 1
2 4 NC
3 Relay Out1
0
Transistor Out0 Timer
In3 Source
Filter Parameter 1 Common
Selection Inv OR
Dig In Fltr Mask
3 20 24
2 3 Dig In Fltr NO
3 RO1/TO0 Sel RO1/TO0 On Time
In2
Filter
Dig In Fltr Mask
Inputs and Outputs - Digital
Dig In Fltr TO1 Off Time

2 2 Dig Out Sts
3 35
Dig Out Invert

5 2
In1
Filter 6 2
Dig In Fltr Mask
Transistor Out1 0
Dig In Fltr Timer
4 2 1 Source NO
3 Parameter 1
Selection Inv
In0
Filter 34
30
Dig In Fltr Mask
TO1 Sel TO1 On Time

Com 2 0
Output Compare
RO0 Level Sel RO1/TO0 Level Sel *-1R2T (1-Relay / 2-Transistor) I/O Modules Only
11 21 RO1/TO0 Level CmpSts TO1 Level Sel 31 TO1 Level CmpSts

5 RO0 Level CmpSts
23 1 0 33 1 0
13 1 0
RO0 Level RO1/TO0 Level TO1 Level
Source Source Source
A A≥B A A≥B
Parameter A A≥B Parameter Parameter
Option Module Parameters – Reference Symbol Legend Selection Selection Selection
A<B A<B
A<B
RO1/TO0 Level 22 B TO1 Level 32 B
RO0 Level 12 B
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 30
A B C D E F G H I
Inputs
1 Anlg In Loss Sts Anlg In0 Value

Anlg In0 LssActn 53 Inputs & Outputs – Analog
49 1 50
V/mA
Voltage Anlg In Type Loss Loss Anlg In0 Hi
Detection Pre Scaled Scaled
+ 45 0 Value 51 Value
Option Module Parameters – Reference Symbol Legend
V/mA
- Ignore 0 (kn * s) + wn In-Lo
ADC s + wn Hi-Lo
+ Square
1 Root Lead Lag Scale
Alarm
V/mA
-
2 46 0 52
2 Current Flt Continue
Anlg In Sqrt Anlg In0 Lo
3
FltCoastStop
Anlg In0 Filt Gn 55
4
Flt RampStop 56
Anlg In0 Filt BW
5
Flt CL Stop
Hold 6 Outputs
Input
Anlg Out0 Val
7
Set Input Lo 82
3
8 Anlg Out0 DataHi V/mA
Set Input Hi
Anlg Out0 Data 78 Anlg Out0 Hi Analog Out Type Voltage
77 80 70 0 +
V/mA
Inputs and Outputs - Analog
Anlg Out0 Stpt 76 -

Anlg In Loss Sts Anlg In1 Value In-Lo
Anlg In1 LssActn 63
Abs Hi-Lo
DAC
Other Ref Sources +
49 2 60 Parameter Scale
V/mA Selection
71 0 V/mA
Loss
-
Voltage Anlg In Type Loss Anlg In1 Hi
Anlg Out0 Sel 75 Anlg Out Abs 81 Current
4 + 45 1 Value 61 Value
Anlg Out0 Lo
V/mA 79
- Ignore 0 In-Lo Anlg Out0 DataLo
(kn * s) + wn
ADC s + wn Hi-Lo
+ Square
1 Root Lead Lag Scale Anlg Out1 Val
Alarm
V/mA

- 92
2 46 1 62
Current Flt Continue Anlg Out1 DataHi V/mA
Anlg Out1 Data 88
3 Anlg Out1 Hi Analog Out Type Voltage
FltCoastStop 87
Anlg In1 Filt Gn 65 90 70 1 +
4 V/mA
5 Flt RampStop 66
Anlg In1 Filt BW Anlg Out1 Stpt 86 -
In-Lo
5 Abs Hi-Lo
DAC
Flt CL Stop Other Ref Sources +
Parameter Scale
Selection
Hold 6 71 1 V/mA
Input
-
7
Set Input Lo Anlg Out1 Lo
89
8 Anlg Out1 DataLo
Set Input Hi
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 31
409
Chapter 6
410
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Outputs
1 11-Series Inputs & Outputs – Digital

Inputs RO0 Off Time
15 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert
5 0 NC
Dig In Sts 6 0
1 2 1 0
Relay Out0 0
Timer Common
Source
Parameter 1
Selection Inv
Dig In Fltr NO
10 14
3
2 RO0 Sel RO0 On Time
In2
Filter
Dig In Fltr Mask RO1/TO0 Off Time

Dig In Fltr 25 Dig Out Sts
2 2 Dig Out Invert
3 5 1
In1 6 1
Filter NC
Relay Out1
Dig In Fltr Mask 0
Transistor Out0 Timer
Dig In Fltr Source
2 1 Parameter 1 Common
3 Selection Inv OR
3 In0 20 24
Filter NO
RO1/TO0 Sel RO1/TO0 On Time
Dig In Fltr Mask
Com 2 0
TO1 Off Time

35 Dig Out Sts
Dig Out Invert

5 2
6 2
Transistor Out1 0
11-Series Inputs and Outputs – Digital
Timer
4 Source NO
Parameter 1
Selection Inv
30 34
TO1 Sel TO1 On Time

Output Compare
RO0 Level Sel RO1/TO0 Level Sel *-1R2T (1-Relay / 2-Transistor) I/O Modules Only
11 21 RO1/TO0 Level CmpSts TO1 Level Sel 31 TO1 Level CmpSts

5 RO0 Level CmpSts
23 1 0 33 1 0
13 1 0
RO0 Level RO1/TO0 Level TO1 Level
Source Source Source
A A≥B A A≥B
Parameter A A≥B Parameter Parameter
Option Module Parameters – Reference Symbol Legend Selection Selection Selection
A<B A<B
A<B
RO1/TO0 Level 22 B TO1 Level 32 B
RO0 Level 12 B
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 32
A B C D E F G H I
Input
1 Anlg In Loss Sts Anlg In0 Value

Anlg In0 LssActn 53 11-Series Inputs & Outputs – Analog
49 1 50
V/mA
Voltage Anlg In Type Loss Loss Anlg In0 Hi
+ 45 0 Value 51 Value
Option Module Parameters – Reference Symbol Legend
V/mA
- Ignore 0 (kn * s) + wn In-Lo
ADC s + wn Hi-Lo
+ Square
1 Root Lead Lag Scale
Alarm
V/mA
-
2 46 0 52
2 Current Flt Continue
3
FltCoastStop
Anlg In0 Filt Gn 55
4
Flt RampStop 56
Anlg In0 Filt BW
5
Flt CL Stop
Hold 6 Output
Input
Anlg Out0 Val
7
Set Input Lo 82
3
8 Anlg Out0 DataHi V/mA
Set Input Hi
Anlg Out0 Data 78 Anlg Out0 Hi Analog Out Type Voltage
77 80 70 0 +
V/mA
Anlg Out0 Stpt 76 -

In-Lo
Abs Hi-Lo
DAC
Other Ref Sources +
Parameter Scale
Selection
71 0 V/mA -
11-Series Inputs and Outputs – Analog
4
Anlg Out0 Lo
79
Anlg Out0 DataLo

5
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 33
411
Chapter 6
412
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1 11-Series Inputs & Outputs – ATEX
Motor PTC/Thermostat Input
Motor PTC
+
PTC/Thermostat Buffer & PTC
Comparator
41 0 Thml Snsor OK
Input Monitor
2 - 1 Short Cirkt
2 Over Temp
3 Voltage Loss
13 Thermostat
14 PTC Selected
Common
ATEX Relay Output
Fault AND
Logic
Transistor
Latch
NO
Reset AND
11-Series Inputs and Outputs – ATEX
Logic

5
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 34
A B C D E F G H I
1
Note: Control Logic
The following parameters are typically referenced
0 when configuring or monitoring Control Logic;
P933 [Start Inhibits]
Digital Inputs
15
0
DPI Port 1
2 (Drv Mounted HIM)
15
0
888 Write Mask Cfg
DPI Port 2
Logic Parser To Spd Ref
15 [5G2], [6E3], [7F2],
0 [7F3], [8F2], [8F3]
Control Logic
Drive Logic Rslt

DPI Port 3
3 879
15
0 0
Mask Evaluation
DPI Port 4 Owner Logic Logic Evaluation
Logic
15 31
0
DPI Port 5
4 15
0
DPI Port 6
15

Bit Bit
0 Masks Owners
Masks Act Status 00 Stop 16 Coast Stop
01 Start 17 CurrLim Stop
Embedded Ethernet 02 Jog1 18 Run
Port 13 03 Clear Faults 19 Jog 2
04 Forward 20 Reserved
15 05 Reverse 21 Reserved
5 919 Stop Owner 06 Manual 22 Reserved
0 324 Logic Mask 885 Port Mask Act 07 Reserved 23 Reserved
325 Auto Mask 886 Logic Mask Act 920 Start Owner 08 Accel Time 1 24 Reserved
DeviceLogix 326 Manual Cmd Mask 887 Write Mask Act 921 Jog Owner 09 Accel Time 2 25 Reserved
Port 14 327 Manual Ref Mask 922 Dir Owner 10 Decel Time 1 26 Reserved
923 Clear Flt Owner 11 Decel Time 2 27 Reserved
15 12 SpdRef Sel 0 28 Reserved
924 Manual Owner 13 SpdRef Sel 1 29 Reserved
925 Ref Select Owner 14 SpdRef Sel 2 30 Reserved
15 Reserved 31 Reserved
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 35
413
Chapter 6
414
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
1 Inverter Overload (IT) Inverter Overload IT

Power Device
Characteristics 940 Drive OL Count 636 – Inverter Capacity
NTC
941 IGBT Temp Pct ‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol Legend
Pwr EE Data
Voltage Class 305 942 IGBT Temp C 641 – Inverter Temperature
Heatsink and
Duty Cycle / Rating 306 Junction Degree 943 Drive Temp Pct
647 – Inverter Calculator
Drive OL Mode 420 944 Drive Temp C 641 – Inverter Heatsink Temperature
Overload Action
2 PWM Frequency 38 424 Active Cur Lmt [24a G5] [24b G5]
620 – DC Bus Voltage DC Bus Voltage 11 d14 Active PWM Freq
601 – Output Current Output Current 7

Alarm Status B
960 0 IGBT OT
Current Limit 1 422
1 Heatsink OT
Current Limit 2 423
4 Drive OL
Parameter
Other Ref Sources Selection 5 CurLmt Reduc
3
1320 – Motor Rated Peak Current 6 PWMFrq Reduc
Inverter Overload IT
533 – Current Vector Limit

Current Limit Sel 421 Fault Status B
953 2 Drive OL
Mtr Over Load (I2T)
3 Heatsink OT
697 – Motor Thermal
4 Transistor OT Motor
Overload User Limit
Current
5 SinkUnderTmp 416 MtrOL Reset Time
624 – Bus Regulator Action
Mtr OL Actv 410
6 Excess Load
Mtr OL at Pwr Up 411 418 Mtr OL Counts
4 DB resistor
Bus Reg Mode A 372 635 – Motor Capacity
Mtr OL Alarm Lvl 412 150% right of curve
Bus Reg Mode B 373 419 Motor OL Trip Time
Mtr OL Reset Lvl 415
12 DC Bus Memory
dc bus 102%
Bus Reg Lvl Cnfg 374 621 – DC Bus Voltage
- Nominal 60 (Hot) time (sec)
Bus Reg Level 375

Motor 180 (Cold)
Current
880 – Bus Bus Reg Ki 380
Regulator Bus Reg Kp 381 Alarm Status A
Reference 1322 – Motor Overload Limit Motor OL Factor 413 1.0 - 2.0 959 2 Motor OL
X (1.025 Typ)
5 1319 – Motor Rated Motor NP Amps 26
Bus Limit Kp 376 * Continuous Current 50% Fault Status A
Bus Limit Kd 377
Bus Limit ACR Ki 378 952 2 Motor OL
DB Resistor Type 382 Motor

Bus Limit ACR Kp 379 * Note: Parameters are Speed (Hz)
DB Ext Ohms 383 not functional when any Mtr OL Hertz 414
881 – Shunt Regulator Resistor Type of the FV motor control
DB Ext Watts 384
886 – External Shunt Resistance modes are selected 3001 – Motor Overload Hertz
DB ExtPulseWatts 385
6 883 – External Shunt Power
PF755 Rev_9.a
884 – External Shunt Pulse Power Page 36
A B C D E F G H I
1
Friction Compensation
Friction Compensation Adjustments Friction Compensation Hysteresis
2 Torque Torque
+ +
+ [FrctnComp Rated]
+ [FrctnComp Stick] [FrctnComp Hyst]
3
+ [FrctnComp Slip]
[FrctnComp Time]
Friction Compensation
[FrctnComp Hyst]
- - [Motor NP RPM] - [FrctnComp Trig] + [Motor NP RPM] + - - [FrctnComp Trig] +
Speed Speed
+ [FrctnComp Trig] + [FrctnComp Trig]
[FrctnComp Hyst]
4
[FrctnComp Time]
- [FrctnComp Slip]

- [FrctnComp Stick] [FrctnComp Hyst]
- [FrctnComp Rated]
5
- -
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 37
415
Chapter 6
416
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Variable Boost Voltage Overview – Function Inputs/Outputs

1
Motor Cntl Mode
35 0
InductionVHz
VB Config
Motor NP Hertz
1535 1
27
Current Rate Parameter
VB Config Selection
VB Config
1535 0
1535 2
VB Enable
2 Rising Edge OR
VB Voltage State Decision Block
VB Config
VB Time 1537
1535 3
1538
Flux Level VB Minimum
VB Config VB Maximum 1539
Rate Calculation Block
1535 4 1540
VB Accel Rate
Minimum Freq
VB Decel Rate 1541
1542 Boost Config Enable Block
3 VB Frequency
VB Min Freq 1543
1544
VB Flux Thresh Clear At Stop Block
VB STATUS
VB Flux Lag Freq 1545
1536 0
1546
VB Filt Flux Cur Control State Cases VB Enabled VB STATUS
VB Current Rate 1547 1536 1

1548 VB STATUS VB Timer
VB Current Hyst Bst_State_Default
4 1536 2
VB Cur Thresh 1549 Bst_State_Init
Triggered VB STATUS
1550 Bst_State_Break
VB Rate Lag Freq 1536 3
1551 Bst_State_Ramp_Up VB STATUS Current Trig

Bst_State_Ramp_Dwn 1536 4
Bst_State_Reset Flux Trigger VB STATUS
1536 5
VB STATUS Freq Trigger
Variable Boost Voltage Overview – Function Inputs/Outputs
5 1536 6
Status Update Max Boost VB STATUS
1536 7
Hold Freq
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 38
A B C D E F G H I
Diagnostic Tools
1 Peak Detect Numeric Constants
NOTE: 1035 PkDtct Stpt Real
The change bit, Peak x Chng (where x = 1 or 2), is set TRUE if the
peak detect value changes, else the change bit is set FALSE. 1036 PkDtct Stpt Dint
Change is also set to FALSE if the detector is in HOLD or SET.
Bit
Digital Switches Bit Peak1 Cfg
Source Bit To Numeric Conversion 1039 2
Source (Peak1 Set)
Dig Sw Parameter Dig Sw Parameter
Peak1 Cfg Peak1 Cfg
d57 d61 1039 0 1039 1
Real Sel Selection Dint Sel Selection (Peak1 Peak) (Peak1 Hold)
Dig Sw Real Out Dig Sw Dint Out PeakDetect1 Out
1 1 PkDtct1 In Sel
Sw On Stpt Real d59 d60 Sw On Stpt Dint d63 d64 on 1041
1037
2 0 0 off
Sw Off Stpt Real d58 Sw Off Stpt Dint d62 Peak 1 PkDtct1
Input Data 1038
Real PresetSel
Source
Real
‘d’ Prefix Refers to Diagnostic Item Number (ex. d33) – Reference Symbol Legend (numeric) Parameter Peak 1
Selection Peak Detect Preset Data
Source Parameter
Peak 1 Change 1040 0 (numeric) Selection
(Peak1Change)
Peak2 Cfg
1044 2
(Peak2 Set)
Peak2 Cfg Peak2 Cfg
1044 0
Diagnostic Tools
(Peak2 Peak) 1044 1

3 (Peak2 Hold)
PeakDetect2 Out
PkDtct2 In Sel
on 1046
1042
off
Peak 2 PkDtct2
1043
Input Data Real PresetSel
Source
Peak 2 Real
(numeric) Parameter
Peak Detect Preset Data
Selection
Source Parameter
Peak 2 Change (Peak2Change) 1045 0 (numeric) Selection

5
6
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 39
417
Chapter 6
418
Chapter 6
A B C D E F G H I
Start Trend Stop Trend

High Speed Trend Wizard
1
Not
Trend Sample Configuration Configured Trend Status
8 buffers of 4096 samples; minimum interval of 1.024 ms Download
or Running
Trend Mode Ready or Start
4 buffers of 1024 samples; minimum interval of 256 us (select one)
Complete Stop Gather pre-trigger
samples
Pre-Trigger 0 to maximum (4096 or 1024) samples
2 Buffers Full Finishing
Trigger Condition
Sample Interval Mimimum (1.024 ms or 256 us) Met
Gather post-
Stop trigger samples
Download Trend Configuration
Trend Trigger Setup

Compare Two Parameters Compare Parameter to a Constant Test bit in a Parameter Buffers Full
3 Trigger Condition Met
Param A Compare Trigger Param A Compare Trigger Param A Trigger

Options: OR OR Test Options: bit
Condition Options: Condition Trigger Condition
Param B Trigger is True or False
>, <, =, ≠, ≥, or ≤ Met >, <, =, ≠, ≥, or ≤ Met Value Met
Value
(bit)
High Speed Trending Wizard
4 Specify Trend Buffer Data Sources Trend Buffers

Parameter or Bit Trend Buffer 1 Trend Buffer 2 Trend Buffer 3 Trend Buffer 4 Trend Buffer 5 Trend Buffer 6 Trend Buffer 7 Trend Buffer 8
Trend Data (circular, 1024 or (circular, 1024 or (circular, 1024 or (circular, 1024 or (circular, 4096 (circular, 4096 (circular, 4096 (circular, 4096
Source 4096 samples) 4096 samples) 4096 samples) 4096 samples) samples) samples) samples) samples)

5
Trend Upload/Download
Upload Trend
Computer Computer Results.
Download
Trend Save buffers
Configuration to .csv file
to Drive
6
Trend Buffer Contents
PF755 Rev_9.a
Page 40
Appendix A
PowerFlex 755 Standard and Safety Drive Module Optional Attributes
The following table specifies what optional attribute and corresponding control
mode functionality is supported by a PowerFlex 755 drive module when using
the Logix Designer application.
Y = The attribute/enum/bit is supported
N = The attribute/enum/bit is not supported
R = The attribute is required
Control Modes
• N = No Control Mode
• F = Frequency Control Mode
• P = Position Control Mode
• V = Velocity Control Mode
• T = Torque Control Mode
For more information on the Control Modes, see Integrated Motion on the
Ethernet/IP Network Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM003.
The Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Reference Manual provides

a programmer with details about the Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP
Network Control Modes, Control Methods, and AXIS_CIP_DRIVE
Attributes.
Table 29 - Conditional Implementation Key

Key Description
AOP Special device specific semantics needed from AOP
Co Controller only attribute (controller attribute that resides only in controller)
C/D Yes = The attribute is replicated in the drive
CScale Motion Scaling Configuration set to Controller Scaling
Derived Implementation rules follow another attribute
Dr Drive replicated attribute (controller attribute that is replicated in drive)
Drive Scaling Drive device supports drive scaling functionality
DScale Motion Scaling Configuration set to Drive Scaling
E21 EnDat 2.1® (feedback type)
E22 EnDat 2.2® (feedback type)
E Encoder-based control, a feedback device is present
!E Encoderless or sensorless control, a feedback device in not present
HI Hiperface® (feedback type)

Appendix A
Table 29 - Conditional Implementation Key

Key Description
IM Rotary or Linear Induction Motor (motor type)
Linear Absolute Feedback Unit - meter; Feedback n Startup Method- absolute
Linear Motor Linear PM motor or Linear Induction motor (motor type)
LT LDT or Linear Displacement Transducer (feedback type)
NV Motor NV or Drive NV (motor data source)
O-Bits Optional bits associated with bit mapped attribute
O-Enum Optional enumerations associated with attribute
PM Rotary or Linear Permanent Magnet motor (motor type)
Rotary Absolute Feedback Unit - rev; Feedback n Startup Method- absolute
Rotary Motor Rotary PM motor or Rotary Induction motor (motor type)
SC Sine/Cosine (feedback type)
SL Stahl SSI (feedback type)
SS SSI (feedback type)
TM Tamagawa (feedback type)
TP Digital Parallel (feedback type)
TT Digital AqB (feedback type)
Table 30 - PowerFlex 755 Safety Drive Module Optional Attributes

ID Access Attribute N F P V T Conditional Implementation
19 Set Axis Features R R R R R O-Bits
0 = Fine Interpolation (Y)
1 = Registration Auto-rearm (Y)
2 = Alarm Log (Y)
5 = Hookup Test (Y)
6 = Commutation Test (Y)
7 = Motor Test (Y)
8 = Inertia Test (Y)
9 = Sensorless Control (Y)
30 Set Axis Configuration R R R R R O-Enum
0 = Feedback Only (N)
1 = Frequency Control (Y)
2 = Position Loop (Y)
3 = Velocity Loop (Y)
4 = Torque Loop (Y)
31 Set Feedback Configuration R R R R R O-Enum
0 = No Feedback (V/Y)(T/Y)
3 = Load Feedback (PVT/N)
4 = Dual Feedback (P/Y)
8 = Dual Integrator Feedback (P/Y)
45 Set Motion Scaling Configuration R R R R R O-Enum
1 = Drive Scaling (N)
1310/251 Set Motor Catalog Number - N N N N Dr NV

Appendix A

1313 Set Motor Data Source - R R R R O-Enum
1 = Database (Y)
2 = Drive NV (Y)
3 = Motor NV (N)
1315 Set Motor Type - R R R R O-Enum
1 = Rotary Permanent Magnet (Y)
2 = Rotary Induction (Y)
3 = Linear Permanent Magnet (N)
4 = Linear Induction (N)
1317 Set Motor Polarity - Y Y Y Y
1320 Set Motor Rated Peak Current - N N N N N-IM
1321 Set Motor Rated Output Power - Y Y Y Y Y-IM
1322 Set Motor Overload Limit - Y Y Y Y
1323 Set Motor Integral Thermal Switch - N N N N
1324 Set Motor Max Winding Temperature - N N N N
1325 Set Motor Winding To Ambient Capacitance - N N N N
1326 Set Motor Winding To Ambient Resistance - N N N N
2310 Set PM Motor Flux Saturation - N N N N PM Motor only
1339 Set PM Motor Rated Torque - N N N N Rotary PM Motor only
1340 Set PM Motor Torque Constant - N N N N Rotary PM Motor only
1342 Set PM Motor Rated Force - N N N N Rotary PM Motor only
1343 Set PM Motor Force Constant - N N N N Rotary PM Motor only
1330 Set Rotary Motor Inertia - N Y Y N Rotary Motor only
1332 Set Rotary Motor Max Speed - N N N N Rotary Motor only
1333 Set Rotary Motor Damping Coefficient - N N N N Rotary Motor only
2311 Set Rotary Motor Fan Cooling Speed - N N N N Rotary Motor only
2312 Set Rotary Motor Fan Cooling Derating - N N N N Rotary Motor only
1336 Set Linear Motor Mass - N N N N Linear Motor only
1337 Set Linear Motor Max Speed - N N N N Linear Motor only
1338 Set Linear Motor Damping Coefficient - N N N N Linear Motor only
2313 Set Linear Motor Integral Limit Switch - N N N N Linear Motor only
1349 Set Induction Motor Magnetization Reactance - N N N N Ind Motor only
1350 Set Induction Motor Rotor Resistance - N N N N Ind Motor only
1352 Set Induction Motor Rated Slip Speed - Y Y Y N Ind Motor only
1370 Set Load Type N N N N N DScale
1371 Set Transmission Ratio Input N N N N N DScale
1372 Set Transmission Ratio Output N N N N N DScale
1373 Set Actuator Type N N N N N DScale
1374 Set Actuator Lead N N N N N DScale
1375 Set Actuator Lead Unit N N N N N DScale
1376 Set Actuator Diameter N N N N N DScale

Appendix A

1377 Set Actuator Diameter Unit N N N N N DScale
44 Set Feedback Unit Ratio - - Y N -
1401 Get Feedback 1 Serial Number N - N N N
1414 Set Feedback 1 Polarity Y - Y Y Y
1415 Set Feedback 1 Startup Method R - R R R O-Enum
1= Absolute (Y)
1420 Set Feedback 1 Data Length Y - Y Y Y TP,SS
1421 Set Feedback 1 Data Code Y - Y Y Y TP,SS
1422 Set Feedback 1 Resolver Transformer Ratio N - N N N RS
1423 Set Feedback 1 Resolver Excitation Voltage N - N N N RS
1424 Set Feedback 1 Resolver Excitation Frequency N - N N N RS
1425 Set Feedback 1 Resolver Cable Balance N - N N N RS
2400 Set Feedback 1 Loss Action N - N N N O-Enum
1 = Switch to Sensorless Fdbk (N)
2 = Switch to Redundant Fdbk (N)
2403 Set Feedback 1 Velocity Filter Taps Y - Y Y Y
2404 Set Feedback 1 Accel Filter Taps N - N N N
1434 Set Feedback 1 Velocity Filter Bandwidth Y - Y Y Y
1435 Set Feedback 1 Accel Filter Bandwidth Y - Y Y Y
2405 Set Feedback 1 Battery Absolute N - N N N TM
1451 Get Feedback 2 Serial Number N - N N N
1464 Set Feedback 2 Polarity Y - Y Y Y
1465 Set Feedback 2 Startup Method R - R R R O-Enum
1 = Absolute (Y)
1470 Set Feedback 2 Data Length Y - Y Y Y TP,SS
1471 Set Feedback 2 Data Code Y - Y Y Y TP,SS
1472 Set Feedback 2 Resolver Transformer Ratio N - N N N RS
1473 Set Feedback 2 Resolver Excitation Voltage N - N N N RS
1474 Set Feedback 2 Resolver Excitation Frequency N - N N N RS
1475 Set Feedback 2 Resolver Cable Balance N - N N N RS
2450 Set Feedback 2 Loss Action N - N N N O-Enum
1 = Switch to Sensorless Fdbk (N)
2 = Switch to Redundant Fdbk (N)
2453 Set Feedback 2 Velocity Filter Taps N - N N N
2454 Set Feedback 2 Accel Filter Taps N - N N N
1484 Set Feedback 2 Velocity Filter Bandwidth N - N N N
1485 Set Feedback 2 Accel Filter Bandwidth N - N N N
2455 Set Feedback 2 Battery Absolute N - N N N TM
365 Get Position Fine Command - - Y - -
366 Get Velocity Fine Command - - Y Y -
367 Get Acceleration Fine Command - - N N N

Appendix A

370 Set Skip Speed 1 - Y - - -
373 Set Skip Speed Band - Y - - -
374 Set* Ramp Velocity - Positive - Y - Y - Derived
375 Set* Ramp Velocity - Negative - Y - Y - Derived
376 Set* Ramp Acceleration - Y - Y - Derived
377 Set* Ramp Deceleration - Y - Y - Derived
378 Set Ramp Jerk Control - Y - Y -
380 Set Flying Start Enable - Y - Y -
445 Set Position Error Tolerance Time - - Y - -
781 Set Position Lead Lag Filter Bandwidth - - Y - -
782 Set Position Lead Lag Filter Gain - - Y - -
783 Set Position Notch Filter Frequency - - Y - -
446 Set Position Integrator Control - - R - - O-Bits
1: Auto-Preset (N)
447 Set Position Integrator Preload - - N - -
790 Set Velocity Negative Feedforward Gain - - Y Y -
464/321 Set Velocity Droop - Y Y Y -
465 Set Velocity Error Tolerance - - N N -
466 Set Velocity Error Tolerance Time - - N N -
467 Set Velocity Integrator Control - - R R - O-Bits
1: Auto-Preset (N)
468 Set Velocity Integrator Preload - - Y Y -
469 Set Velocity Low Pass Filter Bandwidth - - Y Y -
470/327 Set Velocity Threshold N Y Y Y N
471 Set Velocity Lock Tolerance - Y Y Y -
473/325 Set Velocity Limit - Positive - Y Y Y -
474/326 Set Velocity Limit - Negative - Y Y Y -
833 Set SLAT Configuration - - - Y -
834 Set SLAT Set Point - - - Y -
835 Set SLAT Time Delay - - - Y -
481 Set Acceleration Trim - - N N N
482 Get Acceleration Reference - - N N N
801 Get Load Observer Acceleration Estimate - - Y Y N
802 Get Load Observer Torque Estimate - - Y Y N
805 Set Load Observer Configuration - - Y Y N O-Enum
1= Load Observer Only (Y)
2 = Load Observer with Velocity Estimate (N)
3 = Velocity Estimate Only (N)
4 = Acceleration Feedback (Y)

Appendix A

806 Set Load Observer Bandwidth - - Y Y N
807 Set Load Observer Integrator Bandwidth - - N N N
809 Set Load Observer Feedback Gain - - Y Y N
485 Set Acceleration Limit - N N N N
486 Set Deceleration Limit - N N N N
496 Set System Inertia - - R R N
825 Set Backlash Compensation Window - - N - -
498 Set Friction Compensation Sliding - - N N N
499 Set Friction Compensation Static - - N N N
500 Set Friction Compensation Viscous - - N N N
826/421 Set Friction Compensation Window - - N - -
827 Set Torque Lead Lag Filter Bandwidth - - Y Y N
828 Set Torque Lead Lag Filter Gain - - Y Y N
502 Set Torque Low Pass Filter Bandwidth - - N N N
503 Set Torque Notch Filter Frequency - - Y Y Y
506 Set Torque Rate Limit - - N N N
507/334 Set Torque Threshold - - N N N
508 Set Overtorque Limit - Y Y Y Y
509 Set Overtorque Limit Time - Y Y Y Y
510 Set Undertorque Limit - Y Y Y Y
511 Set Undertorque Limit Time - Y Y Y Y
521 Get Operative Current Limit - - N N N
522 Get Current Limit Source - - N N N
524 Get Current Reference - - N N N
525 Get Flux Current Reference - - N N N
840 Set Current Disturbance - - N N N
527 Get Current Error - - N N N
528 Get Flux Current Error - - N N N
529 Get Current Feedback - - Y Y Y
530 Get Flux Current Feedback - - Y Y Y
553 Set Current Vector Limit - Y N N N
554 Set Torque Loop Bandwidth - - N N N
555 Set Torque Integral Time Constant - - N N N
556 Set Flux Loop Bandwidth - - N N N
557 Set Flux Integral Time Constant - - N N N
558 Set Flux Up Control - Y Y Y Y Ind Motor only
O-Enum
1 = Manual Delay (Y)
2 = Automatic Delay (Y)
559 Set Flux Up Time - Y Y Y Y Ind Motor only

Appendix A

562 Set Commutation Self-Sensing Current - - N N N PM Motor only
O-Value = #
563 Set Commutation Polarity - - N N N PM Motor only
250 Set Feedback Commutation Aligned - - Y Y Y O-Enum
2 = Motor Offset (N)
3 = Self-Sense (Y)
570 Set Frequency Control Method - R - - - O-Enum
128 = Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz (Y)
129 = Sensorless Vector (Y)
130 = Sensorless Vector Economy (Y)
600 Get Output Frequency - R Y Y Y
610 Set Stopping Action - R R R R O-Enum
2 = Ramped Decel Disable (FPV/Y)
3 = Current Decel Hold (PV/N)
4 = Ramped Decel Hold (PV/Y)
128 = DC Injection Brake (IM/Y)
129 = AC Injection Brake (IM/Y)
612 Set Stopping Time Limit - - N N N
613/354 Set Resistive Brake Contact Delay - N N N N PM Motor only
614 Set Mechanical Brake Control - N N N N
615 Set Mechanical Brake Release Delay - N N N N
616 Set Mechanical Brake Engage Delay - N N N N
870 Set DC Injection Brake Current - Y Y Y Y Ind Motor only
872 Set DC Injection Brake Time - Y Y Y Y Ind Motor only
871 Set Flux Braking Enable - Y Y Y Y Ind Motor only
627 Set Power Loss Action - Y Y Y Y O-Enum
2 = Decel Regen (Y)
628 Set Power Loss Threshold - Y Y Y Y
629 Set Shutdown Action - N N N N O-Enum
1 = Drop DC Bus (N)
630 Set Power Loss Time - Y Y Y Y
637 Get Converter Capacity - N N N N
638/262 Get Bus Regulator Capacity - N N N N
646 Set Motor Overload Action - N N N N O-Enum
1 = Current Foldback (N)
647 Set Inverter Overload Action - Y Y Y Y O-Enum
1 = Current Foldback (Y)
128 = Reduce PWM Rate (Y)
129 = PWM Foldback (Y)
659 Get CIP Axis Alarms Y Y Y Y Y
904 Get CIP Axis Alarms - RA Y Y Y Y Y
695 Set Motor Overspeed User Limit - Y Y Y Y
697 Set Motor Thermal Overload User Limit - Y Y Y Y
699 Set Inverter Thermal Overload User Limit - N N N N

Appendix A

706 Set Feedback Noise User Limit N N N N N
707 Set Feedback Signal Loss User Limit N N N N N
708 Set Feedback Data Loss User Limit N N N N N
730 Get Digital Inputs - Y Y Y Y
731 Set Digital Outputs - N N N N
732/267 Get Analog Input 1 - N N N N
733/268 Get Analog Input 2 - N N N N
734 Set Analog Output 1 - N N N N
735 Set Analog Output 2 - N N N N
750 Set Local Control N N N N N O-Enum
1 = Conditionally Allowed (N)
2 = Allowed (N)
980/242 Get Guard Status - Y Y Y Y
981/243 Get Guard Faults - Y Y Y Y

Index
A Controller, DriveLogix 10
AC induction motors Conventions, Manual 11
recommended 357 Current Limit 156
Accel/Decel 124 Current Limit Stop 121
Accel/Decel Time 16
Adjustable Voltage 17 D
Alarms 155
Data Packets
Analog I/O 105
lost 301
Analog Input DC Bus Voltage 158
Square Root 111 Decel Time 16
Analog Inputs 105
Detection
Analog Output 114
Input Loss 112
Analog Outputs 113 DHCP persistence
Analog Scaling 107 IP address assignment 315
Auto Restart 25 Dig Out Invert
Auto/Manual 27 No. 226 – Main Control Board 147
Autotune 35 No. 6 – Option Module 147
Auxiliary Fault 121 Dig Out Setpoint
Auxiliary Power Supply 41 No. 227 – Main Control Board 142
auxiliary power supply option module No. 7 – Option Module 142
Dig Out Sts
installation and configuration 347
axis configuration No. 225 – Main Control Board 149
No. 5 – Option Module 150
control modes 307
Digital Inputs 119
Digital Outputs 130
B Digital Outputs Parameters 142, 147, 149
Braking 216 Drive Nonvolatile Memory 308
bulletin HPK-series motors Drive NV option 308
recommended 359 Drive Overload 158
Bus Memory 158 DriveLogix™ Controller 10
Bus Regulation 41 Drives Technical Support 11
Bus Regulation Mode 125 dual loop control
application 309
configuration 309
C Dual-Port EtherNet/IP option module 315
Carrier Frequency 196 install and configure 347
IP address assignment 315
Clear Fault 121
port assignment 315
Coarse Update Rate 301 dynamic brake
Coast Stop 121 configure for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP
Compensation 192 Network 347
Configuration Conflicts 127 Dynamic Braking 197
configure dynamic IP address assignment by port 315
hardware over travel limits 316
incremental encoder feedback with an MPx motor
372 E
MDS instruction 302 Enable 121
Configureation
ETAP. See Dual-Port EtherNet/IP option module
Analog Output 114
Control Mode
axis attributes F
no control mode 419
position control mode 419 Faults 162
torque control mode 419 Feedback Devices 54
velocity control mode 419 feedback option modules
control modes install and configure 346
axis configuration 307 Flux Braking 216
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 301

Index
Flux Regulator 218 Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network

Flux Up 218 control logic block diagram 413
Flux Up Enable (No. 43) 220 control modes 301
Flux Up Time (No. 44) 220 diagnostic tools block diagram 417
flux vector overview block diagram 377
Flying Start 54 friction compensation block diagram 415
Forward/Reverse 122 high speed trending wizard block diagram 418
Decel Limit 126 inputs and outputs, analog block diagram 409
Forward/Revese inputs and outputs, digital block diagram 408
End Limit 126 inverter overload IT block diagram 414
frequency control MOP control block diagram 407
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference option modules supported 346
319 position control, aux functions block diagram 389
position control, homing block diagram 393
position control, phase locked loop block diagram 390
G position control, position CAM block diagram 391
position control, profiler/indexer (sheet 1) block
General Precautions 12 diagram 392
position control, profiler/indexer (sheet 2) block
diagram 393
H position control, regulator block diagram 388
Hand-Off-Auto Start 124 position control/aux functions, position oriented
torque boost block diagram 396
hardware over travel limits position control/aux functions, roll position indicator
configure for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP block diagram 394
Network 316 process control (sheet 1) block diagram 405
Human Interface Module Removal 52 process control (sheet 2) block diagram 406
safety option module restrictions 346
speed control reference (sheet 1) block diagram 381
I speed control reference (sheet 2) block diagram 382
incremental encoder feedback with an MPx motor speed control reference (sheet 3) block diagram 383
speed control reference (sheet 4) block diagram 384
configure 372 speed control reference (sheet 5) block diagram 385
induction motor data speed control, reference block diagram 387
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference speed control, reference overview block diagram 380
327 speed control, regulator (flux vector) block diagram
induction motor model 386
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference speed/position feedback block diagram 379
327 system tuning 363
Input Loss Detection 112 torque control overview, induction motor and surface
Input Phase Loss Detection 166 permanent magnet motor block diagram
Inputs 397
torque control overview, interior permanent magnet
Analog 105 motor block diagram 398
Digital 119 torque control, current, induction motor and surface
Integrated Architecture Builder software 300 permanent magnet motor block diagram
401
torque control, current, interior permanent magnet
motor block diagram 402
torque control, inertia adaption block diagram 403
torque control, load observer/estimator block
diagram 404
torque control, reference scale and trim block
diagram 399
torque control, torque block diagram 400
variable boost voltage overview, function inputs/
outputs block diagram 416
VF (V/Hz), SV overview block diagram 378
IP address assignment
Dual-Port EtherNet/IP option module 315

Index
J Nonvolatile Memory 308

Jog 123 Notch Filter 244
Jog Forward Jog Reverse 122
O
L Option Modules
Last StrtInhibit (No. 934) 95 supported for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP
Network 346
Linear Topology Outputs
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 342 Analog 113, 114
Linear/Star Topology Digital 130
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 344 Overload 158, 168
Load Overspeed Limit 172
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference Owners 70
334
Load Compliance
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference P
335
Load Observer Password 173
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference Permanent Magnet Motor
337 evaluation 361
Lost Data Packets 301 specifications 361
Permanent Magnet Motor Data 308
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference
M 329
Permanent Magnet Motor Model
Manaual Control 123
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference
Manual Conventions 11
329
MAS instruction 304 Permanent Magnet Motors
MDS instruction recommended 358
configure 301 PID Cfg (No. 1065) 79
decrease speed sample code 303 PID Enable 125
increase speed sample code 303
ramp attributes 304 PID Hold 126
ramp attributes sample code 305 PID Invert 126
start sample code 302 PID Loop 76
torque mode sample code 304 PID Reset 126
Minimum Coarse Update Rate 301 PID Status (No. 1089) 85
MOP Increment/Decrement 124 Port Assignment
Motion Analyzer software 300 Dual-Port EtherNet/IP option module 315
Motion Axis Stop. See MAS instruction position loop
Motion Drive Start. See MDS instruction RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference
Motion Servo Off. See MSF instruction 325
Motor Feedback Position Mode 306
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference Positive/Negative Hardware Over-travel 127
331 Power Loss 72, 125
Motor Load Feedback Power Loss Mode 125
RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference Power Tab
332 RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference
Motor Overload 168 337
Motor Thermistor 152 Precautions, General 12
Motor Types 235 Precharge 125
MSF instruction 304 Process PID Loop 76
Mtr Options Cfg (No. 40) 25 Process PID Parameters 79
PTC Motor Thermistor Input 152
PWM Frequency 196
N
Network Topologies
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 341

Index
R Speed Select 123

Real Time Clock 174 Speed Torque Position 266
Speed Torque Position Mode 124
Recommended
Square Root
AC induction motors 357
bulletin HPK-series motors 359 Analog Input 111
permanent magnet motors 358 Star Topology
Reflected Wave 179 Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 341
Regen Power Limit 247 Start 122
Restart, Auto 25 Start Inhibits (No. 933) 95
Ring topology Status 127
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 343 Stop 121
Ring/star topology Stop Mode 124
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 345 Support, Product 11
Run 122 System Tuning
Run Forward/Run Reverse 122 Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 363
S T
safety option modules Technical Support 11
restrictions for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Thermistor 152
Network 346 Third-party permanent magnet motors
Scaling, Analog 107 data modifications 361
Security 185 Torque
Shear Pin 188 Mode 306
shunt regulator Position 266
configuration for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/ Reference 262
IP Network 347 Torque Loop
Signal Loss 112 RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference
SLAT. See Speed Limited Adjustable Torque 323
torque overload capability 345
Slip Compensation 192
Slip Regulator 194 Torque Reference 262
Software Torque Setpoint 126
Integrated Architecture Builder 300
Motion Analyzer 300 V
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque
configure for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Velocity Control
Network 353 RSLogix 5000 instance to parameter cross reference
Speed Reference 251 321
Speed Regulation 260 Velocity Mode 306

Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to
software service packs. You can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software
updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.
In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more
information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local
Rockwell Automation representative.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Supersedes Publication 750-RM002B-EN-P - September 2013 Copyright © 2016 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

PowerFlex Drive 750 Rm002 - en P

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerFlex Drive 750 Rm002 - en P

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerFlex Drive 750 Rm002 - en P

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety considerations are mentioned in the document?

What safety considerations are mentioned in the document?

What are some of the product support options mentioned?

What are some of the product support options mentioned?

Reference Manual

PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

This manual contains new and updated information.

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 3

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 5

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 7

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

The purpose of this manual is to provide detailed information including

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 9

The following publications provide necessary information when applying the

You can view or download publications at

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Manual Conventions • In this manual we refer to PowerFlex 750-Series Adjustable Frequency AC

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 11

General Precautions Qualified Personnel

ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component

Class 1 LED Product

ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 13

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 15

Adjustment range is 0.00 to 3600.00 seconds.

Adjustment range is 0.00 to 3600.00 seconds.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

In adjustable voltage control mode, the output voltage is controlled

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 17

Adjustable voltage control is enabled by setting P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] to

The adjustable voltage control voltage ramp provides an independent voltage

Adjustable Voltage Control Setup

Table 1 - Basic Adjustable Voltage Control Parameters

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Description

Refer to the PowerFlex 750-Series Programming Manual, publication 750-

Additional Parameter Changes

When using adjustable voltage control it is necessary to change additional

Table 2 - Adjustable Voltage Applications Parameter Settings

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 19

Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Description

Single Phase Output

Consult Rockwell Automation before configuring a drive for single phase

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016 21

Three Phase Output

If you are driving as resistive load, configure it in a three phase arrangement to

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 750-RM002C-EN-P - February 2016

XL1 = 2  pi  60   1.2  1000  = 0.45ohm

XL2 = 2  pi  60   5  1000  = 1.88ohm

XL3 = 2  pi  60   5  1000  = 1.88ohm

XL4 = 2  pi  60   3  1000  = 1.13ohm

Now total it. XL1 + XL2 + XL3 + XL4 = 5.35 ohm.